uc 

.VA5 

SUMMARY OF 

pply Principles 


COMPILED BY 

MAJOR TROUP MILLER 

CAVALRY 


THE GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS 

PORT LEAVENWORTH, KANSAS 

1920-1921 




“Centralized control and decentralized operation is the 
fundamental principle of military supply by virtue of which 
the prompt and regular supply of the field forces is accom¬ 
plished with a minimum of friction, and competition between 
supply services is eliminated.*' 



THE GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS PRESS 
Fokt Leavenworth, Kansas 











































i 







f 










M 




m 


ui>\ 


m\ 








m 




Mis 


>'V 






wi 


‘nrij 


I A 




i yf^' 


hT) 


V*l 




.V '* 




f'S 












■:<t' 




■ > 


‘n 




wj 




• ^v. 








' I.'' ' ■ «*' 'l* ’ ^ 

. ♦'. 'i TW . < »flill *. . Wl - *< 




't •. ^-Slis 


II 


4 « 


id 


L i i 


'Vf 


h v? 


: T' 


NV 






. 41 , 


¥ ‘V 






'iS\ 


') 


IV %- 




■V'* . x 






t i^fl 


s 




J.ck r^ 

'' 

V^'"‘-<i'* 














L i vi 






•lii 




t t 


r f 




:i 




r 


. < 








L\.. 




m 


m 


ifU 


W;'"' 


' ./ 'i’CTi. 


(•'-Ar 


o 






• Si 




f \ 




'f^i 








I > 






V't 


’ V/ 


ri\ 


*>A 


>• 


be 








jVi'' 




, i>; 








i' li 






'.41'' 

► tj;' 

ri:^^ 


'mk ■ 


' . '• 

k§ 


U 


r;' '’'i 

* 4' 


V-v i'J 




ijil 


U 


li'x.l '■ > 


/' 




V > 


lOK 


r!i. 


Aj. 


'is 


r:\ 


tt 


"1 


**2hH 


'i{J 


ti i. 










W. 


JV.> 


Kt: 




'Sfrk r 












-■'» ''•. V 




kl »J *' 


.-♦W ' ' 


.’fj 


L'. I. 




k Wl 


H1 


py. ‘ 


V‘l.' 


-IP 




\\ 


r.l, 




»^l 


J / 


^•■' 'vf 'v.'.r.v<,.■'?. .’.,;i';' 

ievr ^ ,Vy .' K- w.' 

r. 4 Vj 


t ii 




i.i'- ■( '* ‘s. 








W' 










m 






f. 


Vv., 


Mi 


M' ■ ■ 


w 


■*\ 


S“‘ .^f-' ‘ 




■ J- 


I ' • • ' »i 

i\} f il 


/ '■ w 

,/ ■ ■’»/.•; Vv,. 

frif). !-»'- 
71 ^ - ’ 


•.'i'vt. 






'f't 
4 ' f, 


\>, 


4 




.' V 


■ ' • ' ^] 


.1 •, 


. S i 


k\)Jrf vv*v «.., 




m 




Wm 


1*7 • * 




E3. 






rv?I; 






ft: 


»i #♦ 




.,;ly 

k- ;» • 

is\A. *^4.' ’ 


*■ i. Ii 




X 


I H 




•i^Vf 


' ii ' 


^ V, 


Vi 


]• » 




■/'V^y' i • 


. k 


«>4 


■f^ 


S .J'‘^ 4^ 




■rf(' 


4^'' 








ViL:y.. 


ui' 




•>>' 




*¥ ’> 


‘♦m 


I' * 










M 




1 ' 














■,v 




I :w. 








n. 




M .LiC'v^ 




■y i' 




hV; 


ir 


M.l 




tv. *•■ / 


* r 














P r'*i? 


' 


l, . 




7i 











SUMMARY OF 


Supply Principles 


COMPILED BY 

MAJOR TROUP MILLER 


CAVALRY 


THE GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS 

FORT LEAVENWORTH, KANSAS 


1920-1921 



“Centralized control and decentralized operation is the 
fundamental principle of military supply by virtue of which 
the prompt and resrular supply of the field forces is accom¬ 
plished with a minimum of friction, and competition between 
supply services is eliminated.” 


THE GENERAL SERVICE SCHOOLS PRESS 
Fort Leavenworth, Kansas 


19 2 1 







'U-C 

• Ms 


■^^^'h' ^Jf- j^i 




7 


7 


X. ! 


'Oj 


INTRODUCTION 


The object of this compilation of supply principles is 
to furnish a guide or reference book for instructors and 
members of the Staff and Line Classes, The General Service 
Schools, in order that the various matters pertaining to 
supply may be readily found under one cover instead of 
having to search several papers for the information de¬ 
sired. 

Many lessons in supply were learned from our exper¬ 
iences in The World War, and during the past year the in¬ 
structors in the supply course at these schools have en¬ 
deavored to present these lessons to the Staff and Line 
Classes. The matter as presented has appeared^ however, 
in so many different forms and miscellaneous publications 
that it is believed the following summary of supply prin¬ 
ciples will be of value in studying the subject of supply and 
in solving problems dealing therewith. 

An attempt has been made in some instances to reduce 
these supply principles to a percentage for each 100,000 
men that might be engaged upon certain tasks and, upon 
this basis, it is thought that estimates might be prepared 
for the employment of larger forces. 

It must be borne in mind, however, in accepting these 
principles, that the unusual conditions which prevailed at 
times during The World War may not apply again, but this 
text has been prepared with a view of furnishing the staff 
officer something at least upon which he may base a reason¬ 
able estimate to fit the particular situation under consider¬ 
ation. 

There appears to be no book yet published by the War 
Department on this important subject, and until such a pub¬ 
lication is issued it is hoped that the notes contained herein 
may be of assistance to officers handling the subject of 
supply. 

The author claims no originality in the preparation of 
the contents of this pamphlet, but feels indebted to those 
officers who have already given so much time and thought 
to this subject 

iii 


INTRODUCTION 


No attempt has been made to cover in this pamphlet 
the duties of the various staff officers who deal with supply, 
as their functions under the various situations may be 
found in the staff manuals which are now in course of prep¬ 
aration. 

This pamphlet has been prepared under the direction 
of, and its pViblication as a text and reference book for 
The General Service Schools has been authorized by the 
Commandant and Assistant Commandant. It will be used 
until more complete texts can be prepared on this subject. 


CONTENTS 

Page 

Chapter I —Organization of the Theater of Operations 

for Supply _ 1 

Chapter II —Supply of an Expeditionary Army_45 

Chapter III —Division Supply_77 

Chapter IV —Ammunition _• 94 

Chapter V —Transportation_112 

Chapter VI —Trains _145 

Chapter VII —The Services _183 

Chapter VIII —Replacements _214 

Chapter IX —Forms for Administrative Orders_225 

Chapter X —Miscellaneous _246 












JT” 




4 

'I* . 


, c a; 




SUMMARY OF 
SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 




CHAPTER I 


Organization of the Theater of Operations 
for Supply 

(1) AREAS OF MILITARY ACTIVITY 

(G. 0. 26, W. D., May 3, 1920.)—‘‘Hereafter the follow¬ 
ing terms will be used exclusively in describing the indicated 
areas of military activity: 

Theater of operations .—The territory prescribed by 
the War Department as that within which military activities 
are controlled by the commander of the field forces. 

'‘Zone of the interior .—The territory within which 
military activities are controlled by the War Department 
acting through agencies other than the commanders of 
field forces. 

"Combat zone .—That portion of a theater of operations 
designated as such by the commander of the field forces 
operating in that theater. It includes division areas, corps 
areas, and army areas as hereinafter defined. 

"Communications zone .—That portion of a theater of 
operations designated as such by the commander of the 
field forces operating in that theater. 

“It includes all territory from and including the base 
to the rear line of the combat zone. 

"Supply zone .—A subdivision of the zone of the interior 
with boundaries prescribed by the War Department. See 
Circular No. 107, War Department, 1920. 

"Army area .—That portion of the combat zone allotted 
to an army by the commander of the field forces or the 
commander of a group of armies. If but one army is 
operating, the combat zone and the army area are one 
and the same; hence in this case the use of the latter term 
is unnecessary. 

"Corps area .—That portion of an army area allotted to 
an army corps by the army commander or higher authority. 



2 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


**Division area .—That portion of a corps area allotted 
to a division by the corps commander or higher authority. 

^‘Advance section, communications zone—Intermediate 
section, communications zone—Base section, communica¬ 
tions zone .—Subdivisions of the communications zone cor¬ 
responding to similarly designated sections of the line of 
communications, as described in paragraph 369, Field Ser¬ 
vice Regulations. 

‘Tn so far as the foregoing provisions conflict with 
the provisions of the Field Service Regulations, this order 
will govern. The foregoing definitions and necessary mod¬ 
ifications in the subject matter of the Field Service Regu¬ 
lations will be included in these regulations when revised.’^ 

See “Diagrammatic Representation of the Zone of the Interior and the Theater 
of Operations.” 

2. ORGANIZATION OF THE THEATER OF OPERATIONS 
FOR SUPPLY 

The theater of operations is divided into two general 
zones: 

(1) Co..in.unications zone. 

(2) Combat zone. 

Communications Zone:— This zone contains the pri¬ 
mary services of supply and territorially will comprise, de¬ 
pendent upon geographical conditions, certain sections; if 
two, an advance and a base section. If necessary “inter¬ 
mediate” sections may be established, the limits of which 
will from time to time be prescribed by the commander of 
the forces in the field. 

Combat Zone:— The territorial limits of the combat 
zone will be prescribed by the commander of the forces in 
the field. That portion of the combat zone assigned to 
an army is called an army area. For combat and admin¬ 
istrative purposes an army area may be divided as follows: 

(a) An army combat area, the limits of which will be adjusted 
from time to time to contain all the elements of the corps in 
contact with the enemy. 

(b) An army service area, extending bacjk to the rear of the 
army area which will contain such agencies and establish¬ 
ments as are necessary for the immediate and direct service 
of the combat troops. 



SddOO V3ilV 3yiAii2S 

* PiOwdJ SddOD VhvUlSAkJHV^30NVHhJ03 

t'7A'i/ It/QldOJ 2D IA^ 35 ^ N01 1D3S 3DN\AAOV^ Vf02NS3J.Nl 

* yjON VhJhlOD ANaV Z/OI^OD N0UD25 '^DONVNHOD N0IJ.D3S 


5N0IJ.D3S 


3SVQ 


S^SONVLdAJOD N0/3D33 


3NOZ X VQl^OD 


3NOZ SNOfl ^DlNniAlt^OD 


HJONVHi^'JOD ANHV ilO AN^tf 


3NOZ SNOiXVDtNnNNOO 1V&2N3D 9NlON\rAJtNOD 

SNOlXVHJdO JO 3dXV2N± 


S30d0J 013U 3HX JO J 31 NO-N i ■ d 30 NVN NO 9 


SOtdJx Ni J^X JO 3N02 
X NJNJ. dVd30 JVAA 


^ a. ci. 3; 

OQOO 

Q: . Cfe 


Q 

5' 

^1 


.i: 

I 

t: 


'ts 

Q 

V. 


r? ^ 

? ^ ^ 2 

^ -s: 

V. 


^ lX 

tb I- t? 

Ct ^ Cl Ci: 


I 

Q 

(U 

<1 

X 

5 

X. 


o 

I 

(1) 

§ 

CO 


'< 

V* 


CO 

(M 

ifl 

a> 

biO 

C3 

Ph 


T 4 


-X3 “^3 


2 


>3 

5 

V 

<0 

5 

0 


< « ^ 


Xj 

o . 
Q 


-4: 

!:e ^ 
? ^ 


5j -3? 

s: c 



Q 

t 

Q 

I 


-C 

r 


c>. 

c 

lo 

c 

o 

■C. 

0 

'o 

t: 

E 

E 

'S 


c 

I 

'o 

X 

E 


c 

I 

I 

VI 

c 

Q 

•s^ 

•o 

$ 


<11 

t 

O 

N 

-) 

c 


.5 


\J 

X. 


0 

i X 

^ c ^ !0 

^ Vj C) ^ 



'/KA! : • 3Q 


AdVX JdODS 













































































































































2 


to a 

sect', 

tio'n. 

resp 

com 

vice 

the 

will 

ificE 

lati< 

of o 

2.C 


zon 


ma 

pel 

tW( 

me 

wi 

th( 

ZO] 

th( 

an 

ist 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 3 

Two or more armies may be combined to form an 
army group, and their service areas may, at the discretion 
of the commander of the forces in the field, be combined 
and administered as a single army service area. 

3. ORGANIZATION OF THE SYSTEM OF SUPPLY- 
GENERAL PROVISIONS 

Experience has shown that the supply of troops can 
be effectively accomplished only by making a single agency 
responsible for its control. This agency must have at hand 
information as to the present and prospective state of supply 
and the capacity of every element of the supply system. It 
must have full authority to make changes necessary to meet 
a rapidly shifting situation. This agency is the fourth sec¬ 
tion, general staff (G4). It exercises such supervision 
and control as may be necessary in regard to the functions 
of construction, supply, transportation, storage and distri¬ 
bution. 

Exclusive of certain schools, training centers, or other 
commands which may be specifically excepted, the com¬ 
manding general, communications zone, commands the 
communications zone and all troops and agencies therein. 
He is responsible for the discipline, police, sanitation and 
protection thereof. He is responsible for the initial pro¬ 
curement of all supplies, material and equipment neces¬ 
sary for the troops, and for all plants and establishments. 
He is also responsible for the care and storage of such 
supplies, material and equipment, and for their manu¬ 
facture, salvage, repair and cleaning, and for the construc¬ 
tion, maintenance and repair of all agencies necessary to 
accomplish these purposes. He is responsible that the sup¬ 
plies, material and equipment are maintained and distrib¬ 
uted among the several depots in accordance with approved 
projects. He exercises general supervision over the initial 
equipment of troops arriving in the communications zone 
and assists in the speedy refitting of troops withdrawn 
from the combat zone. In the combat zone he will be re¬ 
sponsible through his agencies for specific works of con¬ 
struction assigned to him from time to time, and for fur¬ 
nishing all organizations and personnel necessary to the 


4 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


proper administration of supply and service establishments 
in the combat’ zone. The maintenance and operation of 
establishments in the combat zone, herein created, will be 
under the supervision of officers on the staff of the com¬ 
mander of the army. 

The commanding general of the communications zone 
is charged with the unloading of freight and troops from 
ships at all ports of debarkation, and with the transpor¬ 
tation of all troops and supplies therefrom throughout the 
communications zone. He is responsible for the construc¬ 
tion, maintenance and operation of such utilities as may be 
necessary to accomplish these objects, including such rail¬ 
road lines and rolling stock as may come within the control 
of the forces. 

Under authority delegated to him by the commanding 
general, communications zone, the commanding officer of 
each base, intermediate, or advance section of the com¬ 
munications zone will exercise command over the troops 
and establishments in his section and will be responsible 
for the discipline, police, and sanitation of the area assigned 
him. He is particularly charged with responsibility for 
the efficient distribution and economical employment of 
labor organizations in his section and for the prompt un¬ 
loading of vessels and transfer of freight from the wharves 
to depots within his own section, or to other parts of 
the theater of operations in accordance with instructions 
issued to him. He will facilitate the construction of the 
wharves, depots and other works in his section and will 
supervise the various services of supply and transportation 
with a view to the expeditious movement, release, and re¬ 
turn of railway rolling stock and motor transportation. 

Each army service area will be commanded by an 
officer of suitable rank with the title of “commander of 
the army service area,” who will be directly under the 
commanding general, army, or army group. Insofar as 
practicable it will be his duty to relieve the commanding 
general of the army of details incident to the administra¬ 
tion and supply of troops in the army service area. 

The commander of the army service area will have 
charge of the exploitation of local resources and of the dis- 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


6 


tribution of the products thereof. He will supervise the 
relations between American forces and the civil popu¬ 
lation. He will regulate the use of special service troops 
and labor personnel at his disposal. He is responsible 
for the sanitation of his army service area and is charged 
with the preparation and maintenance of billeting accommo¬ 
dations for all troops therein. He supervises the establish¬ 
ment in billets of incoming troops. He makes suitable 
provisions of rations, forage, fuel, bedding, and other sup¬ 
plies to meet their needs and particularly anticipates their 
demands for the first few days after their arrival. (For 
letter of instructions to commander, army service area, see 
paragraph 38.) 

Whenever two or more armies are combined to form 
an army group, the army service areas may, in the dis¬ 
cretion of the commander of the field forces, be combined 
and placed under the control of the army group commander. 
In such an event a commander of the army service area for 
the army group will be appointed 'who will be directly 
under the commanding general of the army group. His 
duties in connection with troops in the army group will 
be in all respects analogous to these herein prescribed for 
the commander of the army service area. 

The commander of the army service area will be pro¬ 
vided with a suitable administrative, supply and technical 
staff. 

4. AGENCIES OF SUPPLY AND EVACUATION 

The agencies of supply and evacuation comprise base, 
intermediate and advance depots, regulating stations (with 
'^regulating station reserves” attached), railheads, refilling 
points and evacuating and sorting stations, army depots, 
corps parks, divisional dumps, special area dumps, and the 
necessary means of transportation and communication. 

Depots: —The word "depot” used in this pamphlet 
will signify a communications zone establishment, and the 
words "army depot” an army establishment. Depots are 
usually located within the communications zone. Their func¬ 
tion is primarily to provide an emergency reserve of mater¬ 
ials for the furtherance of military operations. In order 


6 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


to anticipate the demands of troops, or to fulfill a special 
mission, the stocks maintained at these depots may as 
a whole, or in part, be placed at the disposition of a regu¬ 
lating station for a definite period of time. 

The chief of each supply service is immediately re¬ 
sponsible for his depots and establishments in the commun¬ 
ications zone. In accordance with general instructions, he 
will anticipate the needs of the forces and will submit 
projects for special plant, equipment and material required 
in the operations of his department, and after approval 
thereof he will maintain appropriate stocks of supplies 
at the various depots and establishments. With the ap¬ 
proval of the headquarters of the field forces changes 
in these projects and in the various lists of supplies will 
be made from time to time to correspond with the varying 
phases of militarry operations and terrain. Special atten¬ 
tion will be devoted to the needs of troops arriving in the 
communications zone, and arrangements will be made to fur¬ 
nish them prescribed equipment promptly, and without 
awaiting formal request. Whenever any shortage is in¬ 
dicated or anticipated in any important article of supply, 
equipment or transportation, and the necessity arises for 
special control of expenditures or for reduction of allow¬ 
ances, the chief of the service concerned will bring the 
matter to the attention of the headquarters of the field 
forces (G4), through the commanding general of the com¬ 
munications zone, with a view to suitable action. 

Under the direct supervision of the commanding gen¬ 
eral, communications zone, supplies will be obtained by 
request on prescribed agencies in the United States or by 
purchase. No purchasing agent or disbursing officer is, 
in general, concerned with the initiation of purchases or 
with the state of supplies in depots. The function of these 
officers is to purchase and inspect the supplies ordered, 
and in co-operation with the transportation agencies, pro¬ 
vide for their delivery and to make payments. Canvass 
will be made of all possible sources of supply with a view 
to taking full advantage thereof. The purchasing agent 
will from time to time inform the commanding general, 
communications zone, and through him, the various supply 
departments, as to the character of supplies which can 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 7 

advantageously be obtained in the theater of operations, 
with such data concerning time of delivery and other per¬ 
tinent information in the case of specific articles as may 
be necessary to permit of intelligent determination as to 
the expediency of placing orders for the same. When pre¬ 
paring requests for procurement of supplies application 
should be made to the purchasing agent for latest infor¬ 
mation as to the state of the market and the feasibility 
of procurement of articles in question within the allotable 
limit of time. 

Each depot or group in the communications zone will 
be commanded by an officer of suitable rank and experience, 
who will be designated '‘Commanding Officer, — Depot.'' 
In accordance with instructions issued to him from time 
to time the commanding officer will exercise all the custom¬ 
ary functions of a post commander, and will devote special 
attention to the protection of the stores in his depot against 
damage by fire or by improper storage or handling. By 
efficient management of labor at his disposal he will facil¬ 
itate the prompt handling of incoming and outgoing freight, 
prevent congestion and speed up the turn around of freight 
cars and other means of transportation. To this end all 
orders or requests for shipments of supplies emanating from 
any source whatever will be transmitted to the command¬ 
ing officer, depot, properly marked for the depot officer 
concerned. In accordance with instructions issued to him 
by the commanding general, communications zone, the com¬ 
manding officer, depot, will determine priority of shipment, 
make allotment of cars, and by proper utilization and co¬ 
ordination of transportation agencies, expedite the move¬ 
ment of freight toward the front. 

Each department having supplies at the depot will be 
represented by a depot officer and the necessary personnel 
to handle supplies pertaining to his department. It will 
be the duty of each of the chiefs of services to see that 
stocks, as a whole, are so balanced as to enable his depot 
to perform the particular mission assigned to it. The com¬ 
manding officer, depot, will co-ordinate the activities of the 
various departmental depot officers, while leaving to them 
the internal management of their respective depot sections. 


8 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Each depot officer will keep the chief of his service 
in the communications zone periodically informed as to the 
stock on hand, and will issue supplies on requests approved 
by the chiefs of his department or as hereinafter otherwise 
prescribed. He will supervise the unloading and loading 
of supplies pertaining to his service, and will see that out¬ 
going cars are properly marked. He will transmit informa¬ 
tion in regard to shipments to the consignee through pre¬ 
scribed channels in accordance with instructions to be issued 
from time to time. Under no circumstances will he arrange 
for transportation except through duly constituted trans¬ 
portation agencies under the general supervision of the 
commanding officer, depot. 

5. REGULATING STATIONS 

Based on traffic considerations, the territory occupied 
by troops in combat is divided into areas, to each of which 
is assigned a regulating station. A regulating station is 
that agency in the system of supply which directs and con¬ 
trols the movement of troops and material destined to 
or from the area which it is specifically designated to serve. 
The facilities at the regulating station consist essentially 
of a railway yard with receiving, classification and depar¬ 
ture tracks, and certain facilities for storage and handling 
of stocks of supplies herein collectively designated as ‘‘Reg¬ 
ulating Station Reserves.” For reasons of convenience 
other facilities may be established at the regulating station, 
but these are not invariably provided. To meet the needs 
of the shifting military situation in mobile warfare, reg¬ 
ulating stations may be established from time to time where- 
ever the necessary railway trackage already exists or may 
be quickly installed. 

Sufficient trackage and switching facilities to enable a 
subdivision of the total trackage available into a receiving 
and classification yard will answer the purpose, provided 
the point selected is within about 12 hours’ run of the rail¬ 
heads and, if practicable, two lines exist from the point 
so selected to the front. 

Estimate of freight to be shipped from the regulating 
station each day is made on 200 tons per division per day 
(75 tons more than the daily Class I supply requirement). 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 9 

Based on 30 pounds per man per day which covers all 
requirements of all supplies for an operation, an estimate 
of 375 tons per division per day should be made (25,000 
men per division). 

The regulating station is commanded by a regulating 
officer (RO) who is a member of the 4th section, general 
staff (G4), headquarters of the field forces, and exercises 
his command by virtue of authority delegated to him by 
the commander of the field forces. He is assisted by a 
suitable staff representing the various departments and 
agencies of supply, including transportation. He has an 
executive officer, who relieves him of all details relating 
to the function of military command and routine admin¬ 
istration. 

The regulating officer is responsible for the system¬ 
atic, orderly movement of supplies and reinforcements to 
organizations served by his station and for the evacuation 
of men, animals, and materials therefrom. To him are 
sent all orders for and information regarding the railway 
transportation of men, animals, and materials in his terri¬ 
tory. He is advised in ample time of proposed changes 
at the front that affect supply operations, and he makes 
appropriate dispositions accordingly. He co-ordinates the 
activities of departmental representatives at his station, 
determines the size of stocks to be kept in the yard, de¬ 
termines priority of shipments, makes the allotment of 
cars, and effects prompt release of railway equipment. 
He makes suitable drafts for supplies on designated depots 
to insure the necessary flow of supplies. 

No shipments will be forwarded to any regulating 
station, nor to any point in the combat zone served 
by such a station, excepting by order of the regulating offi¬ 
cer, or in accordance with a definite shipping schedule pre¬ 
viously approved by him. Officers commanding depots and 
others in charge of shipments are responsible that advance 
notice is given the regulating officer of all shipments made 
to his regulating station, or to the area which it serves. 
The flow of supplies thus arranged for normally reaches 
the regulating station in solid trains which are there broken 
up and reassembled in trains for divisions or large groups 


10 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


01 non-divisional elements in the combat zone; express, 
mail, and miscellaneous small shipments for the combat 
zone are received and sorted at the regulating station and 
forwarded in cars on the divisional trains. 

To insure the daily flow of supplies to combat troops 
against interruption, due to irregular arrivals at the reg¬ 
ulating station, the regulating officer draws upon his reg¬ 
ulating station reserves, and such drafts are replaced at 
the first opportunity. The regulating officer is responsible 
for the maintenance of a sufficient emergency reserve, and 
the storage facilities that pertain to the regulating station, 
as such, are not available for storage of miscellaneous 
materials not needed for this purpose. 

Whenever the operation of the railway facilities at 
a regulating station, or whenever the handling of trains in 
the areas served by such station are taken over by the 
field forces, the work of railway operations will be handled 
by personnel from the transportation department, under 
the direction of a division superintendent, who will be 
responsible for the movement of cars in accordance with 
military requirements as indicated to him by the regulat¬ 
ing officer. 

A division superintendent, or other transportation de¬ 
partment representative stationed at a regulating station, 
is a member of the regulating officer’s staff. It is his 
special function to assist and relieve the regulating officer 
in the discharge of his duties in respect to railway per¬ 
sonnel, rolling stock, and other equipment required in con¬ 
ducting railway transportation, maintenance; and generally 
in all questions of a technical nature relating to the super¬ 
vision of railway operation. All regulating and railhead 
officers in the combat zone will be responsible to a chief 
regulating officer (CRO), at the headquarters of the field 
forces (G4). 

In all matters of discipline, sanitation, military ad¬ 
ministration and supply, all personnel at the regulating 
station is subject to the jurisdiction of the regulating 
officer in his capacity as a military post commander. In all 
matters of a technical nature relating to railway operation 
or maintenance and duties or employment directly in con- 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY li 

nection therewith, the regulating officer will exercise his 
control through the proper railway officers. 

See charts: “Organization of Regulating Station,” “Organization of American 
Regulating btetion A, “Organization of American Regulating Station B,” and 
Proposed Table of Organization for a Regulating Station Serving 600,000 or more 
Troops. 

6. RAILHEADS AND REFILLING POINTS 

The railhead is the point on the railway at which 
troops or supplies are discharged and from which they 
are distributed. The refilling point is the place at which 
the trains assigned to divisions and the larger group of 
non-divisional elements are refilled. The two may coincide, 
and the instructions hereinafter given as to railheads apply 
with equal force to refilling points. 

Any station that has a siding capacity for 10 standard 
railroad cars (200 tons, 20 tons per car) will be sufficient 
for 1 division; 20 cars, 2 divisions, etc., provided only that 
sufficient road facilities exist for movement of motor or 
animal-drawn transportation in and out. 

At or near the railheads will be maintained limited 
quantities of stores for emergency use, and depending on 
transportation facilities, one or more days' supply of ra¬ 
tions, forage, fuel, gasoline, and other articles of approxi¬ 
mately uniform daily consumption (Class I) from which 
divisional trains may be filled without holding them for the 
arrival of belated railway trains. When drafts are made 
upon these stocks, the latter will be replenished from sup¬ 
plies brought up on the trains. Report will be made daily to 
the regulating officer as to stores on hand. Effort will be 
made to maintain balanced stocks of ration components. 

Each railhead is commanded by a railhead officer 
(RHO), who is directly responsible to the regulating 
officer for the efficient operation of his railhead. He is 
charged with the reception, unloading, custody and delivery 
of all supplies received at his station. He is warned by 
the railhead transportation officer (RTO) of the probable 
hour of arrival of trains and will make arrangements to 
unload all cars with utmost dispatch. These cars must be 
released within 24 hours after their arrival and as 
much earlier as may be practicable. He is responsible for 


12 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


the sanitation and appearance of his yard and all ground ad¬ 
jacent thereto which may become littered up by reason of the 
use of the station by the troops. He will exercise particular 
care not to encroach upon portions of the yard reserved 
for commercial purposes whenever a railhead is located 
at a commercial station. Special precaution will be taken 
to keep clear the loading platforms and the ground near 
the tracks. Sales commissaries and other facilities not 
essential to the operation of a railhead as such will be 
established at or in the immediate vicinity of the railhead 
only upon the approval of the regulating officer. When 
so established the railhead officer will have no responsibility 
in connection therewith. 

The railhead officer commands his station by virtue 
of authority delegated to him by the commander of the 
field forces through the regulating officer. He receives 
his instructions from the latter, and is assisted by a suit¬ 
able personnel which may include officers from the various 
supply departments. He will be furnished with railhead 
detachments of laborers for routine duty, and he may call 
upon the local military commander for additional labor 
necessary to meet at any time requirements of the situation. 

The railhead officer has associated with him a rail¬ 
way transportation officer (RTO) to assist in matters of 
railway operation in accordance with military requirements 
as indicated by the railhead officer. The railway transpor¬ 
tation officer is an officer of the transportation department, 
and in all matters of railway operation reports to and re¬ 
ceives his orders from his division superintendent. Both 
officers should endeavor by all means within their power to 
expedite the movement, release, and return of railway 
rolling stock, and to free the railhead as rapidly as possible. 

Although serving in areas which are frequently under 
the control of commanders of tactical units, or in the 
army service area, the personnel at railheads will not be 
assigned to such commands, nor will they be interfered 
with in the discharge of their duties connected with supply 
or transportation activities, but nothing herein shall be con¬ 
strued to deprive such tactical area commanders of author¬ 
ity fundamentally vested in them, such as police control, 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


13 


highway traffic control and the enforcement of measures 
for sanitation and safety. 

See diagrams: “A Model Railhead,” “Regulations for Railhead Officer” and 
“Railhead Detachment.” 

7. EVACUATION AND SORTING STATIONS 

Evacuation stations and sorting stations are estab¬ 
lished to handle the rearward movements of men, animals 
and material. An evacuation station is a place for the 
collection of men, animals and materials that have become 
unfit for use at the front and for which movement to the 
rear is contemplated. The personnel of these stations 
receives and cares for the items to be evacuated and at the 
proper time loads them on trains provided by the regulat¬ 
ing officer^ 

Orders for the evacuation of men, animals and mater¬ 
ial are ordinarily issued by G4, army headquarters, which 
should receive early notification of the desired movements 
so that the regulating officer may be given ample time to 
make arrangements for necessary rolling stock. In an 
emergency during action the officer in charge of an evacua¬ 
tion station may call directly upon the regulating officer for 
the necessary railway equipment to evacuate the wounded, 
notifying G4 at his first opportunity that he has made such 
call. 

Sorting stations are railway stations to which evacu¬ 
ated men and materials are sent from the evacuation sta¬ 
tions and where they are sorted into special classes and then 
shipped to their final destination at the rear. Sick and 
wounded are sent to the various hospitals, worn out and 
broken material is distributed to depots or shops previously 
designated. 

The evacuation of sick and wounded men is under 
the general supervision of the medical department. For 
detailed instructions governing the evacuation of the 
wounded see paragraph 21. The evacuation of wounded ani¬ 
mals is supervised by the veterinary service and conforms in 
general with the methods used in the evacuation of the sick 
and wounded. The salvaging of worn out or broken mater¬ 
ial and the general supervision of its evacuation and ulti- 


14 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


mate distribution devolves upon the salvage service. In 
all of this work the actual evacuation is executed in co¬ 
ordination with the transportation service, 4th section, gen¬ 
eral staff. 

8. ARMY SUPPLY ESTABLISHMENTS 

Army depots, corps parks, division dumps, and 
special area dumps contain more or less complete stocks of 
equipment, material and supplies required by the various 
units indicated. In accordance with strategical and tactical 
requirements, as indicated by G3, army, these supply estab¬ 
lishments will be located by G4, army, in consultation with 
the various supply officers concerned, and. thereafter will 
be administered by the respective services to which they 
pertain, under the general supervision of G4, army. Within 
such broad general lines as may be prescribed by G4, army, 
with a view to simplification and co-ordination of practice, 
the various services will organize their own systems of 
supply, and to that end will establish only such of these 
depots and dumps as best meet the needs of their respec¬ 
tive services. In the establishment of these organs of 
supply, special attention must be given to questions of 
proper location and efficient layout with a view to facil¬ 
itating and economizing transportation by standard gage 
and light railways, motor trucks and animal-drawn vehicles. 
The possibility of future expansion must be considered. 
The tendency toward multiplication of units and the dis¬ 
persion of supplies must be especially guarded against, 
in order to prevent wastage of material and the difficulties 
and delays incident to moving stores in the event of an 
advance or retreat. 

9. CLASSIFICATION AND METHODS OF SUPPLY 

The system of supply herein prescribed contemplates 
that troops shall normally be incumbered with a minimum 
of impediments and supplies, thus insuring a maximum of 
mobility. The responsibility for supply has been placed upon 
supply agencies as hereinbefore indicated and the methods 
for issue of supplies have been so simplified that any essen¬ 
tial articles can be obtained, when needed, on a few hours' 
notice. 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


15 


For convenience of administration, all supplies required 
by troops are divided into four general classes, viz.: 

Class I:—All articles which are consumed at an ap¬ 
proximately uniform daily rate irrespective of combat oper¬ 
ations or terrain, and which do not necessitate special 
adaptation to meet individual requirements, such as rations, 
forage, fuel, gasoline, lubricants, and illuminants, includ¬ 
ing dry batteries. This also will contain all articles which 
can be handled on the basis of a daily automatic supply. 

Class II:—Authorized articles of clothing and equip¬ 
ment which, though consumed at an approximately uniform 
rate, are for the personal use of the individual and neces¬ 
sitate special arrangements to meet individual requirements, 
such as clothing, shqes, raincoats, brassards, gas masks, 
helmets, blankets and bedsacks. 

Class III:—Authorized articles of equipments, of 
which allowances are established by Tables of Organization 
and Equipment, or by'schedules of allowances published by 
the War Department or by headquarters of the field forces, 
such as arms, engineer, medical, ordnance,* quartermaster, 
and signal equipment, including vehicles, both motorized 
and animal-drawn. 

Class IV:—Ammunition, construction material of all 
classes, engineer and ordnance material, and all articles of 
which the consumption varies sharply with operations, sea¬ 
son, or terrain, such as barbed wire, bridge and road mater¬ 
ial, machinery, telephone and telegraph line material, lum¬ 
ber and forestry products (other than fuel), railway ties 
and rails and water supply equipment. Also all articles 
of an exceptional nature required for special purposes, and 
all materials and supplies, which, by reason of extreme 
shortage, require special supervision in their distribution 
and use, such as certain medical supplies, photographic 
and lithographic materials, optical apparatus, chronometers 
and other instruments of precision. 

Any article which normally belongs in Class II or 
Class III may, by reason of special stringency, be placed 
in Class IV pending re-establishment of normal status of 
supply. This will be done on orders issued by headquarters 
of the field forces (G4). 


16 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


In the following description of procedure the term 
^‘division’’ is used for convenience to indicate an aumin- 
istrative unit. For non-divisional elements the procedure 
will be substantially that prescribed for a division, with 
the exception that to facilitate delivery of supplies a number 
of these non-divisional elements may occasionally be com¬ 
bined to form a provisional supply group. These regula¬ 
tions will also apply to schools, hospitals, camps and other 
commands in the zone of the armies. 

In accordance with the classification in preceding para¬ 
graphs, supplies will be obtained and distributed as follows. 

10. CLASS I SUPPLIES 

The distribution of articles in this class is based on 
the actual strength in men and animals of the troop units 
as shown by records maintained by the statistical section of 
the division or statistical officers of non-divisional elements. 

(a) The divisional supply officer will make up his re¬ 
quests for rations, forage, and fuel from the data furnished 
him by the statistical section at division headquarters, and 
they will be filled by the supply officer at the railhead or 
refilling point. 

(b) The daily automatic supply of forage, fuel and 
rations is based on the actual strength of the organization 
in men and animals, or on experience tables for gasoline, 
oils and illuminants. This information is furnished by G4, 
corps or division, to army headquarters (G4) from data 
prepared for the (G4) statistical section, army headquar¬ 
ters, who thereupon notifies the regulating officer of the 
number of men and animals of each division or other similar 
organization belonging to the army; organizations in the 
army service area not included in the above send similar 
strength reports to army headquarters (G4), who similarly 
notifies the regulating officer, and at the same time gives 
him such special information as may be necessary to meet 
the requirements of each organization. (See Class I chart 
of supplies.) 

(c) The regulating officer may call upon the various 
supply depots supporting his station to forward necessary 
automatic supplies in either of two ways, viz.: 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


17 


(1) By directing supplies to be made up into trains for through 
shipments to specific divisions or supply groups, or— 

(2) By calling for shipment of supplies in bulk. 

(d) Under the first method of procedure the supplies 
are loaded into cars in quantities indicated by the regulating 
officer, and each car is legibly marked on both sides in ac¬ 
cordance with shipping instructions supplied by him. All 
cars for a specified unit are assembled and shipped as a 
daily train. Notice of shipment is transmitted by the 
commanding officer, depot, to the regulating officer in time 
to reach the latter simultaneously with, or preferably before 
the arrival of the cars. These notices of shipments are at 
once passed to the division superintendent (or railway 
transportation officer) who enters required data in a car 
record book, makes up the trains and dispatches them 
at the proper time to their destination accompanied by a 
“convoy” (special agent), when he thinks such a convoy 
necessary. The division superintendent (or railway trans¬ 
portation officer) will forward to the railhead officer in 
time to reach the latter simultaneously with, or preferablv 
before, the arrival of the train an invoice thereof showing 
car number, contents and consignee. 

In all cases the railway personnel will be given in ad¬ 
vance such information as may be available as to probable 
make-up of trains with destination and proposed hours of 
departure. 

On arrival at railheads, cars are promptly unloaded 
under the supervision of the railhead officer, and the sup¬ 
plies are transferred to the divisional trains. On the other 
hand divisional transportation should not be kept waiting 
at the railhead unnecessarily, and the railhead officer will 
accordingly inform the division supply officer of the prob¬ 
able hour of train arrivals in order that the division trans¬ 
portation may make suitable connections, if possible; other¬ 
wise the issue will be made as indicated (par. 6, ante ). 

At the time of making issues no allowance will be made 
for variations in troop strength occurring between the date 
on which organizations strength reports are made and the 
date on which corresponding shipments of rations are issued, 
hut issues will be made for the strength at the time of 
drawing; record will be kept of issues as actually made and 


18 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


these will be balanced against the strength reports at stated 
intervals. 

(e) Under the second method of procedure when the 
regulating officer calls for shipment of supplies in bulk, the 
following procedure will obtain: 

The supplies will be loaded by the depot officers on cars 
in such units and quantities as the regulating officer may 
determine to be most suitable for handling and distribution. 
Each car will be legibly marked on both sides to show char¬ 
acter and weights or quantities of contents, and such other 
simple data as may be required. Notice of shipment will 
include information as to car numbers, contents and weights 
or quantities in each car. Promptly on receipt of such 
notices the regulating officer will indicate to the division 
superintendent (or railway transportation officer) the des¬ 
tination of the various cars and the provisional make-up of 
all trains for various railheads. Under normal conditions 
such advise as to ‘‘make-up” can be prepared with a rea¬ 
sonable degree of accuracy 24 hours in advance of the 
scheduled hour of departure, but this provisional make-up 
will be followed by a final make-up as soon as it can be 
furnished. Upon arrival of cars they are assembled by 
the railway personnel and dispatched to their destination 
in accordance with make-up schedules. 

In forwarding supplies in this manner carload lots or 
unit quantities will not be broken, and it will not always be 
practicable to meet the exact requirements of a divisional or 
provisional supply group. The method will thus result in 
over issues or under issues, as the case may be, which will 
require adjustment at stated intervals. A record book suit¬ 
ably ruled for plus and minus issues and net amounts due 
different organizations will be kept by the railhead officer 
and by the divisional supply officer with a view to making 
suitable adjustments in subsequent issues. 

11. CLASS II SUPPLIES 

(Clothing, Blankets, Gas Masks, etc.) 

(a) The distribution of articles in this class is like¬ 
wise based on the actual strength in men and animals of 
the troop units as shown by statistical records, and in addi- 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 19 

tion is based on records of sizes (for clothing, shoes, etc.) 
maintained by the regimental supply officers and determined 
by experience. 

The latter will furnish necessary data as to sizes to the 
divisional supply officer, who will consolidate them and keep 
them reasonably up to date by requiring reports at stated 
intervals. Whenever supplies become necessary, he will pre¬ 
pare a consolidated request for his division and submit the 
same to army headquarters (G4) for approval and for de¬ 
termination as to what portion of the supplies shall be 
drawn from stocks in the army depots. Any portion of 
the request which cannot be filled from sources at the dis¬ 
posal of the army will be forwarded through the regulating 
officer to a storage depot previously designated by the chief 
of each supply department to furnish, for the particular 
unit or sector, the supplies of the character required. The 
depot will fill the request to the nearest unit package. Orig¬ 
inal packages will not be broken. Upon receipt of requests, 
the depot officer will inform his railway transportation 
officer as to his requirements for railway rolling stock and 
the latter will make the necessary arrangements. The 
commanding officer, depot, will inform the regulating officer 
of projected shipment and the latter will establish order of 
priority and give such other instructions as may be perti¬ 
nent. After the cars are placed by the railway personnel, 
they will be loaded by the depot personnel, and the pro¬ 
cedure thereafter will be as heretofore described for carload 
lots of Class I supplies. (See Class II and III, chart of 
supply.) 

(b) During periods of stabilized warfare, or for troops 
in training areas, or under favorable conditions of service 
and in accordance with experience accumulated as to rates 
of consumption, certain articles in this class of supplies 
may be placed on a semi-automatic basis; shipments may 
thus be made to the organizations on certain dates agreed 
upon in advance, due allowance being made for variations 
in strength. 

(c) Variations indicated by (b') above, will be author¬ 
ized only by order of the headquarters of the field forces 
(G4) on recommendation of G4, army. 


20 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


12. CLASS III SUPPLIES 

(Authorized Articles of Equipment) 

(a) Under the supervision of the commanding gen¬ 
eral, communications zone, or the commander of the army 
service area, initial issue of authorized articles of unit equip¬ 
ment will be made without request to all troops arriving in 
their respective areas. Thereafter requirements for sup¬ 
plies will be transmitted by divisional units to the divisional 
supply officer who will fill same from any supplies at his 
disposal in accordance with established schedules of allow¬ 
ances. If he cannot fill the entire request, he will forward 
the remainder of the request to army headquarters, where 
it will be filled by the proper army supply officer from 
supplies actually held in army establishments, or in depots, 
in credit allotments, as hereinafter explained. 

(b) Any portion of the request that cannot be filled 
from sources at the disposal of the army will be forwarded 
through the regulating officer to a storage depot previously 
designated by the chief of each supply department to fur¬ 
nish, for the particular unit or sector, the supplies of the 
character required. (See Class II and III, chart of supply.) 

13. CLASS IV SUPPLIES 

(Ammunition, Construction Material, etc.) 

(a) Requirements for articles of this class are handled 
in the manner described for those of Class III, except that 
after the articles which are available within the army 
have been furnished, the remainder of the request will 
be forwarded direcl^ from army headquarters ' (G4) to 
headquarters of the field forces (G4) where appropriate 
action will be taken. (See Class IV, chart of supply.) 

In making shipments of supplies a list of contents 
or ‘‘loading slip,” duly verified, will invariably accompany 
each car. For supplies shipped in closed cars, the slip will 
be tacked in a conspicuous place inside the car near the 
door; and for supplies shipped in open cars, it will be placed 
in a durable envelope and tacked to the under side of the 
car near the middle, in a place protected from the weather. 
In all cases, notice of shipment, containing necessary in- 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 21 

formation as to car numbers, contents, weights or quan¬ 
tities, and the consignee will be transmitted to the regulating 
officer by the commanding officer, depot, or other shipping 
officer, in time to reach the regulating station simultan¬ 
eously with, or preferably before the arrival of the cars. The 
notice of shipment will contain reference to the identification 
of file number and the items on the requisition or order 
on which the shipment applies. A duplicate of such notice 
will be sent to the consignee. For organizations serving 
in combat areas, the notice will be sent to headquarters 
(G4) of the proper army for transmittal to the consignee. 
For organizations elsewhere it will be sent directly to 
the consignee by the shipping officer. 

Whenever articles are to be shipped from depots in 
less than carload lots to any division or supply group, they 
will be properly marked with the name of the ultimate 
consignee and will be placed by the department depot officer 
in cars with similar small shipments destined for other 
units in the same command. No car will contain supplies 
furnished by two or more departments. Cars will be con¬ 
signed to the corresponding departmental supply officer of 
the army or other headquarters having jurisdiction and 
he will arrange for delivery of contents to the ultimate 
consignee. Loading slips placed in such cars will give 
all data necessary to insure delivery to the original unit 
making the request. 

14. CREDIT 

(a) In order to expedite the supply of articles of any 
class, and to reduce the necessity for sending formal re¬ 
quirements to headquarters of the field forces, certain 
quantities of supplies stored in the various depots may be 
allotted to and placed at the disposal of army headquarters 
for a definite period of time. Such quantities of supplies 
will be called “credits,” and after allotment will be subject 
to draft on demand directly from army headquarters with¬ 
out further reference to the headquarters of the field forces. 
The purpose of allotting such credits is to assure army 
headquarters a definite amount of supplies for the period 
stated, and at the same time relieve the army of the 


22 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


necessity of caring for them in army depots. The com¬ 
manding officers of the depots at which stores are actually 
located thus become ‘Varehousing agents’^ for the army 
for the amount of supplies covered by the credit allotment. 
Upon receipt of drafts from army headquarters for supplies 
covered by '‘credits,” the commanding officer, depot, will 
arrange through the proper regulating officer for necessary 
transportation, and will cause cars to be loaded by the 
proper departmental depot officer. One copy of each draft 
made against the credit will be sent by G4, army, to the 
regulating officer. By arrangement between G4, army, 
and the regulating officer, the orders may direct shipment 
in carload lots at a fixed rate for a number of days, and the 
railway division superintendent in such cases will take 
action to secure the rolling stock required. 

(b) At the end of the period named in the credit 
allotment, all undrawn balances will revert to depot stock, 
but on request made prior thereto, a new credit will have 
to be arranged by headquarters of the field forces (G4) 
for the next succeeding period. Army headquarters may 
at its discretion make similar credit allotments of supplies 
in army depots to subordinate units and establishments. 
Copies of documents making credit allotments will be for¬ 
warded by army headquarters to the commanding officers 
of the depots and to the chiefs of the services concerned. 
The latter will make arrangements to meet drafts on these 
credits. A "credit allotment” will not be confused with 
a demand or order for shipment. 

(c) Requests will normally be filled from supplies 
actually on hand, or at the disposition of the various head¬ 
quarters. Only under exceptional circumstances will re¬ 
quests be forwarded for action to higher authority while 
subordinate agencies still have supplies at their disposal 
from which such requests may be filled. In such cases 
the reason for forwarding the requests to higher authority 
will be indicated. 

(d) No request will include articles issued by two or 
more supply departments, nor, when it can be avoided, 
will articles of different classes be listed in the same request. 
All requests for divisions, corps and army troops, or for 
non-divisional organizations that are forwarded to depots 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 23 

will be in triplicate, and will bear a serial file number 
for the organization concerned. This number will be pre¬ 
fixed by an abbreviation indicating the department that 
issues the supplies covered by the requisition, as follows: 

“QM” for Quartermaster Corps; 

“MD” for Medical Department; 

“Engr” for Corps of Engineers; 

“Ord” for Ordnance Department; 

“Sig C” for Signal Corps; 

“Air” for Air Service; 

“MTC” for Motor Transport Corps. 

The various items in each requisition will also be 
numbered consecutively. When apprpved by competent 
authority, one copy will be sent to the proper depot, with 
necessary shipping instruction; one copy will be returned 
to the supply officer initiating the request; and a third 
copy will be sent to the regulating officer indicated by the 
shipping instructions. All copies will be clearly marked 
to show the fact of. approval, and the approving author¬ 
ity. After action by the depot, its copy may be forwarded 
to the chief of the appropriate department. All inquiries 
and correspondence concerning supplies will refer to the 
request and item number as given by the division, corps 
or army, and to any additional file numbers indicated by 
the approving authority for the purpose. Requests from 
non-divisional organizations will indicate the particular 
tactical command, if any, to which they are attached in 
addition to the identification numbers by the organizations 
themselves. 

(e) Whenever a request cannot be completely filled, 
the approving authority or depot officer supervising the 
issues thereon will make notation on the various copies 
as to action that may be expected in respect to articles 
that cannot be supplied. 

(f) When a storage depot cannot supply all articles 
called for on a request, it will forward such articles as may 
be available. The remainder of the request will be extracted 
to the proper chief of supply service. For supplies of 
Classes I, II, and III, action will be by telegraph, and 
the chief of service will at once forward to the depot the 
supplies necessary to fill requisition. For supplies of Class IV 
the chief of the supply service concerned will make issue 


24 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


at once directly to the consignee from any other depot 
at which the supplies may be had, or if not in stock, will 
direct purchase and delivery thereof. He will notify the 
depot officer of His action and will take steps to stock up 
his depot if the articles in question are of such a nature as 
to indicate future demand. Chiefs of supply services, when 
authorized by the commanding general, communications 
zone, may keep the entire stock of certain classes of articles, 
of which the supply is limited, at one or more designated 
depots, and in such cases other depots will forward or 
extract thereto requests for these supplies. 

(g) In general, when it is known that items cannot 
be supplied within 15 days after receipt of require¬ 
ment by the supply department concerned, they will be 
stricken from the request and the officer initiating the 
demand will be notified at once. Arrearages on requests 
will not be allowed to accumulate. Prompt action on each 
request must be taken, within the limits of his power, by 
each officer through whom it passes. 

(h) Organizations will not duplicate on requests ar¬ 
ticles that have been called for on previous requests until 
notice has been received that such articles have been stricken 
therefrom; provided, however, that: 

Supply officers may at intervals of not less than 15 
days include in requests all items previously requested 
and not supplied, but they will indicate opposite each 
such item the number of times and the dates and reference 
numbers of the requests on which it has been previously 
stricken out. A reasonable period must be allowed for 
transmission of requirements and for delivery of supplies. 

(i) The responsibility of the necessity for and the suffi¬ 
ciency and accuracy of such requests rests with the regi¬ 
mental or other similar commander; the final responsibility 
rests with the division commander. Whenever, for any 
reason, in the opinion of G4, division, corps or army, 
it may become necessary or advisable to “cut” a requisition, 
the chief staff officer of the appropriate supply service at 
the headquarters concerned will be consulted, and he will 
indicate the order in which and the amount by which the 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 25 

various items in the requests will be cut to come within 
the prescribed limitations as to weight or bulk; to fix 
the responsibility for such a reduction, he will make suitable 
notation on the request and initial the same. 

(j) Corps troops and army troops will send their re¬ 
quests directly to corps and army headquarters respectively. 
Other non-divisional elements will send their requests di¬ 
rectly to the headquarters of the units to which they may be 
attached. In these cases the procedure to be followed 
for each class of supplies will be as outlined above. 

(k) When supplies are issued from depots to establish¬ 
ments, troops, or for construction work in the combat zone, 
or are transferred from one supply service to another, the 
receiving officer will receipt for the supplies, with a notation 
showing the organization or the work for which the supplies 
or materials are to be used. No further accounting for 
the supplies or materials will be required from the receiving 
officer (FSR, Par. 370). The same care will be taken 
of all equipment, supplies and material, and the same 
economy in their use will be observed as if a formal account¬ 
ing were required. Commanding officers are charged with 
the duty of seeing that neither men nor organizations of 
their commands waste, make misuse of the supplies, material 
or equipment furnished them or accumulate a surplus 
thereof. Organizations or individuals demanding much 
in excess of the average amounts required by other like 
units under similar conditions will be investigated, and 
proper action taken if waste, misuse or undue accumulation 
are discovered. 

(l) The chiefs of the various services of supply, either 
in person or by deputies, will make frequent inspections of 
the establishments of their departments in all parts of the 
theater of operations, with a view to reporting upon any 
unauthorized use or misuse of equipment, supplies, or 
materials, or any accumulation of the same beyond reason¬ 
able needs. In conference with the head of the salvage 
service, they will arrange for the salvage and speedy return 
to departmental establishments of all articles left behind 
by troops in the course of operations. Stores remaining 
in dumps or utilizable articles found on the field will be 


26 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


shipped to the nearest appropriate supply establishment 
still functioning in the vicinity. Such articles will not be 
returned to salvage establishments in the rear when other 
convenient means of disposition are available. 

15. METHOD OF SUPPLY IN THE COMMUNICATIONS 
ZONE 

Units in the communications zone will obtain their 
equipment and supplies in the following general manner, 
details of which shall be prescribed by the commanding 
general, communications zone. 

(a) Articles of Classes I, II, and III will be issued 
by supply depots on duly approved requests made direct 
to them. All requests will show amounts on hand, and 
no surplus over the authorized allowances will be asked for. 

(b) Requests for equipment or supplies of Class IV, 
including all those for construction work, will be submitted 
to the chief of the supply service concerned, who will, 
after approval, send them to the proper depot for filling. 
Credits for material for approved construction projects 
may be placed at the disposition of the officer in charge. 
These will be handled within the communications zone 
in a manner similar to that prescribed for credits given 
to army headquarters. 

In authorizing credits and in making drafts upon 
storage depots for supplies for troops in the communications 
zone, due care will be taken to protect the interests of 
troops in the combat zone, and instructions to that end 
will be issued by the chief of - each supply service to govern 
his establishments. 

Copies of all orders and instructipns of a general 
nature issued by the chief of any supply service for the 
government of his establishments will be forwarded to 
the headquarters of the communications zone (G4) and 
to headquarters of the field forces (G4), for information 
and file; but nothing in such orders or instructions shall 
be construed as in any way modifying any of the provisions 
of these regulations. 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 27 

16. AGENCIES AND METHODS FOR MOVING TROOPS 

Troops are assigned to the various armies and sub¬ 
ordinate units thereof for the prosecution of operations 
against the enemy, and subsequent to such an assignment 
their movements are governed by military considerations. 
Troops are assigned to the communications zone for the 
construction, maintenance and operation of agencies neces¬ 
sary to support combatant forces. Orders for the movement 
of troops presuppose suitable arrangements for their trans¬ 
portation and supply and provision for the replacement of 
casualties. The supervision of these functions, viz., 
operations, transport, supply and replacements, devolve 
respectively on the 8d (G3), 4th (G4) and 1st (Gl) sections 
of the general staff, and these sections of the general staff 
at the various headquarters are accordingly concerned in 
the issue of orders affecting the movement of troops. With 
a view, therefore, of fixing responsibility and insuring 
central co-ordination between the various headquarters 
and staff sections concerned, the following regulations will 
govern the issuing of orders and the movement of troops 
pertaining to the field forces: 

Prior to, or immediately upon arrival in the theater 
of operations, all troops will be given an initial assignment 
jointly by G3 and G4, headquarters of the field forces. 
Their primary destination will be indicated by G4 to the 
commanding general, communications zone, who will ac¬ 
complish the movement in accordance with instructions 
given him. The assignment of troops distinctly intended 
for combat or ‘‘line duty’' may be determined by G3 on 
its own initiative. 

Organizations having been assigned to an army, or 
other independent combat unit, orders will thereafter be 
issued from headquarters of the field forces: 

(a) For movement from the communications zone into 
the combat zone. 

(b) For movement from the combat zone into the 
communications zone. 

(c) For movement from one army or independent unit 
to another. 


28 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Organizations that have been assigned to the com¬ 
munications zone will move on orders issued from head¬ 
quarters of the communications zone: 

(a) Between points wholly within the communications 

zone. 

(b) From the communications zone to establishments 
or projects in the army service area under the jurisdiction 
of the commanding general, communications zone. 

Organizations having been assigned to an army, or 
group, will move on orders issued from the corresponding 
headquarters, provided that the movement is wholly con¬ 
fined to territory within the jurisdiction of such headquar¬ 
ters. 

The 3d section, general staff, at headquarters of the 
field forces or at the headquarters of other commands 
will supervise the actual issue of all orders for the move¬ 
ment of troops within the limitations above indicated. It 
will initiate and issue orders for the movement of all troops 
distinctly intended for combat or “line duty,” but to insure 
the functioning of supply and auxiliary technical services, 
G3 will advise G4 of contemplated movements which may 
involve or concern such services. It will likewise advise 
G1 of movements which may require special arrangements 
for replacements. The 4th section, general staff, will in¬ 
itiate and make suitable requests on G3 for the movements 
of all troops of the supply and technical services, not dis¬ 
tinctly intended for line duty, and G1 will similarly make 
requests for the movement of replacements, but nothing 
herein shall be construed to prevent the shifting of rail¬ 
head detachments by the regulating officers and not af¬ 
fecting the automatic flow of replacement troops. 

For purposes of information and record, the copies of 
all orders and instructions directing the movement of troops 
will be transmitted to the 1st section, general staff, which 
is charged with the preparation of the “order of battle,” 
and with arrangements for replacements. 

The division of duties and responsibilities at the head¬ 
quarters of division, army corps, armies and other com¬ 
mands will conform in principle to the distribution above 
indicated. 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 29 

Troop movement bureaus (TMB) are established: 

(a) At the headquarters of the field forces (G4) for 
all movements in the combat zone not otherwise hereinafter 
provided for. 

(b) At headquarters of the communications zone for 
all movements wholly within the communications zone and 
for movements from that zone to points within the combat 
zone. 

(c) At headquarters of armies, troops movement offi¬ 
cers in G4 will be specially charged with the duty of mak¬ 
ing arrangements in consultation with the proper regulating 
officers for all troops movements within their respective 
army combat areas. 

Railway transportation officers (RTOs) are stationed 
at ports and important railway stations to direct and 
supervise arrangements for transportation by rail of troops 
and their baggage and equipment. When large bodies 
of troops are moved, the regulating officers in the combat 
zone and the general railway superintendents in the com¬ 
munications zone arrange for assignments of such rail¬ 
way transportation officers as are needed for temporary 
duty at entraining and detraining stations and at coffee 
and rest stations. 

The transportation department will furnish special 
railway equipment when required and, under the direction 
of the regulating officer, or other officer detailed for the 
purpose, will take charge of the movement of troops, troop 
baggage and equipment from point of origin to point of 
destination. 

It will assist in the movement of casual officers and 
soldiers and- will render every assistance possible through 
its regular representatives. The latter will take special 
precautions to insure the prompt delivery of baggage lost 
or left behind by officers or men. 

Arrangements for transportation by rail are made by 
the railway transportation officer on application from the 
commanding officer, in accordance with the rules given 
below. When no railway transportation officer is avail¬ 
able, the commanding officer of a unit will make all neces¬ 
sary arrangements in conformity with these rules. 

(See paragraphs 17 to 21 inclusive.) 


30 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


17. TROOP MOVEMENTS ENTIRELY WITHIN THE 

COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

All movements of troops by rail in the communications 
zone are arranged for and supervised by agencies of the 
transportation department, as outlined in regulations issued 
by the commanding general, communications zone. 

18. TROOP MOVEMENTS FROM THE COMMUNICA¬ 

TIONS ZONE TO THE COMBAT ZONE 

When troop movements originate in the communica¬ 
tions zone for destination within the combat zone, orders 
for movement will designate the command to which the 
units will report, and will also designate the regulating 
station or other primary destination. Transportation orders 
will normally direct movement to primary destination only. 
The regulating officer, or railway transportation officer 
supervising the movement, will make all arrangements for 
continuance of the movement designated by the army or 
higher commander and will control the same beyond the 
primary destination to the ultimate detraining point. 

19. TROOP MOVEMENTS FROM THE COMBAT ZONE TO 

THE COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

(a) For a movement not exceeding 20 officers or 
men, the railway transportation officer will arrange for 
movement on regularly scheduled trains and will notify 
all concerned of the arrangements made. 

(b) For a movement involving more than 20 men, 
or requiring special train, the railway transportation offi¬ 
cer will make application to the regulating officer. The 
latter will arrange for the movement and notify the troop 
movement bureau at headquarters of the field forces of 
the arrangements asked for, in order that the troop move¬ 
ment bureau may arrange for the movement if not promptly 
arranged locally. The regulating officer will notify the com- 
^mand of the time when cars will be spotted and ready 
for loading, the hour of departure and places where hot 
coffee will be furnished, and will send all necessary infor¬ 
mation to other officers concerned in the movement. 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 31 

20. TROOP MOVEMENTS ENTIRELY WITHIN THE 
COMBAT ZONE 

(a) When movements of troops belonging to an army, 
involving travel over routes entirely within the combat 
zone, are to be handled by means of transportation not 
under the exclusive control of the army authorities, appli¬ 
cation will be made by the proper commander to the troop 
movement bureau at headquarters of the field forces and 
the latter will make all necessary arrangements. 

(b) When movements of troops belonging to an army, 
involving travel over routes entirely within an army area, 
are to be handled'by the army authorities or by means of 
transportation exclusively under army control, arrange¬ 
ments will be made by the troop movement officer in G4 
at the headquarters of the army concerned. 

An application for transportation will show the per¬ 
sonnel, animals and equipment to be moved by rail, as fol¬ 
lows: 

1. Unit. 

2. Destination. 

3. Number of officers and men. 

4. Tons of baggage. 

5. Number of two-wheeled and number of four-wheeled ve¬ 

hicles. 

6. Number of animals. 

7. Authority for the move. 

8. Time when command can be ready to move. 

Advices reporting the forwarding of troops will show 
the primary destination of the organization, but will not 
normally indicate the ultimate destination or detraining 
point. The first advice will report the name of the unit, 
the strength of the command, the name of the commanding 
officer and the schedule arrangements and identification 
number. Subsequent advices will report the hour of de¬ 
parture, the expected hour of arrival, and will refer to the 
movement by the identification number. 

Such identification numbers will be assigned serially 
by each office arranging movements. 

Railway transportation officers will act as intermed¬ 
iaries between officers in command of troops and railway 
personnel. Commanding officers of troops or detachments 
are responsible for the enforcement of all instructions from 


32 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


railway transportation officers in regard to entraining, de¬ 
training and the conduct of personnel while aboard trains 
or within stations. 

21. EVACUATION OF SICK AND WOUNDED BY HOS¬ 

PITAL TRAINS 

Hospital trains are medical department organizations. 
As regards personnel, material, supply and maintenance 
of their equipment and disinfection, they are administered 
under the direction of the chief surgeon of the field forces. 
As railway units, they are operated under the direction 
of the officer to whom they are assigned and they are re¬ 
paired by the transportation department. 

Based on the recommendations of the chief surgeon 
of the field forces, or his deputy, assignments of hospital 
trains are made by headquarters of the field forces (G4) 
to regulating officer and to the troop movement bureau, 
at headquarters of the communications zone. 

An officer of the medical department will be assigned 
to each regulating station as a member of the staff of the 
regulating officer, and as a representative of the chief 
surgeon, to whom commanding officers of hospital trains, 
assigned to that station, will be directly answerable in 
matters pertaining to medical department administration. 
He will be charged by the regulating officer with the duty 
of seeing that trains are at all times ready to answer 
calls and are kept properly provisioned and stocked. 

22. EVACUATION FROM THE COMBAT ZONE 

The chief surgeon of the field forces will allot daily a 
requisite number of beds to each regulating afficer, ad¬ 
vising him by telegraph as to their number and location. 
These beds will be reserved for the exclusive use of the 
regulating officer to whom allotted, and daily notice of any 
changes in these credits will be furnished him. In all 
questions arising as to bed credits, their sufficiency and lo¬ 
cation, the chief surgeon and regulating officers are au¬ 
thorized to communicate direct. The latter will assign 
destination to hospital trains in accordance with the in¬ 
formation furnished, as provided for above, and the traffic 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


33 


conditions at the time of the evacuation. Information re¬ 
garding transportation or combat conditions which might 
affect the allotment or location of beds reserved for him 
will be promptly communicated to the chief surgeon of the 
field forces by the regulating officer. 

G4, army, will furnish the regulating officer daily 
with all data bearing upon evacuation in order that the 
latter may judge the sufficiency of trains and beds at his 
disposition, and take the necessary steps to correct a short¬ 
age in either. 

Evacuation hospitals will report daily, or as often as 
may be necessary, to G4, army, or to the regulating officers, 
the following information: 

(e) Number of vacant beds. 

(a) Number of evacuable wounded, sitting and lying cases; 

(b) Number of non-evacuable wounded; 

(c) Number of evacuable sick, sitting and lying cases; 

(d) Number of non-evacuable sick; 

(e) Number of vacant beds. 

G4, army, considering the data furnished him as pro¬ 
vided for above, together with such information regarding 
intended operations as may have a bearing on the evacuation 
situation, calls upon the regulating officer for a hospital 
train, giving station and time it is desired to have the train 
placed; the number of officer, soldier, and enemy prisoner 
patients; the number of sick and the number of wounded 
patients; and the number of contagious cases. He will at 
the same time advise the commanding officer of the evacua¬ 
tion hospital concerned of the action taken. 

The regulating officer, upon the receipt of a call from 
G4, army, for the hospital train, will assign the train and ar¬ 
range the necessary schedule, advising the evacuation hos¬ 
pital and G4, army, of the probable time of arrival and the 
period of time allotted for loading. The commanding officer 
of the evacuation hospital will be charged with seeing that 
the necessary steps are taken in order that the train may 
be promptly loaded in the time allotted. 

The regulating officer will notify the commanding officer 
of the receiving hospital of the contents of each train, show¬ 
ing the number of officer, soldier and enemy prisoner pa¬ 
tients; number of sitting and number of lying patients; 


34 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


number of sick and number of wounded patients; and the 
number of contagious cases, together with any other in¬ 
formation that would facilitate unloading the trains. The 
regulating officer will notify the troop movement bureau 
at headquarters of the communications zone of all troop 
movements into the communications zone, and will arrange 
through that bureau for return movements, indicating in 
each case whether movement at customary rate of rush 
handling is desirable under circumstances existing at the 
time. 

In emergencies, when communication by telephone or 
telegraph is interrupted, or inadequate, rendering it imprac¬ 
ticable to follow the channels of communication above pre¬ 
scribed, commanding officers of evacuation hospitals are 
authorized to communicate direct with the regulating officer 
and request a train, notifying G4, army, as soon as possible 
of the action taken. When necessary, a representative of 
G4, army, may be stationed at the regulating station for 
the purpose of co-operating with the regulating officer in 
carrying out the provisions outlined in the above para¬ 
graphs. 

23. EVACUATION IN COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

Evacuation from hospitals in the rear of the combat 
zone will be provided for by the troop movement bureau at 
headquarters of the communications zone, in accordance 
with requests made upon him for this purpose by the chief 
surgeon of the field forces. Secondary evacuations from 
hospitals in the combat zone, not functioning as evacuation 
hospitals, will be arranged for by the chief surgeon of the 
field forces directly with the regulating officer concerned. 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


■35 




















































































36 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 































































































































Orom'/jation or American RrcuLAmc Sr a tion "B ’ 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


37 



P 

































38 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


24. REGULATIONS FOR RAILHEAD OFFICERS 
Railhead Officer 

A railhead officer is the representative of the regu¬ 
lating officer and is in charge of the railhead and all agen¬ 
cies under the control of the regulating officer. 

He reports to and receives orders directly from the 
regulating officer. His position calls for courtesy and dis¬ 
cretion in the exercise of the authority he represents. 

The railhead officer is the final link between the com¬ 
munications zone and the troops which he serves. His re¬ 
sponsibilities embrace the care of, distribution and conserva¬ 
tion of all commodities entrusted to his care. 

He must exercise judgment and tact in serving the 
divisions and in his relations with the railhead personnel. 

He must familiarize himself with all general orders 
governing his duties and with all local conditions that may 
affect his work. 

He should know all possible entraining and detraining 
points in or near the area served by the railhead and should 
be informed as to the general location and strength of each 
unit in the area and with all lines of communication. 

The railhead officer will be charged with the receipt 
and prompt unloading of all cars received at his station for 
American troops. He will be warned of their arrival by 
the regulating officer and will unload the cars as soon as 
possible and always within 24 hours after they are placed 
for unloading. Where labor troops are not available^or in¬ 
adequate for this purpose, the railhead officer will call on 
the local commanding officer for necessary details (see 
Railhead Detachment). 

Automatic Supplies: —The railhead officer will turn 
over to the division or other organization, in bulk daily, 
the automatic supplies for one day, based upon the actual 
strength of men and animals of the organization. Strength 
reports should be received one day in advance when prac¬ 
ticable. The railhead officer should calculate all items in 
advance and the issue should be set aside (in bulk) to ex¬ 
pedite delivery. 


PROPOSED TABLE OF ORGANIZATION FOR A REGULATING STATION SERVING 500,000 OR MORE TROOPS 



j 

1 Colonel 

a> 

c 

'o 

O 

•4-1 

1 

Major 

Captain 

Lieutenants 

1st or 2d 

Field Clerks 

Stenographers 

Typists 

Clerks 

Checkers 

Labellers 

Laborers 

Interpreters 

Motor Cars 

Electricians 

Motorcycles 

Motor Trucks 

Motor Ambulances 

Chauffeurs 

Telephone 

Operators 

Telegraphers 

Carpenters 

“A” Reeulatinc' Officer . 

1 

(a) 1 • 

(b) 1 

(c) 3 

(d) 3 

2 







4 






4 




“B” Supply Branch ___ __ 



1 

(a) 6 

(b) 6 

1 

6 

4 

13 














“C” Evacuation Branch . 




1 

(a) 1 


(b) 2 
















“D” Rest Camp _^_ 


1 

(a) 1 

(b) 1 

(c) 4 


1 

1 

14 














“E” Casuals—Distribution Branch __ 




1 

(a) 2 

1 

2 

7 

6 














“F" Disposition Branch (Arrival and 












1 











Depart, of Freight) _ _ 



1 

(a) 1 

(b) 7 


3 

2 

26 

10 

9 



1 





1 




“G‘* Railway Transportation Branch -- _ 




1 

(a) 7 


3 


19 



2 

1 

1 

! 

1 



2 




“H” Executive Branch __ _ 

♦ 



1 

(a) 1 

(b) 2 

4 

1 

2 

7 



6 

2 

1 

1 

I 

4 

*30 

x2 

6 

3 

3 

1 

TOTAL— ... 

1 

2 

6 

16 

32 

8 1 

00 

16 

85 

10 

9 

8 

3 

7 

1 

6 

30 

2 

12 

3 

3 

1 




«D"- 

^‘E”- 

-G”- 

"H"- 


DETAILED EXPLANATION 

-(a) Assistant to reg’ulating officer, (b) Inspector of railheads and communication with organizations to 
be equipped, (c) Representatives at primary regulating stations, (d) Representatives at en¬ 
training and detraining. 

-(a) Assistant to supply officer in charge of ration supplies. Assistant to supply officer 1/c forage, 
fuel, gasoline, lubricants and illuminants. Assistant to supply officer 1/c clothing, animal- 
drawn transportation and miscellaneous QM supplies. Assistant to supply officer 1/c ord¬ 
nance supplies including ammunition. Assistant to supply officer 1/c engineer and signal 
supplies. Assistant to supply officer 1/c medical and chemical warfare supplies. 

(a) Assistant to officer in charge evacuations, (b) One day and one night. 

(a) Assistant to commanding officer, rest camp, (b) Rest camp quartermaster, (c) One each, in 
charge of provisional companies. 

(a) Assistant to officer in charge. 

(a) Assistant in charge of car distribution bureau in yards, (b) Assistants to disposition officer 
and officer in charge car distribution. 

(a) Duty with chief railway transportation officer, troop movement bureau, railway transportation 
officer at station and military quai. 

(a) Assistant to executive officer, (b) Assistant to executive officer on night duty. (*) Trucks 
utilized in forwarding supplies under emergency. Ambulances used at station and connection 
with rest camp. 

DUTIES OF THE VARIOUS BRANCHES 
“B” Supply Branch 

(1) Automatic shipment of Class I supplies to all troops in the zone of army, in districts served by 
regulating station. 

(2) Making and forwarding requisitions to the various depots for all Class II, III, IV and V supplies 
ind material requested by the armies and CZ troops in the district served by regulating station. 

(3) Maintenance of all reserves and emergency stocks at railheads. 

(4) All routine correspondence with depots involving supplies, requisitions and shipment of supplies. 

(5) Having at all times reports of all supplies on hand at all railheads; status of all requisitions 
landled by supply officer ; reports on all shipments made on requisitions and en route to destinations. 

^‘C” Evacuation Branch 

(1) Allotment of bed space in hospitals and direction of evacuations to the rear. 

(2) Securing schedules from railway transportation branch and issuing instructions for movement 
f hospital trains serving regulating station. 

“D*' Rest Camp 

The administration, discipline, sanitation and equipment of all casuals received. 


“E’* CASUALS—Distribution Despatch of all Casuals 

Joi Movement from regulating station to classification camps and depot divisions in the rear. 

(2) Movement from regulating station to corps and division replacement battalions, divisions depots 

ana stations in the advance. 

“F'' Disposition Branch 

(1) Reconsignment of supplies in the advance which had been misdirected or which have arrived 
subsequent to the departure of the consignee from original destination of supplies. 

(2) Disposition and record of all cars arriving at station consigned for regulating officer, or con¬ 
signed to organizations or stations in the advance. Distribution section via the regrulating officer. 

(3) Record of all cars loaded out of station. 

(4) Record of all cars and direction of movements thereof in yards at station at all times. (Car 

Disposition Bureau.) 

(5) Keeping of station list and battle order, and giving all necessary information relative to locations 
01 consignee of material, supplies and troops. 

“G” Railway Transport Branch 

(1) Communication with transportation department. 

lol transportation for troop and freight movement in district served by regulating station. 

/ \ and supervision of RTO’s in sections served by regulating station. 

(4) Spotting of empties for load on depot tracks; pulling empties and loads from depot tracks - classi¬ 
fication and make-up of outbound trains in yards. 

(5) Spotting all loads received for discharge on depot tracks. 

(6) Operation of LCL (less than carload lots) Warehouse. 

(7) Tracing car load and LCL shipments (through Car Service Bureau). 

(8) Operation and maintenance of railroad equipment at station. 

(9) Technical administration of railway transportation personnel. 

'‘H’" Executive Branch 

(1) Communication between regulating officer and commanding officer, U S troops. 

(2) Issuing of all special and general orders concerning regulating station administration. 

(3) Distribution of personnel of regulating station and railheads. 

(4) Administration of communication service (mail, telephone and telegraph), 

(5) Despatch^ of motor transportation assigned to regulating station. 

(6) Distribution of all incoming telegrams and correspondence; despatch of all outgoing communica¬ 
tions. 

(7) Routine office administration. 

Note: —The foregoing table, based on daily business, as follows: Supply of 600,000 or more troops 
(at one time handled 786,000). Supply of 80,000 or more animals (at one time handled 116,000). Hand¬ 
ling between 3,000 and 5,000 casuals. Disposition of 1,600 cars. 




















































































































38 


24. REGU 

A rai 
lating offic 
cies under 
He r( 
regulating 
eretion in 
The ] 
municatio 
sponsibili' 
tion of al] 
He 1 
divisions 
He 1 
govern in; 
aifect his 
He s 
points in 
be inforr 
unit in t 
The 
and proi 
America 
the regi 
possible 
for unlo 
adequat 
the loci 
Railhea 
Au 
over to 
the aut 
strengt 
reports 
ticable. 
advanc 
pedite 


A Model Railhead 







































































• * •. 


V. • 





‘ i,*- ^ * 



"U - \ 

% » w 


t ‘t 

^J: 


♦« 







* • -j 


'■ < j 

44 : 




* ••*'*»* 






K, 

?-,* .■**' i 
■ ***»>'^*-^ *■ 


% 






w‘ 




«'• 








i 


( • 


» 


t X 



i 





j I 


I 


I 


t 



1 


I 



f 


\ 





,-4 





> Af 


t 










THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 39 

When issues are made direct from the daily train, the 
same procedure will be followed as far as practicable and 
all supplies left over after actual issues will be taken in 
stock. 

Other Supplies: —Property pertaining to organiza¬ 
tions received at railhead from time to time will be taken 
charge of by the railhead officer. He will immediately no¬ 
tify the divisional officers, who will cause the same to be 
removed from railhead without delay. 

Checking Supplies :—An accurate check will be made 
of the contents of each car. When same do not agree with 
checker’s list found in car, a report will he made setting 
forth the discrepancies in detail. 

Warehouses and Open Storage: —All warehouses 
and open storage must be kept in orderly condition, well 
policed, and careful attention paid to fire prevention. The 
goods must be kept in orderly stacks. 

Stores stacked in the open should be protected by camou¬ 
flaged paulins and the stacks so arranged as to reduce their 
visibility to hostile air observers. 

Care of Forage:—F orage stacks should not exceed 
100,000 pounds weight. This method will increase number 
of stacks, facilitate prompt turnover and expedite taking 
of inventory. 

Stacks should be built with conical tops covered with 
weather-proof paulins, tied down with rope or weighted at 
bottoms. 

Hay and Grain: —All sack goods stored in the open 
should always be placed on dunnage, never on the bare 
ground. As additional protection, a paulin should be placed 
over the dunnage. 

Broken Packages: —All broken packages, including 
sack goods, should be promptly repaired. Open cases and 
packages must be kept in a separate enclosure to prevent 
waste or loss through pilfering. 

Care of Fresh Beef: —Fresh beef should be issued 
directly from the cars on track when practicable. When 
beef is received '‘soft” or shows signs of deterioration, sacks 
should be removed, the bad parts trimmed away, the beef 
re-wrapped in clean sacks and issued immediately. Supply 


40 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


officers should be informed of the condition of the meat and 
requested to expedite its movement. 

Care of Bread: —Fresh bread must be kept in clean, 
well ventilated warehouses. Loaves should always rest on 
the edges and not be laid flat, either in storage or in transit. 
Where bread racks are not available, bread should be 
stacked in compact piles, not to exceed seven or eight tiers 
in height. In case of mould, all infected bread should be 
segregated promptly. 

Note :—All supplies longest on hand must be issued first, especially perishable 
articles such as beef, bread, fresh vegetables, etc. 

Responsibility: —The responsibility for all supplies 
received at railhead rests with the railhead officer. 

Records: —Accurate records, showing receipts, issues 
and disposition of all supplies received at railheads must be 
kept. 

Car Records :—Records will also be kept of the arrival 
and dispatch of all cars showing car numbers, dates of ar¬ 
rivals, departures and contents of same. 

Reports: —Daily reports are made to the regulating 
officer by telephone. These include actual stock on hand of 
each item of Class I supplies, including fuel, forage, 
gasoline and oil; also clothing; the amount of issues 
for the day; any other information or unusual conditions 
of interest to the regulating officer. Ten-day reports must 
be made in writing, based on actual inventories, or stock- 
age. Also regular personnel reports as called for, stating 
the duties of each officer and man. Any changes in per¬ 
sonnel must be promptly reported by telegraph. All im¬ 
portant telephone messages should be confirmed by wire or 
writing. 

Sales Units :—In the sales commissary reports to the 
railhead officer, the locality, routes and hours of business 
will be fixed by the railhead officer upon consultation with 
the division authorities. In case the sales unit reports 
direct to the division, the responsibility of the railhead offi¬ 
cer regarding this unit will cease. 

Salvage Units: —All property salvaged which is in 
serviceable condition will be turned in to the railhead for 
re-issue, and, if the property is in excess of requirements, 


THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 41 

will be shipped to proper depot by the railhead officer. Un¬ 
serviceable property or clothing to be renovated will be dis¬ 
posed of in accordance with orders issued from time to time 
by the salvage department. Salvage units will make stated 
trips throughout the area occupied by divisions, and will 
bring to the railhead for assorting and for further dis¬ 
position all property thus obtained. 

Clothing Squad: —Duties of the clothing squad will 
be the care of the reserve stock of clothing maintained at 
railhead, the issue of same on emergency demand, and the 
replenishment of clothing of field hospitals and at the bath¬ 
ing and delousing plants. 

Bathing and Delousing Plants: —The personnel of 
these plants are charged with the operation of the same at 
such times and places within the divisional areas as may be 
determined by the divisional authorities. The clothing of 
all men visiting these plants will be sterilized and a clean 
suit of underwear and socks issued to each man. The outer 
clothing, if serviceable, will be re-issued to the owner; such 
articles which are unserviceable will be replaced by ser¬ 
viceable articles. Articles so issued will be automatically 
replaced from the railhead stocks. 

Soiled but serviceable underwear will be turned over 
to the salvage officer for shipment to designated laundries. 

All unserviceable articles will be turned in to the sal¬ 
vage officer. 


CL/tSS 1 CHART OF SUPPLY 

(00 amendfdl) 


Rfftfulsihons sl^oivn 
0/7 fhis stcfe. 





tr---©=^ 


Adv 

Depot 


Supply rouie on 
Hnis jfUe. 


L£0€ND 

HahonSf Forage refurn 
Slren^lh rap or! — 

Floiv of supply _ 

R H is Ratih i. i 
R S Is RegulalingStahon. 

CLASS 1. 

Ralions 

Forage 

Fuel 

Gasoline 

Lubricanfs 

llluminanls, eh. 


Hg CZ main fains fhedepofs 















THEATER OF OPERATIONS FOR SUPPLY 


43 


CLASS mis cHAnr of supply 

(CO as amended.) 


Peauisitions shown 
on This side. 


Supply rouie on 
L/tts side 


Balance of re^uisihon offer 
issue from supply. 


Balance of requtsfion after 
issue from depoh 

If Class IT or Class HT I 
supplies are not in Army Depots'' 
fhe route of reefuisriion ismodifie<)\ 
to fhafeedenf. I 


LEGEND 

Requisition _ 

Flow of supply _ 

R H IS Railhead. 

RS is Regulafini^ Station 


CLASSJT. 

Clothing,blankets, overcoats, 
slickers,ponchos, bed sacks, 
brassards. 

CLASSm. 

AH of her authorized articles 
of equipment ezcept ammumt- 


'iT 


Hq CZ maintains the depots 


















44 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


* 

CLAJS JZ ChAR T OF SUPPUT 

'OO ajamended) 
























CHAPTER II 


Supply of an Expeditionary Army 


25. PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE OR¬ 
GANIZATION OF THE COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

Assuming that an army has been or is being organized, 
that it is to be transported to an overseas port or ports, 
and that a port of debarkation or base port has to be 
organized, we are confronted with the problem of the com¬ 
munications zone. In other words, the communications 
zone with all of its various activities must be established. 

After a temporary organization of the communications 
zone headquarters, the next problem involves preparation at 
the base port for the reception of troops, camps for the 
troops and hospitalization, reception of supplies, and the 
storage, transportation and distribution of same to the 
army. 

In establishing the port, here are a few points to con¬ 
sider : 

First. Study the port facilities and determine three 
main points: 

(a) What new facilities will have to be installed so the port 
can accommodate the expedition? 

(b) What personnel, materiel and facilities will be needed 
to operate the port? 

(c) What personnel, material and facilities will be needed to 
clear the port, that is, keep the docks, etc., clear for automatic 
use? 

Second. What quantity of supplies of all classes will be 
needed automatically and periodically? What reserve of 
supplies will be needed ? 

Third. What storage facilities will be required ? Loca¬ 
tion ? Personnel ? 

Fourth. What railroads will be operated? What con¬ 
structed? What railroad personnel, material and facilities 
will be needed? 

Fifth. What camps for troops and what hospitals will 
be needed? 

45 



46 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Sixth. How will the system of command and adminis¬ 
tration of the communications zone be organized ? 

All of the foregoing must be based on a study of the 
actual conditions. Past campaigns will be a guide, but only 
a thorough study of the situation at the particular port and 
between there and the ultimate objective will give sound 
conclusions upon which to base the organization of the com¬ 
munications zone. 

26. PERSONNEL FOR COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

It is impossible to assume beforehand that we will have 
in the supply service any certain conditions to meet. If we 
knew beforehand where the theater of operations was to be 
located, we could make a survey of the facilities and agencies 
in the area which could be used for the storage and dis¬ 
tribution of supplies. 

We could make an organization, assign the troops, and 
allot the material and equipment that would be required. 

Again we could assume a situation and build upon paper 
a supply service, which would take care of the given forces, 
to be used under the assumptions made. Neither of these 
will exactly meet the general case, however, which is an 
unknown situation in an unknown theater of war. 

Nevertheless we have learned from our experiences that 
the nearest estimate, or approximation, which can be made 
in supplying personnel for operation of the communica¬ 
tions zone is to assume that in any case it will take one man 
in the communications zone to look after three or four in 
the combat forces. 

Therefore for a force of 100,000 men we estimate that 
about 30,000 men will be required in the supply services 
distributed about as follows: 


Location 

Base Sections (probably two) . 

Advance Section _ __ 

Headquarters - _ _ - 

Depots and Casuals - 

Elsewhere _ - 


Officers 

_430 

_270 

-170 

-270 

_510 

Men 

8070 

4470 

670 

6070 

10070 


Total_ 

-1650 

28350 


The commanding general, communications zone, will 
have to make such assignments and transfers as may be 
necessary. 









SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 41 

He would allot the forces under his charge in the man¬ 
ner best suited to the conditions and for the purposes for 
which they could be most advantageously used. 

27. RESERVE SUPPLY OF ALL MATERIAL IN THE 
COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

From our experiences in The World War there was 
maintained in France a 90 days' reserve of all supplies for 
the American Expeditionary Forces distributed as follows: 

Forty-five days’ supply near base ports. 

Thirty days’ supply in the intermediate section. 

Fifteen days’ supply in the advance section. 

This supply was based upon 30 pounds per man per 
day, and the amount decided upon was adopted as a measure 
of safety against submarine and other losses. When the 
submarine menace was overcome, the required reserve was 
reduced to 45 days, which was distributed proportionately 
as above. 

A diagram attached to this pamphlet illustrates the 
sources of these supplies, the amounts to be maintained and 
where kept, the method of storage and distribution and by 
whom controlled (see diagram illustrating the flow of sup¬ 
plies in the American Expeditionary Forces). 

27i. STORAGE SPACE REQUIRED FOR RESERVE SUP¬ 
PLIES IN THE COMMUNICATIONS ZONE 

In order to house the 90 days' reserve supply for the 
American Expeditionary Forces in France it was estimated 
that covered storage space of 21 square feet per man would 
be required. Later experience, however, proved that many 
goods could be stored in the open under tarpaulins without 
serious injury and this figure was reduced to 9 square feet 
per man. 

This amount was for storage of reserve only and did 
not include space required for storage of materials in tran¬ 
sit through ports, nor that for goods intended for local con¬ 
sumption. Later when the reserve supplies were cut to 45 
days, the necessary covered storage was reduced to 4.5 
square feet per man. 


48 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


28. AMERICAN ESTIMATE OF POUNDAGE PER MAN 

PER DAY 

Fifty pounds of cargo per day was taken as a basis 
for computing tonnage requirements. This means that 21- 
tons of cargo shipping must be in continuous operation for 
each soldier maintained abroad. 

A 10,000-ton cargo ship will maintain 4,000 men, or 
250,000 tons of cargo shipping will maintain a force of 
100,000 men. 

The following estimate, based upon our experience in 
The World War, is believed to be of value, inasmuch as it 
may be used as a guide in future in making similar calcula¬ 
tions : 

AMERICAN ESTIMATE OF POUNDAGE PER MAN 
PER DAY 

Estimate 30 pounds per man per day. 


Food from table 3971, p. 602 Q.M. 

Manual—gross wgt. _ 4.9 

Hay 14 lbs. per horse 
(per day—1 horse) 

. (per 7 men) _'_ 2. 

Oats 12 lbs. per horse per day_ 1.72 

Extra rations, sales articles, clothing, equipment, etc_ 1.76 

10.37 lbs. 

Approximate total _ 10.60 

Ordnance and ammunition _12.60 

Medical supplies _ .35 

Postal, R. C., Y. M. C. A., etc. _ .65 

Gas Service _ .50 

Signal Corps _ .60 

Engineers _ 3.60 

Motor Transport - 1.00 

Air Service _ .60 


30.00 lbs. 

In addition to above, estimated requirement for in¬ 
stallation construction, rolling stock contingencies as fol¬ 
lows : 

Basis of calculation of pounds per man per day. 

(a) Initial supply: 

1. For each man: 

Food- 7.5 lbs. (includes 60 per cent w^astage) 

Fuel - .6 

Sales stores _ .6 

Y. M. C. A. - .5 (Takes place of exchange) 

Red Cross_ .6 

Clothing _ .6 

Equipment _ .6 


Total .. 10.6 lbs___10.6 

2. For each animal: 

Food -25.1 lbs. 

Equipment __ .6 


25.5 

Proportion of 1 animal to 7 men_3,6 

14.1 lbs.14.1 lbs. 





























SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


49 


3. Ammunition supply: 

Small arms, grenades, etc, _ 2 lbs. 

Artillery, based on 10 rounds per gun per day 
at 50 lbs. per round and 8 guns for 1000 
men (10 X 50 X 8 -i- 1000) _ 4 lbs. 

4. Replacement of artillery _16 lbs. 

Based on 25 per cent loss p^r year (8 guns 
per 1000 men and 4 tons per gun). 

5. Engineer, »Signal, Aviation, Medical, etc., equip¬ 

ment - .5 lbs. 

6. Replacement of animals, vehicles, etc. _ 3.5 lbs. 


Based on 50 per cent loss (one animal to 7 
men, 9 shipping tons per animal, 9 X 
^000 X 50 per cent 7 365). 

7. Initial R. R. rolling stock, repair and construc- 
. tion material, also dock construction and 

operation material, estimated _10.1 lbs. 36.1 lbs. 


50.2 lbs. 

(b) Reserve supply: 

Following deductions from table above: 

Item 3—Ammunition supply : 

Reserve is accumulated gradually—S.A_ 1 lb. 

Artillery Am_ 2 lbs. 

Item 4—Replacement Artillery : 

(Reserve replacement is gradual)_10 lbs. 

Item 6—Replacement animals (reserve 

gradual) - 2.5 lbs. 

Item 7—Initial construction, etc. _ 5. lbs. 20.5 lbs. 


29.7 lbs. 

Approximate total 30 lbs. 

29. BRITISH ESTIMATE OF POUNDAGE PER MAN PER 
DAY 

It will be seen from the following estimate that the 
British calculations were very similar to our own: 

BRITISH ESTIMATE OF POUNDAGE PER MAN PER DAY 



July-Sept. 

July-Sept. 


1017 

1918 

Ammunition . _ __ 

_ 6.32 

9.77 

Supplies _ _ 

_ 9.25 

9.31 

Timber_ 

_ 2,19 

.59 

Coal _ _ 

_ 2.23 

4.40 

Railway Material _ 

_ 1.89 

.57 

Road Material _ 

_ 1.32 

.11 

R. E. Stores _ 

. 1.15 

1.36 

Ordnance Stores _ 

_ 1.68 

1.70 

M. T. _ 

.14 

.05 

Tanks__ _ 

.14 

.18 

Aircraft Stores _ 

_ .16 

.10 

F F r. 

.32 

.87 

Miscellaneous _ 

_ .43 

.54 

Mails and Pouch _ 

. .13 

.25 


27.35 lbs. 

29.30 lbs. 

TRANSPORTATION 

PRINCIPLES 

FOR A LARGE 


OPERATION 

In a large war operation the considerable concentra¬ 
tion of troops in a comparatively confined area and the neces¬ 
sity of providing them in time with large supplies of ra¬ 
tions, ammunition and materiel requires first, the organi¬ 
zation, second, the development, and finally the co-ordination 






























50 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


of all the various means of transportation, together with 
the supply services and evacuation. 

The conduct of an offensive operation or of a defensive 
battle requires: 

(a) During the preparatory period, the building up of 
important stocks of rations, ammunition, and artillery and 
engineer materiel, requires reinforcement in personnel, and 
this personnel has to be detailed to the various railheads, 
depots, parks and dumps; a thorough organization of 
the clearing stations with the requisite means of trans¬ 
portation is also to be thought of. 

(b) During the period of execution and evacuation in¬ 
tensive currents of transportation are liable to last for a 
long time. It is difficult to give exact figures with regard 
to evacuation, but for the supplies the daily requirements 
of an army of 500,000 men may be reckoned as: 

2,500 tons for rations. 

6,000 tons for ammunition. 

500 tons for artillery material. 

' 2,000 tons for road ballast materials. 

It is, therefore, vital to develop to the utmost all means 
of transportation. Railways are the quickest of all and have 
the greatest carrying capacity. Motor transport is easy 
and fairly fast, but it requires a great many trucks for a 
given tonnage and it means heavy expenditure of gasoline. 
As for horse transport it is slow and cannot be used for 
long distances. 

The conclusion is that any army cannot live or fight 
without a complete railway system {broad gauge and even¬ 
tually metric gauge with narrow gauge lines to prolong it). 

The following principles should he remembered : 

First: Railways are absolutely necessary for all large 
operations; they must follow the troops as they progress. 
It is an essential thing to build the broad gage line as far 
as the area actually under shell fire, and to have narrow 
gage extensions (60-cm. and then 40-cm.) pushed as far 
forward as possible. 

Second: The organization of large railheads provided 
with numerous sidings with big reloading yards and spacious 
areas for the dumping of stores, material and ammunition, 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


51 


is equally necessary for the regular operation of transpor¬ 
tation. 

Third: In order to insure that the troops actually en¬ 
gaged in the battle are provided with supplies coming 
regularly to the railheads, the army commander must, 
through G4, army, supervise all the transportation and cir¬ 
culation between railheads and the first line trenches. 

Fourth: When an army has to carry out either a large 
offensive or defensive operation it is of vital importance that 
reserves of motor transport should be kept available for 
the unexpected movement of large units, for the supply of 
troops, for the movement of emergency material or for 
evacuation in case the railway line is temporarily broken. 

Fifth: The success of a large offensive operation de¬ 
pends largely upon its thorough preparation. Such a pre¬ 
paration is the duty of the officers of the staff; they must, 
whatever their particular job may be (operations, intelli¬ 
gence, supply branches), work in close co-operation and 
carry out their duties as if the battle is to last several 
months. 

31. SUPPLY SYSTEM TO BE EMPLOYED FOR AN EX¬ 
PEDITIONARY ARMY 

When an army invades hostile territory the supplies 
for the army might be provided by the following methods: 

(a) By transporting all supplies by water from home ports. 

(b) By utilizing the local resources of the invaded country. 

There are four methods of utilizing the local resources 
of the country: 

1. By billeting or quartering the troops upon the inhabitants. 

2. By contributions levied upon the country. 

3. By making requisition for such supplies as are required 
to satisfy the wants of an army. 

4. By foraging upon the country, or the collection of supplies 
found therein by the troops themselves. 

The method of supply to be adopted upon the invasion 
of a hostile country is prescribed by the war office of the 
invading army, and the commanding general of the forces 
in the field should have explicit instructions in the event 
that the resources of the country are to be utilized. 


52 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Diagram Illustrating 

Tee Flow op sufpuies 

LN THE 

American Expeditionary Forces _ 

Requisition on U.Siby CG. ^ 


45 level | 



1- —=-==r-- •— -—'*^1 

F — ^i^^-Oepo+ - 


? /TT" 

Porcha'se»m France 
by G PA foVCG C Z. 



Isi'AEMY 


. - - ^ '2^Ajro^^ DEE^CBED UNITS 

B-Railhead*. Points at which supplies are delivered to Organizationa 

































































SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


63 


The problem of utilizing the resources of the country 
involves: 

1. A preliminary study of the resources of the country, 
which includes the annual production, the time of harvest, amount 
of exportation and importation, the manufactured products, and 
the amount of supplies consumed by the inhabitants. 

2. The possibility of directly securing the supplies. 

3. The facilities for using the supplies to the best advantage. 

4. A careful administrative reconnaissance of the country, 
examination of statistics, or, in the absence of statistics, making 
an approximate estimate of the production and the average yield. 

5. A careful comparison of the resources with the necessities 
to be provided for. 

6. Time available for the collection of the local resources. 

The method of utilizing the resources of the country, 
whether by billeting, contributions, requisitions or foraging, 
having been determined, it then becomes necessary to pre¬ 
scribe in orders how the details of the adopted method shall 
be carried out. Each corps might be directed to procure its 
own supplies, or the army undertake the procurement of the 
local supplies and distribute them to all troops in the army, 
or the communications zone handle the entire question of 
supplies. 

This latter method would require careful organization 
and supervision by G4 of the communications zone, the es¬ 
tablishment of many depots, and the inauguration of a sup¬ 
ply system for the prompt delivery of supplies to all units. 

Bridgeheads are formed around the ports of debarka¬ 
tion and possession taken of the railroads leading therefrom 
into the interior of the hostile country. 

Supply depots are established in and around these ports, 
and as the army advances the necessary supplies are sent 
up to it at certain designated points direct from the depots 
at the ports through a regulating station. 

When the army advances to such a distance from the 
base ports that ammunition and emergency supplies can no 
longer reach it on short notice, it then becomes necessary 
to organize the forward area, or army area, for supply and 
evacuation. 

Army depots containing supplies pertaining to all the 
services then become necessary, and an evacuation system 
must be organized which will insure prompt removal of the 
sick and wounded to the base hospitals in the base section. 


54 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


32. ORGANIZATION OF ARMY AREA FOR SUPPLY 

In general G4 is responsible for supply, evacuation and 
road maintenance, and G1 enforces traffic control and circu¬ 
lation, and regulates military police, prisoners of war and 
captured material. 

The technical services operate directly under the dif¬ 
ferent branches of the G4 office. G4 prescribes fixed 
policies and outlines methods of procedure for the chief of 
each of these services. 

The army pioneer regiments and such labor troops as 
may have been assigned to the army by general headquarters 
are available for use by G4 in the organization of the army 
area for supply. These troops operate under the army en¬ 
gineer. The army trains are also under control of G4. 

33. DISTRIBUTION OF WORK OF ORGANIZATION OF 

AN ARMY AREA FOR SUPPLY 

G4, in consultation with the chief of staff, G1 and G3, 
prepares a plan of organization of the army area "which is 
usually submitted to the chief of staff in the form of an 
annex to accompany the army field order. This plan is 
nothing more than an army administrative order and in¬ 
cludes the location of all railheads, ammunition depots, sup¬ 
ply depots for all of the services, road maintenance, evacua¬ 
tion establishments and plans traffic circulation. Military 
police, prisoners of war and captured material are usually- 
handled in a separate annex prepared by G1 of the army, 
but will be included as a part of the army administrative 
order. 

In preparing the G4 plan, G4 calls a conference of the 
chief of army artillery, commander, army service area, and 
the chiefs of services, explains to them the decision of the 
army commander, and gives them a general outline of his 
(G4’s) plan for the organization of the army area. He 
directs these officers to make a study of the situation and 
submit to him their recommendations in the form of plans 
showing the location of the various establishments pertain¬ 
ing to their different services, the amount of supplies and 
material they propose to place therein and any pertinent in- 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 55 

structions which it is desired to communicate to the com¬ 
mand. 

The establishments to be located in the army area and 
the responsibility for the administration thereof are divided 
among the various services as follows: 

(a) Quartermaster: 

(1) Location of army supply depots, including personnel and 
amount and kind of supplies in general to be maintained therein. 

(b) Ordnance : 

(1) Location of army ordnance supply depots, including per¬ 
sonnel and amount and kind of supplies. 

(2) Technical ordnance personnel for the administration of 
army ammunition depots and corps parks. 

(3) Ordnance personnel for the ordnance reclamation ser¬ 
vice, including location of reclamation depots. 

(c) Chief of Army Artillery : 

(For responsibility for the supply of ammunition in a 
theater of operations see Ammunition Supply.) 

(d) Engineer: 

(1) Location of army engineer depots—amount and kind of 
material—personnel. 

(2) Assignment and supervision of work of labor troops— 
road maintenance and instructions for same. 

(e) Medical: 

(1) Location of army medical supply depots—amount of 
supplies—personnel. 

(2) Location of army evacuation hospitals, convalescent de¬ 
pots, and mobile surgical hospitals. 

(f) Signal Corps^ Motor Transport, Chemical Warfare 
Service and Air Service: 

Location of army supply depots—amount and kind of sup¬ 
plies—personnel. 

334 . PERTINENT POINTS CONCERNING ARMY DE¬ 
POTS. 

(a) Object of Army Depots: —Army depots are es¬ 
tablished at the beginning of the operation, to fill as far as 
possible the current needs of the troops. They constitute, 
in fact, an emergency reserve if we assume that troops 
enter the field properly equipped. It should not, therefore, 
be necessary to go further back than the army depots to 


56 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


fill current needs except for those supplies in which there is 
a shortage, that is, Class IV supplies, and which cannot be 
furnished to the army except in such quantities 'as may be 
necessary to meet the most urgent needs thereof. The 
above cannot be accepted as a rigid rule, however, as the 
quantity and character of supplies maintained in army 
depots depends upon many conditions. . 

(b) Amount of Supplies Maintained Thereat:— 
Bearing in mind that the functions of all supply establish¬ 
ments, from division dumps to base depots, is primarily to 
provide an emergency reserve of materials for the further¬ 
ance of operations, increasing in size from front to rear for 
this purpose, the principle that determines the amount of 
supplies to be maintained in army depots is that such sup¬ 
plies must be sufficient to meet such needs as determine the 
probable requirements of the several supply services. These 
are based upon the mission of the force, its size, the charac¬ 
ter of the theater of operations, availability of supplies 
within the theater of operations, and the state of availability 
of all supplies available to the army from the home country 
or the lines of communication. For example, if the mission 
of the army is an offensive one and the operations take 
place in a theater devoid of wire communications, the rela¬ 
tive requirements of signal supplies will be large. No fixed 
rule can be given; but as a general rule it is believed that, 
if possible, each service (except the Ordnance Department, 
as far as concerns ammunition) should be required to main¬ 
tain in its army depots supplies equal to a complete re¬ 
plenishment or replacement of one-third of the correspond¬ 
ing equipment in the army. 

As to ammunition, the reserve maintained in army de¬ 
pots is impossible of determination by any general rule. It 
is determined absolutely by the availability of supply, the 
amount of artillery with the army, the calibers thereof, 
and the mission of the force, though normally there should 
be maintained within the army an amount of ammunition 
equal to that carried in the combined combat trains of the 
division and corps artillery, plus two days of fire for the 
army artillery. For example, if the division carries in its 
combat train or division dump one day of fire for its artil- 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


57 


lery, and the corps carries in its combat train or corps park 
one day of fire for the corps artillery, the army should carry 
in its trains or depots artillery ammunition to an amount 
equal to the total for the corps and divisions plus the amount 
of infantry ammunition carried in the combat trains of the 
corps and divisions plus two days of fire for the army artil¬ 
lery. The minimum requirements of the army depots, there¬ 
fore, should he an amount sufficient to replenish or refill the 
combat train of the corps and division troops. 

(c) Location of Depots: —The relative importance 
of the several services and establishments, such as an am¬ 
munition depot or an evacuation hospital, are determined by 
the character of the operations and the railroad and road 
network both to the front and to the rear. Each chief of 
service should, after reconnaissance, recommend the location 
or locations for his depots or establishments, but final de¬ 
termination as to their location, based upon their recom¬ 
mendations and requirements of the operation, are made 
by G4, that is, by the army commander. This decision by 
G4 is, as can readily be seen, absolutely essential and is 
final; but after the decision has been made and the chief 
of service concerned informed, the details as to establish¬ 
ment and stocking are the functions of the chief of service 
under the supervision of G4. 

The requirements of the location of an army depot are 
dependent upon the character of supplies, such as ammuni¬ 
tion, engineer, medical, etc., the tactical situation and the 
terrain. The primary consideration is that the location 
should be such as to admit of ready access from the rear 
by railroad if possible, otherwise by road; ready access to and 
from the front and such as to fit into the circulation re¬ 
quirements and admit of the issue of supplies by wagon or 
truck without congestion either within the depot or on the 
roads leading into it from the front and rear. These con¬ 
ditions should be met by the establishment of several depots 
of the same service, if necessary, rather than attempting 
to concentrate all of the same class of supplies in one local¬ 
ity. The needs of the troops are paramount and all details 
of the supply system must be such as to meet these needs 
if possible, with the least inconvenience to the troops. 


58 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The distance from the front is a consideration, and it is 
believed our experience in France enables us to fix the dis¬ 
tances of an evacuation hospital from the front as not less 
than 15 miles, and an advance ammunition depot not less 
than 12 miles; depots for other classes of supplies, if possi¬ 
ble, to be within these limits. Secondary locations for all 
depots should be always selected to enable prompt re-estab¬ 
lishment in case of destruction or loss by shell fire or bomb¬ 
ing. 

(d) Personnel at Depots:— A technical force suffi¬ 
cient to supervise the receipt, issue, care, maintenance, 
and accounting for supplies. Unskilled labor is provided 
as indicated below- This is a matter solely within the 
responsibility of the chief of the service concerned. 

Labor troops or pioneer infantry are placed at the dis¬ 
position of the army by higher authority. An approximate 
number for each depot cannot be given, but these troops 
must be sufficient to provide for the prompt unloading of 
supplies received at the depot, for the prompt loading and 
issuing of supplies sent forward to the troops, and for the 
care and maintenance of supplies in the depot. The num¬ 
ber in any one depot will vary from time to time during 
the operations. During the Meuse-Argonne operation we 
had one complete regiment of pioneer infantry in our am¬ 
munition depots as labor troops. The condition of the ac¬ 
tion required a constant shifting from one depot to another 
to meet the constantly varying requirements of the several 
depots as the advance progressed, caused by the abandon¬ 
ment and reduced use of some and the construction qf new 
depots nearer the front. 

The experience of the French shows the following labor 
required at ammunition depots: 

Skilled labor, 1 man per 4 tons per day. 

Unskilled or ordinary labor, 1 man per 2 tons per day. 

34. ESTIMATE OF TONNAGE 

In directing the chiefs of services to submit plans for 
their respective services, G4 furnishes them certain data 
upon which they can estimate the amount of supplies to 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


59 


be placed in the army depots. It has been found from the 
experience of the British and American armies in The World 
War that to maintain an army in the field it requires a 
daily shipment of approximately 30 pounds per man per 
day. This amount covers all supplies and is based on the 
following figures: 


„ . Article Pounds 

Rations __3 75 

Clothing and equipment_ 1.75 

Ordnance and ammunition _12.00 

Medical _ .35 

Engineer - IIIIIIII 3!50 

Motor Transport_ 1.00 

Signal - ‘.50 

Gas service _ .50 

Air service_ .60 

Welfare and mails_ .55 


Total_29.50 or 30 lbs. 


Knowing the strength of the army and making use of 
the foregoing as a guide, G4 can prepare a schedule which 
will furnish an estimate of the amount of supplies to be 
transported daily by rail to the army depots. The army 
depot for quartermaster supplies will not include rations 
and forage. The foregoing depends entirely, of course, 
upon how the army depots are to be used. If they are to 
be used as regular supply depots to fill current requisitions, 
then they should be maintained at the same level of supply 
at all times, which will mean daily shipment of supplies to 
them from the communications zone. If, however, they are 
to be stocked and held as reserve depots to serve the troops 
in emergency during an offensive, then the daily shipment 
of supplies to them from the rear will not be necessary. 
When the latter method is employed G4 usually designates 
an approximate amount of supplies to be kept on hand in the 
depots at all times, and when supplies are issued from the 
depots they are immediately replaced by requisitions 
through the regulating officer on the communications zone 
depots under a policy prescribed by G4. 

The amount of ammunition in the ammunition depots 
is regulated entirely by the daily expenditures and on the 
daily G4 allocation to the corps based on the daily expendi¬ 
tures. 














60 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


35. PLANS SUBMITTED BY CHIEFS OF SERVICES 

In preparing for an offensive the chief of staff calls upon 
the chiefs of the general staff sections and the chiefs of ser¬ 
vices for plans covering the operations of their sections 
and services respectively. These plans are often divided into 
two parts, one part pertaining to the preparation for the 
offensive and the other part relating to operations to be 
carried out after the offensive has begun. 

The services controlled by G1 and G4 submit their 
plans to these staff officers for approval and final action by 
the chief of staff. The plans when approved may be issued 
independently of the G1 or G4 plan as annexes to the army 
field order for the offensive, or they may be included in 
the G1 or G4 administrative order as a part of that order or 
as annexes attached to it. 

The ‘‘Plan of Ammunition Supply” and “Plan of Sup¬ 
plies” included in this chapter are illustrations of the plans 
called for by the chief of staff. 

The following additional plans, in which Gl> and G4 
are interested, might be required by the chief of staff of 
the army: 

(1) Plan of engineers. 

(2) Plan of circulation and evacuation of prisoners (this 

plan will be included in the administrative order). 

These are two very important plans and should be pre¬ 
pared well in advance of the proposed operations. The 
Plan of Engineers is prepared by the chief engineer of the 
army and submitted to G4 for approval and transmittal to 
the chief of staff. 

As the advance progresses changes in these plans 
would be made from time to time as the situation required, 
by issuing from the army headquarters memoranda pre¬ 
pared by the staff section or service concerned. Such memo¬ 
randa might include designation of the time when certain 
sections of roads would be closed for repairs, prescribing 
traffic circulation on certain roads taken over in the enemy’s 
territory, time sections of reserved roads would be extended, 
etc. 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


61 


These memoranda would also cover such matters as 
changes in the rear boundary of the corps; additional in¬ 
structions, when necessary, for assistant provost marshals 
of corps and divisions, with reference to traffic control, 
etc.; movement of establishments; warnings about move¬ 
ment of troops and trains across certain areas; and any 
other matters that could not be foreseen in preparing the 
original plans. 

These memoranda from the army are given the same 
distribution as are the field orders and annexes. 

36. FORM FOR PLAN OF SUPPLIES (FOR AN OFFEN¬ 
SIVE) 

First Blue Army, 

(Place) 

(Date) 

From: AC of S, G 4 . 

To: Commanding General, I, II and III Corps, CO, Army 

Service Area, all Commanding Officers, Army Troops. 
Subject : Supplies. 

1 . There have been established in the army area the following depots: 

Engineer—Material and supplies which are furnished upon 
request approved by corps engineer or G 1 cavalry divi¬ 
sion. 

Signal—Material and supplies furnished upon request ap¬ 
proved by corps signal officers, or G 1 1 st Cavalry Divi¬ 
sion or G 4 these headquarters for army troops. 

Medical—Supplies furnished upon request approved by corps 
surgeon, G 1 1 st Cavalry Division or chief surgeon at 
these headquarters for army troops. 

Motor Transport—Spare parts, supplies and repairs fur¬ 
nished upon written request approved by G1 corps or 
division and chief motor transport officer these head¬ 
quarters for army troops. 

Ordnance—Spare parts, for guns, small arms, automatic 
weapons and individual equipment furnished upon re¬ 
quest approved by corps ordnance officer, G 1 1 st Cav¬ 
alry Division or brigade commanders for army troops. 

Quartermaster—Equipage (less rations), spare transporta¬ 
tion and harness with spare parts and material for re¬ 
pairs of same, and clothing, furnished upon requisition 
approved by G1 corps or division and proper command¬ 
ing officer for army troops. 

Chemical Warfare—Defensive supplies and material of all 
kinds which are furnished upon request approved by 
corps chemical warfare officer, or G1 cavalry division. 

All requests for supplies or material from above depots when 
approved as indicated will be honored at proper depots. Whenever 
possible, corps and division chiefs of services will consolidate re¬ 
quests and requisitions, thereby reducing the amount of work at 


62 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


depots in which personnel is limited. In case supplies are not fur¬ 
nished on request, the organization affected will report the fact to 
this office. 

By command of Lieutenant General X, 

• ^ 4 . 

Copies to; 

CG all Divisions. “ 

CG Army Artillery. _ , . ; 

CG Brigades Army Artillery. 

Chief of Services, Army Staff. 

37. FORM FOR PLAN OF AMMUNITION SUPPLY (FOR 
AN OFFENSIVE) 

. First Blue Army, 

(Place) 

(Date) 


From: G 4 , First Blue Army. 

To: Commanding General, I, II and III Corps and Army Ar¬ 

tillery. 

Subject: Plan of Ammunition Supply for the Army Corps operating 
under the orders of the, Fii:st Blue Army. 

1. The First Blue Army will have under its control the following de¬ 

pots for ammunition: 

Name of Depot , . Code Kind of Ammunition 

Contained Therein 

2. The administration of the army depots is under the Chief Ordnance 

Officer, First Blue Army. 

3. Administration signifies: 

(a) Upkeep of the roads in the depots. 

(b) Proper protection and camouflage of ammunition. 

(c) Administrative work in connection with personnel. 

4. The location of new army ammunition depots will be the duty 

of the chief of artillery, in consultation with G4, First Army, and 
will be in accordance with contemplated operations (G3, First 
Army). 

The amount of ammunition to be kept at the batteries, in the 
corps parks and in the depots is determined by the chief of 
artillery in consultation with G3. 

5. The ordering into and the stocking of the army depots is solely 

under the jurisdiction of G4, First Army, who is entirely responsi¬ 
ble that the proper amounts are kept therein. The issuing out of 
ammunition from these army depots can only be done with the 
authority of G4, First Army, except in the case where a credit may 
be established at any army depot for an army corps. In the 
latter case the army corps may draw upon its credit to the 
limit of said credit without consultation with G4, First Army. 

6. The corps may be authorized by the army to establish corps parks. 
■ The ammunition placed in these parks will be entirely at the 

disposition of the corps which is responsible for the proper 
care of the ammunition. This ammunition will be accounted 
for daily on the report (situation) submitted by the corps, and 
will be entered under the heading “Corps Parks.” 

In case of'an advance, the ammunition still remaining in these 
''' ’parka will be"carried" forward by the means at the disposal of 

. . .-r-, - ... 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


63 


the corps, before the corps makes any further demands for am¬ 
munition upon the army. Should this be impossible (owing to 
the withdrawal from action of certain calibers or lack of trans¬ 
portation facilities) the corps will make known to G4, First Army 
the amount of ammunition remaining in the parks. 

The same rules apply to the ammunition remaining behind 
at the battery emplacements. 

During the advance it will very likely not be possible for the 
army to establish quickly depots in the new zone. The ammuni¬ 
tion will be transported by the means at the disposal of the 
corps from the old battery emplacements and from the original 
army depots up to the new points of delivery, which points the 
corps may have to choose each day according to circumstances. 

7. A credit will be established by G4, First Army in certain depots 

(to be designated later) for each army corps. This credit has 
no limit as regards time, once given to a corps, it remains at 
its disposition until such time as the corps sees fit to remove it 
from the army depot. The corps will assign one officer or one 
responsible noncommissioned officer, who is thoroughly conver¬ 
sant with ammunition, to each army depot at which said corps 
has a credit. It will be the duty of this officer or noncommissioned 
officer to keep the corps munitions officer daily informed as to 
the status of the corps credit. In other words, this officer or non¬ 
commissioned officer is the information agent between the com¬ 
manding officer of the army depot an*d the corps munitions offi¬ 
cer. 

In general the credits are given by G4, First Army, without 
any demand on part of the corps, by reference to the daily report 
(situation), the expenditures, and the amount of ammunition to 
be kept at the disposition of the corps according to the orders 
of the commanding general of the army. 

Nevertheless, the corps is authorized to make requests for 
ammunition upon the army whenever it may deem necessary. 

The corps is advised of its credit by telephone or telegraph. 
If necessary it may make its demands for ammunition at the same 
time as it sends the telegram or telephone message of expen¬ 
ditures. 

8. The total amount of ammunition which will be in the sector 

(including that carried in the combat and ammunition trains) 
at the beginning of the contemplated operation is as follows: 

(a) At the batteries, as directed by the corps. 

(b) Within the corps, 2h days of fire for all calibers, including 

amount at the batteries. 

(c) At the army depots, I day of fire for all calibers. 

Supply of Ammunition 

9. The supply of ammunition to the army artillery, corps parks, to 

the divisional rendezvous point and to the batteries themselyes 
will be entirely dependent upon the individual problems which 
may arise during the course of operations. The First Army has 
a certain number of trucks at its disposition and it is needless 
to say that these trucks will be used to the limit for getting up 
ammunition to the troops. The responsibility for getting ammu¬ 
nition forward (from the army depots, the corps parks or the 
divisional rendezvous points), rests upon the army artillery, as 
far as the units are concerned which are under the immediate 
and direct tactical orders of the army artillery commander. This 
will be effected by the army artillery park. For the units under 
the immediate and direct tactical control of the corps this will be 
effected by the corps artillery park and the divisional ammuni- 


64 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


tion train. This does not prevent the army artillery or the various 
corps from calling on the army for aid in transporting ammuni¬ 
tion forward. 

Supply by 60-cm. Railroad 

10. The 60-centimeter railroad will give priority to ammunition ship¬ 
ments above all other shipments. The 60-centimeter is now be¬ 
ing used to feed all the corps parks, and as many of the battery 
positions as it is now possible to reach. When the advance 
commences, and the batteries move forward, it will be no longer 
possible to feed them by 60-centimeter railroad. However, depots 
may be established by the army at the ends of the leads of the 
60-centimeter, and ammunition will have to be shipped forward 
by trucks from these depots to the rendezvous points or to the 
batteries themselves. 


Daily Reports 

11. Reports will be submitted daily by each battery to the battalion. 
The report will go from battalion to regiment, regiment to bri¬ 
gade, and brigade (G4 in case of divisions) to the corps muni¬ 
tions officer. These reports will close at 6:00 PM. The expendi¬ 
tures, closed at 6:00 PM, will be telephoned-from the battery 
to the battalion, and so on upwards. Each higher command will 
in turn consolidate this telephonic* report, and the corps muni¬ 
tions officer will telephone the final consolidated report of ex¬ 
penditures (for the batteries under the direct tactical orders of 
the corps) to G4, First Army before 10:00 PM. The artillery units, 
which are under the immediate and direct tactical orders of the 
army artillery commander, will telephone their expenditures to 
the army artillery munitions officer (at army artillery headquar¬ 
ters), who will consolidate reports in like manner and telephone 
the expenditures to G4, First Army, before 10:00 PM each day. 
For the units under the immediate and tactical orders of the corps, 
the written report (situation) will be submitted through the 
same channels as the telephonic reports. They will be collected 
by courier from corps headquarters the following morning when 
he makes his rounds of the various division or brigade headquar¬ 
ters. The corps munitions officers, and the army artillery muni¬ 
tions officer will send two copies of the situation to G4, First 
Army. These reports (situation) will be collected the following 
morning by the courier from army headquarters, and must ar¬ 
rive at G4, First Army, before noon. 

The army artillery commander is responsible for the submis¬ 
sion of the reports of the artillery units which are under his 
immediate and direct tactical command; the corps artillery 
commander for the corps artillery; and the brigade artillery com¬ 
mander for the divisional artillery. 

Attention is called to the fact that heretofore the daily reports 
have sometimes been neglected altogether, and at other times 
have been far from accurate. These ammunition reports are 
vital, and the necessity for an accurate report is evident. The 
reports from each battery will not only include the amounts on 
hand at the gun emjdacements, but also the amounts on hand at 
the battery echelon {including the combat trains). 

Ammunition Left Behind in Dumps and Battery 
Emplacements 

12. Orders will be issued by each corps and division commander 
designating one or more officers in the corps or division to 
look after the ammunition left behind in corps parks, divisional 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


66 


rendezvous or gun emplacements when the advance begins. This 
officer must know every emplacement and rendezvous and quan¬ 
tities of ammunition on hand therein. The corps and divisions 
will be responsible for moving forward ammunition from the 
corps parks or from the divisional rendezvous and gun emplace¬ 
ments. 

Ordering of Ammunition 

13. The army artillery munitions officer or the corps munitions offi¬ 
cers when submitting application for ammunition to G4, First 
Army, must give the following data: 

(a) Amount of ammunition necessary, by calibers. 

(b) Unit ammunition is to be shipped to. 

(c) If request for transportation from the army is made, the fol¬ 

lowing data must be given: 

1. Tonnage. 

2. Kind of ammunition to be transported. 

3. Method of transportation (60-cm. or truck). 

4. Place of loading (a corps may have a credit at various 

depots, in this case will wish to designate the particu¬ 
lar depot from which to draw the ammunition). 

5. Time at which transportation is desired at loading place. 

6. Destination of shipment. 

7. Unit ammunition is designed for. 

8. Exact place (a spot that cannot he mistaken) where the 

convoy (guide) will meet the 60-cm. or trucks to take 
them to their final destination. 

(d) All requests for transportation from the corps upon the 

army must be made before 4:00 PM each day to the muni¬ 
tions branch G4, First Army. 

(e) The army will telephone or telegraph the corps in answer 
to their demands, indicating: 

1. The hour of loading. 

2. Probable hour of departure from depot. 

3. Probable hour of arrival. 

4. The point to which the trucks or 60-cm. will be sent to 

meet the agent (convoy) from the corps. 

(f) Every requisition, whether wholly or partly filled, is con¬ 
sidered as liquidated. 

By command of Lieutenant General X: 

Y, 

G4. 

38. SUGGESTED LETTER OF INSTRUCTIONS TO COM¬ 
MANDER, ARMY SERVICE AREA 

First Blue Army, 

(Place) 

(Date) 

P'rom: AC of S, G4. 

To: Commander, Army Service Area. 

Subject: Instructions. 

1. Various instructions have been furnished you from time to time 

during the past two months relative to establishing and admin¬ 
istering the Army Service Area. The following is a resume of 
those instructions for your guidance in the future operations of 
the First Blue Army. 

2. The Army Service Area, First Blue Army, comprises, etc. (give 

limits). 


66 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


3. The regulating station for the First Blue Army is (place). 

In all matters relating to the location of railheads in the Army 
Service Area for the service of pioneer infantry and labor troops 
under your direct control, you are authorized to communicate 
direct with the regulating <>fficer. 

4. In general your duties will be as follows: 

(a) Conduct the military government of the Army Service Area. 

(b) Take charge of the exploitation of local resources and the 

distribution of the products thereof, should this method of sup¬ 
ply be adopted. 

(c) Supervise the relations between the forces of the First Blue 

Army and the civil population and the feeding of the civil 
population. 

(d) Regulate the use of special service troops and labor personnel 

placed at your disposal. 

(e) You are responsible for the administration, sanitation, dis¬ 

cipline and police of all troops located in the Army Service 
Area, except the administration of combat divisions and 
such other combat units as operate directly under the army 
artillery and air service commanders. However, this 
authority does not cover the technical employment and in¬ 
struction of any troops, unless specifically assigned to you 
for that purpose. 

(f) You are charged with the preparation and maintenance of 

billeting accommodations for all troops in the Army Service 
Area and the supervision of the establishment in billets of 
incoming troops. You will organize the billeting areas of 
the Army Service Area, bearing in mind the importance of 
locating them within easy reach of the main circulation routes 
and be prepared at all times to state what areas are avail¬ 
able. 

(g) Make suitable provisions of rations, forage, fuel, bedding and 

other supplies to meet the needs of troops ordered into the 
Army Service Area and particularly anticipate their demands 
for the first few days after their arrival. 

(h) The area commandants, zone and town majors in the Army 

Service Area will be under your orders. They have been 
instructed accordingly. 

5. Your attention is directed to Administrative Orders No 10, First 

Blue Army, 20 Sept 19, in which certain army depots are estab¬ 
lished in the Army Service Area and adjacent thereto. You 
are directed to communicate with the chiefs of services of the 
army with a view of arranging to furnish them the necessary 
troops for the guard and labor at those depots. 

6. You are particularly charged with the traffic control, circulation 

and police in your area. For this purpose you will co-operate 
with the army provost marshal. One battalion of the 1st Regi¬ 
ment, Army Military Police, has been directed to report to you 
for duty. 

7. The following troops have been attached for duty under your con¬ 

trol, to assist in the administration of the Army Service Area: 
4th Pioneer Infantry. 

5th Pioneer Infantry. 

6th Pioneer Infantry. 

The commanding officers of these regiments have been directed 
to report to you for instructions. 

8. It is imperative that your headquarters maintain, at all times, 

close communication with the G1 and G4 officers at these head¬ 
quarters in order that you may be kept fully advised of any an- 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


67 


ticipated movement of troops, organization of additional depots 
or other establishments in your area and of any other matters 
which may affect the administration of the Army Service Area. 
9 . It is particularly important that you-keep this office informed of 
the conditions generally in the Army Service Area and your 
recommendations for the improvement of such conditions as may 
appear to need attention are desired. 

By command of Lieutenant General X: 

Y 

G 4 . 

39. CORPS PHASE OF SUPPLY 
The service troops include: 

1 corps artillery park. 

6 truck companies, 162 2-ton trucks. 

1 park battery or depot section. 

1 ordnance repair shop. 

1 engineer train. 

1 supply train. 

6 truck companies, 162 2-ton trucks, or 

3 truck companies, 81 3 -ton trucks. 

1 troop transport train. Same organization as the supply 
train. 

1 sanitary train. 

1 remount depot. 

1 mobile veterinary hospital. 

40. CORPS RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUPPLY 

It is generally accepted that although the corps is a 
tactical organization, it has a few administrative responsi¬ 
bilities, such as the supply of ammunition, engineer material 
and medical supplies. The supply problems with which the 
corps is most concerned are those dealing with engineer 
material and ammunition. In times of emergency, the corps 
may act as agent for other supplies, such as equipment and 
ordnance spare for guns and small arms. 

The normal channels of supply are direct from army 
to division, the corps staff being responsible only for the 
supply of corps troops. 

The principle of supply is to shorten the channel, and 
to accomplish this it is necessary that requisitions and re¬ 
plenishment follow the shortest practicable route and only 
pass through those headquarters that allocate or regulate 
the flow of supplies. 

The factor that determines whether the corps shall 
act as a supply organization or not, is the application of 
the principle given above: “Do the divisions get their sup- 


68 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


plies quickly enough V If the answer to this question is in 
the negative, the corps must function in an intermediate 
capacity. The supplies handled by the corps, however, will 
be limited usually to those mentioned above. 

G4 recom,mends to the army the location of railheads 
or refilling points for divisions and corps troops in accor¬ 
dance with the scheme of advance. While the mechanics of 
supply are handled directly between the division and the 
army, G4 of the corps closely supervises the results and aids 
m every way that the facilities of the corps permit. Lack 
of forage, lack of shoes, lack of rations all affect vitally 
the efficiency of the corps as a marching or fighting unit, 
and the corps commander is quite as seriously concerned as 
is a division commander in relieving any shortage. 

41. CORPS SUPPLY ESTABLISHMENTS 

In an offensive or defensive situation, where the corps 
is acting alone, the following are usually established: 

(a) A park or parks for ammunition.. 

(b) An engineer park (maintained with army personnel). 

(c) A medical supply park (when necessary). 

(d) A mobile ordnance repair park. 

(e) Remount depot and mobile veterinary hospital usually 
with an advance collecting point for sick and wounded animals. 

(f) Replacement park (personnel). 

Ammunition parks are always established by the corps, 
but, when operating as a part of an army, corps parks for 
other supplies are not ordinarily necessary, the supplies 
being obtained direct from the army depots. 

Supplies pertaining to services not given in the above 
list are usually procured by divisions from army depots 
direct under rules prescribed by G4 of the army. 

Ammunition and engineer material are very heavy and 
troublesome to handle. It is therefore necessary to place 
them where they will be more accessible to the combat units 
than when kept at the army depots. 

42. AMMUNITION PARKS 

All tactical operations are controlled directly by the 
corps. 

The corps plans and controls the use of the divisional 
and corps artillery and any other artillery attached to it. 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY G 9 

The corps decides the relative amount of firing each artil¬ 
lery unit will carry on. It is therefore necessary that the 
allocation of all ammunition to divisions and corps troops 
should be made by the corps, as the corps must be able to 
supply the means for carrying out its plans. 

Corps ammunition parks should be located with the 
following considerations in mind: 

The exact distance at which large stores of ammuni¬ 
tion should be from the enemy cannot be definitely stated. 
It varies according to the concealment available, and in any 
particular area, with the intensity of the enemy’s shell fire. 
It may be considered that large stores within 7,500 yards 
will be spotted and shelled by howitzers, and that up to 
15,000 yards, long range gun fire will be directed on similar 
establishments. Actually but little damage is done in the 
latter case, if the parks are well planned and constructed. 
Within 12,000 yards, a park is likely to suffer considerably 
from aerial bombing. 

Parks should be near a broad gage railroad line, with 
which they should be connected by a broad gage track or 
by a 60-centimeter line. They should be far enough away 
from the main line to avoid damage to that line in case of 
explosion of any of the ammunition. They should be near 
good roads, but not on the main highways. Preferably 
they should be on the lateral roads connecting two or more 
highways. 

Corps parks should be arranged in an orderly manner 
to prevent confusion, with projectiles, propelling charges, 
boxed ammunition and pyrotechnics piled separately. Owing 
to danger of fire, infantry ammunition, flares and grenades 
are usually stored separately from other ammunition. 

Corps parks, at least for heavy artillery ammunition, 
should be placed so as to be suitable for use as army depots 
in case of an advance. 

The operation of a corps park is usually carried out 
under the direction of the munitions officer with corps ar¬ 
tillery park personnel; the material, in the nature of dun¬ 
nage, skids, platforms and cover, is usually provided by the 
corps engineer who also is responsible for the construction 
of these parks. 


70 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


43. ENGINEER PARK 

The army places upon the corps and divisions the bur¬ 
den of repairing and maintaining the roads, each within its 
own area. Where the army depot is some distance to the 
rear, the corps, with the assistance of the army, usually 
establishes a park containing road and other construction 
material, at a convenient point about 7 or 8 miles from the 
front. The park is maintained with army personnel. 

The park should be on a standard gage railroad, if pos¬ 
sible, or placed so that later it may be connected with such 
a railroad. It should be located conveniently to the divi¬ 
sions which it serves and should be accessible to good roads. 
It should be well stocked with road and other construction 
material, and bridge material when required. 

44. MEDICAL PARK 

Medical supplies are usually drawn by divisions and 
corps troops from the nearest army medical supply depot, 
but there may be occasions when the corps will have to 
establish a medical supply park (as when acting alone). 

These supplies require good overhead cover from the 
elements, and a suitable building large enough to meet the 
needs of the corps should be selected. The necessity of 
having this park close to the front does not exist, as in 
the case of other supplies mentioned above, as these supplies 
are not so bulky and are much more easily handled. The 
items and the quantity of each to be kept in this park will 
be based upon the recommendation of the corps surgeon 
who will consider the requirements and the demands. More 
than one corps medical supply park will not be necessary. 
When a forward one is established the rear one will be 
abandoned, the movement of supplies being executed by the 
corps sanitary train under the direction of the corps sur¬ 
geon. 

45. MOBILE ORDNANCE REPAIR PARK 

The corps at times may find it advisable to pool the 
divisional mobile ordnance repair shops with the corps heavy 
ordnance repair shop. 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 71 

There is always considerable work to be done in repair¬ 
ing arms and equipment, and the pooling arrangement will 
be found to be much more efficient than if each shop is 
operated separately. 

These mobile shops will operate directly for their divi¬ 
sions under the direction of the division ordnance officer. 
The groups will be under the supervision of the corps ord¬ 
nance officer, who is responsible for maintenance the sup¬ 
ply of ordnance material from the army depot to the dif¬ 
ferent shops, and for co-ordinating the work done by the 
shops. This group should be located at a well protected 
point, sufficiently far back from the front line, and centrally 
located for all divisions and the corps. 

46. REMOUNT DEPOT AND MOBILE VETERINARY 

HOSPITAL 

These are separate organizations, have separate func¬ 
tions and should never be placed together on account of 
the danger of infection and contagion. 

These establishments should be convenient to divisions, 
however, and, if practicable, on a broad gage railroad. This 
facilitates the shipping of animals that cannot make a 
long journey on foot. If near a railhead, the cars bringing 
up supplies will be available for the return of horses. The 
corps remount depot is an emergency reserve, and animals 
are drawn from it when the communications zone cannot 
supply them in time. When animals are received at de¬ 
training points from the communications zone consigned to 
a particular division, they should be unloaded by the corps 
remount squadron and be thoroughly examined by the 
squadron veterinary personnel before being turned over to 
the division. Unfit animals should be put into the remount 
depot and fit animals substituted. 

47. REPLACEMENT PARK (PERSONNEL) 

The replacement of personnel can be facilitated by the 
corps maintaining a replacement battalion. This was in¬ 
augurated in the American Expeditionary Forces shortly 
before the armistice. This battalion is an organization 
where personnel can be received, equipped, trained and put 


72 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


in fit condition to go to the line. If replacements not in 
fit condition to join the regiments are received by divisions, 
they may be sent to this battalion for equipment and train¬ 
ing. 

Upon receipt of the weekly requisition for replace¬ 
ments made by the divisions, G1 of the corps furnishes what 
he can from his replacement battalion. He then forwards 
the requisitions direct to the Gl, communications zone, fur¬ 
nishing a copy to Gl of the army, including a requisition 
for the number necessary to fill his replacement battalion. 

48. SUPPLY 

The army G4 is responsible that the divisions and corps 
are kept informed of the locations of the various depots, 
class of stores or supplies maintained thereat, and the 
method of procedure for obtaining the necessary amount 
of the same. This information is furnished either through 
orders or letters of instruction. Similarly, the corps G4 fur¬ 
nishes the same information to divisions and corps troops 
concerning the supply installations maintained by the corps. 
These instructions must be timely and complete in detail, so 
that at no time will a division be in doubt as to how and 
where it is to secure the necessary equipment and supplies. 

The corps commander is responsible that the corps 
troops submit timely requisitions and that every effort be 
made to secure the supply necessary to maintain the corps 
at maximum efficiency. He is further responsible that the 
efficiency of the divisions in his corps be not impaired, due 
to the lack of available facilities, such as transportation, 
storage room, etc. 

The chiefs of supply services in the corps bear the same 
relation to the corps troops that the chief of the same ser¬ 
vices within divisions do to the units of their divisions; that 
is, to see that those troops get the supplies required when 
needed. They submit requisitions as required, the same as 
the division. These requisitions are forwarded to G4 of the 
army in exactly the same way as the division requisitions. 

The chief engineer, in addition, will recommend sites 
for corps engineer parks, material and supplies to be kept 
in them, improvements in the system of supply of engineer 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


73 


material, road systems to be maintained, and will make 
recommendations as to construction or supply requested by 
the divisions. 

« 

The chief surgeon, likewise, has a double duty. In ad¬ 
dition to the evacuation and medical attention of corps 
troops, he is responsible for the evacuation of sick and 
wounded of the divisions. If this can be done by the divi¬ 
sions, he so recommends to the corps G4. If not, he must 
use his corps sanitary train to assist; and if this is not 
sufficient, he must call on the army for additional facilities. 
If circumstances require, he will recommend the establish¬ 
ment of a corps medical supply park to make the supplies 
more accessible to the divisions. 

Normally the remaining supply services would func¬ 
tion mainly for the corps troops. In exceptional circum¬ 
stances, the relations of the chiefs to the divisions will be 
similar to those of the corps engineer, or the corps surgeon. 

49. RATIONS 

As to this supply, the corps has no responsibility, ex¬ 
cept in so far as the general morale of the troops is de¬ 
pendent on their being well fed, other than supervision of 
the railhead where two or more divisions must be supplied 
from the same point, and for the supply of corps troops. 

50. SIGNAL CORPS 

The field signal battalions of the corps and the divi¬ 
sions, and the telegraph battalion of the corps are provided 
with considerable motor transportation. Therefore, during 
a stabilized period, these units should be able to complete 
their regular equipment, and if considered necessary, to ob¬ 
tain some extra equipment, especially wire, from the army 
depot. They will require very little assistance from the 
corps. 

51. MOTOR TRANSPORT SUPPLIES 

The corps is not directly concerned with this except so 
far as it affects the corps transportation. The motor units 
are usually well able to care for themselves. 


74 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


52. ORDNANCE SUPPLIES 

The pooling of the repair shops will tend to obviate 
the necessity of establishing a corps park for ordnance sup¬ 
plies. 

53. CHEMICAL WARFARE SUPPLIES (DEFENSIVE) 

The establishment of a corps park for these supplies is 
not necessary. Each division has its reserve, which is 
usually sufficient to carry it through an action. If required, 
the army could be called upon for an emergency supply from 
the army depot. 

54. ENGINEER SUPPLIES 

A certain burden is placed upon the corps in the main¬ 
tenance of roads, and this burden is shared with the divi¬ 
sions. The corps relieves the divisions as much as possible, 
and helps with additional labor where it cannot itself do 
the work. The corps has among its corps troops, a pioneer 
regiment of infantry, and also, usually, has attached other 
labor troops from the army. G4 generally details one bat¬ 
talion of the pioneer regiment to each front line division 
(when two divisions are in line), and uses the remaining 
battalion on road work, in ammunition parks, for strength¬ 
ening bridges, and such work as will aid in the offensive. 

In a forward move, a great deal of material will be re¬ 
quired. Roads will have to be repaired or built; bridges 
rebuilt; crater holes in roads and railroads filled up; shelters 
provided; sign boards posted. 

A large part of this work really falls to the lot of 
the army, but the corps and divisions must provide at 
least one two-way route per division, or supplies will not 
reach the fighting troops. 

It is manifestly impossible to prepare these routes 
ahead of the attack, so plans can only go so far as to pro¬ 
vide dumps as near the front line as reasonable, with all 
obtainable materials for the work contemplated. 

The corps can use its corps park, but in addition it is 
advisable, if possible, to push farther forward a divisional 
dump for each front line division. These dumps can be 


SUPPLY OF AN EXPEDITIONARY ARMY 


76 


placed under cover of darkness, and their location will de¬ 
pend largely upon the enemy’s artillery activity. They can 
generally be located within 2i to 3 miles of the front. 

In the choice of locations the question of protection is 
not as important a consideration as concealment. Engineer 
dumps might reasonably be concealed in forests or groves 
of trees, provided the activity incident to their operation 
will not be visible to the enemy. 

A phase which must not be lost sight of by the corps 
G4 is the crossing of streams. They may be fordable for 
infantry, but they are frequently not fordable for wagons 
of supplies and less fordable for trucks. 

G4 may be certain that the bridges will be destroyed, 
so in his engineer park there must be some provision for 
bridge material which may not be obtainable on the ground. 

55. CIRCULATION 

G4 of the corps prescribes the plan of circulation. 
Trains of one division must often pass through the area of 
another to reach their railhead and only the corps can co¬ 
ordinate the movement. 

The corps will endeavor to assign to a division exclusive 
use of certain roads. Where this is not possible and mixed 
traffic of two divisions must follow a certain road the corps 
must regulate this traffic by specifying the hours for each, 
or the precedence of columns entering from one direction, 
or by limiting the length of column of one division that 
can enter on the road, if there is a column of the other 
division waiting. 

In any case the presence of corps military police and 
a corps staff officer on the governing crossroad is essential. 

56. EVACUATION 

The corps uses its hospitals and ambulance companies 
to establish evacuation points in rear of the hospitals of the 
divisions, permitting the latter to pack up and move forward 
to take over more advanced locations. 

Those of the corps are in turn relieved by the sanitary 
organizations of the army. 


76 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The sanitary organizations of the corps, four ambulance 
companies and four field hospitals, all motorized, are in gen¬ 
eral used to supplement the means of its divisions. Some¬ 
times they are employed at the railhead in an evacuation 
capacity, when true evacuation organizations are lacking. 
Sometimes they are used to accommodate special classes of 
casualties, as gas cases, or for handling severely wounded 
that will not bear shipment. 

Amplification of divisional facilities is, however, the 
governing idea. 

57. MILITARY POLICE 

The corps military police control all traffic in rear of the 
zone of the divisions and in front of the army; they co¬ 
ordinate the work of the divisional military police, have 
charge of the corps prisoner of war enclosure and the corps 
straggler line. 

58. TRAINS 

The supply train of the corps assures the transportation 
of rations from the railhead to corps troops or to distribut¬ 
ing points where it dumps its rations or turns them over 
to the field trains of corps troops. It does not, ordinarily, 
form a link in the divisional supply, but, when necessity 
requires, may be used to supplement the division trains un¬ 
der arrangements made between G4 of the division and G4 of 
the corps. 

The corps artillery park is in reality a corps ammuni¬ 
tion train. 

Due to the size of the supply and ammunition trains 
and to the fact that the number of corps troops to be 
rationed is comparatively small, G4 of the corps nearly al¬ 
ways has a flexible reservoir of trucks with which he can 
assist divisions, execute road work, move engineering ma¬ 
terial, and help in troop movements. 

The corps also has, in the Tables of Organization, a 
troop transport train, corresponding in size to the supply 
train, which is intended primarily for the motor transpor¬ 
tation of troops. Its capacity is roughly 4,500 men at each 
trip. 


CHAPTER III 


Division Supply 


59. RATIONS 

Upon arrival of troops at mobilization and concentra¬ 
tion camps the rations saving privilege is suspended and 
entirely replaced by issues of rations in kind. This 
same restriction holds during the period of hostilities (Par. 
293, FSR). 


60. Garrison Ration 

The garrison ration is intended to be issued in kind 
whenever possible. It consists of the following: 


Article 

Amount 

Beef, fresh 


Flour 


Baking powder 

.—_ .08 OZ 

Beans 

_ _ 2.4 oz 

Potatoes_ 

-20 oz 

Prunes 


Coffee, roasted and ground 1.12 oz 

Sugar _ 


Milk, evaporated _ 

.5 oz 

Vinegar _ _ 

- (gill) .16 

Salt _ _ 


Pepper, black _ 

.04 oz 

Cinnamon 

.014oz 

Lard 

.64 oz 

Butter 

.5 oz 


Syrup_ (gill) .32 

Lemon extract_ .014oz 


Substitutes 

Mutton, bacon, canned meat hash, 
fish, turkey. 

Soft bread, hard bread, corn 
meal. 

Rice, hominy. 

Potatoes (canned), onions, toma¬ 
toes, other fresh vegetables. 

Apples or peaches (dried), jam. 

Coffee, roasted, not ground, coffee 
(green), tea. 


Pickles, cucumbers, not exceeding 
50 per cent. 


Cloves, ginger, nutmeg. 
Lard substitute. 
Oleomargarine. 

Vanilla. 


61. Field Ration 

The field ration is the ration prescribed in orders by 
the commander of the field forces. It consists of the reserve 
ration, in whole or in part, supplemented by articles requi¬ 
sitioned or purchased locally or shipped from the rear, pro¬ 
vided such supplement or substitutes correspond generally 
with the component articles or substitute equivalent of the 
garrison ration (Par. 296, FSR). > 


77 


















78 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


It usually consists of: 


Bacon_ 12 oz 

or canned meat_16 oz 

Hard bread -:---16 oz 

Beans- 4 oz 

Potatoes___ 8 oz 

Dried fruit_1.28 oz 

or jam_1.28 oz 

Coffee_1.12 oz 

Sugar___;-3.2 oz 

Milk _;_ .5 oz 

Salt_ .64 oz 

Pepper_ .04 oz 


62. Reserve Ration 

The reserve ration is the simplest efficient ration and 
constitutes the reserve carried for field service. It con¬ 
sists of the following: 


Bacon_12 oz 

or canned meat_16 oz 

Hard bread _16 oz 

Coffee _1.12 oz 

Sugar_3.2 oz 

Salt _ .16 oz 


63. Travel Ration 

The authorized travel ration is: 


Beef canned_ 12 ofe; 

Bread, hard_16 oz 

Beans, canned_4 oz 

Tomatoes_ 8 oz 

Jam _1.4 oz 

Coffee-----_1.12 oz 

Sugar-;-2.4 oz 

Milk - .5 oz 


This ration is issued when a division is on a rail move¬ 
ment. 

64. Trench Ration 

In the American Expeditionary Forces during the 
months from November to March, inclusive, general head¬ 
quarters orders prescribed the following increase in the 
ration allowance of troops when actually serving in front 
line trenches: 


Coffee -50 per cent 

Sugar-33J per cent 

Meat -^_25 per cent 

Candles-50 per cent 

Matches-50 per cent 

































DIVISION SUPPLY 


79 


Canned soup might be substituted for the meat when 
practicable on a basis of two ounces of soup for one ounce 
of meat. 

It was understood that the increase would be called for 
only when required, and proper supervision was exercised to 
prevent waste and accumulation of rations within an or¬ 
ganization. 

65. Trench Reserve 

In addition to the reserve ration carried by the men, 
four days' reserve rations were supplied to the men in the 
trenches and kept there. These rations were packed in tins 
containing 25 complete rations. This reserve was considered 
a part of the sector equipment and left in the trenches when 
a division was relieved. 

66. Forage Ration (AR 1077) 

Article Horses over 1300 lbs Horses under 1300 lbs Mules 

Hay, pounds 17 14 14 

Oats, corn or barley, pounds 14 12 - P 

Straw (or hay) for bedding 3 1-3 3 1-3 3 1-3 

To each animal 3 pounds of bran may be issued in lieu 
of that quantity of grain. 

The commanding officer may in his discretion vary 
the proportions of the components of the ration (1 pound 
of grain, 2 pounds of hay and 2 pounds of straw being 
taken as the equivalents), and in the field may substitute 
other recognized articles of forage obtained locally, the 
variation or substitution not to exceed the money value 
of the components of the ration at the contract rates in 
effect at the time of change (AR 1077). 

67. Forage Ration (AEF) 

Article Horses over 1300 lbs Horses under 1300 lbs Mules 

Hay, pounds 14 12 12 

Oats 14 12 9 

Bran was issued to an amount equal to one-seventh 
of the oats allowance and in lieu of it. ^ 

An additional issue of forage was allowed for animals 
working over 12 hours a day. 


80 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


68. Rations and Forage Required by Field Service Regula¬ 
tions 

Paragraph 302, Field Service Regulations, provides that 
the following rations and forage be kept in the division 
at all times: 

Rations 

1. (a) Carried by the soldier Reserve rations 

(b) Unconsumed part of one day (noon meal). 

2. Rolling kitchen Field rations 

3. Ration carts and R. and B. wagons Field rations 

Reserve rations 

4. Division Supply Train Field rations 

Total Reserve rations 3 days 

Total Field rations 4 days 

Total rations in division 7 days 

Reserve rations are consumed only in case of extreme 
necessity, when no other supplies are available. They are 
not to be consumed or renewed without an express order 
from the officer in command of the troops who is respon¬ 
sible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division 
commander or other independent detachment commander. 

Reserve rations consumed must be replaced at the 
first opportunity. 

The one day’s reserve ration carried in the ration 
section of the field train is intended to provide for re¬ 
placing immediately any reserve ration, carried by the 
man, which may be consumed. 

NOTE (1) ; The ration day begins at supper and ends with dinner (noon 
meals). This arrangement adds to foregoing one-third of a day which the soldier 
, carries. 


2 days 

1 day 
1 day 

1 day 

2 days 


Forage 

1. Carried on the vehicles for draft animals thereof (cavalry and 


artillery animals carry noonday meal) 1 day 

2. Ration carts and R. and B. wagons 2 days 

3. Divisional supply train 2 days 

Total all animals 4 days 

Total all draft animals (including reserve 

rations) 5 days 


On the march grain is usually the only forage carried. 
Hay is provided whenever the transportation or the sit¬ 
uation will permit. The allowance of transportation of 
the forage ration with a division is based on carrying: 

Twelve-pound ration of grain for each horse. 

Nine-pound ration of grain for each mule. 



DIVISION SUPPLY 


81 


In figuring on transportation, 10 pounds of grain for 
all animals and 10 pounds of hay for all animals (if hay 
is to be carried) are generally taken as the basis for a rough 
computation. 

69. Weight of Rations 

Approximate gross weight of garrison ration 5 pounds 

Approximate gross weight of reserve ration 3 pounds 

Approximate gross weight of field ration 4.5 pounds 

70. Daily Ration Telegram 

(See Summary Showing How Supplies are Obtained.) 

The daily ration telegram for the daily automatic Class 
I supplies is sent by G4 of the division direct to G4 of 
the army in time to reach the latter officer by noon each 
day. 

The telegram is prepared from data furnished by the 
statistical section of the division adjutant's office and con¬ 
tains the strength of the division in men (including officers) 
and animals, and quantities of all Class I supplies required 
by the division. 

This information is furnished daily for supplies desired 
three days forward. 

In order that this telegram for Class I supplies will 
contain as little information as possible which might be 
useful to the enemy, the following instructions should be 
complied with in preparing it: 

(a) Number of men and animals mentioned will be given 
in multiples of 100. 

(b) It is usually impracticable to ship wood, and it should 
not be asked for when it can be procured locally. When, however, 
it is necessary to call for same, it should be asked for in carload 
lots, omitting word cars. 

(c) Gallons of gasoline and kerosene will be asked for in 
multiples of 100. 

(d) Barrels of lubricating oil will be given by the number re¬ 
quired, omitting the word barrels; oil will be supplied weekly. 

This telegram will be given in the following order: 
Daily ration, date required, railhead and code name 
of division; number of rations for men, number for which 
increase is desired; number of rations for animals; gasoline, 
wood, oil, etc. 


82 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


If weekly shipment of any article is desired, this word 
'Veekly'' will be placed after the article, and this will be 
supplied weekly thereafter until another change is desired. 
An example of a daily telegram sent July 21st is as follows: 

“D.R. July twenty-fourth, Quebec, comma Sarah period Two 
hundred fifty comma increase ninety comma seventy comma 
gas twenty comma wood three comma oil Mobile E weekly three 
comma cup grease one period.” 

Explanation of the above: 

“Daily rations to arrive Quebec for 40th Division July twenty- 
fourth 25,000 rations, the increase components of the ration for 
9,000—7,000 rations of forage, gasoline 2,000 gallons, wood three 
cars, oil Mobile E, three barrels weekly, cup grease one barrel.” 

The quartermaster draws the Class I supplies for the 
division each day at the railhead on the latest available 
strength report of the division, which he usually receives 
the afternoon before from the adjutant’s office. 

This latest strength report frequently differs from the 
daily ration telegram sent to G4 three days before (due to 
loss from casualties or gain by replacements), but the dif¬ 
ference is regulated by the railhead officer. He simply issues 
on the latest available strength report. If more supplies 
are required than asked for three days before, the extra 
supplies are taken from the railhead officer’s reserve. If 
more supplies are received on the daily ration railroad train 
than are required, the surplus is placed in the railhead 
reserve. 

The daily ration telegram is simply an estimate of 
Class 1 supplies that the division will need three days 
fortvard and furnishes the regulating officer approximate 
figures well in advance upon which to base his shipment 
to the division. 

71. How Rations are Distributed 

Ordinarily the division quartermaster receives the ra¬ 
tions from the railhead during the morning. He calls on 
the commanding officer of the supply train the afternoon 
before for the necessary number of trucks to haul the fol¬ 
lowing day’s Class I supplies. 

In sending supplies forward by truck, the quarter¬ 
master has two methods of distribution, depending upon 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


83 


the location of the troops and the number of distributing 
points in use. If it is difficult to deliver the rations direct 
to the unit supply officers by truck, a division dump or cen¬ 
tral distributing point, or two such points, are usually des¬ 
ignated in the forward area and ^11 the rations and other 
supplies are brought forward in bulk, so to speak, placed 
in separate piles, according to components, and issued to 
organizations at hours designated in division orders. 

This simply amounts to a transfer of the supplies, as 
a whole, from the railhead to an advanced point of issue 
or distributing point, and requires the necessary subsis¬ 
tence personnel to go forward with the supplies to make 
the issues. 

In the other case, and usually where more than one 
distributing point is used, the supplies for each separate 
organization are placed on the trucks at the railhead and 
delivered to the organization at the designated distribut¬ 
ing point at the prescribed hour. The system is as follows: 

The required number of trucks is sent to the railhead 
to be there upon arrival of the train. A slip is given to 
each truck driver as soon as his truck is called for in the 
yard. This slip shows the organization, the location, the 
time of distribution at destination and what supplies the 
truck is to be loaded with. The driver then goes to the 
car indicated. Four trucks are loaded at the same time, 
one for each checker of beef, bread, potatoes, and dry 
rations. The trucks are so arranged that there is no delay 
between trucks, one truck being in wait at each of the four 
cars. 

The trucks to the same organization are sent in a 
convoy, the supply train sergeant arranging the convoy. 
The subsistence sergeant gives to the supply train sergeant 
or to a quartermaster representative, the issue slips in dupli¬ 
cate, indicating the truck numbers on slip. When the trucks 
for a particular organization are all loaded, the convoy is 
then dispatched. Trucks of forage and fuel are likewise 
loaded and accompany the ration trucks. 

The assistant subsistence officer arranges with the 
officers of the supply train the order in which the convoys 
are to be dispatched, so that the rations will reach the 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


U 

distributing points for a particular organization at the 
time called for by the division administrative order. 

At the distributing point, the trucks are met by the 
field trains of the regimental or separate units and the 
supplies transferred. A representative of the subsistence 
officer is sent to each distributing point to supervise the 
transfer of the supplies and to collect the signed issue slips. 

This latter method is particularly valuable for night 
distribution, as the actual distribution has taken place at 
the railhead where rations are sorted out without inter¬ 
ference by the enemy. The work at the distributing point 
amounts only to a delivery of the rations to the proper or¬ 
ganizations. 

It will be much less difficult to transfer the rations 
than to sort out organizational supplies in the dark in the 
forward area. 

Sometimes it is possible to send supplies forward from 
the railhead by a narrow gage railway, operated by en¬ 
gineer troops. When this method is employed the following 
steps are usually taken: 

The quartermaster notifies the yardmaster of the num¬ 
ber of cars he will need for the following day. These cars 
are placed early in the morning, and issues to separate 
organizations loaded on them. It is not desirable to load 
supplies for more than one organization on the same car. 
In the case of small units, the rations, fuel and forage 
are loaded in the same car. Each car is plainly marked 
with the organization and the destination. The subsistence 
sergeant always checks up with the train conductor and 
yardmaster to be sure that they know the destination of 
each car. The subsistence sergeant gives duplicate issue 
slips to the conductor who gives them to the representative 
of the unit supply officer at the destination, or a quarter¬ 
master representative is sent on the train with the slips. 
A small convoy is furnished from the railhead detachment. 

The signed slip is returned to the subsistence officer at 
the railhead by the conductor or the quartermaster repre¬ 
sentative. It is very desirable to have a representative of 
the unit supply officer at the railhead each morning to be 
sent out with the train as a convoy. This representative 
signs the issue slip and stays with the supplies until they 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


85 


reach their destination. The unit supply officer meets the 
train with his field trains, and unloads the cars direct onto 
the wagons. 

A convoy from the troops cannot usually be depended 
upon, however, for the question of distance and transpor¬ 
tation frequently makes this impracticable. 

See “Suggested System of Ration Supply for an Advancing Division.” 


72. Distributing Points 

A distributing point is the place where the ration sec¬ 
tions of the field trains are replenished either from the 
supply train or the communications zone; in the latter 
case either directly from its depots or by means of its sup¬ 
ply columns. When troops are advancing, distributing 
points will usually be pushed forward close behind the 
troops, if possible, even up to the camping area, so that 
the ration vehicles may be able to refill without marching 
too far. In a retreat it may be advisable to deposit sup¬ 
plies along the probable line of retreat (Par. 286, FSR). 

In a division the distributing points are selected by 
the division quartermaster or one of his assistants and the 
locations selected are submitted to G4 in a recommenda¬ 
tion by the quartermaster. 

The locations should be determined by personal re¬ 
connaissance whenever possible, as selections from a map 
alone frequently prove faulty. 

The location of distributing points, with units to draw 
supplies thereat and hour of issue for each unit, is given 
in the division administrative order. 

Time usually allowed for distribution of rations and 
forage: 


Brigade_:-1 hour. 

Regiment _i hour. 

Battalioi^ _ i hour. 

Division trains- 1 hour. 

Smaller units than a battalion-I hour. 


73. Number Used 

Ordinarily two distributing points will be sufficient to 
serve a division, particularly when the units of the division 
are billeted or bivouacked in a small area. Time is saved 







86 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


in distribution, traffic congestion is avoided and the ne¬ 
cessary quartermaster personnel reduced to a minimum. 

There will be occasions, however, when it will be ne¬ 
cessary to use three or even four distributing points when 
the division is widely scattered. This number necessitates 
a larger quartermaster force for the distribution of rations 
and forage and is usually avoided by the quartermaster 
whenever possible. 

One distributing point for the entire division is rarely 
used on account of the traffic congestion and the length of 
time required to complete the distribution. It might be 
used in a rest area or semi-stabilized sector where the units 
of the division are close together and where the railhead 
is well up in the division area. In this case the distribut¬ 
ing point might be located near the railhead and the sup¬ 
plies hauled from the cars to the distributing point by a 
few trucks from the supply train. The road circuit should 
be such that there will be no congestion of field trains at 
the distributing point. 

In a defensive position, or a semi-stabilized sector, two 
distributing points are generally employed, one in the rear 
of each infantry brigade sector and out of range of the 
enemy artillery. The artillery, the trains and other divi¬ 
sional units, such as the engineers, field signal battalion, etc., 
are assigned to one of these distributing points most con¬ 
venient to their location. If the trains and second echelon 
of the division are located too far to the rear to use con¬ 
veniently the distributing points in the brigade areas, a 
third distributing point should be established near the trains. 

In a meeting engagement, where the division is acting 
alone, three distributing points usually will be necessary, 
as the second echelon and trains are generally far to the 
rear. 

On a march where all units of the division commence 
the march on the same day, generally three distributing 
points are employed, one in each infantry brigade staging 
area, and one in the new area for the motor units of the 
division which usually complete the march on the first day. 
A fourth distributing point in the old area would be neces¬ 
sary should some of the units not commence the march the 
first day. 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


87 


In a movement of the division by truck, usually three 
distributing points are required: 

(a) One for the foot troops moved by trucks and motor 
sections of the trains (established in new area or near it). 

(b) One for the artillery (new one each day). 

(c) One for the horsed sections of the trains (new one each 
day). 

The rule to follow is to keep the number of distribut¬ 
ing points down to the minimum that can efficiently serve 
the troops, using two such points whenever possible. 

The conditions in each particular situation will deter¬ 
mine the number to be used, bearing in mind the limited 
quartermaster personnel available. 

74. Consideration in Selecting Distributing Points 

(a) Good main traveled routes for the supply train 
with a good road circuit for trucks at the distributing point. 
Avoid unimproved country roads as the trucks would prob¬ 
ably have great difficulty on them. 

(b) Good approaches for the field trains in visiting the 
distributing points. Unimproved country roads may be used 
by them. 

(c) Well out of range of enemy artillery fire and be¬ 
yond hostile terrestrial observation. Under cover of trees 
or high ground if possible. If unavoidably under hostile 
observation and artillery fire during the day, make arrange¬ 
ments for distribution at night. 

(d) Locate as conveniently to the field trains of the 
units as the conditions will permit. This is particularly 
desirable when the animals are in poor condition. 

(e) Be sure that the distributing points are located to 
fit in with the division circulation map. 

(f) Sufficient space for laying out and issuing supplies. 

(g) Road system must be carefully studied and, if dan¬ 
ger of congestion on bad roads near the front, located on 
good roads well to the rear. 

(h) The maximum radius of action of field trains is 
taken as 8 miles, a round trip from billet or bivouac to dis¬ 
tributing point 16 miles. Therefore it may be accepted 
as a general rule that the distributing point should be located 
within 8 miles of the field trains. 


88 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


75. Personnel Necessary at Distributing Point 

The quartermaster personnel usually consists of one 
commissioned officer and two or three non-commissioned 
officers as checkers at each distributing point. The 
number of checkers depends upon the method of distribution 
employed, but a commisioned representative of the quarter¬ 
master should be present whenever possible. 

Labor in handling supplies at the distributing point 
may be supplied as follows: 

(a) By supply train personnel (3 men per truck) to unload 
supplies. 

(b) By a detachment of men from the railroad detachment 
(about 12 men for each distributing point). Men accompanying 
trucks from railhead, unload supplies and remain and assist 
in distribution. 

(c) By personnel accompanying the ration sections of the 
field trains to the distributing point (usually 2 men per wagon). 

These labor detachments assist supply train personnel 
in unloading trucks and the quartermaster checkers in 
issuing rations. 

If men from the railhead detachment are not available 
a combination of the (a) and (c) methods will prove very 
satisfactory. 

Guard at the distributing points is furnished by the 
quartermaster until supplies are turned over to the units. 

A military police post at each distributing point during 
the hours of distribution is most essential to preserve order 
and regulate traffic. 

76. SUMMARY SHOWING HOW SUPPLIES ARE OB¬ 
TAINED 

In order to prevent troops being encumbered with un¬ 
necessary impedimenta, and at the same time to afford a 
simple and direct method of obtaining the necessary supplies 
without delay, all supplies are divided as follows: 

Class I. Automatic supplies, i.e., rations, forage, fuel, gas¬ 
oline, lubricants and illuminants. 

Class II. Clothing, blankets, slickers, ponchos, bedsacks and 
brassards. 

Class III. Other authorized articles of equipment furnished 
by the several supply departments. 

Class IV. Ammunition, construction material, and all 
articles of an exceptional nature not included in the authorized 
allowances. 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


89 


Class I Supplies are obtained as follows: G4 of the 
division furnishes daily, by telegraphic or telephonic report, 
the strength of the division in men and animals, and the 
actual needs of the division in fuel, gasoline, etc., to G4 of 
the army. The same procedure is followed by G4 of the 
army corps for corps troops. 

Class II and Class III Supplies are obtained as 
follows: Such portions of requisitions for supplies of these 
classes as cannot be filled by the proper supply officer with 
the division are consolidated by G4 of the division and for¬ 
warded by him to the head of the proper supply service at 
army headquarters. The latter, under a policy laid down by 
G4, issues or obtains the necessary supplies. The same 
procedure is followed by G4 of the army corps for corps 
troops. 

Class IV Supplies. Requisitions for articles of this 
class are handled in the same way as described for those 
of Classes II and III, except that, after the articles which 
are disposable within the army have been furnished, the re¬ 
mainder of the requisition is forwarded direct from G4 of 
the army to the general headquarters of the forces in the 
field, where it is considered in connection with contempla¬ 
ted operations and the relative needs of other units. 

NOTE:—See Supply Charts. 


77. REGIMENTAL SUPPLY OF RATIONS 

78. In Camp or Cantonment 

After obtaining the rations, forage and fuel at the rail¬ 
head, or distributing point, the field trains of the regiment 
return to the storehouse of the regimental supply officer 
where the rations only are unloaded. The forage is de¬ 
livered direct to the stables of the supply company, and the 
fuel is delivered to the various company kitchens. 

The company supply sergeants report at the supply 
officer's storehouse at an hour designated by him, and 
rations are issued to them in accordance with the ration 
returns which they have submitted to him the day before. 

Each company supply sergeant removes his rations 
with his company ration cart and receipts for them to the 
supply officer on an issue slip. The rations are distributed 


90 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


by the unit supply officer very much in the same manner as 
they are oy the quartermaster at the railhead or distri¬ 
buting point. 

Each supply company has three regimental supply ser¬ 
geants and four supply sergeants. When battalions are 
detached from a regiment, one of the regimental supply 
sergeants accompanies each battalion. Of the four 
supply sergeants, three of them look after the regimental 
supply and the fourth one is the supply sergeant of the 
supply company. 

The supply officer of the regiment usually assigns the 
work to the three supply sergeants looking after the regi¬ 
mental supply as follows: 

One sergeant in charge of subsistence. 

One sergeant in charge of fuel and forage. 

One sergeant in charge of property. 

When the rations, fuel and forage reach the regiment^ 
the sergeant in charge of fuel and forage immediately issues 
these supplies to the companies from the wagons that 
brought the property from the railhead. 

The sergeant in charge of subsistence breaks the origi¬ 
nal cases and packages in his storehouse and issues to the 
company supply sergeants on issue slips prepared from the 
company ration returns. He requires each company sup¬ 
ply sergeant to sign the original of the issue slip for file 
with the supply officer's records and gives each supply ser¬ 
geant a copy of the slip. 

Should the division supply train deliver the rations 
at the regimental supply officer’s storehouse, the ration and 
baggage wagons would call at a designated hour and re¬ 
ceive their company rations, forage and other supplies. In 
this case the ration and baggage wagons would be assigned 
to companies instead of being pooled under the regimental 
supply officer. 

79. In Campaign 

In combat the ration vehicles are usually pooled under 
control of the regimental supply officer at the rear echelon 
of the regiment. The, ration cart generally dumps at the 
bivouac of the supply company the one day’s reserve ration 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


91 


carried by it and is filled each day from the ration section of 
the field train with the current day's ration for the com¬ 
pany. Usually the rations cannot be sent up to the rolling 
kitchens of the front line and support battalions (which are 
with the combat train) until after nightfall. If the sit¬ 
uation permits, rations may be sent to the reserve battalion 
during daylight hours. 

There are usually high points in the enemy's lines which 
overlook the division area, so daylight traffic must be reduced 
to a minimum. The supply of the front line battalion is 
more difficult than the other on account of its proximity to 
the enemy and the noise caused by vehicles approaching the 
front. 

Forage usually has to be sent forward, in addition to 
rations, for the animals of the combat train. One wagon 
can haul the necessary forage for the animals of two bat¬ 
talions and a machine gun company. Fuel may be procur¬ 
able near the rolling kitchens or it may have to be sent for¬ 
ward from the supply company bivouac. Two wagons for 
fuel are generally required for each battalion. The water 
wagons and medical carts are usually with the combat train. 

Each battalion supply officer is responsible that the 
necessary ration and ammunition vehicles are sent up to 
his battalion each night. He must know where the company 
kitchens are located, what routes are available for reaching 
them, where the animals of the forward vehicles are located 
and that proper instructions are given for assembling the 
ration vehicles after completion of distribution. Those 
vehicles, including the water carts and forage and fuel 
wagons, are formed into small groups, about 8 or 10 vehi¬ 
cles per battalion, and usually start out so as to each the 
line prescribed as the limit of daylight traffic by dark. 

The front line battalion usually has two companies in 
the front line and two in support. The rolling kitchens 
of this battalion may be under cover in rear of the two sup¬ 
port companies or, if not safe there, they may be with the 
support battalion. In any case, the ration vehicles are con¬ 
ducted to the rolling kitchens and, after distributing the 
rations, are assembled with the empty water carts and fuel 
wagons and conducted to the rear before daylight. 


92 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Meals for the two front line companies are prepared at 
or in rear of the support companies and sent forward at 
night by carrying parties from the support companies. 
They may be sent forward in the daytime if cover from 
hostile observation permits. Hot food and plenty of it must 
be sent to the front every night. For this purpose, each 
infantry and machine gun company must have a few “Mar- 
mite’" cans, or other food containers, with its rolling kitchen. 
By having a few such cans the units of the front lines can 
be fed hot food daily under the most adverse conditions. 
A few small sized milk cans will do and they are also con¬ 
venient for water supply to the front lines. The rolling 
kitchens are provided with thermos cans, cook pots, and 
two conveying poles. 

The supply of hot meals to the forward units involves 
a good deal of labor on the part of carrying parties, and this 
means of supply must be well organized and supervised by 
the battalion supply officer in order that it may function 
efficiently. 

The rolling kitchens should be so located or so conduc¬ 
ted at night that the distance covered by carrying parties 
will be reduced to a minimum. 

80. REGIMENTAL SUPPLY OF AMMUNITION 

In going into action, or if entering the front line 
trenches, the two companies of each battalion designated 
for the front line would take forward with them the extra 
bandoleers of ammunition carried by the battalion combat 
wagons. The front line battalion would ordinarily not 
have a dump. Its ammunition would be replenished during 
an attack by the methods outlined in ‘'Infantry Ammunition 
Supply, Open Warfare Situation” (see Ammunition), and 
during a semi-stabilized situation by the use of combat wag¬ 
ons and carrying parties at night. The battalion supply 
officer is responsible for getting up the necessary ammuni¬ 
tion to replenish that expended. 

In a semi-stabilized situation the ammunition for the 
front line battalion is sent up at night by combat wagons 
which fill at the regimental dump (usually located in rear 
of the battle position). 


DIVISION SUPPLY 


93 


The ammunition is sent to the support companies and 
from there is sent forward to the front line companies by 
carrying parties from the support companies. In organiz¬ 
ing carrying parties for ammunition, one man should be 
allowed for each four bandoleers of ammunition (480 
rounds). 

The combat wagons should be so conducted that the 
distance to be covered by the carrying parties will be re¬ 
duced to a minimum. 


CHAPTER IV 


Ammunition 


81. AMMUNITION SUPPLY 

82. Control 

Class 4 supply requisitions require approval of com¬ 
mander-in-chief of the field forces. 

Munitions branch, G-4 section, general headquarters, 
handles ammunition supply. G4 is responsible through 
commanding general, communications zone, that the am¬ 
munition reaches the depots of the communication zone. 
The chief ordnance officer of the communications zone ad¬ 
ministers ammunition depots. G3, general headquarters, is 
responsible for amount of ammunition supplied. 


83. Ammunition Service 

See pars. 313 to 317, inclusive. Field Service Regula¬ 
tions. 


84. Agencies for Supply 

(a) Open Warfare Situation: 

(1) General ammunition storage depots in the base, inter¬ 
mediate and advance sections, communications zone—located on 
standard gage railway lines away from centers of population. 

(2) Army depots containing army reserve ammunition of 
all kinds and located near standard gage railway lines. Supplied 
by comunications zone depots. 

(3) Temporary advance army depots, corps parks, and divi¬ 
sion dumps near roads. Moved as the advance progresses. Ad¬ 
vance army depots on light railway where possible—supplied by 
army depots. 

(b) Stabilized Situation : 

(1) Same as (a) 1 and 2 above. 

(2) Army advance depots, containing usually one type of 
ammunition and located on light railways, connecting with army 
depots on standard gage railway. 

(3) Corps parks, containing all types of ammunition, located 
on light railway or road convenient to motor trucks—supplied by 
advance army depots. 


94 



AMMUNITION 


96 


(4) Division dumps containing ammunition of all kinds, 
located on light railway or road convenient to motor trucks— 
supplied by corps parks. 

(5) Regimental (and sometimes battalion) dumps (small 
arms, grenades, pyrotechnics, etc.)—supplied by division dumps. 

85. Methods of Transportation 

(a) From communications zone ammunition depots to 
army depots—trainload lots by standard gage railway. 

(b) From army depots to army advance depots by light 
railway or truck. 

(c) From army advance depots to corps parks by light 
railway for stabilized situation and light railway or truck 
for open warfare situation. 

(d) From corps parks to division dumps by light rail¬ 
way or trucks both in open and stabilized situations. 

(e) When standard gage or light railways are not 
available, communications zone motor columns are employed. 
Also army, corps and division motor ammunition trains. 

86. Methods of Distribution 

(a) For definitions of ‘'rendezvous point,’" “refilling 
point” and “distributing station,” see par. 318, Field Ser¬ 
vice Regulations. 

(b) By army—army artillery park and ammunition 
train, supplemented by reserve motor truck companies.. 

(c) By corps—corps artillery park, supplemented by 
corps troop transport train and corps supply train. 

(d) By division—division ammunition train, supple¬ 
mented by division supply train. 

(e) By regiment and battalion—combat train, supple¬ 
mented by horse battalion, division ammunition train. 

87. Divisional Reserve Ammunition 

Regulations prescribe that a certain amount of ammu¬ 
nition, both artillery and infantry, shall be kept on hand at 
all times during campaign. 

The following table shows the amount required and 
where it is carried: 


96 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Artillery Ammunition 

In the firing battery and combat train, light artillery. One 
day’s fire (354 rounds). 

In the firing battery and combat train, heavy artillery. 
Three-fourths day’s fire (133 rounds). 

In the ammunition train, light artillery. One-half day’s 
fire (155 rounds). 

In the ammunition train, light artillery One-half day’s 
fire (42 rounds). 

88. Infantry Ammunition 


How Carried 


Kind 


Combat Train 

Ammunition 

Train 

Cal. .30 per man 
Cal. .45 per man 

Person 

100 

35 

120 

21 

120 

21 

Machine guns 
per gun 

Gun cart \ Am. cart 
1250 1 3000 

6000 

6000 

Automatic rifle 

With the guns 

240 



3-inch Stokes 
per gun 

80 

49 

186 

37-mm. gun 
per gun 

192 

960 

310 


In addition to the above ammunition, the combat am¬ 
munition trains carry certain pyrotechnics. These consist 
of cartridges for the 25-mm. signal pistol, signal cartridge 
to be fired from the V. B. tromblon, rockets and bengal 
lights. They are issued to all units except the trains. 
The kinds and amounts required for a month's supply are 
given in the equipment tables. The ammunition train uses 
tonnage not required for ammunition to carry pyrotechnics. 

Hand and rifle grenades are trench stores and are not 
brought out by a division when it is relieved. They are 
turned over to the new division coming in. 

The allowance of artillery and infantry ammunition 
prescribed above for the ammunition train, may be kept in 
division dumps when the division is in a training or rest 
area, but must be kept convenient for loading. 

89. Divisional Means of Handling Ammunition 

(a) By division ammunition train which carries divi¬ 
sion reserve: 





















AMMUNITION 


97 


Division Ammunition Train 
Motor Battalion'. 

Four motor truck companies of 27 two-ton trucks each. 
Carries reserve ammunition for artillery, infantry, machine 
guns, Stokes, 37-mm., grenades, pyrotechnics, etc. 

Horsed Battalion: 

One wagon company of 33 limbered caisson wagons. 
Carries reserve caliber .30 and caliber .45 ammunition only. 

Two caisson companies of 18 caissons each and one spare 
gun. Carries reserve ammunition for 75’s only. 

Horsed battalion utilized as follows: 

(1) Held as reserve. 

(2) Operated between combat trains and motor battalion 
and to the batteries in some cases. 

(3) Supplement motor battalion. 

(b) By combat trains which carry the organizational 
reserve. For composition of combat trains see paragraphs 
160, 161 and 162. 

(c) Distributing stations: 

(1) Open warfare situation. 

One for each brigade. Located near batteries and good 
road circulation to be provided. Not to be located on reserved 
roads. Sheltered from aerial observation. Located in woods 
when practicable. Camouflaged when in the open. 

(2) Stabilized situation—dumps down to battalions and bat¬ 
teries. 


90. Responsibility for Supply 

(a) Amount: 

Communications zone depots—G3, general headquarters, 
through commanding general, communications zone. 

Army depots—Chief of artillery of the army in consultation 
with G3, army. 

Corps parks—Chief of artillery of the corps in consultation 
with G3, corps. 

Division dumps—Artillery brigade commander in consulta¬ 
tion with G3, division. 

(b) Placing in Depots, Etc. 

Communications zone depots—G4, general headquarters, 
through G4, communications zone. 

Army depots—G4, army. 

Corps parks—G4, corps. 

Division dumps—G4, division. 

(c) Selection of Depots, Etc. 

Communications zone depots—G4, general headquarters, 
through commanding general, communications zone. 

Army depots—Chief of artillery of the army in consultation 
with G4, army. 


98 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Corps parks—Chief of artillery of the corps in consultation 
with G4, corps. 

Division dumps—Artillery brigade commander in consulta¬ 
tion with G4, division. 

(d) Administration of Depots, Etc. 

Communications zone depots—Chief ordnance officer, com¬ 
munications zone. 

Army depots—Chief of ordnance, army. 

Corps parks—Corps artillery park commander. 

Division dumps—Artillery brigade commander. 


91. Infantry Ammunition Supply 

(a) Open Warfare Situation. 

Men carry prescribed allowance. Combat wagons 
carry organizational reserve. 

Before going into action extra ammunition is issued to 
men, and combat wagons are sent to rear to rendezvous 
point. If action is prolonged, refilled combat wagons are 
pushed forward as far as possible. 

Following is chain of infantry ammunition supply: 

(1) From refilling point to distributing station—by division 
ammunition train. 

(2) From distributing station to battalion ammunition point 
—by combat wagons. 

(3) From battalion ammunition point to battalion reserves— 
by carts, pack mules or carriers (preference in the order stated 
according to situation). 

(4) From battalion reserve to company supports—by carry¬ 
ing parties. 

(5) From company supports to assaulting echelon—by rein¬ 
forcements. 

(6) At night combat wagons can go farther forward and 
ammunition goes up to the assaulting echelon by carriers. 

(b) Stabilized Situation. 

The method differs from that of open warfare in that 
dumps are formed by division, regiments and battalions; 
and ammunition is sent up to the advance echelons by com¬ 
bat wagons at night and by light railway and carriers. 

(c) Responsibility for Supply. 

Artillery brigade commander for the division. Bri¬ 
gade and regimental commanders (in stabilized situations) 
for brigades and regiments, respectively. Infantry bat¬ 
talion commander, through the munitions officer of the bat¬ 
talion, for the battalion. 


AMMUNITION 




92. Reports on Ammunition Supply 

(a) Expenditures—Artillery—Daily. 

Batteries to regiment by phone. 

Regiment to artillery brigade munitions officer by phone and 
in writing. 

Brigade munitions officer to corps munitions officer by phone 
and in writing (through G4 channels). 

Corps munitions officer to army munitions officer, by phone 
and in writing (through G4 channels). 

Army munitions officer consolidates reports and based on 
them allocates ammunition daily to the different corps (under 
direction of G4, army). 

(b) Infantry Expenditures: —Rendered every 10 
days (and more often, when required) by artillery brigade 
munitions officer to corps munitions officer, who consoli¬ 
dates division reports, and forwards to army munitions offi¬ 
cer through G4 channels. 

(c) Army Depots. 

Render situation reports daily to army G4, munitions 
branch, and to chief of artillery of the army. 


93. Amount of Ammunition in Army Depots 

Depends entirely upon situation. In the St. Mihiel and 
Meuse-Argonne offensives the following amounts were sup¬ 
plied : 

Army depots—Two days’ fire. 

Corps parks—Three days’ fire. 

Later, in the Meuse-Argonne operation, supply was re¬ 
duced to three days of fire as follows: 

Army depots—One-half day’s fire. 

Corps parks—Two and one-half days’ fire. 

The bulk of the ammunition was to be held in the corps 
parks and a minimum amount at the batteries, as experi¬ 
ence had shown great quantities of ammunition abandoned 
in battery positions when batteries moved forward. 

However, in the above operations at no time were two 
days of fire used. In the St. Mihiel about 1.3 and in the 
Argonne, in the attack of September 26th, about 1.21 days. 

94. Supply in Rapid Advance 

Construction of permanent ammunition depots and 
dumps in forward area must be abandoned. Temporary 


100 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


dumps on light railway or on roads must be established and 
pushed forward by light railway or trucks to the corps each 
day. 

95. Ordnance Reclamation Service 
Two establishments as follows: 

(a) Field Cleaning Stations: —To clean, sort and 
condition ammunition left in the old battery positions and 
emplacement dumps and to re-issue to troops in the field. 

To be established as soon as advance permits. 

(b) Reclamation Depots: —To clean, repair and con¬ 
dition all ammunition turned in by salvage service, storing 
and re-issuing on order from G4, army. 

Where ordnance personnel can take the field immediately 
behind a drive and can collect, clean and stack along the 
roads all ammunition left behind by advancing troops, the 
number of reclamation depots is greatly reduced. Corps 
send back for ammunition thus reclaimed. 

(c) Demolition Squads. 

To destroy ‘Muds” and all unsafe ammunition. 

96. Salvage of Material Pertaining to Ammunition 

The artillery brigade commander is responsible for sal¬ 
vage of material pertaining to ammunition, such as empty 
ammunition boxes, brass cartridge shells and machine gun 
strips and belts, using for this purpose the division ammuni¬ 
tion train. 

Rifles, machine guns, etc., are salvaged by the salvage 
service and the ordnance reclamation service. 

97. Rules for Handling Ammunition 

The following rules should be strictly observed in 
handling ammunition: 

(a) In handling all types of ammunition, care must be taken 
that crates are not broken; or if uncrated, that the copper bands 
at base of shell are not scratched. Damaged bands render the 
shells not only useless but dangerous to fire. 

(b) Do not allow colors painted on shells to be effaced; they 
were put there for a purpose and are necessary. 

(c) Protect ammunition from sun and rain; both are harm¬ 
ful to the high explosive filling. 


AMMUNITION 


101 


(d) When fuses are attached to shells, do not handle by 
fuses; you may destroy the protective cover and ruin the fuse. 
Where fuses are not attached, plugs replace them; should one of 
these fall out, put it back at once. 

(e) When handling gas shells, be provided with mask to pro¬ 
tect against leaky shells. 

(f) All ammunition is highly explosive, therefore danger¬ 
ous. Do not smoke while moving it and handle it with care. 

98. Ammunition Capacity of Vehicles 

The capacity of one combat wagon is 28,800 rounds of 
caliber .30 and 4,000 rounds of caliber .45. The capacity of 
a caisson is 106 rounds of 75-mm. ammunition. 

The capacity of a two-ton ammunition truck is as fol¬ 
lows : 


Ammunition 

How Packed 

Wt. lbs. 

Boxes 

Rounds 

Cal. .30 

Rectangular wood 
box (1200 rds) 

100 

40 

48,000 

Cal. .45 

Rectangular wood 
box (2000 rds) 

76 

62 

104,000 

37-mm. 

Rectangular wood 
box (60 rds) 

70 

67 

2,860 

76-mm. 

Rectangular wood 
box (9 rds) 

135 

22 

198* 

166-mm. 

Loose powder in 
large boxes up to 
200 charges per box 

lOO^^ 


40 

3-inch Stokes 

small box (3) 

33 

120 

860 


♦Load is limited by the volume and not by the weight. 

♦♦One hundred pounds is taken as the average weight for the charge complete 
with fuze, etc., and includes weight of containers and gromets. 


99. Ammunition Supply for Cavalry 

The combat train of a cavalry regiment includes 18 
combat wagons, distributed as follows: 


To each troop_1 

To headquarters troop_1 

To machine gun troop-2 

To each squadron _1 


* In each combat wagon there is carried the following 
ammunition: 


Kind 

Troop 

Hq. Troop 

MG Troop 

Squadron 

Rifle, cal. .30 

10,300 

9,500 

1,700 

24,000 

Pistol, cal. .46 

Auto rifle in 

2,394 

3,423 

3,160 

10,000 

magazines 

Machine gun am¬ 
munition 

3,680 


40,000 




(16,000 in belts) 














102 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


In the cavalry and field artillery, due to the mobility 
of these arms of the service, it may often become advisable 
to separate temporarily the combat trains from the troops. 
In the cavalry, when combat is imminent, the extra am¬ 
munition is usually issued before leaving camp and is car¬ 
ried on the horse or the trooper, the combat trains being 
directed to join the field trains. 

The ammunition is replenished at night by motor 
trucks. 

The composition of the ammunition train in a cavalry 
division is the same as that for an infantry division and the 
functions of the two are identical. 

100. NOTES ON DISTRIBUTION OF AMMUNITION 

An ''ammunition distributing station'' is the place 
where the combat trains are refilled. 

An "ammunition refilling point" is the place where the 
division ammunition train is refilled. It may be an army 
depot or a corps park. 

An "ammunition rendezvous point" is the place where 
the ammunition columns of the communications zone are 
met by agents of the field force. 

An "ammunition dump" is a local supply point estab¬ 
lished for temporary use during a semi-stabilized situation. 

Any unit (battalion, battery, regiment, brigade, divi¬ 
sion) may have a dump if the situation warrants it. How¬ 
ever, dumps are seldom established by smaller units than 
divisions. 

For detailed plan of distribution of ammunition to 
infantry and artillery, see chart entitled "Ammunition Sup¬ 
ply and Responsibility for Supply." 

Normally in an attack the motor battalion of the am¬ 
munition train establishes one or two distributing stations 
(depending upon the situation and the roads available) at 
which it places both artillery and infantry ammunition. If 
one centrally located distributing station (sometimes called 
division dump) is established, ammunition of all kinds is 
placed there and is then distributed to the artillery combat 
trains by the two caisson companies, and to the infantry 
combat trains by the wagon company, or the combat trains 


AMMUNITION 


103 


of the artillery and infantry are required to draw ammuni¬ 
tion from the distributing station (see chart entitled “Pro¬ 
posed Plan of Ammunition Supply for Division in Attack”). 

It may be advisable, due to the width of the divisional 
sector and the consequent dispersion of the artillery and 
infantry, to establish two distributing stations (if roads are 
available) ; one in each brigade sector, containing both ar¬ 
tillery and infantry ammunition. In this case the artillery 
and infantry ammunition is supplied at the distributing 
stations by the motor battalion of the ammunition train, the 
latter hauling from an army depot or corps park. Distribu¬ 
tion is then made to the combat trains of the artillery and 
infantry either by requiring the latter to visit the distribut¬ 
ing stations (if the distance is not too great) or by sending 
the ammunition forward to them by using the caisson com¬ 
panies and wagon company of the ammunition train. 

Sometimes when two distributing stations are estab¬ 
lished, artillery ammunition may be placed at only one of 
them (due usually to scarcity of good roads for the motor 
battalion) and infantry ammunition placed at both of them. 
The distribution would be the same as in the preceding case. 
Considerations in selecting distributing stations: 

(a) Good main traveled routes for the motor battalion am¬ 
munition train, with good road circuit at the distributing sta¬ 
tion. Avoid unimproved country roads, whenever possible. 

(b) Good approaches for the combat trains in visiting the 
distributing station or for the caisson and wagon companies in 
going forward. Unimproved roads may be used by them. 

(c) Well out of range of enemy artillery fire and beyond 
enemy terrestrial observation. Under cover of trees or high 
ground if possible. If unavoidably under enemy observation and 
artillery fire during the day, make arrangements for distribution 
at night. 

(d) If combat trains are to visit the distributing stations, 
locate the latter as conveniently to the combat trains as the situa¬ 
tion will permit. This is particularly desirable when the animals 
are in poor condition. 

(e) Be sure that the distributing stations are located to fit 
in with the division circulation map. 

(f) Sufficient space for laying out and distributing ammuni¬ 
tion. 

(g) Road system must be carefully studied and, if danger 
of congestion on bad roads near the front, located on good roads 
well to the rear. 

The location of distributing stations, with kinds of 
ammunition thereat, method of distribution, units to be 


104 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


supplied therefrom, and routes to be followed by the am¬ 
munition train is given in the division administrative order. 

In a semi-stabilized sector one centrally located divi- 
son distributing station (or division dump) containing am¬ 
munition of all kinds is frequently used, particularly where 
the roads are limited. The caisson companies and wagon 
company may operate from this point, or, if the distance is 
not too great, the combat trains may visit it. It should be 
regarded as a temporary arrangement. 

Small temporary battery and infantry regimental (or, 
sometimes, even battalion) dumps may be formed. 

The infantry regimental or battalion dump should or¬ 
dinarily not be established farther forward than the battle 
position (line to be occupied by support battalions) ; usually 
under cover well in rear of that position with good routes 
of approach for combat wagons. From this point ammuni¬ 
tion is sent up at night in combat wagons to replace ex¬ 
penditures in the forward battalion, and the wagons are 
withdrawn before daylight. The regimental dump usually 
replenishes from the division dump. 

The motor battalion of the division ammunition train 
is the connecting link in the chain of supply between the 
ammunition refilling point and the distributing stations. It 
may haul from a park established by the corps or it may 
procure its ammunition from an army depot designated by 
the corps. 

There were many instances in France when ammuni¬ 
tion for the 155’s was delivered to the battery positions by 
the motor battalion, the battery positions usually being 
near good roads. This may be regarded as exceptional and 
this means of distribution should be resorted to only in case 
of emergency. 

The normal procedure of having the combat train 
(motor) of the heavy regiment call at the distributing sta¬ 
tion for its ammunition should be followed as a general 
rule. 

The objections to using the motor battalion ammuni¬ 
tion train for this purpose are: 

(a) Trucks go astray at night on strange roads. 

(b) Appointments with guides do not work out satisfactorily. 


A-MMUNition Supply and Fx r-isPGNsrBTLiTY 
For Suppdy 


lO 

o 
















































104 


supplie 

munitic 

In 

son dis 
munitic 
the roa 
compar 
not too 
regardt 
Sir 
sometir 
Th 
dinarilj 
positior 
under c 
of appr 
tion is 
penditu 
withdr^ 
replenis 
Th 
is the c 
ammun 
may ha 
procure 
the cor 
Th. 
tion for 
the mo 
near gO' 
this mej 
of emer 
Th( 
(motor) 
tion for 
rule. 

Th. 
tion tra 


AMMUNITION 


106 


(c) The location of battery positions is changed from time 
to time. 

(d) Trucks of the motor battalion become scattered. 

The above difficulties are overcome by using the combat 
train for distribution of the 155’s, as that train is more 
familiar with conditions in the forward area. 

The system involves double handling of heavy ammu¬ 
nition, but this factor is more than outweighed by the dis¬ 
advantages enumerated above. 

101. AMOUNT OF AMMUNITION AT BATTERY 
EMPLACEMENTS 

The amount of artillery ammunition to be expended in 
the initial attack will depend entirely upon the artillery 
plan. This will show the amount of harassing fire prior 
to the attack, the length of the preparation and how long 
the batteries will fire in the initial positions after H hour. 
When this is known, the exact amount for the batteries can 
be figured out. 

It is difficult to prescribe the exact amount of ammuni¬ 
tion that should be placed in the battery positions as it will 
depend entirely on the missions of the batteries. The sup¬ 
ply at battery positions, however, should normally be such 
that it will not be necessary to draw on the firing battery 
caissons or combat trains until the batteries move forward 
to their new positions. Therefore the caissons of the firing 
battery and the combat trains, after furnishing the re¬ 
quired ammunition at the battery emplacements, should be 
immediately refilled from the distributing station and held 
in readiness to move forward. 

Likewise the horsed battalion ammunition train should 
be kept filled in order that it may be ready to move forward 
and supplement the combat trains in the attack, should it 
be needed for this purpose, or to establish new distributing 
stations. 

The amount of artillery ammunition for an attack is 
specified by the corps usually in ''days of fire'' or a fraction 
of a "day of fire" (see note). It is allotted to the divisions 
and placed in corps parks from which it is drawn by the 
divisions as needed. The amount expended by a division 


106 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


each day is replaced in the corps park, the replenishment 
being based on the daily expenditure report of the divi¬ 
sion. 

The plan of establishing a corps ammunition park is 
an economical method of handling the supply of ammunition, 
for this places within its control and within easy reach of 
the batteries a reserve which is flexible. 

The task of one group may have been easier than an¬ 
ticipated and its unused ammunition will then become avail¬ 
able for the others. Furthermore, the more difficult it is 
to obtain supplies the greater is the tendency to accumulate 
a large surplus. Without the corps park this surplus would 
be at the batteries or in the divisions, resulting in several 
scattered dumps where one well placed corps park would 
serve. In case of a move these scattered dumps are very 
difficult to clear up and usually are salvaged. The use of 
a corps park prevents wastage, saves labor and transporta¬ 
tion, and preserves and conserves ammunition. 

The principle of ammunition supply at the batteries is . 
therefore to place at the batteries only the necessary amount 
of ammunition to accomplish the mission assigned prior to 
movement of the batteries, fill the combat trains and horsed 
battalion, ammunition train, and hold the reserve in the 
corps park. 

Note: —The term “day of fire” may be defined as an arbitrary number of rounds 
per gun which experience has shown to be a usual expenditure for the caliber in ques¬ 
tion during 24 hours’ fighting in active operations. It is essentially a unit of supply, as 
by the use of this one term it is possible to prescribe an allowance for all calibers, which 
allowance takes into consideration the different firing rates of the various models and 
calibers of artillery. The number of rounds in the day of fire now in use in our 
service is that used by the First Army, American Expeditionary Forces, and is shown 
in the table characteristics of field, railway and anti-aircraft artillery. Although 
essentially a unit of supply, the solution of tactical problems is much simplified by 
having available this unit of a “day of fire” which allows the prescribing of ammuni¬ 
tion without specifying the actual number of rounds per caliber. Attention is in¬ 
vited to the fact that in artillery preparations, continued actions, etc., two or more 
“days of fire” may possibly be expended in a few hours ; the term therefore has no 
reference to the actual expenditures of ammunition in a given situation, this ex¬ 
penditure being dependent upon the tactical mission assigned. 

102. PROPOSED AMMUNITION SUPPLY FOR A 
DIVISION IN AN ATTACK 

The ammunition train consists of four truck companies, 
two caisson companies and one wagon company. Experience 
demonstrates that the trucks cannot advance beyond the 
take-off place for a considerable time after the operations 


AMMUNITION 


107 


Proposed Plan orAMMuNmon Supply- por Division in Attack 



start. The caisson an4 wagon companies can go up as soon 
as the engineers have made the preliminary repairs. 

Therefore it is highly desirable that the munitions offi¬ 
cer be taken into confidence as to contemplated advance, in 
order that he may be able to establish a dump as far for¬ 
ward as his trucks can go. There he will place (as condi¬ 
tions warrant) a supply of both infantry and artillery am¬ 
munition, continually hauling from the corps parks by 
truck. 

When the advance is made (if slow), combat wagons 
and caissons can haul from this dump. If the ad¬ 
vance is fast, each brigade of infantry and regiment of ar- 
















108 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


tillery will at a convenient place establish a brigade and 
regimental dump. These dumps will be supplied from the 
advance division dump by the ammunition train, the two 
caisson companies hauling to the regimental artillery dumps 
and the wagon company to the infantry brigade dumps. 
The battery caissons will haul from regimental dump to 
battery and the combat trains from brigade dumps to in¬ 
fantry regiments. 

This will avoid confusion and prevent hauls/ going 
astray. Battery caissons will soon learn the way to the 
regimental dump. If the battery moves, a guide left in the 
old position conducts to the new. Infantry combat wagons 
soon learn the way to brigade dump and should their regi¬ 
ments move, a guide at the old position carries them for¬ 
ward. It is impossible for ammunition train caissons and 
companies to haul from the advance dump to moving bat¬ 
tery or infantry positions without great loss of time. Trains 
go astray in the night on strange roads, appointments with 
guides fall down and confusion exists. Another advantage 
the regimental and brigade dumps seem to possess is the 
saving of stock. If everything on foot hauls from the ad¬ 
vance division dump, long hauls result. By dividing the 
haul, the animals rest while being loaded, then have a short 
haul, rest while being unloaded and have a semi-rest on 
the short empty haul back. 

The dumps having been established, brigade and regi¬ 
mental commanders should send word to the officer in 
charge of the division dump what class of ammunition they 
need hauled. As the conditions of the action change, they 
are the only ones who know. The division dump is fixed 
and word can be gotten back that commands are running 
short of caliber .30, bombs, Stokes, 37-mm., etc., and the 
next load sent forward can favor that article. 

It has been found impracticable for the munitions offi¬ 
cer to keep in touch with the brigade, for the brigade usually 
moves too rapidly. 

Experience demonstrates that rockets are impractical 
for front line signaling. They require a very long stick, 
which is either broken or lost on the advance, are very 
easily ruined by dampness and are exceedingly bulky to 


AMMUNITION 


109 


transport. If our list of signals be gotten up from Very 
pistol and tromblon (of which there are a very large num¬ 
ber) a supply could be carried in the train and they would 
be ready for use in the front lines during an advance. The 
rockets are only practicable in trench warfare and for short 
objectives. Sketch, page 107, shows the general scheme 
outlined above. 


103. CARGO CAPACITY OF AMMUNITION TRAIN 

Motor battalion, four truck companies (27 two-ton trucks 
each) : 

2,521,200 rounds, caliber .30. 

98,000 rounds, caliber .45. 

1,056 rounds, 155-mm. 

1,056 powder charges, 155-mm. 

3,616 rounds, 75-mm. 

Horsed battalion, one wagon company (33 limbered caisson 
wagons) : 

1,108,800 rounds, caliber .30. 

132,000 rounds, caliber .45. 

Two caisson companies (18 caissons each) : 

3,824 rounds, 75-m. 

104. TRUCK TONNAGE FOR AMMUNITION TRAIN 

The War Department recently prescribed the follow¬ 
ing as the basis for computing the truck tonnage for the 
ammunition train of a combat division: 

1 truck ton for each 250 rifles of infantry or cavalry (except 
detachments at brigade and division headquarters). 

1 truck ton for each 27 automatic rifles. 

1 truck ton for each 5 machine guns. 

1 truck ton for each 2,000 pistols in infantry, cavalry and 
artillery regiments. 

1 truck ton for each 4h, 37-mm. guns. 

15 truck tons for each 8, 75-mm. guns. 

15 truck tons for each 4, 155-mm. guns. . 

9 truck tons for pyrotechnics, grenades and other miscel¬ 
laneous supplies. 


105. AMMUNITION CARRIED IN AMMUNITION TRAIN, 
CAVALRY DIVISION 


Unit 

Cal. .30 

Cal. .45 

75-mm. 

Pyrotechnics 

1 Wagon Co 

950,400 

132,000 

3,816 


2 Caisson Cos 

4 Truck Cos 

2,609,840 

303,300 

3,645 

Remaining Tonnage 

TOTALS 

3,560,240 

435,330 

7,461 

do 















110 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The above table represents approximately: 


For each rifle _ 160 rounds. 

For each pistol _ 21 rounds. 

For each automatic rifle _ 920 rounds. 

For each machine gun _ 5,000 rounds. 

(Including anti-aircraft.) 

For each 75-mm. gun _ 258 rounds. 


106. ARTILLERY BRIGADE MUNITIONS OFFICER 

One provided for staff of the artillery brigade com¬ 
mander. In France, in some cases, a munitions officer was 
also detailed in G4 section to regulate allotment, supply 
and credits of ammunition under G4. In this school, the 
system prescribed in the Field Service Regulations will be 
adhered to and the munitions officer will operate under the 
artillery commander. However, G4 continues to co-or¬ 
dinate this question and the munitions officer, as represen¬ 
tative of the artillery commander, works directly under G4. 

107. FORM FOR AN ORDER ESTABLISHING THE MUNI¬ 
TIONS SERVICE IN A DIVISION 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders! 

No — I 

I. The divisional artillery commander is responsible for the supply of 

artillery and infantry ammunition, pyrotechnics and grenades for 
this division. 

II. He is charged with the maintenance of the prescribed allowances of 

munitions at the various established dumps, also the establish¬ 
ment of such additional regimental and divisional dumps as he may 
deem necessary, after conference with the infantry brigade and 
regimental commanders, to an efficient and adequate munitions 
supply; the prompt supply of munitions to all organizations re¬ 
quiring same, the maintenance of sufficient personnel at divisional 
dumps and with the installation and service of adequate anti-air¬ 
craft defense at each divisional dump. 

III. The combat trains will be kept filled. The divisional ammunition 
train need not be kept filled, but the ammunition for it will be 
conveniently available in the division dumph for expeditious 
loading. 

IV. All requirements for munitions will be communicated direct by 
telephone or by written request to the artillery brigade munitions 
officer, headquarters, 1st Artillery Brigade. 

V. Regimental dumps may be filled from the regimental combat train, 

the combat trains from the ammunition train and the ammunition 
train from the division dumps or from advance army depots or 
corps parks. 







CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD, RAILWAY AND ANTI-AIRCRAFT ARTILLERY 


Authority: Principally data supplied by the Chief of Coast 
Artillery and the Chief of Field Artillery. 


CALIBER AND TYPE 




<:esH 


1. 75-mm. French gun 


2. 4.7-inch gun 


3. 155-mm. French howitzer 


4. 155-mm. French gun 


5. 8-inch howitzer 


6. 9.2-inch howitzer, platform 
mount 


7. 240-mm. howitzer, platform 
mount 


8. 8-inch gun, all-round fire 


9. 10-inch gun, sliding mount 


10. 12-inch gun, sliding mount, 
' 50-caliber 


11. 12-inch mortar, all-round fire 


12. 14-inch navy gun 


13. 3-inch gun, pedestal mount 


14. 3-inch gun, trailer mount 


15. 75-mm. gun, truck mount 


PROJECTILES 

RATE OF FIRE 

Time to em¬ 
place for 
firing or 
change from 
firing to 
traveling 
position 

Weight of _ . Elevation 

Rounds per piece per minute 

Kind Weight bursting Maximum for maximum Number of 

lbs. charge, range, range, degrees range zones 

lbs. yards 

Short Maximum Day of 
Prolonged burst possible fire 

a be 

Shrapnel 16 .17 9700 41 1 

Shell 11 to 12.65 1.60 8700 34 2 i 

Shell 16 .87 12000 34 2 i 

d d e f 

2 10 16 300 

g 

3 min. 

Shrapnel 60 .59 11000 26 1 

Shell 45 6 13000 40 1 

Shell 45 4.20 13000 40 1 

1 2 7 100 

10 min. 

Shrapnel 90 .99 HOOO 40 7 

Shell 95 16 10200 40 7 

Shell 95 9 12000 41 7 

i 2 4 150 

15 min. 
or more 

Shell 95 17 17000 40 4 

Shell 95 " 9 17000 36 4 

i 2 4 100 

6 to 24 hours 

Shell 200 29 12000 45 6 

Shell 200 20 12000 45 6 

h 2 4 100 

6 to 24 hours 

Shell 290 33 13000 46 6 

J i i 80 

8 to 24 hours 

Shell 356 49 14000 44 5 

1 J 2 60 

10 to 24 hours 

Shell 200 30 21000 42 

J 1 1 80 

30 min. 

i i 50 

3J hours 

Shell 510 56 28000 45 

Shell 700 90 45000 40 

1 I i 40 

32 hours 

SVipll 700 94 15000 45 10 

J 1 1 50 

30 min. 

qi 11 1200 154 46000 43 

it!" lino 88 41000 43 

i i i 50 

i J i 50 

31 hours 

ou 1 17 10000 19 

15 1-72 10000 “ 19 

1 5 10 300 


ou 1 1^1 .17 14000 37 

15 1-72 14000 P 37 

1 6 10 300 

5 min. 

oi 1 14 q "17 8000 25 

U S 1.66 8666 * 25 

1 5 10 300 

5 min. 


Piece 

transport 


Ammunition transport 


Horse j 


Tractor, 

5-ton 


Tractor, 

5-ton 


Kind 


Rounds 

per 

vehicle 


Caisson 


Tractor, 

10-ton 


Tractor, 

10-ton 


Truck 


Tractor, 

5-ton 


Tractor, 

5-ton 


Cars 


Cars 


Truck 


Truck 


Truck 


Cars 


Cars 


Cars 


Cars 


Cars 


Truck 


Truck 


Cars 


Cars 


Cars 


Trucks 


Truck 


Trucks 


Trucks 


h 

106 k 


Average 

rate of Day’s 
march, march, 
miles per miles 
hour 


Caisson 1 56 

Truck 49 m 

56 n 


Caisson 1 28 

Truck 40 


40 


20 


14 


10 


■ 96 


48 


24 


3.5 t 


3.5 t 


3 t u 


2.5 t u 


260 


260 


3.5 t u 


3.5 t u 


20 


20 


20 


20 


260 


20 


25 


40 


40 


35 


30 


40 


40 


200 


200 


200 


200 


200 


60 


60 


60 


REMARKS 

a Varies between quite wide limits depending on 
type, material, etc. 
b Approximate. 

c With separate loading ammunition the powder 
charges are made up generally of several parts, 
the shorter ranges and higher angles of fall 
being obtained by omitting one or more parts 
of the charge. 

d Considering the wear and tear on materiel, par¬ 
ticularly the bore. 

e Considering the design of the materiel and the 
skill of the personnel. 

f Day of fire may be defined as an arbitrary num¬ 
ber of rounds per piece which experience has 
shown is a usual expenditure for the caliber in 
question during 24 hours fighting in active 
operations. It is essentially a unit of supply, 
g Varies between wide limits, depending on ter¬ 
rain and conditions of action, 
h For 2-ton metal body ammunition truck; for 
3-ton truck, add 50%. On roads, 
i Fixed charges, normal and reduced, not con¬ 
vertible in the field. 

j For each five combat divisions, there will be one 
regiment of 75 guns carried on motor trucks, 
for strategical mobility. Their tactical mobility 
is slight. 

k Caisson limber, 36 rounds; caisson body, 70 
rounds; piece limber, 36 rounds. 

1 Caisson consists of two caisson bodies, 
m Shrapnel, 
n Shell. 

0 8,000 firing vertically, 
p 9,500 firing vertically, 
q 7,000 firing vertically. 

r Those listed are at present representative 
types; others are in service, and others are 
being developed. 

s A 4.7-inch anti-aircraft gun has been manufac¬ 
tured. Horizontal range about 16,000 yards, 
vertical range about 11,000 yards, 
t Personnel in trucks can move separately at 8 
miles per hour. 

u Tractor column must have center of road, prac¬ 
tically monopolizing a two-way road. 















































































































































































































































































. • 

f 




A 






i .> 


t ■ 


/. 


•; 




I-*) 


I - r 

M ‘A» 


’ 4 • # 


' V 




J 

r 

'r 


♦ 



, > 

• : ■ t V 






• ♦ A * •» » 


• f . r . 



■IT 


I - 


I!-.. I'- 


‘i i': if; *. 

' ♦{ .T 


Tr 




^ yr: > 


\i\ 





.i 


-L. 

.1 


u 


\ ■ ‘ 

r'i .„ ; 


f ^ 


'Jf 


i^. 














i* 


* A* 


4 - ’ 



a 


r f" 

• ' • w 








•* -m. 1-^ -t— 


U<rf.; -cbtfO'/i ..r 


'%A * 




ifl ‘ 


T Vi :r ,’/•..(! .(»-:? 


i A>rw«l 


i ^ , I 




.V 



:/ -I M.J * 

: f- T V •' Uji'-'. 


V,.H ' ' 


■ ' 


{•. ■ r-M r 




F*2 Jt-i' f i 


'■♦N 

• c 


Y 


• -- 
41^ ’ 

f-H rs 


' ’ :*i .1 r 




■V' .fcl 




:.Ji: n.i 


L i- 


I i 






I _ 


^' • 




3i 


- \ •y 


^■1 


~ufti itl^l 


J 
















AMMUNITION 


111 


VI. The commander of each regiment and separate combat organiza¬ 
tion will detail one officer to act as munitions officer. 

The duties of the munitions officer will be as follows: 

A. To keep his commanding officer constantly informed as to the 

amount of ammunition, pyrotechnics and grenades on hand 
within his organization and in the organization dump. 

B. He will make request upon the artillery brigade munitions officer 

for such munitions as may be required to maintain the pre¬ 
scribed allowances within the organization and in the dump, 
and will follow up all such requests with a view of assuring 
the receipt of the requested munitions. In case of any short¬ 
age of munitions within the organization or dump due to 
non-delivery he will immediately report the fact to his com¬ 
manding officer. 

C. To prepare and submit all special and routine rej^rts that may 

be required regarding the receipt and expenditure of muni¬ 
tions. 

VII. Organization commanders are directed to submit to the artillery 
brigade munitions officer the name and rank of the officer de¬ 
tailed in accordance with Par. VI. 

VIII. A. The artillery brigade munitions officer will furnish this office 
with a list of the munition officers of the division as soon as prac¬ 
ticable. 

B. He will furnish this office daily with a statement showing the 
amounts of ammunition, pyrotechnics and grenades received 
and expended within the division. 

By command of Major General X: 

Y, 

Chief of Staff. 


CHAPTER V 


Transportation 


108. RAILWAY TRANSPORTATION 

108^. Movement of United States War Strength Division 

The following table shows the number of trains neces¬ 
sary and the composition of each train for the movement of 
a war strength United States division on American rolling 
stock. The basis of this table was a study made in Wash¬ 
ington with reference to the movement of the 1st Division 
from New York to Washington. This movement of the 1st 
Division is the only movement of a division at war strength 
which has taken place in the United States. The actual 
movement was not a typical war time movement, as the 
division moved in three echelons; one echelon, consisting of 
all motor transportation (less caterpillar tractors), which 
moved overland; another echelon, consisting of all freight 
and animals (less officers’ baggage) but with sufficient per¬ 
sonnel to handle unloading; and the last echelon consisting 
of the personnel of the division. The study received from 
the War Department was found to contain numerical and 
other errors. It is thought that most of these have been 
corrected in the following table. These tables were based 
on the following: 

(a) Tourist sleepers were estimated for the personnel at 40 
men per car. 

(b) Number of animals loaded in one stock car, 20; ex¬ 
cept for artillery horses. Artillery horses were figured at 
18 per car. 

(c) Flat cars were assumed to be 36 feet in length. 

(d) Two motor trucks were loaded on one flat car—three 
could be loaded, but this necessitates tilting one truck, and ex¬ 
perience has demonstrated that this is detrimental to both the 
truck and the car. 

(e) Artillery was loaded on the basis of three 2-element 
vehicles to each flat car. This did not include motor vehicles. 

(f) It was assumed that the movement was to be made in 
the theater of operations, and that it was necessary to move 
the regimental battalion and company detachments of the head¬ 
quarters and supply companies with the units that they serve. 


112 



TRANSPORTATION 


113 


In the table given below, these detachments are indicated by 
giving the headquarters and then the word “detachments.” For 
example: “Regimental headquarters and detachments,” means 
that the regimental headquarters moves on the train as well as 
the detachments of the headquarters and supply companies of the 
regiment which serve the regimental headquarters. 

(g) It will be noted that tourist kitchens and tourist sleepers 
form a part of all trains. When it is considered that there are 
about 790 tourist cars and 14 tourist kitchen cars in the 
United States, it is obvious that the organization is impracticable. 
However, we can substitute for the tourist kitchen a box or bag¬ 
gage car which can be fitted up to take the place of a kitchen. 
In place of the tourist cars we can substitute day coaches and 
standard sleepers. 


114 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


109. ENTRAINING DATA 


NUMBER OF CARS £ 

_ D 


ORGANIZATION 


.2 

3 

o 


Division hqrs ___ - 

Ammunition train : 

8 

9 

12 

1 

1 

1 

81 


Hq and attached organizations- 

Horsed battalion: 

4 

1 

13 

1 

1 

1 

20 


Caisson company —- 

5 

11 

9 

1 

1 

1 

27 


Caisson company, bn hq --- 

6 

12 

9 

1 

1 

1 

29 


Wagon company — -- 

4 

11 

12 

1 

1 

1 

29 


Total for bn--- 

Motor battalion: 

15 

34 

80 

3 

3 

8 

85 


Truck company_ —- 

4 

0 

17 

1 

1 

1 

23 

3 

Truck company, bn hq - 

5 

0 

21 

1 

1 

1 

28 


Total for bn ___ 

18 

0 

76 

4 

4 

4 

102 


Total for ammunition train_ 

Regiment of engineers (sappers) : 

36 

35 

115 

8 

8 

8 

200 


Regtl hqrs, medical, ordnance 

6 

5 

3 

1 

1 

1 

16 


Two companies _—- 

13 

5 

6 

1 

1 

1 

26 


Two companies, bn hq_ 

13 

5 

7 

1 

1 

1 

27 

2 

Total for regiment __ 

45 

20 

23 

4 

4 

4 

96 


Engineer train __ __ 

2 

6 

16 

1 

1 

1 

25 


Military police company, tn hq __ — 
Supply train: 

7 

6 

4 

1 

1 

1 

19 


Truck company _ 

2 

0 

17 

1 

1 

1 

21 

4 

Truck company, hq ____ 

s 

0 

18 

1 

1 

1 

23 


Truck company, medical det_ 

2 

0 

18 

1 

1 

1 

22 


Total for train_ _ 

13 

0 

86 

6 

6 

6 

111 


Field Signal Battalion _ 

Sanitary train: 

Tn hq, one amb company (motor), 

8 camp infirmaries, div med sup 

12 

2 

12 

1 

1 

1 

28 


unit _ _ __ _ 

Hq amb sec, hq. field hosp sec, 1 
amb company (animal-drawn), 

1 field hosp company (animal- 

5 

3 

14 

1 

1 

1 

24 


drawn) ___ 

7 

9 

10 

1 

1 

1 

28 


2 amb companies (motor) _ 

6 

0 

18 

1 

1 

1 

26 


3 field hosp companies (motor) _ 

7 

0 

16 

1 

1 

1 

26 


Total for sanitary train _ _ 

Machine gun battalion (motorized) : 

25 

12 

58 

4 

4 

4 

103 


1 company, hq bn medical, ordnance. 

6 

0 

17 

1 

1 

1 

25 


1 company __ _ _ 

5 

0 

13 

1 

1 

1 

20 


Total for battalion __ _ _ 

Machine gun battalion (horse-drawn) : 

11 

0 

30 

2 

2 

2 

46 


Bn ha and 2 companies . 

11 

7 

8 

1 

1 

1 

28 


2 companies, ord and med __ 

10 

6 

8 

1 

1 

1 

26 


Total for battalion _ __ _ 

Artillery brigade: 

21 

13 

16 

2 

2 

2 

64 


Brig hq, regt hq __ _ _ 

7 

6 

10 

1 

1 

1 

25 


75-mm. gun battery __ 

75-mm. gun battery -)- bn hq or -f" 

5 

10 

8 

1 

2 

1 

26 

8 

supply company _ __ _ 

7 

13 

9 

1 

2 

1 

32 

4 

Regt ho. 75-mm. detachments 

Regt hq, 6" or 4.7" howitzers, ord 

4 

6 

6 

1 

1 

1 

18 


det _ __ _ 

4 

0 

13 

1 

1 

1 

19 


Batterv 6" or 4.7" howitzer.s 

5 

0 

20 

1 

1 

1 

27 

8 

Battery 6" or 4.7" howitzers, bn hq__ 

7 

0 

23 

1 

1 

1 

32 

3 

Total for brigade_ _ 

Infantry regiments : 

119 

144 

236 

88 

21 

4 

21 

638 


Regt ho. ho comnanv, med, ord 

8 

9 

12 

1 

1 

1 

31 

4 

2 rifle companies 

13 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

20 

10 

2 rifle comnanies, brig hq 

14 

3 

4 

1 

1 

1 

23 

2 

2 rifle comnanies, hn hq 

14 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

21 

12 

Machine gun company __ 

5 

2 

4 

1 

1 

1 

13 

4 

Total for four regiments . , , 

394 

94 

122 

32 

32 

32 

674 


Division _ _ _ _ 

714 

354 

767 

97 

86 

86 

2102 



10 




X 

o 

a 




ai 

C 

>-i •'« 

01 

3 


O 


^ <U 

o >> S 

® Si o 
C w p 

3 S 

Si yj3 
0) 

11 C 

u 

©CO 

H S 


















































TRANSPORTATION 


115 


110 . 


Nuni' 

ber 


1 . 

2 . 

3. 

4. 
6 . 
6 . 

7. 

8 . 


9. 

10 . 

11 . 

12 . 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16. 


17 . 

18. 
19. 
2v). 
21 . 
22 . 

23. 

24. 


25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 

32. 


33. 

34. 

35. 

36. 

37. 

38. 

39. 


40. 

41. 

42. 

43. 

44. 

45. 

46. 


List Showing Train Loads 


COMPOSITION OF TRAIN 

2(i Infantry Brigade: 

Hq 2d Inf Brig and 3d Inf Regt. 

Hq 3d Inf Regt; Hq Co; Med; Ord. 
Hq 2d Inf Brig ; Cos A and B 3d Inf. 
Hq 1st Bn 3d Inf; Cos C and D 3d Inf. 
Hq 2d Bn 3d Inf; Cos E and F 3d Inf. 
Cos G and H 3d Inf. 

Hq 3d Bn 3d Inf; Cos I and K 3d Inf. 
Cos L and M 3d Inf. 

MG Co 3d Inf. 


4th Infantry Regiment: 

Hq 4th Inf Regt; Hq Co; Med; Ord. 

Hq 1st Bn 4th Inf; Cos A and B 4th Inf. 
Cos C and D 4th Inf. 

Hq 2d Bn 4th Inf; Cos E and F 4th Inf. 

Cos G and H 4th Inf. 

Hq 3d Bn 4th Inf; Cos I and K 4th Inf. 

Cos L and M 4th Inf. 

MG Co 4th Inf. 


1st Infantry Brigade: 

Hq 1st Inf Brig and 1st Inf Regt. 

Hq 1st Inf Regt; Hq Co; Med; Ord. 

Hq 1st Inf Brig ; Cos A and B 1st Inf. 
Hq 1st Bn 1st Inf; Cos C and D 1st Inf. 
Hq 2d Bn 1st Inf; Cos E and F 1st Inf. 
Cos G and H 1st Inf. 

Hq 3d Bn 1st Inf; Cos I and K 1st Inf. 
Cos L and M 1st Inf. 

MG Co 1st Inf. 

2d Infantry Regiment: 

Hq 2d Inf Regt; Hq Co; Med; Ord. 

Hq and Cos A and B 1st Bn 2d Inf. 

Cos C and D 2d Inf. 

Hq and Cos E and F 2d Bn 2d Inf. 

Cos G and H 2d Inf. 

Hq and Cos I and K 3d Bn 2d Inf. 

Cos L and M 2d Inf. 

MG Co 2d Inf. 


.1st Field Artillery Brigade: 

Hq 1st FA Brig and 1st FA Regt. 

Hq 1st FA Brig ; Hq 1st FA Regt. 
Hq and Btry A 1st Bn 1st FA. 
Btry B and Sup Co 1st FA. 

Btry C 1st FA. 

Hq and Btry D 2d Bn 1st FA. 

Btry E 1st FA. 

Btry F 1st FA. 


2d Field Artillery Regiment: 

Hq 2d FA Regt. 

Hq and Btry A 1st Bn 2d FA. 
Btry B and Sup Co 2d FA. 

Btry C 2d FA. 

Hq and Btry D 2d FA. 

Btry E 2d FA. 

Btry F 2d FA. 












116 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Num¬ 

ber 


47. 

48. 

49. 

50. 

51. 

52. 

53. 


54. 


55. 


56. 


57. 

58, 


59. 


60. 

61. 

62. 

63. 


64. 

65. 

66 . 
' 67. 

68 . 

69. 


70. 

71. 

72. 

73. 


74. 

75. 

76. 

77. 

78. 

79. 

80. 
81. 


82. 

83. 


84. 

85. 


COMPOSITION OF TRAIN 

3d Heavy Artillery Regiment: 

Hq 3d HvA ; Ord; Med. 

Hq and Btry A 1st Bn 3d HvA. 
Btry B 3d HvA. 

Hq and Btry C 2d Bn 3d HvA. 

Btry D 3d HvA. 

Hq and Btry E 3d HvA. 

Btry F 3d HvA. 


Division Headquarters. 


Field Signal Battalion. 


Train Headquarters and Military Police Company. 


1st Machine Gun Battalion. 

Hq and Co A 1st MG Bn; Med; Ord. 
Co B 1st MG Bn. 


1st Engineer Train. 


1st Regiment Engineers. 

Regt Hq 1st Engrs; Med; Ord. 

Hq 1st Bn 1st Engrs ; Cos A and B 1st Engrs. 
Hq 2d Bn 1st Engrs ; Cos C and D Ist Engrs. 
Cos E and F 2d Bn 1st Engrs. 


Supply Train : 

Hq Div Sup Tn ; Co A Div Sup Tn. 

Co B Div Sup Tn. 

Med Det Div Sup Tn ; Co C Div Sup Tn. 
Co D Div Sup Tn. 

Co E Div Sup Tn. 

Co F Div Sup Tn. 


Sanitary Train ; 

Div Sn Tn Hq; 1st Amb Co; Camp Ifmies (8). 
Div Med Sup Unit. 

Hq Amb Sec and Hq F Hosp Sec. 

Sn Tn ; 4th Amb Co; 4th F Hosp Co. 

2d and 3d Amb Cos. 

1st, 2d and 3d F Hosp Cos. 


Ammunition Train : 

Hq 1st Am Tn and attached units. 

Hq Motor Bn and Truck Co No 1, 1st Am Tn. 
Truck Co No 2, 1st Am Tn. 

Truck Co No. 3, 1st Am Tn. 

Truck Co No 4, 1st Am Tn. 

Hq and Caisson Co No 1, Horsed Bn, 1st Am Tn. 
Caisson Co No 2, 1st Am Tn. 

Wagon Co, 1st Am Tn. 


2d Machine Gun Battalion ; 

Hq and Cos A and B 2d MG Bn. 
Cos C and D, 2d MG Bn ; Ord; Med. 


3d Machine Gun Battalion : 

Hq and Cos A and B, 3d MG Bn. 

Cos C and D, 3d MG Bn; Ord; Med. 








TRANSPORTATION 


117 


111. Rail Transportation for Machine Gun Organizations 




1 

NUMBER OF CARS 



ORGANIZATION 

Tourist 

V 

o 

m 

Flat 

Box 

Kitchen 

No of trains 

Total cars 

MG Bn. motorized . 

1 Co ; Bn Hq ; medical; 
ordnance 

6 

0 

17 

1 1 

1 

1 

26 

Total for Bn _ 

5 

0 

13 

1 

1 

1 

20 

MG Bn, Animal-drawn_ 

11 

0 

30 

I 2 

2 

2 

46 

Bn Ha and 2 coa 

11 

7 

8 

1 

1 

1 

28 

2 cos; medical; ordnance __ 

I'J 

6 

8 

1 

1 

1 

26 

Total for Bn_ _ 

21 

13 

16 

2 

2 

2 

64 

Regtl MG Co _ 

5 

2 

4 

1 

! 

1 

1 

13 


Equipment loaded as follows: 

Combat Carts _12 per car 

Wagons _3 per car 

Motor Vehicles _ 2 per car 

Animals _ 20 per stock car 

Harness placed on carts and wagons. 

Rate of march of Motorized Machine Gun Battalion: 

Alone _12 miles per hour 

With other truck transportation_8 miles per hour 

112. Entraining Table 

(See insert between pages 120-121.) 

113. Dimension and Capacities of Railroad Cars 

(See insert between pages 120-121.) 


114. Standard Railroad Troop Train 

1 Locomotive. 

16 Box cars, for men and animals. 

12 Flat cars, for vehicles. 

1 Sleeper or day coach, for officers. 

1 Caboose, for train crew. 

Total 1 locomotive and 30 cars. 

Total length 1,042 feet. 

The above train may have to be split up in runnnig over 
mountains. 
































118 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


115. Trains Required to Move a Division 

From mobilization camp to port of embarkation in 
The World War on an average of: 

62 Trains. 

707 Pullman sleeping cars, or 
622 Coaches. 

62 baggage cars for kitchens. 

62 baggage cars for baggage, etc. 

116. MARINE TRANSPORTATION 

117. Classification of Ships 

Ocean ships are classified under various headings, such 
as: 

(a) Cargo, express, passenger, etc. 

These names are self-descriptive. 

(b) Two-deck, three-deck, etc. 

These names refer to the size of the vessel and not 
necessarily to the number of decks actually in the ship, 
which may be less but not more than the number indicated 
by the name. 

(c) Trunk steamers, whaleback, tank, etc. 

These are special types of vessels of which the trunk 
and whaleback, at one time common, are passing out of use, 
and need not be further considered. 

(d) Tonnage, expressed in various ways, and needing more 

explanation. 

Tonnage is the principal method of classifying ships. 
Four kinds of tonnage expression are used; displacement 
tonnage, dead weight tonnage, gross tonnage and net 
tonnage. 

Displacement tonnage is the actual weight of the vessel, 
and is equal to the weight of the water displaced. Dis¬ 
placement “light” is the weight of the vessel containing 
crew and ordinary stores, but without fuel, cargo, or pas¬ 
sengers. Displacement “loaded” is the weight of the ves¬ 
sel when loaded with fuel, cargo, and passengers, up to the 
full load water line. The “actual” displacement is the 
weight of the vessel at any particular time, and varies be- 


TRANSPORTATION 


119 


tween the displacement “light” and the displacement 
“loaded,” changing from day to day. 

The displacement of a ship at any time is determined 
by the master from observation of the depth of water that 
the ship is drawing. This draft is plotted in a table on cross 
section paper as an argument, from which can be taken the 
displacement corresponding to that draft. 

Dead weight tonnage is the quantity of cargo, passen¬ 
gers and fuel, which a ship is capable of carrying. It is, 
therefore, the difference between displacement “light” and 
displacement “loaded.” Dead weight tonnage is frequently 
the basis on which ships are chartered, and is important 
for that purpose. It shows the capacity of the ship for 
commercial transportation. 

Gross displacement is the interior volume of the ship 
in units of 100 cubic feet, or 2.83 cubic meters for ships 
using the metric system. The determination of gross ton¬ 
nage is made according to certain rules, which vary with 
practically all governments, and which exclude from 
measurement certain parts of ships, such as superstructure, 
hatchways, galleys, light and funnel spaces, etc. There 
are also special gross tonnage measurements used by the 
Suez and Panama Canals, obligatory for ships operating 
through them, and which are in addition to any other rules 
of measurement required by home countries. 

The official marine statistics of the United States are 
published in terms of gross register tons, and most shipping 
lists make the gross register tonnage a basis for classifica¬ 
tion. It is therefore an important unit of measurement. 

Net tonnage is the gross tonnage of a ship, less space 
occupied by engines, bunkers, parts utilized exclusively for 
the navigation of the ship, such as capstans, anchor gear, 
chart houses, donkey engines, and certain other parts. Just 
as in gross tonnage, the exact deductions to be made vary 
in each country and in the Panama and Suez Canals, so do 
the deductions made for net tonnage similarly vary. The 
only difficulty in determining net tonnage is in deciding 
how much space shall be deducted for bunkers, as this varies 
with the length of the voyage, and kind of fuel used. Many 
ships have movable partitions, which increase or decrease 


120 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


bunker spaces, with corresponding decreases or increases of 
cargo space. In the United States, for screw propelled ves¬ 
sels where the engine and propeller room occupy between 
13 and 20 per cent of the gross tonnage of the vessel, an 
arbitrary deduction for all propelling machinery and fuel 
spaces of 32 per cent of the gross tonnage is made. If the 
space occupied by the engine and boiler rooms is less than 
13 per cent, or more than 20 per cent, such space is actually 
measured and 75 per cent is added thereto as an arbitrary 
allowance for bunker space. Most vessels are so constructed 
as to come within the percentage rule, as this is more ad¬ 
vantageous to the vessel owner. 

Net register tonnage is shown on all registers, and is 
the basis throughout the world for tonnage taxes, and for 
commercial charges, such as pilotage, towage, dockage, etc. 
Charter rates are usually based on net tonnage, when dead 
weight tonnage is not used. Because tax and port charges 
are made on the basis of net tonnage, there is an incentive 
to ship owners to understate this tonnage, and in handling 
ships care must be taken to determine just how the net 
tonnage was arrived at. 

United States vessels are required by law to be docu¬ 
mented in official lists, published by the commissioner of 
navigation, which give data as to tonnage, etc. Vessels 
desiring to engage in the foreign trade or in the whale 
fisheries are registered; if engaged in the coastwise trade, 
they are enrolled, while small craft used for pleasure pur¬ 
poses or the harbor services are licensed. Coastwise vessels 
which are enrolled, may be transferred to the registered 
class, but until so transferred, cannot undertake foreign 
voyages. 

118. Chartering of Ships 

Where the amount of traffic is such that entire ships 
are necessary to handle the business, ships are ordinarily 
chartered. Such charters are either time charters or trip 
charters. 

The contract for the use of a ship is known as a '‘charter 
party.'' It is generally a lengthy document setting forth 
in great detail the conditions agreed upon. In time charters 


1 


m 

O 

< 

H 

m 

O 

g 

< 

H 

Q 


< pq o 


o 

a 

S 


V 

3 

u 

C4 

a 

Q 




I 

I 

I 

I 

o 


Z 

O K 



> o 


Q >H 

I z 

1 < 

1 Oh 

i § 

I O 
O 
U 
< 

o 

H 




• V 

H 


tt 

c 

c 

• M 

rt 

c 




CO I I I 

Z i i I 

O ill 

I i i ■ i 

CO I I I 

i 1 1 I 

gill 

< I I I 

p C W o 

z 


CO 

H 

2 

p 


o 


?q 


^3 


CO 




iC 




oo 




'M 


CO 




iC. 




00 ' 


(N 


CM 


(M 


CO 

(M 




CM 

CVJ 


t> 

CM 


CM 


UC ! 
03 


oc 

CM 


o 


Oi 

CM 


U 

W 




















































































































120 


bunker spac* 
cargo space, 
sels where 1 
13 and 20 p 
arbitrary d( 
spaces of 32 
space occup 
13 per cent, 
measured a 
allowance f( 
as to come 
vantageous 

Net re 
the basis tj 
commercial 
Charter rai 
weight ton 
are made o 
to ship ow] 
ships care 
tonnage wj 

Unitec 
mented in 
navigation 
desiring t( 
fisheries a 
they are e 
poses or tl 
which are 
class, but 
voyages. 

118. Char 

Wher 
are necesi 
chartered 
charters. 

Thee 
party.'' 
in great c 


113. Dimensions and Capacities of Railroad Cars 


PASSENGER CARS 


Seating capacity (maximum at 2 persons 

to each double seat) _ 

Seating capacity at 3 persons to every 2 

double seats - 

Sleeping capacity (maximum) at 2 persons 

per berth - 

Sleeping capacity at 3 persons per section_ 

Sleeping capacity at 1 person per berth_ 

Number of sections - 

Length in feet- 


Day 

Standard 

Tourist 

Coach 

Sleeper 

Sleeper 

60 to 70 

56 to 64 

48 to 64 

45 to 48 

42 to 48 

36 to 48 


66 to 64 

48 to 64 


42 to 48 

36 to 48 


28 to 32 

24 to 32 


14 to 16 

14 or 16 

66 to 75 

65 to 80 

66 to 76 


BAGGAGE AND FREIGHT CARS 


















Palace Stock 









O 


Box Steel Under Frame 

Box 

Automobile 

Box 

Furniture 

Refrigerator 

Stock Ordinary 





Flats 



Gondolas 



















Ms 

^ a 

With 

Stalls 








Freight or baggage in tons- 
C^pacity in cubic feet- 

30 40 

3300 4000 

30 

1884 

30 

2288 

40 

2448 

40 

2800 

50 

2600 

50 

3200 

40 

4500 

30 

1976 

60 

3300 

60 

3600 

20 

1800 

30 

2100 

30 40 

2184 2700 




30 

2000 

40 

2200 

60 

2700 

30 

1021 

60 

1373 

60 

886 

70 

1331 

Length in feet, inside mea- 

60 

70 

33 

34 

36 

40 

36 

40 

60 

33.9 

40 

60 

31.6 

35 

36 40 

44 

48 

48 

35 

40 

60 

33 

38 

40 

46 

Width in feet, inside mea- 

8 

8 

8.2 

8.4 

8.6 

8.6 

8.6 

8.1 

9 

8.2 

8.1 

8.6 

8.4 

8.4 

8.6 8.8 

8 

s,. 

8.6 

8.6 

9.6 

9.4 

8.4 

9.3 

8.9 

9.3 

He^ht in feet, inside mea- 

T.fi 

7.6 

6.9 

8 

8 

8 

8.1 

9.1 

10 

7.2 

9 

8.7 

7.6 

7.6 

7 8 

18 to 22 

22 to 26 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

— 

— 


3.9 

3.9 

2.6 

3 

Number of animals, horses 















16 

26 

20 

— 

— 

































Note —Fifty-foot end door auto car will hold 2 Standard Liberty or 2 Riker 3J-ton trucks, with Dodge light truck or passenger car in body of each truck (tops 
down and wind shield removed), or 3 G. M. C. ambulances, or 3 passenger cars or Dodge light trucks. Forty-foot end door auto car will hold 1 Standard Liberty truck 
1 ambulance or nassensrer car or lierht truck, or 3 Dodge passenger cars or 3 light trucks. -r**! x i xi. x-n 

Forty-foot flat will hold 3 escort wagons or 3 ambulances or 2 escort wagons and 1 water wagon, or 2 Standard 3i-ton Liberty or Riker trucks, or three artillery 


vehicles complete. 

Fifty-foot flat or gondola will hold 2 
Ordinary 36-foot stock car will hold 
or wheel mules or 24 to 26 cavalry horses 


Standard Liberty or Riker trucks or 3 G. 
18 artilleiy horses or wheel mules or 22 
or lead mules. 


M. C. ambulances, properly blocked, 
cavalry horses or lead mules. Ordinary 


40-foot stock car will hold 22 artillery horses 







































120 


bunker spac 
cargo space 
sels where 
13 and 20 ] 
arbitrary d 
spaces of 3: 
space occuf 
13 per cent 
measured a 
allowance f 
as to come 
vantageous 

Net re 
the basis t 
commercia: 
Charter ra 
weight ton 
are made c 
to ship ow 
ships care 
tonnage w: 

Unitec 
mented in 
navigation 
desiring ti 
fisheries a 
they are e 
poses or tl 
which are 
class, but 
voyages. 

118. Char 

Wher 
are neces; 
chartered 
charters. 

Thee 
party.” 
in great c 


113. Dimensions and Capacities of Railroad Cars 


Seating capacity (maximum at 2 persons 

to each double seat) _ 

Seating capacity at 3 persons to every 2 

double seats _ 

Sleeping capacity (maximum) at 2 persons 
per berth - 


PASSENGER CARS 

Day Standard Tourist 

Coach Sleeper Sleeper 


Sleeping capacity at 
Number of sections . 


1 person per berth-_ 


. . 60 

to 

70 

56 

to 

64 

48 

to 

64 

_ 45 

to 

00 

•«3' 

42 

to 

48 ■ 

36 

to 

48 




56 

to 

64 

48 

to 

64 




42 

to 

48 

36 

to 

48 

_ 



28 

to 

32 

24 

to 

32 




14 

to 

16 

14 

or 

16 

... 65 

to 

75 

65 

to 

80 

65 

to 

75 


BAGGAGE AND FREIGHT CARS 















• 




Palace Stock 











Box Steel Under Frame 

Box 

Automobile 


Box 

Furniture 


Refrigerator 

Stock Ordinary 





Flats 



Gondolas 



fco 

Cj 

be 

















D 

xl2 









be 


















p 








Freight or baggage in tons- 
Capacity in cubic feet- 

30 40 

3300 4000 

30 

1884 

30 

2288 

40 

2448 

40 

2800 

50 

2600 

50 40 

3200 4500 

30 

1975 

50 60 

3300 3600 

20 

1800 

30 

2100 

30 

2184 

40 

2700 




30 

2000 

40 

2200 

60 

2700 

SO 

1021 

60 

1373 

60 

886 

70 

1331 

Length in feet, inside mea- 

60 

70 

33 

34 

36 

40 

36 

40 

50 

33.9 

40 

50 

31.6 

35 

36 

40 

44 

48 

48 

35 

40 

60 

33 

38 

40 

46 

Width in feet, inside mea- 

8 

8 

8.2 

8.4 

8.6 

8.6 

8.6 

8.1 

9 

8.2 

8.1 

8.6 

8.4 

8.4 

8.6 

8.8 

8 

8.6 

8.6 

8.6 

9.6 

9.4 

8.4 

9.3 

8.9 

9.3 

Height in feet, inside mea- 

7.6 


6.9 

8 

8 

'8 

8.1 

9.1 

10 

7.2 

9 

8.7 

7.6 

7.6 

7 

18 

22 

8 

to 22 
to 26 

7.6 

7.6 

7.6 

— 

— 


3.9 

3.9 

2.6 

3 

Number of animals, horses 














16 

26 

20 


_ 



























































'/o^Sorfiat rmToTd%‘="icort“^agons"tr raLb'ilank""or"2"e\^coTt’^wagons'lnd /water wagon, or 2 Standard 3i-ton Liberty or Riker trucks, or three artillery 
or wheel mules or 24 to 26 cavalry horses or lead mules. 






































120 


bunker spac 
cargo space 
sels where 
13 and 20 ] 
arbitrary d 
spaces of 3: 
space occui 
13 per cent 
measured a 
allowance f 
as to come 
vantageous 

Net re 
the basis t 
commerciaj 
Charter ra 
weight ton 
are made c 
to ship ow 
ships care 
tonnage wj 

Unitec 
mented in 
navigation 
desiring t( 
fisheries a 
they are e 
poses or tl 
which are 
class, but 
voyages. 

118. Char 

Wher 
are neces; 
chartered 
charters. 

Thee 
party.'' 
in great c 


TRANSPORTATION 


121 


the party chartering the vessels agrees to pay a fixed sum 
per day for the use of the vessel, and usually furnishes 
the fuel, and sometimes the oil and water, necessary for 
the operation of the vessel. The other running expenses 
of the ship, consisting of ordinary repairs, wages of the 
master and crew, etc., are generally borne by the owners. 
In trip charters a specified sum is paid for the voyage, based 
on the size of the ship, or on the quantity of cargo actually 
loaded into it. 

119. Selection and Assignment of Ships 

Military movement by marine transportation may be 
of such a size as to require the use of every available ship. 
On the other hand, in small wars, or for minor expeditions 
the number of ships available may be in excess of the num¬ 
ber required. 

In the first case the military problem is to utilize to 
the maximum every ship obtained. In the second case 
some selection can usually be had, and naturally it is de¬ 
sirable to make the best selection. 

The following paragraphs give information with re¬ 
gard to ships, indicating the use to which they may be put, 
and certain points showing desirability for particular pur¬ 
poses. 

All ships before being chartered should be inspected. 
When ships are at a distant point, they may have to be 
chartered on an examination of the plans. Inspection of 
a ship includes inspection of hull, equipment, and machinery. 
It takes time to prepare a ship for inspection which should 
be held when holds and bunkers are empty. An inspection 
should not be required unless there is a reasonable pros¬ 
pect of chartering the vessel, should the result of the in¬ 
spection show the ship to be suitable for the purposes 
desired. 

Ship plans consist of: 

(a) Sheer drawing, which is an elevation plan showing longi¬ 
tudinal contours, position of deck, water lines, and some other 
details. 

(b) Body plans, which are sectional drawings of the ship 
at various points. 

(c) Half breadth plans, showing horizontal sections of the 
ship at various water lines. 

(d) Specifications, which are statements of details covering 
what is shown on plans, and some not shown. 


122 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The actual inspection of the ship should be made by 
licensed surveyors. For the United States government this 
may be done by inspectors of the Steamboat Inspection Ser¬ 
vice or by naval officers. Commercial surveyors can also 
be obtained for small fees at all important ports. 

It ordinarily takes one to two days to inspect a ship, 
the hull, equipment and machinery being inspected simul¬ 
taneously by different surveyors, as many working as the 
size of the ship requires. If inspection in dry dock is neces¬ 
sary, arrangements must be made for use of the dock. For 
rating purposes this depends upon the age of the ship, and 
the material of which it is constructed, a dry dock inspection 
being required once in so many years. 

When a ship is absent, and decision as to charter must 
be made without delay, the ship’s rating in a standard 
register, such as Lloyd’s shipping register, may be pro¬ 
visionally accepted, as to its general condition. 

The standard rating at Lloyd’s is 100 A1—L. M. C. 
The 100 A refers to the ship’s seaworthiness; a per cent 
lower than 100 may be given. Nothing below 90 A should 
be accepted. Figure 1 refers to the ship’s equipment. If 
complete it is entitled to 1, if not, it gets nothing. L. M. C. 
stands for Lloyd’s Machinery Certificate, and indicates that 
same is in satisfactory condition. 

The corresponding rating for American ships in for¬ 
eign trade in the “Record of American Shipping” is A-l-M.C. 
In addition there are special ratings for refrigerator ships, 
grain ships, etc. 

Ships may have no commercial rating due to: 

(a) Surveyed, but found in such poor condition as to not 
be entitled to a rating. 

(b) Last survey rating expired, and no opportunity for re¬ 
inspection. 

(c) Owners provide their own insurance, and not selling 
vessels, do not desire rating with attendant expense for inspec¬ 
tion. United States government vessels are in this class, also 
those of certain large commercial companies. 

When choice exists as to selection of ships, it is advis¬ 
able to inquire as to the quantity of fuel and ship stores 
usually expended. Old vessels often require much more 
coal and stores than more modern ones. Some of the ancient 
United States transports on the Pacific burn several times 


TRANSPORTATION 


123 


as much coal as modern ships of the same capacity. Such old 
ships require a longer time in port to be coaled, a greater 
number of coal passers, firemen, etc., and a greater amount 
of bunker space, with corresponding decrease of space avail¬ 
able for cargo and passengers. 

For ships to be used as troop ships, special examination 
must be made as to cooking and heat arrangements, and 
water supply for troop decks. Ships converted from cargo 
carriers must usually have the facilities installed. Life 
saving appliances are now, by law, required to be sufficient 
for the total number of passengers carried on board, but for 
converted cargo ships the original number must be in¬ 
creased. An examination must be made to determine how 
additional lifeboats and rafts required may be loaded on 
to a ship without too much disturbing its stability. 

It is necessary that ships be so loaded as to keep the 
center of gravity within certain limits. Improper loading, 
such as placing heavy stores near the top and light stores 
at the bottom, are liable to raise the center of gravity so 
much as to make it dangerous for a vessel to proceed to sea. 
Ships vary as to stability and cannot be loaded indiscrim¬ 
inately. Care must be taken in selecting cargo ships, as 
military stores may vary greatly from commercial stores. 

The maximum draft of a ship is important only where 
it is large and the ship is intended to operate in small har¬ 
bors. 

Heights between decks are important in troop carrying 
ships as they determine the number of bunks that can be 
placed in a tier, and whether animals can be carried. Care 
must be taken to determine whether the actual height be¬ 
tween decks has been reduced by steam pipes or other ob¬ 
structions. 

Ships intended to carry animals or for use as hospital 
ships should be as steady as possible. This steadiness de¬ 
pends upon the periodic time of the ship, vessels that have 
the slowest periodic time rolling least. The equation for 
the periodic time is: 



where tt equals 3.1415; g.= acceleration due to gravity, e = 
radius of gyration and m = metacentric height. The radius 


124 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


of gyration where not known can be assumed without ma¬ 
terial error to be equal to one-third the breadth of the ship. 
The metacentric height is variable, depending upon the load¬ 
ing, but should be shown on the ship’s specifications. For 
ocean cargo ships, it varies between 1 foot and 2 feet, and 
for passenger ships between i foot and 2 feet. The 
larger value should be used when the ship is deeply laden. 
The vessel’s pitching can be determined by a similar equa¬ 
tion, but for most ships can be assumed to be about one-half 
the time for rolling. These equations are for unrestricted 
rolling or pitching; if a ship has anti-rolling devices, such 
as bilge keels, water tanks, gyroscopic stabilizers, etc., the 
equations must be modified, being increased according to 
devices installed by a suitable factor greater than 1. 

Steering qualities of ships are important under certain 
conditions, pointed out later. Ships with unbalanced rud¬ 
ders and hand steering gears require considerable time to 
put the helm hard over at full speed. The tactical diameter 
of a ship is the space required to turn the ship 180°, and 
should be known for use in case maneuvering in convoys is 
necessary. 

The following information concerning each ship should 
be filed for determining the best use at which to employ 
the ship and for use in providing spare parts, and providing 
for repairs: 

(a) Name of owners; form and conditions of charter; ton¬ 
nage, gross, net and dead weight; passenger and cargo capacity; 
speed; length, breadth, depth and draft, loaded. 

(b) Number and kind of decks. Capacity of each for pas¬ 
sengers, animals or cargo. Nature of superstructures if any. 

(c) The rig of the vessel. 

(d) Wireless equipment. Should have a wave length of 600 
feet, with at least two other lengths. 

(e) Number, size, and position of hatches and side ports. 
This is to determine the maximum size of pieces of cargo that 
can be loaded. 

(f) Number of winches and booms. Whether ship can load 
both port and starboard side simultaneously. Greatest weight 
that can be hoisted. 

(g) Special facilities for dry or perishable goods (such ships 

receive at Lloyd’s a special rating of These facilities are 

particularly suitable for transportation of fresh vegetables. 

(h) Cooking facilities for troops. Heating and water sys¬ 
tems. 

(i) Electric installation, type and capacity. In case of con¬ 
verted cargo ships note whether the capacity of the plant is 
sufficient for troop decks. 


TRANSPORTATION 


125 


(j) Condition of ship’s hull, including tail shaft. Date last 
cleaned. Actual speed of ship. Best speed in past. 

(k) Condition of vessel’s equipment; number of anchors, 
chains, etc.; whether same have been proved. 

(l) Special deck structures not shown on plans. If any, type 
and location. 

(m) Whether decks are suitable for troops and animals, prop¬ 
erly lighted and ventilated, whether space is obstructed by pillars, 
pipes, etc. Plans should show exactly what spaces are available. 

(n) Systems of fire protection. Can live steam be turned 
into holds ? 

(o) Method of loading coal into ship. Quantity that can 
be taken on board per hour. Capacity of bunkers. Fuel con¬ 
sumption when running, and when standing by. 

(p) Nature of sanitary system. Whether pumps and tanks 
are of sufficient size for proposed troop requirements. 

(q) Nature of life saving appliances, with capacity. Con¬ 
dition of bulkheads. Can latter be controlled from the bridge? 

(r) Heating system. Nature of system employed. Is it 
sufficient for troop decks? 

The following data should be kept on file with regard 
to ship machinery: 

A. Main Engines: 

a. Type of machinery; reciprocating, turbine, gas, etc. 

b. Number and size of cylinders, turbines, etc. 

c. Kind and quantity of cylinder and engine oils used. 

d. Name of makers, and numbers of machinery installed. Note 
whether fittings are American or British standard. 

e. Number and type of screws, valve gears, etc., installed. 

B. Auxiliary Engines: 

a. For each engine, same as for main engines. 

C. Special Data for Refrigerator Machinery: 

a. Type of machinery; single, duplex, etc. 

b. System; air, brine, ammonia, etc. 

c. Method of insulation; air, cork, charcoal, etc. Size and 
temperature of each insulation chamber. 

d. Ice capacity per day. Amount of cargo refrigeration 
space. 

jSfoTE:—Ships with refrigerator machinery receive a rating of R. M. C. at Lloyds. 

D. Special Data for Electrical Machinery: 

a. Voltage, amperage, capacity. 

b. Type of current, direct or alternating. If latter, number 

of pll3.SGS Gt-C. 

c. Detailed statement as to what current is used for; lights, 
blowers, fans, etc., with quantity of current needed for each pur¬ 
pose. Quantity of excess current. 

E. Boilers: 

a. Exact dimensions of boilers, with connections, including 

grates. . . 

b. Number and type of feed pumps, or injectors. 


126 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


c. Nature of condensing apparatus. 

d. Nature of feed water heaters. 

e. Nature of super-heaters, if used. 

f. Nature of draft, natural or forced. If latter, type and 
size of blowers. 

g. Kind of fuel used. 

h. Nature of automatic stokers, if any. 

i. Method of ash disposal. 

j. Nature of furnaces; plain, ribbed, corrugated, etc. 

The following general ship data should be noted: 

a. Ship’s official registry number. 

b. Ship’s official code letters. 

c. Number of officers and men, with salaries in deck, engine 
and steward departments. 


120. Marine Troop Movements and Tactics 

Ocean troop movement may be classified under two 
headings: 

a. When the movement is from an established port of em¬ 
barkation to another established port of debarkation. 

b. Where movement is from an established port of embarka¬ 
tion, to a point where there are little or no disembarkation 
facilities, or where active resistance from the enemy may be ex¬ 
pected. 

Examples of the first class are ordinary peace move¬ 
ments and the extensive troop movements in The World 
War from the United States and England to France. Ex¬ 
amples of the second class are the troop m^ovements from 
the allied countries to the Dardanelles, where landings Were 
made in face of resistance from hostile coast defenses. Other 
examples are troop movements in The World War by the 
allies in Mesopotamia and by the United States in the 
Spanish War to Cuba, Porto Rico, and the Philippines, where 
landings were made at points with little or no disembarka¬ 
tion facilities, but not under active opposition of the enemy. 

As a general rule, marine transportation movements 
of the first class, that is, between established ports, should 
be under control of marine transportation officers, who 
should be thoroughly familiar with the use of ships and able 
to operate them to the maximum advantage and the least 
disruption of military organizations. 

In movements between established ports it is desirable 
that ships be loaded to maximum capacity when the move¬ 
ment is more than a small one. As the troop capacity of 


TRANSPORTATION 


127 


ships seldom equals the exact size of military organizations, 
or combination of organizations, it is frequently necessary 
to divide organizations between various ships, and the same 
is true of animals and cargo pertaining to an organization. 
Care should be taken that an organization with its cargo, 
animals, etc., is not sent on widely separated vessels. But 
it is quite impracticable to arrange invariably for complete 
units to go on the same ship, without materially reducing 
the capacity of ships. 

In movements of the second class, where tactical con¬ 
ditions are paramount, it is absolutely essential that the 
ships should be loaded so that stores first needed should 
be on top and that the troops should be assured of the 
necessary arms, ammunition and subsistence immediately 
after landing. In this case, it may be necessary to have 
organizations complete on the vessel, and arrangements 
must be made to use any spaces left over for other purposes. 

As an illustration of the trouble and delays that may 
be caused by an improper consideration of tactical require¬ 
ments, in the first disembarkation in the Dardanelles, ships 
arrived with cargo on top for which no facilities for unload¬ 
ing existed, while cargo that could be handled and was much 
needed was buried underneath the unremovable stores. These 
transports had to be sent back to Alexandria, Egypt, the 
nearest available port, to be unloaded and reloaded properly. 
Naturally much delay and inconvenience resulted. 

Movements of the second class should be made pri¬ 
marily with a view to the tactical conditions which are ex¬ 
pected to be met with at point of disembarkation, and in 
these movements the commanding officer in charge of the 
disembarkation, assisted by such marine experts as neces¬ 
sary, should have final decision on the loading and equip¬ 
ment of ships, including the providing of necessary debark¬ 
ation facilities. 

A clear distinction must be made between marine trans¬ 
portation movements where tactical requirements are in¬ 
volved and those in which there is no such condition. In 
prior case, preparations for proper consideration of marine 
matters must be made by providing the necessary technical 
staff as assistants to G4’s and G3’s, to enable disembarka- 


128 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


tion to be made with maximum efficiency, but the respon¬ 
sibility for arrangements made should be with the comman¬ 
der of the debarking forces. 

War Department 

Transportation Service—Water Transportation Branch 
Vessels Operation Section 

121. Data on Army Transports 

September 1, 1919. 

No. 

Vessels 

Troop Transports _ 46 

Troop Transports which were formerly Cargo Transports- 68 

Ex-German Liners assigned to the United States upon 

signing the Armistice_ 10 

Navy Battleships and Cruisers used in bringing troops to U. S- 24 

Navy Vessels assigned as troop transports for U. S. Coastwise 

Service—Transferred from Cross Channel Service- 4 

Navy Vessels used as Hospital Ships_ 2 

Assigned foreign troop transports_ 11 

Army Transports in Philippine and Panama Service_ 6 

Troop transports in preparation_ 11 


182 

Cargo Vessels in Trans-Atlantic Service _395 

Cargo Vessels in Cross Channel Service_ 82 

Cargo Vessels formerly Navy account loaned to Army for cross 

channel trade_ 4 

Swedish Vessels operation in cross channel service for 

account of A.E.F._ 53 

British Vessels allocated by Inter-Allied Maritime Transport 

Council for use of War Department (500,000-ton agreement) 51 
British Vessels assigned for use of War Department in exchange 
for vessels allocated to British by shipping control committee 
of the War Department_ 13 


Total _598 


Grand Total_780 

122. MOTOR TRANSPORTATION 

123. Standard Motor Truck Company 

Consists of: 

2 officers and 80 enlisted men. 

1 motor car, light open. 

1 motorcycle with side car. 

27 trucks, cargo (Class A or B, divided into 3 sections of 9 
trucks each). 

2 trucks, cargo (1 light repair and 1 for company sup¬ 
plies, Class AA). 

2 trucks, tank. 

1 kitchen, rolling, trailmobile. 




















OVERSEAS TONNAGE DATA—INFANTRY DIVISION 


Infantry Division—(T. O. 1918, Series “A”) 
TONNAGE DATA 


ORGANIZATIONS 

No. of 
Units 

(A) 

PERSONNEL 

(B) 

Total 

Animals 

(C) 

(1) Rations 

(*1\ Kora.crft 

SHIP 

T 

0 N S 

Officers 

Enlisted 

Men 

3 Days’ 
Reserve 

4 Days’ 
Field 

15 Days’ 
Garrison 

Oats 

20 Days’ 
Hay 

(7) 

Small Arms 

(8) 

Artillery 

va; 

Extra 

clothing, and 
Offrs. baggage 

Organization 

Equipment 

Cb) 

War Set 

KV 

Tentage, 
Including 
Stoves & Cots 

ADimai 

Trains 

■arawn veni 

Guns, 

Caissons 

cies ( 0 ) 

Machine 

Guns 

MOior-( 

Trains 

irawn Vehn 

Guns, 

Caissons 

2 les (6) 

Machine 

Guns 

GRAND 

TOTALS 

Division Headquarters.. . . 

1 

46 

90 

65 

1 

1.5 

8 

15 

50 

1 


11 

4 

15 




150 



9F\f\ 

Headquarters Troop- 

1 

4 

148 

103 

1 

2 

9 

24 

80 

3 


2 

2 

6 

46 





175 

Infty. Brig. Headquarters... 

2 

10 

40 

34 

.33 

.6 

3 

8 

26 



3 

2 

6 

12 



20 



81 

Infty. Regiments_ 

4 

428 

14,766 

1,540 

102 

156 

846 

360 

1,185 

333 


204 

72 

798 

2,980 


38 

40 



7 114 

F. A. Brig. Headquarters_ 

1 

9 

54 

57 

.33 

.5 

3 

13 

44 



2 

1 

6 

' 33 


10 



113 

F. A. Regiments (3-iiich)_ 

2 

126 

2,960 

2,660 

21 

32 

172 

622 

2,046 

18 

362 

48 

30 

162 

1,204 

1,104 


100 



6,911 

F. A. Regiment (4.7 or 6-in.). _ 

1 

71 

1,687 


11 

17 

93 



10 

189 

26 

16 

87 




(g)3,991 

324 


4 764 

Trench Mortar Battery... . 

1 

5 

172 


1 

2 

10 




20 

2 

1 

9 




264 

15 


324 

Cavalry Regiment.__ ___ ... 

1 

96 

1,807 

2,248 

13 

20 

106 

526 

1,730 

28 

28 

(h)127 

100 

762 


4 

10 


3,454 

Engineer Regiment_ 

1 

67 

1,896 

327 

13 

20 

109 

77 

252 

26 


26 

7 

103 

589 



23 



1^245 

Inft 3 ^ M. G. Battalion.... 

2 

66 

1,496 

476 

11 

15 

86 

111 

366 ' 

24 


23 

13 

82 

458 


76 




1^266 

Division M.G. Battalion._ 

1 

16 

377 


3 

4 

22 



6 


6 

3 

21 




224 


(C)360 

649 

Field Signal Battalion_ ... 

1 

16 

473 

26 

4 

6 

27 

6 

20 

3 


7 

15 

26 

147 



290 


550 

Hdq'rs Trains—Mil. Police... 

1 

15 

359 

349 

3 

4 

21 

82 

269 

3 


6 ' 

4 

20 

67 



18 



497 

Ammunition Train.. ..._ 

1 

38 

1,296 

634 

9 

14 

74 

148 

487 

16 


10 

14 

70 

608 

(d)219 


3,879 



5,548 

Sanitar^^ Train... .. 

1 

61 

1,004 

205 

7 

11 

69 

48 

168 



20 

(e)98 

56 

244 


1,435 



2,136 

Supply Train__ 

1 

16 

485 


4 

5 

28 



7 


7 

11 

26 




3,655 



3,743 

Engineer Train.. __ 

1 

2 

82 

no 

1 

1 

5 

26 

86 



1 

(f)98 

6 

119 



234 



676 

Mobile Ord. Repair Shop_ 

1 

3 

45 


.6 

.6 

3 





1 

1 

3 




379 



388 

Total 


1,073 

29,126 

8,834 

207 

312 

1,684 

2,066 

6,798 

478 

561 

433 

619 

1,602 

7,269 

1,323 

118 

14,722 

339 

360 

38,790 

These figures represent ratio of 1 ship ton to 1 short ton 

Number of cubic feet to 1 short ton 

1.60 

60 

1.60 

60 

1.50 

60 

1.95 

78 

5,425 

217 

.6825 

27.3 

.6335 

21.34 

1.75 

70 

1.76 

70 

3.25 

130 

5.50 

220 

2.625 

105 

2.00 

80 

4.50 

1 180 

1 

' 2.00 
‘ 80 

4.50 

180 



REMARKS 


(a) Includes officers’ field al¬ 
lowance of baggage and 10 
lbs. additional for each sol¬ 
dier, to cover surplus cloth¬ 
ing,viz., overcoat, mosquito 
bar, etc. 

(b) Includes all organization 
property usually carried in 
the combat and field trains, 
except heavy tentage, 
stoves, cots, etc., ammuni¬ 
tion, rations and forage. 

(c) Special trucks, designed to 
carry in each, 1 gun squad, 
gun and equipment. 

(d) Caissons and two (2) extra 
field guns. 

(e) Includes field hospital. 

(f) Includes all supplies pre¬ 
scribed to be carried on 
engineer train. 

(g) Artillery tractors. One 
short ton equals 70 cu. ft. 


MISCELLANEOUS: 
Rations 
(1) Reserve 
(1) Field 
(1) Garrison 


Number per ship ton 
448 rations 
384 rations 
269 rations 


(Field ration equals reserve ration plus lb.) 


Forage: * Number per ship ton 

(2) Oats 86 rations 

(2) Hay 26 rations 

(Hay: Usual commercial bales) 


(4) Applicable to all troops: per 1000 men equals 60 ship tons 

Omitting Cots: per 1000 men equals 30 ship tons 

(5) Uncrated and stowed in tiers: 

Train vehicles: wheels removed, bodies filled and 

stowed separately. All animal equipment shipped wdth vehicles. 

(7) Small arms ammunition shipped with organizations. 

NOTE: This data is compiled for use in connection with the initial movement of an expeditionary 
force BY WATER, prepared to take the field immediately upon debarking. 


Prepared in the Office of the Chief of Transportation 
War Department, Washington, D. C, 


AMMUNITION: 

(8) Small'Arms; 600 rds. per rifle 

1000 rds. per automatic rifle 
6000 rds. per machine gun 
100 rds. per pistol or revolver 
5000 rds. for 3-inch trench mortar 
(3) Artillery: Three days’ fire for guns, howitzers and mortars. 

(6) Uncrated and stowed in tiers: 

Motorized train vehicles: bodies filled with suitable broken cargo. 
Easily removable bodies, removed from chassis and stowed separately. 
(8) Artillery ammunition shipped with guns. 


Approved: 

January 8,1920. FRANK T. HINES, 

Brigadier General, G.S., 
Chief of Transportation. 


(C) Ship ton equals 40 cubic feet. 
To reduce ship tons to short 
tons, multiply by 40 and divide 
by number of cubic feet equal 
to 1 short ton. 


(h) Includes mounted equip¬ 
ment less that carried by 
the soldier when tempora¬ 
rily separated from his 
mount. 

Dead weight tonnage required 
for transportation of personnel 
and animals. 

(A) Per man, 3^ dead weight 
tons. 

(B) Per animal, 6 dead weight 
tons. 
































































































11 


ti 

si 

d 


i: 


T: 

T 

E 

N 

N 

N 

A 

A 

T; 


C; 

Ci 

C: 


S> 

B] 

B] 


11 


TRANSPORTATION 


129 


124. Standard Motorcycle Company 
Consists of: 

2 officers and 38 enlisted men. 

32 motorcycles with side cars. 

2 trucks, cargo (for company supplies, Class AA). 

125. Headquarters Motor Command 

A supervising organization, provided on the basis of one 
for every four motor truck or motorcycle companies, for 
motor organizations operating in the same locality which 
have not been assigned to divisions or other units. Its 
organization is as follows: 

4 officers and 11 enlisted men. 

2 motor cars (1 light open and 1 light closed). 

1 truck, cargo (for supplies. Class AA). 

2 motorcycles with side cars. 

126. Definitions 

Motor truck units are referred to as: 

A group convoy or motor train (several companies operating 
together). 

A convoy (more than 1 truck company). 

A company (27 trucks of 3 sections of 9 trucks each). 

A section (9 trucks). 

A section (less 1, 2 or 3 trucks, etc.)—any unit less than a 
section. 

127. Assignment of Motor Transportation in the Theater of 
Operations 

It may be taken as a general rule that motor transpor¬ 
tation should be assigned as follows: 


Communications Zone_10% 

Combat Zone_90% 


128. Requisitioning Commercial Motor Vehicles 

It is estimated that there are now (1919) in commer¬ 
cial operation in the United States 600,000 motor trucks 
and 50,000 trailers. Of these it is believed that, in case of 
emergency, there would be available for use by the govern¬ 
ment 60 per cent or 360,000 motor trucks and 30,000 trailers. 

At the close of 1917 there were more than 5,000,000 
passenger vehicles in use in the United States, with a seat¬ 
ing capacity of 25,000,000 people; so, based on the above 




130 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


figures, the possibilities of motor transportation in this coun¬ 
try for use by the army may be calculated, should the 
government be suddenly faced with a crisis which demanded 
its immediate use. 


129. Classification of Trucks by Tonnage 


Class A A_i-ton truck 

Class A_li-ton truck 

Class B_3-ton (or over) truck. 


130. TROOP MOVEMENTS BY TRUCK 

Movements by truck on a large scale meet the follow¬ 
ing requirements: 

(a) To carry the personnel of infantry up to and out of the 

line. 

(b) To carry out strategical moves of divisions, less trans¬ 
port, -when necessary. 

(c) To carry out miscellaneous moves of regiments and other 
units quickly. 

131. Conditions Under Which Motor Transport of Troops is 
Advisable 

From the above conditions, if account be taken of the 
time necessary to move the truck columns from the motor 
park to entrucking point and from the detrucking point 
to motor park, it is seen to be inexpedient to use truck 
transport to effect troop movements: 

(a) For infantry troops and their combat equipment when 
the distance is under 12 miles. 

When the distance for infantry is under 12 miles, the 
equipment of the men may be carried in trucks. 

(b) For artillery, when the distance is under 36 miles. How¬ 
ever, in exceptional cases and when the distance to be covered is 
between 18 and 36 miles, the loading into trucks of artillery 
material only may be deemed expedient, the horses under such 
conditions being able to perform longer marches. 

Note :—See Table “Number of Men in an Infantry Brigade for Movement by 
Truck and Marching.” 


132. Number of Men Carried in Different Sized Trucks 

IJ-ton 3-ton 5-ton 

With baggage 12 20 25 

Without baggage 20 40 45 





TRANSPORTATION 


131 


Baggage consists of packs and equipment. 

The same type of truck is used for both cargo and troop 
transportation. The conversion of cargo trucks to troop 
trucks, and vice versa, is simple. 

Benches must be provided for troops and kept in a con¬ 
venient place ready for use together with such parts as 
tops, bows, etc. 

Extra baggage trucks are not provided unless speci¬ 
fically called for in orders. 

For every 20 loaded trucks 1 empty truck should 
be added to be used should a loaded truck become disabled. 
It may be necessary to break up a company and attach 
its trucks to other companies for this purpose. Troops 
must immediately be transferred from a disabled truck as 
the convoy must always proceed without delay. 

In moving troops by truck all of the details relative to 
rations, baggage, etc., to be carried by the troops are ar¬ 
ranged in order by the staff of the commanding officer con¬ 
cerned. The motor transport officers are responsible for 
the supply of gasoline and oil for the vehicles and for the 
rations and other supplies for the motor personnel. 

133. Consideration of Roads 

When loading troops an effort must be made to provide 
a circuit so that the trucks coming into an area will not 
have to turn around before or after being loaded or to 
double back on the incoming column of empty trucks. It 
is better to go a few miles out of the way for a proper cir¬ 
cuit than to try to turn the truck companies around on a 
road. Time will be saved in the end. 

In unloading troops at a town, instead of unloading on 
the near side of the town or in the town itself, the convoy 
should go through the town and unload on the opposite side, 
if possible, to avoid the possibility of injuring some man 
when the empty convoy pulls out. Likewise, as in loading, 
a circuit or route must be worked out so that the trucks 
after unloading will not interfere with incoming loaded 
trucks. Whenever possible, loading and unloading should be 
done on side road-s when the main highway is being used by 
other troop transportation. 


132 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Always, if possible, while actually transporting troops, 
motor trains should be kept on the main roads, which are 
usually two-way roads. 

Whenever there is any doubt about the condition of the 
roads, a thorough road reconnaissance should be made be¬ 
fore prescribing in orders a route for motor transportation 
to follow; the road should also be carefully posted. In this 
reconnaissance, or if examining roads on a map, hills should 
be looked for, and, especially when very long and steep, 
avoided, when possible. Doubtful bridges should be in¬ 
spected. 

134. Maximum Speed of Motor Vehicles 
In Cities and Villages: 

• Trucks, 8 miles per hour. 

Passenger cars, ambulances and motorcycles, 15 miles per 
hour. 

On Open Roads: 

Trucks, 12 miles per hour. 

Ambulances, 14 miles per hour. 

Passenger cars and motorcycles, 35 miles per hour. 

The average marching speed to be expected of truck 
convoys is, in the daytime, from 6 to 9 miles per hour, ac¬ 
cording to the type of road and type of trucks employed. 
On dark nights when lighting up is impossible, the average 
speed is reduced to from 3 to 5 miles per hour. 

Unless tactical conditions demand otherwise, 100 miles 
may be regarded as a good day's march, which will require 
from 10 to 12 hours on the road. 

135. Road Distances 




TRUCKS 

MOTOR 

CARS 



Open 

Close 

Open 

Close 



formation 

formation 

formation 

formation 



yds. 

yds. 

yds. 

yds. 

Between 

vehicles 

20 

5 

40 

5 

Between 

sections 

40 

20 

60 

20 

Between 

companies 

75 

40 



Between 

trains 

100 

60 




The length of a truck is about seven yards. 

Ordinarily in solving a problem the close formation for 
towns is disregarded. 

NOTE: See diagram “Road Space of Truck Units Marching and Halted." 


TRANSPORTATION 


133 


136. Time Allowed for Motor Truck Companies to Close Up 
at Entrucking Point 


1 to 2 truck companies _5 minutes 

3 to 4 truck companies_ i _10 minutes 

5 to 6 truck companies _15 minutes 

etc. etc. 


Distances for halted vehicles are those prescribed for 
close formation, so, in halting the train to load or unload 
troops, that is the formation to figure on. The rate of 
travel and road spaces are particularly important factors 
for consideration by staff officers and motor transport offi¬ 
cers of higher commands, for where the roads are limited 
in number and the time element and distance to be traveled 
enter into the question some careful calculating will have 
to be done. Particularly is this true where all the trains 
pass the same initial point in entering or leaving a camping 
or billeting area. 

137. Convoys 

The group convoy consists of several companies operat¬ 
ing together. This type of convoy is used when it is desired 
to move large numbers of troops or supplies from one part 
of the front to another, or to concentrate them quickly at 
one point. 

These convoys at times when transporting troops reach 
enormous proportions. As an example, at one time for a 
ten-day period, there were 5,000 trucks operating on the 
road between Compiegne and Montdidier, carrying 5,000 
truck loads of troops of 20 men to the truck. 

Only by the strictest discipline and closest adherence 
to the rules of convoy can trucks in such numbers be moved 
promptly and efficiently. 

There is an officer designated as chief of the convoy. 
He has complete charge of all units of which it is composed. 
He is responsible for all necessary arrangements, the issu¬ 
ing of the required orders, proper routing and discipline 
of its personnel. He selects the assembly point where all 
units meet to join the convoy and the times when they shall 
arrive at this point. He designates the stopping and rest¬ 
ing places to be made by the convoy when en route. 





134 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


In order to get the trucks together, an assembly point 
is chosen. A time is set when each column shall arrive at 
this point. There can be no excuses for lateness—the trucks 
must be at the assembly point on time. In this way, a large 
number of trucks can be concentrated in a single convoy 
without confusion or loss of time. 

In a very large convoy, there may be several small as¬ 
sembly points and then a main or final point. The convoy 
is dispersed in the same way as it is assembled, the units 
separating at a given point and proceeding to their bases 
individually. 

In a convoy, the officer in charge of the first column 
acts as guide of the entire convoy. It is his duty to lead 
the convoy along the route chosen by the commanding officer, 
to keep and regulate the speed of the convoy and in the 
absence of the chief of the convoy to take command. 

There can be no delay, whatsoever, in the movement of 
a convoy when transporting troops that must reach their 
destination when scheduled. It is the duty of the convoy 
commander to see that everything is done to make this pos¬ 
sible. He must be at the entrucking point with his com¬ 
mand at the hour and minute set. 

All concerned must remember one thing when hauling 
troops. They should get all the comfort it is possible to 
give them. It is customary to halt the convoy ten minutes 
every three hours to permit the men to relieve themselves. 

The truck convoy formation on a road is just the same 
as an infantry unit marching. The unit in the truck com¬ 
pany corresponding to the infantry squad in the infantry 
company is the truck. This truck is manned by two drivers, 
a first driver and a second driver. The next larger forma¬ 
tion is the section made up of a number of trucks, normally 
nine. This section corresponds to the infantry platoon. An 
assistant truck master is in charge of the section. A motor 
truck company, normally consisting of three sections, is both 
an administrative and tactical unit. As an administrative 
unit it directs, feeds and clothes its members. As a tactical 
unit in the majority of cases, the company operates in the 
field as a unit. The company may send out two or three 


TRANSPORTATION 


135 


trucks to one place or another, but it is the company that is 
operating, whether the trucks are together or scattered. 

The position of the truck company commander is ordi¬ 
narily in rear of his company in order that he may personally 
note all vehicles that may be compelled to fall out and give 
the necessary instructions. When a disabled truck is to 
be abandoned with or without a guard, or whether efforts 
will be made to repair it or whether it will be taken in tow, 
is a question to be decided by the truck com,pany commander. 

The truck company commander should precede the 
convoy: 

(a) When covering unknown roads. 

(b) To reconnoiter entrucking and detrucking points prior 
to arrival of trucks. 

(c) Before entering a large town or city, in order to find best 
route through the city and obtain information regarding traffic 
rules. 

(d) At times made necessary by any particular situation. 

When the company commander is in rear, the truck 
master is the guide of the company. He rides in the first 
truck of the first section. 

138. Technical Rules Governing the Carrying Out of Troop 

Movements by Truck 

Transporting troops by truck is a difficult undertaking 
unless both the method and system are known. It is a prin¬ 
ciple in transporting troops by truck never to load in a town 
but always go through the town and stop on the other side, 
so that the last truck is on the outskirts of the town. 

All trucks designated for a particular entrucking point 
should be numbered in chalk on the off side, consecutively 
throughout the column. Spare trucks should be marked 
“Not to be loaded’' and should accompany the column to 
replace casualties en route. 

In transporting small bodies of troops, the troop officers 
will ride on truck seats or in cars of convoy and company 
commanders. In transporting large bodies of troops, one 
or more trucks are set aside for use of troop officers. 

139. Divisional Units, Equipment and Material Considered 

as Feasible to be Moved by Truck Transport 

1. Division headquarters. 

2. Billeting parties. 


136 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


3. Personnel of infantry units, machine guns, machine gun 
carts, Stokes mortar and carts, 37-mm. guns and carts, and am¬ 
munition. 

4. Field kitchens (exceptional cases) (2 per truck without 
limbers). 

5. Guns, ammunition wagons and limbers of divisional artil¬ 
lery. 

6. Personnel of divisional artillery. 

7. Baggage. 

8. Horses (special fittings required for trucks). 

The following is the normal transport capacity of a 
truck: 

Troops _15 to 30 

Machine guns, Stokes mortars and 1-pounder 

carts _3 to 4 

Tons of supply_2 to 5 

Horses _3 to 5 

140. Commander of Troops to be Entrucked 

As regards the commander of the troops to be en¬ 
trucked, he will be required to act under one or the other 
of the following situations: 

First. The entrucking point and the time of arrival of the 
trucks will be known. In this case, he forms his command and 
, marches it to the entrucking point in time to be in position 
before the arrival of the trucks. 

Second. The entrucking point or the time of arrival of the 
trucks may not be known. In this case, the convoy commander 
notifies the troop commander when the convoy is ready to begin 
loading and the troops are then marched to the entrucking point. 

141. Formation of the Troops at Entrucking Point 

(a) When the road is closed to all other traffic. The 
troops will form upon the right side of the road with the 
leading element opposite the position of point where leading 
truck will stop. 

(b) When the road is not closed to all other traffic and 
there is access to fields on the right of the road, the right 
to be considered with reference to the direction in which 
the trucks are traveling. In this case, the troops are to be 
formed up in the fields clear of the road. 

(c) When the road is not closed to all other traffic and 
there is a limited space available off the road. The troops 
will be formed in the space available and will be conducted 
in groups to the trucks. 


NOTE; See diagram “Methods of Loading Troops on Trucks.' 






TRANSPORTATION 


137 


142. Method of Loading the Troops in Trucks 

The assistant truck master in charge of each section 
assembles the assistant drivers of his section in order of 
trucks. The leading section, followed in turn by the second 
and third sections, marches to the head of the troop column. 
The first 20 men to be loaded are counted off and the 
assistant driver of the first truck marches them to his truck. 
Then 20 more are counted off and are taken by the 
assistant driver of the second truck. This process is con¬ 
tinued until the trucks are all loaded. In marching the 
various truck loads to the individual trucks, the assistant 
driver places himself in front of his troops. 

While the assistant driver is getting his troops, the 
driver lets down the tailboard and puts up the benches, if 
there be such provided. In loading, the troops should not 
climb over the side of the truck but enter it from the rear. 
Their packs are placed under the seat before the troops enter 
the truck. The tail board is then closed and fastened se¬ 
curely. The truck driver regulates his speed and does his 
driving according to orders from his truck commander, and 
no officer, noncommissioned officer or private who is being 
transported should give him orders or directions as to the 
operation of the truck. 

NOTE: See diagram “Methods of Loading Troops on Trucks.” 


143. Detrucking Troops 

On arrival at detrucking point, the truck column is 
halted and closed up. The signal to unload is given and the 
troops get out of the trucks and clear the road to the right. 
When the troops are clear of the road, the truck column 
should move off. The troops should not fall in on the road 
or move on the road until the truck column has moved off. 
During darkness, the commanding officer of the truck 
column should detail a motorcyclist to report to the com¬ 
mander of the troops when the truck column has cleared 
the road. 


138 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


144. Precautions in Bad Weather 

In bad weather, troops often arrive at the loading point 
in an exhausted condition. Extra medical arrangements are 
necessary at such a time. Extra ambulances should be near 
to convey bad cases to the hospital. Similar arrangements 
should be made at unloading point. 

Careful arrangements must be made for guides from 
unloading point to billets or camp not only for units but for 
parties of stragglers. 

A responsible officer should be present to superintend 
both unloading and loading. 

145. Loading Machine Gun Carts, Stokes Mortar Carts and 

1-Pouhder Gun Carts 

These carts are loaded at the same time that the com¬ 
panies to which they belong are entrucked and at the. same 
points. 

Each truck can carry 4 carts—except the smaller type 
which can only carry 3. 

The shafts of the carts and all the contents of the carts 
are removed and placed on road near cart. Two men get in 
the truck and the carts are lifted up horizontally by four 
men, its rear toward the front of the truck and placed in 
the truck. The two men in the truck roll the cart to the 
front of the truck, the left wheel against the right panel. 
The cart is then turned up vertically, the front up in the air, 
a triangular wedge is placed under each wheel and a rec¬ 
tangular wedge against the inside of each wheel so as to 
avoid all lateral motion. The cases and the load of the 
cart are then piled up against the right wheel, space being 
reserved along the left side of the truck for the right wheel 
of the next cart. The next cart is loaded in a like manner. 
The shafts of the carts are placed between the carts. 

The length of time for loading a truck should not ex¬ 
ceed one-half hour. 

146. Loading Field Kitchens 

These are loaded by means of an inclined plane. Two 
men are at the pole while two others with long handled 


TRANSPORTATION 


139 


wedges follow the movement of the wheels up the plane. The 
loading can be accomplished by man power or a truck can 
be used as a tractor. A three-ton truck can carry two roll¬ 
ing kitchens without their limbers. 

147. Loading Horses 

Horses are transported in specially fitted up trucks. 
Trucks of large size can carry five horses standing 
crossways (perpendicularly to the direction of travel). 
Smaller trucks can carry three horses standing lengthways 
(parallel to direction of travel), heads toward rear of truck. 
The loading is performed by means of inclined planes. 

148. Loading Field Artillery 

Each truck can carry two axles, one limber and rear 
vehicle. Loading is the same as for field kitchens. 

Another method of transporting artillery is by towing. 
If this method be used, it is essential never to exceed under 
any circumstances at any one movement, a speed of 6 miles 
per hour. 


MOVEMENT TABLE FOR ENTRUCKING TROOPS 


140 


Clearance of 
Assembly 

Point 

SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 

Departure 
for Assembly 
Point 


Route to 
Assembly 
Point 


Assembly 

Point 


Time of 
Arrival 


Route of Truck 
Companies to En¬ 
trucking Point 


Departure of 
Truck Columns 


Assignment of 
Truck 
Companies 


Entrucking 

Point 



















Road Space of Truck UniTS MARc/ijns a/^d /t^alted. 











































I 

o 


-I 

4i 


'V 


§ 

I' 






Methods OF Lo/^ding Troops ^r^f!,c. 

ON Trucks . H^ror. rr,^ o.ly ,uff;<,^N .Ml, M>rgn„.,d „ 

f^r tracks. 

























































f 













144 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


NUMBER OF MEN IN AN INFANTRY BRIGADE FOR 
MOVEMENT BY TRUCK AND MARCHING 



Men 

Men 


UNIT 

By Truck 

By Marching 

1 Co Inf 

246 

16 

4 Cos Inf 

984 

60 

Bn Hq 

60 

5 

Total Bn 

1034 

65 

Total 6 Bns 

6204 

390 

6594 

Regt Hq 

30 

11 

Hq Co 

237 

42 

Sup Co 

41 

38 

MG Co 

141 

43 

Total Regt 

449 

134 

Total 2 Regts 

898 

268 

1166 

BHQ 

17 

12 

MG Bn 

696 

180 

Total BHQ and MG Bn 

613 

192 

806 


Total in brigade _8565 

Less 92 signal men and 4 men per regt (T. O. Oct. 15, 1919)_100 


Actual total in brigade (T, O. Apr. 24, 1918) _8465 

Total truck companies required to transport men going by truck_ 15 

Total trucks required to move rolling kitchens of brigade (2 kitchens 

per truck, less limbers) _ 16 

















































CHAPTER VI 


Trains 


149. TRAINS 

Trains include army trains (parks and truck com¬ 
panies) ; corps trains and artillery park; division trains 
consisting of ammunition, supply, sanitary and engineer 
trains; and organization trains consisting of combat and 
field trains. 

150. Army Trains 

(See TO 201, Nov. 7, 1918) 

The army trains include the following: 

Army artillery park. 

Army ponton park. 

Sanitary train. 

Supply train. 

15 motor transport companies. 

10 reserve motor transport companies. 

These trains are used to augment the trains of divi¬ 
sions and corps, except the motor transport companies, 
which are for troop movements. The motor section of 
the army artillery park is identically the same as the corps 
park. The depot section consists of three park batteries. 

The army ponton park is about the same as the corps 
ponton train. It carries the same amount of bridge, but 
is organized into three ponton divisions in order that these 
divisions can be detached and sent to the different corps 
if desired. 

The sanitary train and the supply train have the same 
organization as the corresponding trains of the corps. 

Each motor transport company is equipped with 27 
3-ton trucks, and the 15 companies can transport the foot 
troops of a brigade of infantry. 

In addition to the above there are 6 headquarters motor 
commands of 4 officers and 11 enlisted men each (one for 


145 



146 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


each 4 motor transport companies) and 4 motor repair 
shop truck companies, each company composed of 6 service 
parks and 1 headquarters motor command. 

151. Corps Trains 

(See TO 101, Oct. 31, 1918) 

Corps trains consist of the corps artillery park and the 
engineer, ponton, sanitary, supply and troop transport 
trains. The corps artillery park is composed of a headquar¬ 
ters; a motor section, having a headquarters and six truck 
companies; and a park section (consisting of one park bat¬ 
tery) . An attached ordnance repair shop operates under 
the corps ordnance officer. 

The corps artillery park operates under the corps artil¬ 
lery commander, and is used to augment the division am¬ 
munition trains. The corps artillery is motorized and needs 
no assistance ordinarily in handling its ammunition supply. 
In fact all corps troops except the pioneer infantry, the re¬ 
mount depot, the veterinary hospital and the ponton train, 
are able to function their supply and evacuation, so that the 
corps trains can be used to augment the division trains. 

The supply train needs about one company to handle 
the supply for the corps troops that are not motorized. 

The engineer, supply and sanitary trains have the same 
organization as the corresponding train in the division, ex¬ 
cept that the sanitary train has no animal-drawn com¬ 
panies. 

Troop transport train has the same organization and 
equipment as the supply train. 

The ponton train has 4 officers, 170 men and 52 
wagons with bridge equipment for 675 feet of bridge, nor¬ 
mal construction, and 475 feet with reduced intervals. 

152. DIVISION TRAINS (Infantry) 

Composition of trains. 

The trains included in an infantry division may be 
classed as organizational trains and as divisional trains, and, 
also, as animal-drawn and as motor-driven. 

The organizational trains comprise the combat and 
field trains of various organizations. 


TRAINS 


147 


The divisional trains include: 

(a) Train headquarters; 

(b) Ammunition train; 

(c) Supply train; 

(d) Engineer train; 

(e) Sanitary train. 

The train headquarters includes the commander of 
trains and his staff. 

The staff of the train commander consists of 3 offi¬ 
cers and 19 soldiers in addition to: 

1 medical detachment; 1 officer and 6 soldiers. 

3 veterinary field units; 3 officers and 9 soldiers. 

The division trains are commanded by the commander 
of trains, who exercises this command in much the same 
manner as the brigade commander exercises his command 
over the regiments and machine gun battalion. Each train 
has a headquarters, commander and appropriate staff. 

The commander of trains controls the marching and 
camping of the ammunition, supply, sanitary and engineer 
trains when they are combined. He is also charged with 
all matters of general police in rear of the division while 
on the march or in action, and throughout the command 
while in camp. 

In practice the commander of trains regulates the 
marching and camping, etc., of such trains as may be under 
his control in any situation. After trains are released from 
his command he has nothing further to do with their opera¬ 
tion until they are again returned to his control. The com¬ 
mander of trains operates directly under G4 of the division. 

(See form of administrative order defining functions of division 
trains and motor transport service). 

The military police company functions under the con¬ 
trol of the division provost marshal and not the commander 
of trains. (See “Military Police.’’) 

In combat or when combat is imminent, and in train¬ 
ing, the commander of trains releases control under orders 
of the division commander and trains pass for operations 
as indicated below: 

The ammunition train to artillery brigade commander; 

The sanitary train to the division surgeon; 

The engineer train to the division engineer; 


148 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The supply train to the division quartermaster ; 

The mobile ordnance repair shop to the division ordnance 
officer; 

The service park to the division motor transport officer. 

*‘In principle, the administrative services of a division 
must have the same degree of mobility as the division itself. 
They should not be charged with taking care of supplies 
which cannot be transported in the ammunition, supply 
and engineer trains.” (Par. 267, FSR.) 

The function of the various trains is to keep the com¬ 
mand ready for action at all times without hampering 
their movements. 

153. Ammunition Train 

‘‘The ammunition train includes all vehicles, animals, 
and personnel employed in transporting the divisional ar¬ 
tillery and infantry ammunition reserve, or in bringing up 
the same from the refilling point to the combat trains of the 
organizations.” (Par. 278, FSR.) 

The ammunition train comprises the following: 

(a) Headquarters, including: 

One lieutenant colonel, commanding, and 3 officers and 28 
soldiers. 

(b) The motor battalion (1st Battalion), including: 

A headquarters, 1 major and 2 officers and 30 soldiers; 

Four truck companies, 12 officers and 584 soldiers. 

Each company includes 27 (2-ton) cargo trucks. 

Prescribed load for whole battalion (see below). 

(c) A horsed battalion (2d Battalion), including: 

A headquarters; 1 major and 2 officers and 21 soldiers; 

2 caisson companies and 1 wagon company; 9 officers and 
535 soldiers; 

1 caisson company includes 18 caissons and 1 spare gun; 

1 wagon company includes 33 combat wagons. 

Both battalions have supply, repair, ration and baggage 
vehicles, rolling kitchens (horsed and trail mobile), water 
carts and medical carts. 

Prescribed load for whole battalion equals (see below). 

(d) A mobile ordnance repair shop including: 

15 trucks for supply, repair and equipment and 3 offi¬ 
cers and 45 soldiers. 

(e) Certain ordnance and medical personnel. 

(f) Loads and distribution of ammunition carried in ammuni¬ 

tion train. 

(See Equipment Manual, Series A, No. 10, A.E.F.) 


TRAINS 


149 


There are several uses for the horsed section: 

(a) Held as reserve; 

(b) Operate between combat trains and division trains and even 

to batteries in some cases; 

(c) Supplement division trains. 

The situation determines method of employment. 

See FSR, pars. 313 et seq. 

The ammunition train carries the divisional ammuni¬ 
tion reserve from which combat trains are refilled, and is 
a connecting link in the chain of ammunition supply from 
the refilling point of the communications zone (army de¬ 
pots) to the ammunition distributing stations. In prin¬ 
ciple, it is the function of the ammunition column (army 
depots) to push up close to the rear of the troops and to 
maintain a constant supply of ammunition at the refilling 
point. This has the effect of shortening the haul for the 
ammunition train. (Par. 320, FSR.) 

In combat the radius of action of the division is de¬ 
pendent upon the distance that the ammunition train can 
operate and maintain the ammunition supply to the combat 
trains. 


Road space motor battalion and headquarters_ 2,350 yards. 

Road space horsed battalion and headquarters_ 2,000 yards. 

Total--- 2.5 miles. 


154. Ammunition Carried in Ammunition Train 


Unit 


Cal. 30 

Cal. 45 

37-mm 

75-mm 

155-mm Hand Rifle 3-inch 
Grenade Grenade Stokes 

Pyrotechnics 

1 Wag. Co. 

2 Cas. Cos. 

950,400 

132,000 


3,816 




4 Truck 

Cos. 

1,981,200 

94,000 

3,720 

3,626 

1,008 3,200 

800 4,680 

Remaining 

Tonnage 

Totals 


2,931,600 

226,000 

3,720 

7,440 

1,008 3,200 

800 4,680 

Remaining 

Tonnage 


The above table represents approximately: 


For each rifle_ 120 rounds 

For each pistol_ 21 rounds 

For each machine gun (heavy) -5,000 rounds 

For each machine gun, anti-aircraft- 910 rounds 

For each auto rifle _ 648 rounds 

For each 37-mm. gun - 310 rounds 

For each 75-mm. gun __ 155 rounds 

For each 155-mm. howitzer - 42 rounds 

For each 3" Stokes_ 195 rounds 


















150 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Par. 319, FSR, prescribes that the ammunition train 
will be organized into two companies or battalions and each 
company or battalion will be subdivided into an infantry 
and an artillerj^ section. This arrangement is made, except 
as noted below, by the employment of the motor battalion 
in one section and the horsed battalion in another section. 
However, it should be noticed that 155-mm. howitzer am¬ 
munition and the grenades—37-mm., etc., are only carried 
in the motor battalion. This creates no difficulty as the 
motor trucks can cover the distance. 


155. Supply Train 

“The supply train includes all vehicles, animal and per¬ 
sonnel employed in transporting the divisional ration and 
grain reserve, or in bringing up the same from the refilling 
point to the distributing point.” (Par. 278, FSR.) 

The supply train comprises the following: 

(a) Headquarters including: 

1 major commanding and 2 officers and 13 soldiers 

(b) 6 (2-ton) truck companies; 12 officers and 462 soldiers. 

Or 3 (3-ton) truck companies; 6 officers and 231 soldiers. 

(Each company includes 27 cargo trucks.) 

(c) Cargo capacity: 

2- ton trucks_ 3.000 pounds 

3- ton trucks_ 6,000 pounds 

Total for train_486.000 pounds 

(d) Load: 

2 days’ field ration for division at 5 lbs. 280,000 pounds 

2 days’ grain at 9 lbs._ 136,032 pounds 

Total - 416,032 pounds 

Surplus- 69,968 pounds 

NOTES: (1) Surplus used for quartermaster supplies, depending on situation, 
and for sales stores, tobacco, etc. 

(2) With two-ton trucks, two sections each carrying 1 day’s supplies can be 
conveniently arranged, i.e., three companies to a section. With three-ton trucks, one 
company will have to be split when a subdivision is necessary. 

(3) The three-ton trucks will he used at these Schools. 

Road space supply train (3 companies) _1.2 miles 

The supply carried in the supply train may be held as 
a reserve or, on the other hand, the supply train may be 
so operated as to form the connecting link between the re¬ 
filling point (railhead) and the distributing points. When 
operating as a connecting link, the supply train of a divi¬ 
sion is ordinarily divided into two sections, each carrying 
one day’s supply. (Par. 304, FSR.) 









TRAINS 


151 


The service of supply is directed and controlled in ad¬ 
ministrative orders issued by the division commander, which 
fixes the distributing point or points to which the empty 
vehicles of the field train are to be sent. The division quar¬ 
termaster sends the empty vehicles of the supply train to 
the refilling point for replenishment. 

The division quartermaster directs the movement for¬ 
ward of the necessary number of loaded vehicles of the 
supply train to distributing points and makes arrangements 
for their prompt return and for reloading all empty vehicles 
of the supply train at refilling points. (See par. 305, FSR.) 

In marches and training areas the radius of action of 
a division is dependent upon the distance that the supply 
train can operate and maintain the ration supply to the field 
trains. 

(See Notes on the Use of Supply Train, Infantry Division.) 

156. Engineer Train 

‘‘The engineer train includes all vehicles, animals, and 
personnel for transporting heavy entrenching tools, ex¬ 
plosives, and other engineer equipment and material which, 
under ordinary conditions, is required to accompany the 
division.” (Par. 278, FSR.) 

The engineer train comprises the following: 

2 officers and 82 soldiers. 

19 combat wagons (6 limbered caissons carrying combat am¬ 
munition for engineer regiment and 13 escort wagons 
carrying engineer tools, entrenching, etc.) 

4 wagons, technical supply; 

12 trucks, technical supply. 

The engineer train carries heavy entrenching tools, 
sand bags, reserve explosives, and other engineer material 
which may be required by the division during certain per¬ 
iods of combat. (Par. 354, FSR.) 

The main part of the cargo consists of 3,900 shovels 
(entrenching) and 1,950 pick mattocks (carried in combat 
wagons) and 3,000 pounds of explosives, 10,000 sand bags, 
7,500 pounds barbed wire and 3,500 pounds wire netting 
carried in the technical supply wagons and trucks. (For 
details, see Equipment Manuals, A.E.F., Series A, No. 12.) 


Road space, motor section _ 280 yards 

Road space, animal-drawn section- 520 yards 

Total_0.5 miles 





152 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


157. Sanitary Train 

'The sanitary train includes all vehicles, animals, per¬ 
sonnel and reserve sanitary material, not attached to or¬ 
ganizations, employed in collecting and caring for the sick 
and wounded of the division pending their evacuation by 
the line of communication.” (Par. 278, FSR.) 

The sanitary train comprises: 

Headquarters: 2 officers and 5 soldiers. 

Ambulance section: Headquarters, 2 officers, 10 soldiers. 

3 motor ambulance companies (Nos. 1, 2, and 3) (12 
ambulances each). 

1 horsed ambulance company (No. 4—12 ambulances). 

Field hospital section: Headquarters, 2 officers, 11 soldiers. 

3 motor field hospital companies (Nos. 1, 2 and 3). 

1 horsed field hospital company (No. 4). 

8 camp infirmaries: 1 wagon each. 

1 medical supply unit: 2 trucks. 

1 field laboratory: 1 truck. 

NOTE: The ambulance companies and field hospital companies have been num¬ 
bered by the Schools for convenience in solving problems. 

Field Hospitals. 

Field hospitals are set up when conditions so warrant 
and are the places to which the wounded are transported 
by ambulance companies. Their position must be access¬ 
ible both from the front and rear. Field hospitals are not 
set up when the sick or wounded can be turned over con¬ 
veniently to the elements of the sanitary columns (evacua¬ 
tion hospitals) or railway hospital trains. Canvas is pitched 
only when buildings are not available, or inadequate for 
the purpose of housing the wounded. 

Field hospitals, although provided for surgical and 
medical treatment, are nevertheless limited to providing 
necessities for the sick and wounded pending their evacua¬ 
tion to the rear. 

When a field hospital is established it should be well 
beyond effective light artillery range (about 4 to 6 miles 
from the front) on or near a well traveled road for evac¬ 
uation from the front and to the rear. Prominent road 
junctures should be avoided. 

Dressing Stations. 

Ambulance companies establish dressing stations, sta¬ 
tions for slightly wounded and transport the sick and 
wounded from the regimental aid stations, or infirmaries 


TRAINS 


153 


to the field hospitals, evacuation hospitals or hospital trains. 
In action they send litter bearers from the dressing station 
forward to the aid stations to carry wounded to the am¬ 
bulance head or dressing stations, where the ambulances 
transport them to the rear. Whenever possible the ambu¬ 
lances push forward to the aid stations, or as near there 
as practicable, to speed up the evacuation. 

Ordinarily two dressing stations are established, one 
in each infantry brigade sector with one ambulance com¬ 
pany at each station. They are usually set up on or near 
the brigade axial road, and in such a position as to avoid fire 
from light artillery (usually from 1 to 2 miles in rear of 
the battle position). 

In an attack locations are usually designated for am¬ 
bulance companies to station themselves to cover the zone 
of attack of each brigade. As the attack progresses they 
move forward under direction of the division surgeon and 
establish dressing stations as the situation demands. 

The station for slightly wounded is established well to 
the rear usually centrally located on or near the division 
axial road and near the line of natural drift of wounded 
from the front. The personnel and equipment usually con¬ 
sist of 1 medical officer and 6 or 8 enlisted men and 1 
or more camp infirmaries taken from the sanitary train. 


Road space, motor section-- 2,300 yards 

Road space, animal-drawn section- 600 yards 

Total _ 1.6 miles 


158. Form of Administrative Order Defining Functions of 
the Divisional Trains and the Motor Transport Service 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders ) 

No — j 

1. (a) Except when released by order as provided for in paragraphs 
282 and 283, FSR, division trains are subject to the control 
of the commander of trains whose status and responsibility 
as a commander are analogous to those of a brigade com¬ 
mander. . 

(b) The administration, operation, marching and camping of the 
ammunition train, the supply train, the sanitary train and 
the engineer train are functions of the commander of trains. 
The trains are subject to his control until they are ordered 
released by the division commander when combat is im¬ 
minent. Combat is considered imminent when troops are de¬ 
ployed for combat or occupy a sector in face of the enemy. 





154 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


When the trains are released the control passes as follows: 

Ammunition train to the divisional artillery commander. 

Supply train to the division quartermaster. 

Sanitary train to the division surgeon. 

Engineer train to the division engineer. 

2. (a) The reception, repair and assignment of motor vehicles and 
bicycles are • functions of the motor transport officer. Re¬ 
assignments of motor vehicles may be made by the motor 
transport officer with the approval of G4. 

(b) The commander of trains is responsible to the division com¬ 

mander for the efficiency and condition of the division trains, 
and the motor transport officer as a representative of the 
division commander is competent to inspect, report upon and 
order into repair shop any motor vehicle of the division 
which may appear in need of repairs or overhauling. 

(c) The motor transport officer is the immediate commander of the 

commanding officer, service park unit. 

(d) The motor transport officer will maintain five motor cars from 

the division allowance for replacements. These cars will be 
pooled and used for general passenger transportation. 

(e) The motor transport officer will maintain 10 trucks and 15 

motorcycles from the divisional allowance for replacements. 

(f) Motor transport secured from the motor transport officer or 

the commander of trains for a particular mission will be 
returned immediately upon the completion of that mission. 

By command of Major General X. 

Y 

Chief of Staff. 

159. ORGANIZATIONAL TRAINS (Infantry) 

(See Tables of Organization and Road Spaces, G.S.S., 1919) 

160. Combat Trains 

The combat trains include the various vehicles which 
carry the reserve ammunition of each organization and spe¬ 
cial wagons as indicated hereinafter. The rolling kitchen 
will he considered as a part of the combat train in all sit¬ 
uations unless the order of the commander specifies other¬ 
wise. (This is a change from FSR.) Water carts are 
not considered as a part of combat trains unless the com¬ 
mander specifically so orders. 

Combat trains usually march in rear of their respective 
organizations. However, they may be grouped in any suit¬ 
able formation the commander deems- advisable. Unless 
orders state otherwise, combat trains will be considered as 
marching in rear of their respective organizations. 

Field Service Regulations, paragraph 275, state that 
combat trains remain at all times with the unit to which 
attached and follow it into action. In the cavalry and field 


TRAINS 


155 


artillery it may be advisable to separate temporarily com¬ 
bat trains from the troops. 

In practice combat trains of rifle companies march 
in rear of battalions or of the regiment. Prior to de¬ 
ployment the battalion commanders order the issue of am¬ 
munition to the companies, then send the combat wagons to 
distributing stations to refill and return to designated posi¬ 
tion. As ammunition can only be delivered to the front line 
at night, the combat wagons of the regiment will ordinarily 
be grouped in rear of the reserve battalions and will go for¬ 
ward at night with the rolling kitchens. 

The battalion supply officer is in charge of the delivery 
of food and ammunition to the companies of his battalion, 
under the direction of the regimental supply officer. 

In marches not in close proximity to the enemy, combat 
trains, less rolling kitchens, should be marched at the rear 
of the field trains, as their presence with the units to 
which they are attached is not essential. The troops are 
in need of their baggage and supplies. The rolling kitchens 
should immediately follow the troops in rear of either the 
battalion or regiment. 

In movements by truck the rear half of the rolling 
kitchens of foot troops should accompany the trops. Two 
trucks can carry them for a battalion, in addition to the 
cooks and a day’s rations. 

For the infantry brigades this will require 15 trucks, 
which can be detached from the supply or ammunition train 
or part from both. 

Paragraph 317, FSR, states that it is the function of 
the organization commander to which a combat train is 
assigned to regulate the supply of ammunition from the 
combat train to the firing line, and to dispatch the empty 
vehicles of the combat train to the distributing station. 
Battalion commanders are charged with keeping their com¬ 
bat trains properly filled and equipped. 

The battalion commander’s representative with the 
combat train in action is the battalion supply officer, who is 
charged with the responsibility for the procurement and 
distribution to the various companies of all supplies and am¬ 
munition. He procures the ammunition at the distribut- 


156 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


ing station which is designated in division orders, under 
the method prescribed by his regimental commander. 

In lieu of orders from higher authority, it is the func¬ 
tion of the battalion commander to prescribe the method 
of refilling the combat wagons of his battalion. 

The combat trains of the infantry division are as fol¬ 
lows : 


Infantry Regiment: 

Combat wagons_19 

(1 to each rifle company—2 to machine gun company 
and 5 to headquarters company.) 

Rolling kitchens_15 

Medical carts_-_^ 

Total _37 

Road space, 790 yards. 

Brigade machine gun battalion; 

Combat wagons_ 8 

Rolling kitchens_ 4 

Medical carts_ 1 

Total_13 


Road space, 240 yards. 

Road space, combat train, infantry brigade, 1.2 miles. 

Light artillery regiment: 

Each Battery: 


Caissons_ 6 

Reel carts (2 L) _ 1 

Battery wagon_ 1 

Store wagon_ 1 

Rolling kitchen_ 1 

Total_10 

Total 6 batteries_ 60 

Headquarters company: 

Reel carts _ 1 

Store and battery wagon_,_ 1 

Trucks (radio and telephone) _ 2 

Rolling kitchen_ 1 

Medical carts_ 2 

Total_ I 7 

Total for regiment_ 67 

Road space 1,380 yards. 

Heavy artillery regiment: 

Each battery, trucks (8 for personnel) _14 

Each battery, trucks for supply_ 1 

Each battery, trucks (reel and fire control)_ 1 

Each battery, total _16 

Total 6 batteries_ 96 


































TRAINS 


157 


Headquarters company: 

Motor-drawn reel carts _ 4 

Trucks, personnel_ 8 

Trucks, radio and telephone_ I_I _ 2 

Total _ 14 

Total vehicles, heavy artillery regiment (CT)_110 

Less trucks with personnel _56 

Total _ 64 


Road space 840 yards. 


Total road space for combat trains, field artillery brigade, 
3,720 yards = 2.1 miles. 


Division machine gun battalion: 

Trucks _ 4 

Road space _40 yards. 

Engineer regiment: 

Tool wagons_30 

(4 to each company and 6 to headquarters) 

Rolling kitchens_ 6 

(6 wagons ammunition with engineer train) 

Total_36 

Road space_920 yards. 

Field signal battalion: 

Reel carts (2-horse) _ 6 

Trucks (material) _ 5 

Total_ 7Ti 

Road space _ 100 yards. 


161. Combat Wagons in an Infantry Regiment 

The regimental headquarters company has 2 combat 
wagons assigned to it for the 1-pounder gun platoon, 2 
wagons. 

Supply company furnishes 17 wagons. 

These wagons are distributed as follows: 


Signal platoon - 1 

Sapper and bomber platoon- 1 

Pioneer platoon - 1 

Machine gun company - 2 

Twelve rifle companies- 12 


Total_17 

Total regiment-19 































158 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


162. Contents of Combat Wagons 

Rifle Company 


Ammunition, rifle_24,000 rounds 

Ammunition, pistol_ 1,540 rounds 

Grenade dischargers, rifle- 6 

Projectors, 14-cm._ 2 

Rifle grenades_ 144 

Stretchers_ 4 

Hand grenades _ 96 


One range finder to be carried by one company combat 
wagon in each battalion.. 

Pyrotechnics :— There is no fixed number or type pre¬ 
scribed for a division. The division is issued a certain 
quantity for each particular operation. The division allots 
the type and number to its various units. Each unit car¬ 
ries its allotment in its combat wagon. 

One-Pounder Gun Platoon 


Each wagon transports: 

Ammunition, one-pounder _1,440 rounds 

Ammunition, pistol_ 500 rounds 


Spare parts, tools and miscellaneous articles. 

Machine Gun Company 
Tivo Combat Wago7is 

Ammunition, rifle (on each wagon) _36,000 rounds 

Ammunition, pistol (on Wagon No. 1)_ 3,740 rounds 

Range finder (on Wagon No. 1) _ 1 

Projectors, 14-cm. (on Wagon No. 2)_ 2 

Reels, breast (on Wagon No. 2)_ 2 

Telephone (on Wagon No. 2) _ 1 

Wire (on Wagon No. 2) _ 1 km. 

Stretchers _ 3 


Pioneer Platoon 
One Combat Wagon 

Reconnaissance material. 

Equipment for regimental command posts. 
Message centers and observation posts. 
Pyrotechnics. 

Demolition outfit. 

Tools, carpenter and wheelwright. 

10 shovels. 

8 picks. 

5 axes. 

1 saw, crosscut. 

















TRAINS 


159 


Signal Platoon 
One Combat Wapon 

Wire -20 miles 

Bags, tool, service _ 2 

Batteries _52 

Books, message_500 

Clamps, splicing_ 4 

Fuzes _76 

Grips, buffalo_ 2 

Hammers, claw _ 4 

Hatchets_ 4 

Kits, flag_13 

Projectors_:_16 

Receiving sets. Type A_ 1 

Reels, breast_ 4 

Saws_ 4 

Screw drivers_ 4 

Switchboards_11 

Tape, friction and rubber_ 6 pounds 

Telephones _25 

Axes, hand _ 5 

Buzzers, service_ 5 

Storage batteries_ 4 

Candle lanterns_10 

Envelopes, message_250 

Pliers _ 40 

Ammunition, pistol_94 rounds 

Transmitting sets. Type 23- 1 

Light Stokes Mortar 
One Combat Wapon 
Ammunition :— French 

Projectiles are packed 8 in a box, wt. of box 66 pounds. 
Cartridges and relays are packed 150 cartridges and 450 
relays in box. 

Boxes of projectiles (37), rounds -296 

Boxes of cartridges and relays- 2 

Sand bags--24 

Ammunition:— British 

Projectiles are packed 3 in a box with fuzes and rings, wt. 
of box 43 pounds. 

Boxes of projectiles (57), rounds -171 

Sand bags-24 

163. Field Trains 

Field trains carry the rations (less those with rolling 
kitchen) and baggage, including the grain for animals. 
They are assigned to regiments and smaller independent 
organizations, according to the strength in men and animals, 
and are a part of the supply company or detachment. They 
include special wagons as indicated hereinafter. 

The field trains of each organization are divided into 
a ration section and a ration and baggage section. 

































160 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


The ration section comprises the ration cart carrying 
one day’s reserve rations for the command. The ration 
and baggage section includes the wagons carrying baggage 
and two days’ field ration and grain, and all other field train 
wagons not included in the ration section, such as the water 
cart and spring wagon, if any. 

The field trains are marched and grouped to meet the 
conditions of the situation. There are no rules. They may 
march in rear of their own organizations or grouped as 
follows: 

As a battalion group marching in rear of the battalion; 

As a regimental group marching in rear of the regiment; 

As a brigade group marching in rear of the brigade; 

As a divisional group marching in rear of the division. 

(NOTE; When marching in rear of the division, the field train group may be 
placed under the commander of trains or marched independently thereof. The divi¬ 
sional field train group is commanded by the senior line officer present therewith, or 
by an officer specially assigned. The trains of the group should be formed from 
head to tail in order of march of their respective organizations.) 

The sections of the field train given above provide for 
two subsections each carrying one day’s rations and one 
day’s grain. When two field rations are carried in the field 
train (one in the rolling kitchen and one in the ration wa¬ 
gons) the regimental supply train is divided into two sec¬ 
tions. One section (called the empty section) connects the 
regimental issuing point with the supply train at the dis¬ 
tributing point or receives the supplies at the railhead or 
refilling point. 

The other section (called the full section) makes the 
distribution from the regimental issuing point to the com¬ 
panies (see notes on the Use of Field Trains, Infantry Divi¬ 
sion) . The following gives the general classes of vehicles 
in combat and field trains. 

In the infantry division field trains are as follows: 


Infantry regiment; 

R. and B. wagons_22 

Ration carts_16 

Water carts _15 

Rolling kitchen _ 1 

Total vehicles_64 

Road space 930 yards. 

Brigade machine gun battalion: 

R. and B. wagons_ 5 

Ration carts_ 5 

Water carts _ 4 

Total_14 

Road space 240 yards. 


Road space, field trains, infantry brigade, 2,180 
yards. 













TRAINS 


161 


Light artillery regiment: 

R. and B. wagons _ 23 

Ration carts _ 8 

Water carts _ 8 

Rolling kitchen _ 1 


Total vehicles_ 40 

Road space 750 yards. 

Heavy artillery regiment: 

Motor car _ 1 

R. and B. trucks_16 

Repair trucks_ 4 

Supply trucks _ 6 

Tank trucks _ 3 


Total vehicles _30 


Road space 760 yards. 

Road space, field trains, artillery brigade, 1.2 miles. 

164. HANDLING TRAINS (General Remarks) 

Except for the sanitary train, there are three echelons 
of trains in the division from front to rear, i.e., combat, 
field and division. In theory, each echelon in rear keeps 
the echelon in front filled. However, the above basis is 
not adhered to when time and labor can be saved by any 
modification. Therefore, frequently the division ammuni¬ 
tion and supply trains may function directly with the combat 
train, the field train being held as a reserve. So also, the 
division train may be held as a reserve, the field train being 
filled directly by the columns of the communications zone. 

In campaign there are three general situations to be 
considered, i.e., a march, a battle and a camp. 

In a march, several elements of the trains, such as am¬ 
bulance companies, will be released and placed in the ad¬ 
vance guard and in the main body. The rest of the trains 
will function under the commander of the trains who re¬ 
ceives orders from G4. 

In a battle, the initial orders of the division commander 
(administrative order) will release some trains and place 
them under the control of such officers as the artillery com¬ 
mander, division surgeon and division engineer. The trains 
not released continue to function under the commander of 
trains. 

In a camp, all the divisional trains generally continue to 
function under the commander of trains. The ammunition 















162 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


train can be placed under the artillery commander for 
training, etc., if the division commander sees fit. 

However, it must be kept in mind that any and all trains 
are available for any and all work. They are used by G4 
as a pool to meet all situations. 

Par. 277, FSR, is not entirely applicable to our pres¬ 
ent field train. We now have one ration and baggage wagon 
to a company, etc. Therefore, the rations and baggage are 
sent to organizations in the same wagon. The reserve 
ration, i.e., the ration cart section, need not be sent to units 
unless the reserve ration is to be replaced. 

When seven rations are being carried by the division 
(with a full and empty ration section) the field train can 
be refilled in the morning in most situations and need not 
always be withdrawn from troops during the night. How¬ 
ever, outpost and combat situations may force the troops to 
get along with only their rolling kitchens. 

Distance a division can be supplied by its own trans¬ 
portation : 

This is influenced by many conditions, such as roads, 
weather and length of time the supply at a distance is to be 
continued. In the Chateau Thierry offensive our divisions 
supplied themselves at from 60 to *70 miles from railhead. 
It is possible with good roads to extend this to 90 miles, 
However, these conditions require constant work by the 
trains. A good average is 50 to 60 miles. 

Road discipline is an essential element of training in 
all trains. Too much stress cannot be laid on this. 

In movements by marching the field and combat trains 
usually accompany the regiment, but, if roads are scarce, 
the field trains are generally grouped in rear by brigade 
and moved under the general supervision of the commander 
of trains. This is particularly true when combat is im¬ 
minent. 

During marches, when at some distance from the en¬ 
emy, combat trains should follow the field train's of their 
brigades in order not to interfere with the freedom of move¬ 
ment of the latter, as troops usually arrive in camp tired 
and want their baggage and supplies as soon as possible. 

During marches the division trains are divided into 
two sections, one motor section and one animal-drawn sec- 


TRAINS 


163 


tion and both sections moved under the orders of the com¬ 
mander of trains. The supply train moves by bounds in¬ 
dependently of the other trains, as it must continue its 
function of supply. Usually detachments of the sanitary 
train are left in the old area to complete the evacuation 
therefrom and upon completion of this duty are moved to 
the new area under orders of the division surgeon. 

In war of movement the functioning of the trains is 
an important problem, as the freedom of movement of the 
combat units must be unhampered and at the same time 
the flow of supplies and the evacuation of the wounded 
must be constantly maintained in such a manner that or¬ 
ganization commanders can give their time and efforts to 
the tactical problems at hand. 

The operations of the different trains must be so co¬ 
ordinated that the minimum of confusion or congestion will 
occur. 

The locations of the different trains and supply echelons 
must be such that they can readily perform their proper 
functions with as little interference as possible to the other 
elements with which they are operating. 

In an offensive the infantry field and combat trains 
should be as well forward as the terrain and circumstances 
will permit. 

The combat train of each battalion seeks cover usually 
about 800 to 1,000 yards in rear of the battalion. 

The combat train of the advance battalion frequently 
joins the combat train of the support battalion, or the en¬ 
tire combat train of the regiment may be assembled at a 
rendezvous point 1,200 to 1,500 yards to the rear and under 
cover, such point being designated by the regimental com¬ 
mander. 

After the day’s fight and at the first sign of darkness 
the rolling kitchens and ammunition vehicles start on their 
way to the front to the rendezvous point, usually in the 
vicinity of the brigade command post, where they are met 
by the company guides who conduct them to the point 
designated by the company commander. They move for¬ 
ward usually in small groups by battalions. After the dis¬ 
tribution of cooked meals and ammunition has been com¬ 
pleted, the vehicles are assembled at a designated point and 


164 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


conducted to the rear before daylight. In a semi-stabilized 
situation where hostile observation and fire are active, it 
frequently becomes necessary to move the combat trains 
back to the vicinity of the field trains. 

The field trains are generally located beyond effec¬ 
tive artillery range, about 4,000 to 5,000 yards from the 
front line. 

In locating the field and combat trains the following 
considerations should be borne in mind: 

(a) Protection from the enemy’s fire. 

(b) Protection from the enemy’s terrestrial and aerial 
observation. 

(c) Convenient to water. 

(d) Convenient to routes to distributing points and 
distributing stations. 

(e) Within 8 miles of the distributing points (for field 
trains) and within 2 or 3 miles of the distributing stations 
(for combat trains). 

The above principles also apply in locating the field and 
combat trains of the artillery. 

In combat the limbers of the firing batteries seek cover 
in the vicinity of the guns, usually not over 1,000 yards 
from the batteries. They are generally located in rear of 
the guns but in some cases may be in front of them under 
cover of a ridge while the batteries are further back in 
order to fire over the ridge. 

The combat trains of the artillery are usually located 
about 1,500 yards in rear of the battery positions. When 
conditions become stabilized the limbers and combat trains 
may withdraw to the position of the field trains. 

The artillery field trains are generally 2 or 3 miles in 
rear of the artillery positions. This location of the field 
trains is frequently referred to as the “echelon” or “rear 
echelon.” The “echelon” is generally the administrative 
headquarters of the regiment whose commander is forward 
at his command post. The echelon is established far enough 
to the rear to escape serious interference from the enemy’s 
fire. It consists of all officers, men and horses not required 
at the front; supplies are received here and forwarded. 
Replacements report here and are equipped if necessary and 


TRAINS 


165 


instructed. It is the regimental base; the receiving, evac¬ 
uating, resting and training center of the regiment. 

The division trains in an offensive are usually bi¬ 
vouacked well to the rear and near the second echelon of the 
division, whenever possible. The motor sections of the 
trains must have good firm standings for the motor vehicles. 
The animal-drawn sections must be near water. Cover is 
desirable, but not so essential as with the organization 
trains. The sanitary train is split up into detachments at 
the dressing stations, station for slightly wounded and field 
hospital, but the headquarters is generally located at the 
field hospital where the reserve units are also held. 

Usually bivouacs for the ammunition and engineer 
trains, when not near the second echelon, are located wher¬ 
ever suitable places convenient to the work performed by 
these trains can be found, bearing in mind good standings 
for trucks and proximity of water. 

The mobile ordnance repair shop and service park 
unit habitually accompany the ammunition train and supply 
train respectively. 

The mobile veterinary section is located at a convenient 
point in rear of the field trains on good lines of approach 
from the front and usually near a good route of evacuation 
for animals toward the rear. It should be under cover, 
if possible, and near water. 

In order that the G4 office may know the exact locations 
of all trains so that instructions may be given in case of 
emergency, it is usually directed in the division adminis¬ 
trative order that contact be maintained at all times with 
the G4 office by mounted agents from all trains. 

165. DIVISION TRAINS (Cavalry) 

(See pamphlet entitled '‘Tables of Organization,” road spaces and 
other data relating to the cavalry division.) 

166. Train Headquarters and Military Police 

The organization of train headquarters and military 
police is the same for both the cavalry and infantry 
divisions. 


166 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


167. Ammunition Train 

The ammunition train for both infantry and cavalry 
divisions is the same. 


168. Supply Train 

The supply train (motor), cavalry division, comprises: 

5 truck companies (2-ton) or 
3 truck companies (3-ton). 

(Each truck company includes 27 cargo trucks.) 

Cargo capacity 3-ton truck 6,000 pounds or 486,000 pounds 


for train. 

Load: 

2 days’ field rations at 5 pounds- 247,570 

2 days’ grain at 9 pounds- - 237,492 

Total _485,062 


NOTE: Supply train (wagon-pack) not included. 

The supply train (wagon-pack), cavalry division, com¬ 
prises : 


1 wagon company (4 sections) or 120 wagons. 


6 pack companies (50 pack mules each) or 300 pack mules. 
Cargo capacity: 

Wagon (2,700 lbs.) or wagon company_324,000 lbs. 

Pack mule (300 lbs.) or 6 pack companies 90,000 lbs. 

Total _414,000 lbs. 

Load for division: 

1 day’s field rations at 5 pounds_123,195 

1 day’s grain at 9 pounds_246,068 

Total _369,263 


NOTE: Remaining tonnage for extra grain, rations, or sales articles. Supply 
train (motor) not included. 


169. Sanitary Train 

The sanitary train is similar to the sanitary train, 
infantry division, except that it has one motorized field 
hospital less. 


170. Engineer Train 

The engineer train is stronger and is differently equipped 
from that of the infantry. The amount of tools and 
ammunition carried is less but it has in addition a ponton 
section containing 3 light canvas bridge divisions, each cap¬ 
able of making 185 feet of normal bridge for vehicles up 
to 5,000 pounds loaded. 












TRAINS 


167 


171. ORGANIZATIONAL TRAINS (Cavalry) 

For use at these Schools, the vehicles of a cavalry regi¬ 
ment are divided into the combat train and the field train. 


172. Combat Train 

The combat train consists of 18 combat wagons and 
15 rolling kitchens, 3 mules carrying sanitary outfit and 
6 carrying demolition outfit. The combat wagons are 
distributed as follows: 

To each troop _ _ j 

To each squadron_1 

To headquarters troop_ ZZZZZZZZZZZZ.ZZ 1 

To machine gun troop_ ZZZZZZZ_Z” 2 

Rolling kitchen, per troop_ 1 


In each combat wagon there is carried the following; 


Articles 

Troop 

Hq Tn. 

Sq. 

MG Tr. 

Rifle ammunition 

10,300 

9,500 

24,000 

1,700 

Pistol ammunition_ 

2,394 

3,423 

10,000 

3,150 

Auto rifle ammunition in 




magrazines__ 

3,680 




Machine gun ammunition_ 




40,000 

Axes_ __ 

16 

16 

.16 

(16,000 in belts) 
16 

Picks _ 

16 

16 

16 

16 

Shovels __ 

16 

16 

16 

16 

Pack saddles ___ 

2 

2 

2 

2 

Litters ___ 

2 

2 

2 

2 

Pyrotechnics __ 

allotment 

allotment 

allotment 

allotment 

Reconnaissance material 





and engineer property ____ 


1 set 

1 set 


Carpenter tools ____ 

1 set 

1 set 


1 set 

Blacksmith tools ___ 

1 set 

1 set 


1 set 

Saddler tools _ __ 

1 set 

1 set 


1 set 

Siernal equipment 


1 set 



Telephones ____ 


20 



Switchboards . _ 


4 



Wire, miles___ 


15 



Mender, harness __ 



1 



The demolition outfit consists of detonating caps, 
crimpers, explosives, fuses, lighters, saws, axes, hammers. 


173. Field Train 

The field train consists of 35 ration and baggage 
wagons, 15 water carts, 15 ration carts. 

They are distributed as follows: 



Tr. 

Hq Tr. 

MG Tr. 

Sup Tr. 

Extra 

R. and B. wagons- 

1 

1 

1 

1 

19 

Water cart ---- 

1 

1 

1 

1 

0 

Ration cart --- 

1 

1 

1 

—0 - 

1 

0 



















































168 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Capacity 


R. and B. wagon_2,700 lbs 

Ration carts_ 800 lbs 

Total_3,500 lbs 


The cargo will be split as follows: 


In the ration cart: 

1 day’s reserve ration_ 357 lbs 

In rolling kitchen: 

1 day’s field ration- 535 lbs 

In R. and B. wagons: 

1 day’s field ration_ 535 lbs 

1 day’s grain_1,578 lbs 

Officers’ baggage- 300 lbs 

Troop baggage_ 300 lbs 


Total _2,713 lbs 

In the 19 extra wagons of supply train* 

2 days’ grain -51,288 lbs 


On each vehicle, a reserve of 1 day’s grain ration for its 
draft animals is carried. 


Each regiment has one 4-mule escort wagon to carry- 
engineer entrenching tools which consist of: 


26 axes 
4 containers 
4 saws and edge tools 
7 crowbars 
6 files, saw 
100 lbs. 16-d nails 
150 picks, mattock 


13 saws, hand 
13 saws, two-man 
1 S. W. set 
1 saw, tool 
2-man saw 
300 shovels 

1 tool sharpener 
25 pounds wire 


174. NOTES ON THE USE OF SUPPLY TRAIN, IN¬ 
FANTRY DIVISION 

(For Organiation See TO 26, GSS) 

See: “Suggested System of Supply for an Advancing Division,” 
“Suggested System of Supply for a Division in Trench Warfare.” 

The supply train, composed of 3 motor truck com¬ 
panies of 27 3-ton cargo trucks each, usually functions in 
two sections, each section carrying one day^s supply for the 
division. In addition, reserve stores in the possession of 
the quartermaster and property pertaining to the railhead 
detachment and the supply train itself are carried by the 
two sections of the supply train. 















TRAINS 


169 


175. Number of Trucks Required to Haul Division Reserve 

of Rations 

The following table shows the number of trucks re¬ 
quired to move the two day^s division reserve rations, and 
also the number of trucks required to haul one day's supply 
for the division when the garrison or field ration is furnished, 
and hay is supplied in addition to grain: 

Division Supply Train 

2 days’ field (28,000 x 4| x 2) z= 252,000 
pounds = 42 trucks. 

, . . 2 days’ grain (6,000 x 10 x 2) = 120,000 

Div dump containing pounds = 20 trucks. 

Div reserve (rations 

and grain) Par. 302, Total for div reserve = 62 trucks 

FSR Total supply train = 81 trucks 

Available for other duty = 19 trucks 

1 garrison or field (28,000 x Ah = 126,000 
pounds = 21 trucks. 

1 grain and hay (6,000 x 20) = 120,000 
Dailv supply (rations pounds = 20 trucks, 

and forage) 

Total for daily supply = 41 trucks 
Empty section Sup Tn = 40 trucks 
Total trucks Sup Tn = 81 trucks 

NOTE: The above table is based on the division at full strength of men and 
animals (an unusual condition) but illustrates the maximum number of trucks that 
might be required. 

When the division is constantly moving and it is 
not practicable to form a division dump, the two days' re¬ 
serve of field and grain rations would be kept loaded on the 
supply train. One section would issue to the distributing 
points each day and then draw from the railhead, provided 
the distance to the railhead was not too great. If the fore¬ 
going is not practicable, one of the two days' reserve of 
field and grain rations must be disposed of in order that 
one section of the supply train may issue daily and the 
other draw from the railhead daily. 

When in a training area or semi-stabilized sector one 
field and grain ration would be placed in a divisional dump, 
thereby releasing one section of the supply train to draw 
at the railhead each day while the other section issues to the 
distributing points. The above is based entirely upon 
the field ration being received daily with grain or grain 
and hay. 


170 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


When in a training area or semi-stabilized sector and 
the garrison ration (including fresh beef and fresh vege¬ 
tables) is received daily, the two days’ reserve of field and 
grain rations would be placed in a divisional dump, thereby 
releasing all of the trucks of the supply train. One section 
would draw at the railhead daily and issue the same day to 
the distributing points. The two days’ field rations in 
the field trains would be placed in an organizational dump 
and the garrison ration drawn and issued to the rolling 
kitchens on the same day upon which received. Hay may 
or may not be issued. 

The supply train should be stationed at or near the 
railhead whenever possible. If this is not practicable, it 
should be located near a main route to the railhead and 
on the side of the divisional area nearest to the railhead. 
If no other troops than the division are drawing from the 
railhead, the supply train can usually bivouac there. 

It usually draws its own supplies from the division 
railhead rather than from one of the designated distributing 
points unless one of the latter is at or near the railhead 
or the billet or bivouac of the supply train. 

On good roads the supply train can operate from 60 
to 100 miles (round trip) in hauling supplies from the 
railhead to the distributing points. Usually when the 
distance exceeds 100 miles (round trip) an extra echelon 
of supply must be installed. This is generally provided for 
by the army. 

Whenever the average haul for animal-drawn trains 
is over 8 miles from the railhead, the supply train should 
be used, as with a 16-mile trip in addition to the time 
necessary to be spent at the railhead the field trains will 
be on the road from six to seven hours and the last units 
to receive supplies will have difficulty in making the company 
issues and deliveries before dark. 

On marches of the division which require three or four 
days, the supply train usually functions from the railhead 
in the old area for the first two days and then moves with 
its reserve supplies to its station near the railhead in the 
new area. 


TRAINS 


171 


In rail moves, if the motorized transportation is to move 
by train, one company of the supply train should go forward 
in one of the first sections. 

In rail movements in the forward zone the motorized 
trains usually travel by road. In this case as much of the 
supply train as can be spared should proceed so as to arrive 
in the new area by the time the first troop train arrives 
therein or as soon thereafter as possible. 

When the division is operating at a considerable dis¬ 
tance from its railhead, the corps or army trains are used 
to augment the supply train of the division. This is done 
in two ways: 

First—By moving the supplies forward with corps or 
army trains and establishing refilling points where the 
division supply train takes over the supplies, or— 

Second—By attaching additional transportation from 
the corps or army to the division for temporary use to be 
operated as a part of the division supply train. 

Should an animal-drawn supply train be in use by 
the division instead of a motor train, the following measures 
should be taken for supply by this means: 

First—Organize the train into two sections, each cap¬ 
able of transporting one day's supply for the division. 

Second—Should the distance from the railhead to the 
distributing points be greater than 8 miles, organize a relay 
of rations, the first section of the supply train bringing the 
supplies to the eight-mile point where they are taken for¬ 
ward to the distributing points by the second section of the 
supply train. 

The first section returns to the railhead the same day 
and the second section after delivering the supplies at the 
distributing points returns to the relay point. This method 
necessitates the exchanging of loaded wagons for empty 
ones at the relay point, but is considered a much better plan 
than having a long loaded haul by sections alternating 
every other day. It gives a short loaded and a short empty 
haul for each section each day. 

Third—If the distance from the railhead to the troops 
is greater than 16 miles but not over 24, locate the distribu¬ 
ting points at the 16-mile limit and require the field trains 
to cover the remaining distance. 


172 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Fourth—If the distance from the railhead to the troops 
is greater than 24 miles, an extra echelon of supply will be 
necessary. This may be furnished by the corps or army, 
or native animal-drawn transport impressed into service. 
Should the latter method be adopted the native vehicles 
should be employed as a link in the supply train, as the 
character and capacity of these vehicles will make less dif¬ 
ference in the supply train than in the field trains. 

The best method of handling native impressed trans¬ 
portation is to use it as a link in the relay system, grouping 
each relay in its own local area as far as possible. This 
will keep the drivers within their own locality, resulting in 
better service and will enable the army to require the 
natives to feed their animals and themselves, thereby sav¬ 
ing the hauling of extra rations and forage which other¬ 
wise would be necessary. 

176. TABLE OF RATION WEIGHTS AND SHIPPING 
UNITS 

The following table shows the ration allowance, the 
shipping unit, its weight and the number of rations per unit 
and the capacity in shipping units of a 3-ton truck: 


Article Ration 

allowance 

Unit 

Wt 

lbs 

No. rations 
per unit 

Load 3-ton 
truck 

Bacon 

12 

oz 

cases 6-12-lb. 

cans 

100 

96 

64 cases 

Hard bread 

16 

oz 

cases 100 i-lb. 

cartons 82 

60 

60 cases 

Beans 

4 

oz 

sacks 100-lb. 


101 

400 

60 sacks 

Potatoes 

8 

oz 

sacks 100-lb. 


101 

200 

60 sacks 

Dried fruit 

1.28 

oz 

box 60-lb. 


67 

626 

100 boxes 

Coffee 

1.12 

oz 

cans 60-lb. 


69 

714 

100 cans 

Sugar 

3.2 

oz 

sacks 100-lb. 


101 

600 

60 sacks 

Milk 

.5 

oz 

cases 48-1 lb. cans 

66 

163 

90 cases 

Salt 

0.64 

oz 

sacks 100-lb. 


101 

2,600 

60 sacks 

Pepper 

0.04 

oz 

cases 48-4 oz 

cans 

24 

4,800 

200 cases 

Hay 

12 

lbs 

bales 


100 

8 1/3 

60 bales 

Oats (horses) 

10 

lbs 

sacks 


100 

10 (horses) 60 sacks 

Oats (mules) 

8 

lbs 




12 J (mules) 


177. Number of Trucks Required to Haul Rations of In¬ 
fantry Brigade 

After consulting the ration allowance and the strength 
tables it will be found that the following number of trucks 
will be required to haul the rations for an infantry brigade: 

For each regiment 5 trucks 

For brigade headquarters and machine gun battalion 2 trucks 
Total for brigade 12 trucks 








TRAINS 


173 


■^u66CST€D System of Ration Su^^ly ron an Aovancino Oiyision 


CoMMUNICA noN 

*• 

Chain op 
Responsibility 

SuRPL Y CCHE L ONS 

Route Folloytco 

BY Supplies 

Runnca 

CcAPANY CuiOEs Lead R Kto 
thcih Co- Ho- ~ L oca taon 
OY R K YixEo BY On 

Como AS . 

A 

Manhanouno 

I 

R.K. 

FRONT LUli 


( y y jco.Hf 

□ Op-r 

MoynTAD OmOMALY 

CUAOCS YAOM Ba TTALIONS 
lead r. TNS. PNOM Meetiue 
Point to RK. 

M.P YIXEO BY Baia. H^. 

T 

1 

1 

F.'tns 

Heetins VZ^A ^int 

ReO TL SuAFl r ^YY/CtA 
AND 

MovNTeo Oaoealy 

Fe6TL S-O. 6UIDES PTnS. 
pnon DisrniBuriNo PbiNY 
TO Meetins Point 

D. R P/XED BY DiY. 

1 

1 

1 

I 

1 


"^Rmny 

COSuAALY TaAIN 
Automobile 

ANO 

Mo TON CrcL AS rs 

<p 1 Division 
through Diyision 

QuAP TER master. 

Repillino Point 
pixEo BY Army. 

t 

1 

1 

Division 

Sur\Tn. 

1 

i 

i 

Pep u LIME V/ 


g.OSuAPL Y Column 
Automobile 

AND 

Motoh Cyclists. 

Reoulatina OpncER 
or 

O R--Army. 

Railhead fixed my 
Army 

f 

1 

C.Z. 

OR 

Army 

Motor 

Supply 

CoLUMH. 

1 

\ 


Head 

Tclconapm 

Pebula tins 
Officer 

1 

1 

Daily 

R.R. Train 

1 

i 

Ree ^ 

1 

1 

^ Station 































174 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


SuoacsrcD sSrjrcM of foh a D/ytston in TkcNcn iyARFAKc 



THOOFS 



RH 


TAOOPS 



RHoaRP. 


TNOOFS 



RH.oaR.P 


Norc:- 

i>F lASpd R.H AT no'i' cr^rfo/p^ ^F>ti i^^auirps cl FAi/hpct^ 

detatch/rjFnf ^ 

B- can bcusFc/ nrhcn animcth cuv tnpoor condition or a. ^horia^e oxis t^^ 

The trtei-hod adoptooi ofepends upon:- 
(cl) racfical Situation. 

(b) Distance frotn X toY. 

(c) Roaefj and rranjport a Fat Jo hip 



















TRAINS 


175 


The above figures include forage but do not include 
fuel, gasoline and oil or other Class I supplies. 

The field artillery will require more trucks than the 
infantry brigade on account of the greater number of 
animals. 

178. NOTES ON USE OF FIELD TRAINS, INFANTRY 

DIVISION 

Composition : The field trains are composed of the 
organizational vehicles provided for carrying rations for 
men and animals and the baggage of the command. 

The field trains of each organization are divided into a 
•ration section, and a ration and baggage section. 

The ration section comprises the ration cart carrying 
one (1) day’s reserve rations for the command. The ration 
and baggage section includes the wagons carrying baggage 
and two (2) days’ field rations and two (2) days’ grain 
rations, and all other field train wagons not irtcluded in the 
ration section, such as the water cart and spring wagon, if 
any. 

The rolling kitchen, carrying one (1) day’s field ration, 
or unconsumed portion thereof when not with the combat 
train, forms a part of the ration section of the field trains. 

How Handled : The field trains of a regiment may be 
actually handled in the following manner: 

(a) First method: 

Each company’s ration section, consisting of the ration cart 
and rolling kitchen, if the latter is not with the combat train, and 
its ration and baggage section, consisting of its ration and bag¬ 
gage wagon and a water cart, may be kept with the company. 

The ration and baggage wagon would issue one (1) day’s field 
ration to the rolling kitchen each day and refill at the regimental 
distributing point. This method is particularly adapted to camps 
and stabilized situations. 

(b) Second method: 

In this case, the regimental field trains might be pooled by 
the regimental commander in the supply company under control 
of the regimental supply officer. In this event, the baggage of the 
command might be carried on certain wagons of the 22 ration 
and baggage wagons in the regimental field train, the two days’ 
field rations on certain others, and the two days’ grain and hay 
rations on certain wagons. One of the two days’ field rations 
and forage rations would be issued daily and replenished from the 
distributing point. This method is usually employed on marches, 
and in operations where movement is contemplated. 


176 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Figuring out the above plan in pounds, on the basis 
of 2,700 pounds per wagon and 800 pounds per ration cart, 
the following distribution of baggage, rations and forage in 
the regimental field trains might be adopted for the in¬ 
fantry : 


RATION SECTION 


One reserve ration for the regiment at 3 
pounds per man, 11,502 pounds. 

Ration carts (at 800 pounds each) required 15 


Surplus ration carts _ 1 

Total ration carts _16 


The 11,502 pounds \vould be distributed among the 16 ration carts. 


RATION 


fTwo field rations for the regiment 
J at 4.5 pounds per man, 34,486 

■\ pounds. 

R. and B. wagons (at 2,700 each) 
^ required _12 


FORAGE 


'Two days’ grain and hay for 
the regiment at an average 
of 10 pounds grain and 12 
pounds hay per animal per 
day, 12,204 pounds. 

R. and B. wagons (2,700 pounds 
each) required _6 


RATION AND j 

BAGGAGE SECTION 


BAGGAGE 


('Regimental head- 

I quarters _500 

j Headquarters com¬ 
pany _250 

Machine gun company. 250 

Supply company -250 

Officers (50 pounds each) 

_1,450 

Total _2.700 

. or one wagon. 

Battalion head¬ 
quarters _250 

Four companies (250 

pounds each) _1,000 

Officers (50 pounds 

each) _1,450 

Total per battalion_2,700 

or one wagon. 

Total 3 battalions_8,100 

or three wagons. 

■Total regiment _10,800 

or four wagons. 


Total, R. and B. wagons in regimental supply company 
Total, rations, forage and baggage - 


pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 


pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

pounds. 


22 

22 


Considering only the ration section of the ration and 
baggage section, it will be seen that there are 18 full 
wagons of which 12 are carrying the two days’ field 
rations and 6 are carrying the two days’ grain and hay 
ration. The third day’s grain and hay or unconsumed por¬ 
tion thereof is being carried on all the vehicles in the regi¬ 
ment for the draft animals thereof. In the same manner 
riding animals carry a portion of their grain ration issued 
the night before for a noonday feed. 

Six of the wagons, carrying one day’s field rations, 
would distribute to the rolling kitchens each day and three 





















TRAINS 


177 


of the wagons carrying one day’s grain and hay would dis¬ 
tribute one day’s forage ration each day. 

These nine empty wagons would then go to the dis¬ 
tributing point each day and fill with one day’s field ration, 
and one day’s forage ration. 

If hay is issued daily, there will always be sufficient 
wagons to draw the grain and hay daily from the distribut¬ 
ing point. If grain only is issued, three wagons could 
easily carry two days’ supply. 

Hence, it will be seen from the foregoing that in the 
ration and baggage section of the regimental field train 
there are normally two full ration sections, one section 
distributing daily and then drawing from the distributing 
point. The same principles apply in the field trains of other 
organizations of the division. 

The above computation is made and the discussion 
based on the assumption that eight rations are being carried 
in the division as follows: 

On the men, 2 reserve rations. 

On the rolling kitchen, 1 field ration. 

On the ration cart, 1 reserve ration. 

On the field train (both sections full), 2 field rations. 

On the supply train, 2 field rations. 

Total 3 reserve and 5 field rations. 

When only seven rations are carried, one field ration 
less is carried on the field train. There would then be a 
full ration section of 9 ration and baggage wagons (6 loaded 
with 1 field ration and 3 loaded with 1 forage ration) and 
a corresponding empty section of 9 ration and baggage 
wagons. The 6 full wagons carrying the field ration would 
distribute to the rolling kitchens each day (usually in the 
afternoon) and the 3 full wagons carrying the forage would 
distribute one day’s forage ration each day (usually in the 
afternoon). The 9 empty wagons would go to the dis¬ 
tributing point each day, 6 filling with one day’s field ra¬ 
tion and 3 filling with one day’s forage ration (usually in 
the morning). 

This arrangement gives in the ration and baggage 
section of the regimental field train normally a full and 
empty ration section—the full section distributing daily 
and the empty section drawing daily. 



178 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Sometimes in movements of the division where it is 
not practicable for the supply train to distribute rations, 
as in the case of a relief, a “double refill” is ordered. This 
means that the ration section which distributes rations to 
the rolling kitchens in the afternoon immediately returns 
to the distributing point and refills. The empty section 
has already refilled during the morning, which results in 
a “double refill” for the day. The division still has seven 
rations on hand, with the rolling kitchens and both sec¬ 
tions of the field train full and one ration in the supply 
train. No issue of rations by the supply train on the fol¬ 
lowing day will be necessary. 

For further details, reference the operations of the full 
and empty ration sections, see the following: 

(a) Diagram illustrating the movements of echelons of supply 
during entrainment. 

(b) Chart of supply echelons. Movement by truck and marching. 

(c) Suggested method of supply for divisions assembling for 
an attack. 

(d) Disposition of reserve rations in a rest or training area. 

When the first method of handling the field trains is 
used the capacity and cargo of the vehicles of an'infantry 
company may be computed as follows: 

Capacity 


1 R. and B. wagon_2,700 lbs 

1 ration cart _ 800 lbs 


Total _3,500 lbs 

Cargo 

1 day’s reserve rations_ 768 lbs 

1 day’s field rations_1,152 lbs 

2 days’ grain rations_ 252 lbs 

Officers’ baggage_ 300 lbs 

Company baggage- 500 lbs 


Total ---2,972 lbs 

Surplus capacity_ 528 lbs 


1 rolling kitchen; 1 day’s ration. 

Computation for other organizations will be on the 
above basis. 

Rolling kitchens usually march with the combat train 
and will be included in the combat train in problems at 
these Schools, unless the special situation warrants placing 
them in field trains, when the orders for that situation 
should cover same. 














DIAGRAM ILLUSTRATING THE MOVEMENTS 
OF ECHELONS OF SUPPLY DURING ENTRAINMENT OF Ist.DIV. JUNE 25-28 1918 


trains 












































CHART or SUPPUY tCHELONS 
H^OVEMENT BY TRUCK AND MARCHING JUNE1-4i9i8 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


180 



i 


NOT£:ll1imdakl$ mbsiiiifmmitaimnlkjtitiffulk, 












































































TRAINS 


181 


>1 \su6^EST£0 Method of Juffcv for Dif/j/oh^ mjoembuns for an Attach 



More. 


On// /he fnfan/ry F/e^imenis are considered for smipiici//, 
Oiher /rams mteke jtmi/ar moeeenen/s. 


s=ru/l 5ec/ton; (^ = £mp/y Jec/tonj = Ba^^ot^e Jeo/ion. 







182 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


179. Disposition of Reserve Rations in a Rest Area or 
Training Area 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date and Hour) 

Administrative Orders ) 

No — 3 . 

RATIONS AND FORAGE 

I. The rations and forage as prescribed in paragraph 302, Field Ser¬ 

vice Regulations, will be at all times on hand and ready for 
distribution as follows: 

Rations: 

On men, two (2) days’ reserve, one (1) day’s cooked, or un¬ 
consumed portion thereof. 

On kitchens, one (1) day’s field. 

On ration section of field train one (1) day’s field; ration 
cart, one (1) day’s reserve. 

On supply train, two (2) days’ field. 

Forage: 

On each vehicle, one (1) day’s grain rations for its draft, 
animals. 

On ration section of field train, two (2) days’ grain ration 
for all animals. 

On supply train, two (2) days’ grain ration for all animals. 

II. Each regiment and separate unit will establish at once a food and 

forage dump. It will be located at a point selected by the unit 
commander with special regard for the expeditious handling of 
the rations in case of emergency. In this dump will be kept: 

Three (3) days’ reserve rations. 

Two (2) days’ field rations. 

Two (2) days’ grain rations. 

III. The division quartermaster will establish a division ration and 
forage dump. In this dump will be kept: 

Two (2) days’ field rations. 

Two (2) days’ grain rations. 

IV. In Event of a Move or Emergency: 

(a) Rolling kitchens will load from organization dump one days* 
field ration. 

(b) Field train will load from organization dump two days* 
reserve rations and distribute to troops. 

(c) Field train will then return to dump and load remaining one 
day’s reserve rations, one day’s field rations, and two days’ 
grain rations. 

(d) Supply train will load from division dump, two (2) days’ 
field rations and two (2) days’ grain rations. 

V. The locations of the dumps called for above will be submitted to 

these headquarters before noon, July 21, 1918. 

VI. The division quartermaster will notify unit supply officers when 
rations 'to be stored are ready for delivery. 

By command of Major General X. 

Y, 

Chief of Staff. 


CHAPTER VII 


The Services 


180. DIVISION QUARTERMASTER 

(See Organization of the Division Quartermaster's Office.) 

181. Sub-Services Controlled by Division Quartermaster 

182. The Salvage Squad. 

This unit, consisting of 1 officer and 21 enlisted men, 
is attached to the division during campaign. During the 
mobilization and training period of the division at a camp 
or cantonment the salvage service is usually a function of 
the camp quartermaster and serves the division as long as 
the latter is in the camp or cantonment. 

The salvaging of unserviceable material should be a 
daily operation and should be regulated by standing orders 
in the division (see form of division administrative order 
organizing the salvage service). 

In the field the officer in charge of the salvage squad 
is referred to as the division salvage officer. He generally 
establishes facilities near the railhead for receiving, sorting, 
handling and shipping salvage. His establishment is known 
as the division salvage dump. He may, however, during an 
offensive, be directed to establish a dump in the divisional 
sector and evacuate salvage to the corps salvage park when 
motor transportation is available. In this case the salvag¬ 
ing of the divisional area up to a certain line designated in 
the administrative orders by G4 is accomplished usually by 
labor troops or pioneer infantry attached to the division by 
the corps, and beyond that line by combat troops from 
the divisional reserve. The salvage squad would then simply 
function at the division salvage dump and send detachments 
to the aid stations, dressing stations and field hospitals to 
take over the arms, equipment and ammunition from the 
wounded. G4 provides transportation, both motor and ani- 


183 



184 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


mal-drawn, for the collection and evacuation of salvage, and 
it is the duty of the division quartermaster to see that the 
salvage dump is properly organized, that the salvage squad 
is working efficiently and that salvage is being properly dis¬ 
posed of. 

183. The Sales Commissary. 

This is an attached unit, consisting of 1 officer and 
about 12 enlisted assistants. It generally establishes itself 
near the railhead and functions under the direction of 
the division quartermaster. It offers for sale to officers, 
enlisted men, and messes at cost price such articles as food, 
clothing, candies, cakes, smoking material, soap, towels, toilet 
articles, equipment, etc. The unit is generally furnished 
with two or three trucks with which it operates moving 
sales commissaries on daily schedules prepared by the 
quartermaster. In some cases, especially in training 
areas and well organized or stabilized sectors, branch sales 
commissaries may be established under the supervision of 
brigade or regimental commanders. Every possible effort 
should be exercised to afford all organizations frequent and 
convenient opportunities to patronize the sales units. The 
officer in charge of the sales commissary keeps the quarter¬ 
master informed as to the sufficiency of his stock. Supplies 
needed for the unit and which cannot be secured from the 
railhead are requested by G4 in a memorandum or requi¬ 
sition to G4, army. 

184. The Disinfecting and Bathing Plants. 

It is. difficult to keeep troops actually in line supplied 
with clean and serviceable clothing. It is equally difficult 
to afford them bathing facilities and to keep them free 
from body lice. Therefore as soon as organizations are 
brought to the rear they should be afforded immediate op¬ 
portunities to visit the bathing and disinfecting plants es¬ 
tablished by the division quartermaster in convenient loca¬ 
tions. At the plant the men are bathed and treated and 
their old articles of clothing exchanged for new or clean 
and serviceable garments. The discarded clothing is passed 
through the disinfectors and then reissued or sent to the 
laundry or to salvage. The plants are operated by personnel 


THE SERVICES 


185 


furnished for the purpose by the corps or army or by suit¬ 
able men drawn from the division. The disinfectors are 
operated by engineers, while the bathing is conducted under 
the observation of an officer of the medical corps who is 
present to prescribe any treatment needed and to detect the 
presence of skin diseases. 

185. The Clothing Squad. 

This squad, when attached, is in charge of an officer 
and generally functions under the division quartermaster 
and between the railhead officer and the disinfecting and 
bathing plants. It secures articles of clothing from the 
railhead or the advanced army depots and makes the neces¬ 
sary issues to troops in exchange for similar articles turned 
in as explained above. 

This scheme of procuring clothing proved much better 
in France than securing clothing upon regular requisitions. 
Delays incident to the filling of requisitions were avoided, 
besides troops were able to get clothing whenever they 
needed it and in just the required amounts. 

(See sample of division administrative order organizing 
clothing service.) 

186. The Railhead Detachment. 

During an offensive and where more than one division 
is using a railhead, the army usually supplies sufficient 
labor at the railheads to handle the supplies for the rail¬ 
head officer. In this case the division quartermaster sends 
only such personnel to the railhead with the supply train 
as is necessary to load the division supplies. But in train¬ 
ing areas and in quiet sectors where only one division is 
being served by a railhead it often happens that the rail¬ 
head officer has a very limited personnel and is compelled to 
call on the division for assistance. A labor detail must 
therefore be provided by the division. Its strength should 
consist of about 1 officer and 100 men. Its organ¬ 
ization should be similar to that of a company; it 
should run its own mess and be billeted as close to the rail¬ 
head as possible. This detachment functions under the 
division quartermaster who, when called upon by the rail¬ 
head officer, furnishes the latter with such assistance as he 


186 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


may need to unload trains, handle freight and issue supplies. 
There is a lot of work to be done around a railhead and when 
the men are not all working for the railhead officer the quar¬ 
termaster can usually find something for them to do. The 
advantages gained by a division in maintaining its own de¬ 
tail are: The detachment acquires a permanency which con¬ 
tributes to efficiency; it acquires the spirit of an organiza¬ 
tion; it develops an interest in the division it serves; it 
develops in efficiency assured by the removal of unsuitable 
personnel; and it functions under the control of the division 
rather than under the railhead officer. Its entire duty is 
concerned with furnishing the labor parties required around 
the railhead or refilling point. 

The railhead detachment is divided into four groups: 
Rations, forage, fuel and property, and a certain number 
of men are given permanent assignment in each of the four 
groups so that they will be familiar with the work. 

The entire railhead detachment is usually required in 
the morning for unloading the train and issuing the supplies. 
More than one-half of the detachment, about 60 men, is re¬ 
quired to handle the rations and forage but only a few are 
generally necessary for fuel and property. 

(See proposed table of organization for railhead detachment 
serving one division.) 

(See sample of division administrative order organizing rail¬ 
head detachment and burial service.) 

187. The Burial Service. 

The burial service, though functioning under the divi¬ 
sion quartermaster, is usually placed during combat under 
the direct control of the division sanitary inspector, who 
co-operates with the division chaplain. Certain chaplains 
of the division are designated to assist in the burial of the 
dead, to supervise the collection and proper marking of all 
personal effects of the dead, to see to the shipment home 
of such effects and to keep the proper records of all burials. 

Labor troops or pioneer infantry are usually attached 
to the division by the corps for burial and salvage duty and 
are placed by G4 under the control of the sanitary inspec¬ 
tor and salvage officer. These troops are also required to 
bury all dead animals in the divisional sector. When com- 


THE SERVICES 


187 


bat troops can be spared they should be used in burying the 
dead in the forward area. The sanitary inspector should 
see that all graves have the proper identification marks upon 
them, that the dead be buried, if possible, in lots of 50 men 
each, and that the location of the graves be carefully located 
on a large scale map. Photographs of the graves should 
be taken whenever practicable. Tools for burial purposes 
are generally supplied from the engineer train. Animal 
transportation for moving bodies from low and inaccessible 
places to high, open ground should be provided by G4. 

The graves registration service operates under control 
of the quartermaster department and has charge of the 
location, maintenance and control of cemeteries, the proper 
marking, registration and preservation of all graves and the 
maintenance of a complete system of registration. 

In combat, a detachment of the graves registration 
service with a noncommissioned officer in charge is usually 
attached to the division. This detachment works under 
the direction of the sanitary inspector, follows up the work 
of the latter, who furnishes it a map showing the location 
of all graves in the area and, in co-operation with the divi¬ 
sion chaplain, supplies such records of burial as may be 
necessary to complete the records of the graves registration 
unit. 

(See sample of division administrative order organizing rail¬ 
head detachment and burial service.) 


188 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


188. Organization of the Division Quartermaster’s Office 

Lieutenant Colonel—Division Quartermaster 


FINANCE 

SUBSISTENCE 

TRANSPORTA¬ 

TION 

ADMINISTRA¬ 

TION 

1 captain—Disburs- 

(Class I supplies) 

(Class II and III 

Division Quarter- 

ing Officer 

1 major—In charge 

supplies) 

master 

1 1st Lt—Asst 

1 2d Lt—Asst 

1 major—In charge 

1 1st Lt 

6 sergeants 1st class 

2 sergeants 1st class 

1 captain—Asst 

1 sergeant 1st class 

4 sergeants 

4 sergeants 

1 sergeant 1st class 

(chief clerk) 

Pay of personnel 

Ration Returns 

1 sergeant 

DHQ property 

General Disburse- 

Subsistence 

Requisitions 

Miscellaneous re- 

ments 

Forage 

Fuel 

Gasoline, oils, etc. 
Sales Commissaries 
Railhead Detach¬ 
ment 

Employment of Sup 
Tn 

Distributing Points 
Ration Dumps 

1 

Transportation 

Animals 

Clothing 

QM Equipment 

Camp Sites 

Supply Dumps 
Depots and Store¬ 
houses 

QM Workshops 
Burials 

Graves Registration 
Service 

Salvage Service 
Clothing Squad 
Laundries 

Baths 

Disinfecting Plants 

ports 

Office Records 

Record of QM Per¬ 
sonnel and R-H 
Detachment 


NOTE:—Additional enlisted clerks attached as authorized by division com¬ 
mander. 

During an offensive when there is not much demand for Class II and III sup¬ 
plies the personnel of this section is used to assist the subsistence section. 

PROPOSED TABLE OF ORGANIZATION FOR RAILHEAD DE¬ 
TACHMENT SERVING ONE (1) DIVISION 


Captains _ I 

Lieutenants _ (a) 2 

Sergeants _ (b) 4 

Corporals - (c) 6 

Privates first-class or privates _ (d) 12 

Laborers _ (e) 60 

Chauffeurs _ (f) 1 

Motor cars _ (g) 1 


Detailed Explanation 

(a) One assistant to railhead officer and one in charge of labor. 

(b) One in charge ration warehouse or open dumps; one in charge fuel, forage 
and gasoline ; one in charge fresh beef; one in charge of labor. 

(c) Duty with various supply branches, records and issues. 

(d) Duty with issues, dumps; as checkers, cooks, etc. 

(e) Unloading of cars and general labor. 

(f) Duty with railhead officer. 

(g) For duty at railhead. 


All of the above personnel to be drawn from the quarter¬ 
master corps. 

Resume of Personnel 


Officers _3 

Noncommissioned officers_10 

Privates _63 

Total _76 























THE SERVICES 


189 


189. MEDICAL DEPARTMENT 

Standard form for plan of evacuation—division or reinforced 
brigade (attached). 

Standard form for plan of evacuation—corps or army (at¬ 
tached). 


190. Casualties 

( a ) Sick. —For transportation in campaign under aver¬ 
age seasonal supply and morbidity conditions, take daily 
increment of sick as 1.0 per cent. One-third of these will re¬ 
quire evacuation beyond the division. The other two-thirds 
will be slightly sick and recover within five days. Of the 
0.33J per cent evacuated, one-half will be sitters, one-half 
recumbents. 

For trained troops in campaign consider that the con¬ 
stant non-effective list will be somewhat less than 8 per 
cent. Eight per cent gives a fair factor of safety. Take loss 
through death, desertion, discharge, and general courts- 
martial, etc., of evacuated sick as 6.6 per cent and expect 
93.3 per cent to be returned to duty. 

(b) Battle Casualties. —No definite figures can be 
given as to the per diem of battle casualties to be expected 
as these will vary with the military situation and the num¬ 
bers engaged. 

Compilation of per diem casualties in the past shows 
wide variations. The average per diem (24 hours) of bat¬ 
tle casualties can be taken in the division, corps, and army 
with a fair factor of safety as 5 per cent but should be es¬ 
timated and prepared for on the basis of 10 per cent in a 
single division opposed to a force of similar strength in order 
to cover unusual contingencies. 

In a brigade or regiment, preparation should be made 
to care for a per diem casualty of 20 per cent. 


(c) Ratio of Casualties. 


Dead 

Non-evacuables 

Lying 

Sitting 


Open Operations 
20 % 

8 % 

12 % 

20 % 

40% 


Trench Operations 
25% II 
8 %§ 

12 %§ 

20 %§ 

40% 


or lying 20% and sitters 20%. 


Iinequire ouriai. « , 

§Require transportation from field to field hospital. 



190 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Open Operations 
*Non-evacuables 8% 
Lying 12% 

Sitting 20% 

Able to walk to 
field hospital 28% 


168% 

JAble to walk 
to base 12% 


Trench Operations 
8 % Require transpor- 

12% tation from field 

20% hospitals to the 

rear. 

25% 


65% 

12 % 


191. Capacity of Collection Units 


(a) Vehicles. 



Sitters 

Lying Cadavers 

Field wagon 

9 

0 16-20 

or 

1 

4 

Caisson 

2 

0 

Horsed ambulance 

1 

4 

or 

9 

0 

Motor ambulance, G.M.C. bodyl 

4 

cr 

9 

0 

Motor ambulance. Ford body 1 

3 

or 

5 

0 

Truck, li-ton 

1 

6 

or 

13 

0 

Truck, 3-ton 

1 

8 

or 

21 

0 

Pullman sleeper 


3 per section (12-14-16 sections) 

Passenger day coach 

40-50 

0 

Box or flat cars, average 


20-25 (36 to 40-ft. length.) 

or 

36-40 


A.E.F. ward car 

6 

36 

or 

42 


A.E.F. hospital train 

260 

260 

10 ward cars 



or 

60 

360 


(b) Collection—Ambulance Company. 

Horsed company, 80 bearers, 12 ambulances, 1 dressing sta¬ 
tion party. 

Motor company, 72 bearers, 12 ambulances, 1 dressing sta¬ 
tion party. 

Bearer section can Ambulances make 12 Dressing station party 

make 20-40 litter plus Amb. trips per dress 30-40 serious and 

trips per hour hour 30-40 slight cases per 

hour 

Capacity 20-40 patients 72 patients plus, half 60-80 patients 
per hour sitting, half lying per hour 

To determine number of ambulance loads required to 
transport cases from field hospitals to evacuation hospitals 
divide total number of wounded by 6 or total casualties by 
10 . 


*A1I lying to surgical hospital. 
fHalf lying, half sitters. 

JTo convalescent depot. 





THE SERVICES 


191 


To determine number of hospital trains (A.E.F.) re¬ 
quired to evacuate a given number of battle casualty cases 
divide total number by 500. 

These rules based on the assumption that casualties are half walkers 
and half sitters (see lie) and that non-evacuables are sent to mobile surgical hos¬ 
pitals. 


192. Hospitalization—Capacity in Beds 


(a) Normal Crisis 


Camp infirmary 

0 

Not over 6 if shelter and bedding 




are 

at 

hand—48 per Div. 

Ambulance company 

12 

100 

<< 

u 

“ 400 per Div. 

Field hospital company 

216 

300 


a 

“ 1200 per Div. 

Sanitary train 

912 

1648 

u 

u 

it 

Mobile surgical hospital 

120 

200 

n 

ti 

U 

Evacuation hospital. 






A.E.F. 

1,000 

1500 

a 

u 

« 

Camp hospital 

100-300 

100-300 




Base hospital, A.E.F. 

1,000 

2,000 

a 

u 

a 


(b) Capacity of shelter required on basis 5 per cent 
battle casualty list: 

Able to walk to field 

hospital _ 25-28% 

Sitters_ 20% 

Lying - —12% 

57-60% Field hospitals _840 

Non-evacuables_ 8% Mobile surgical hospitals_112 

In field hospitals if mobile surgical hospital is not available_962 

In evacuation hospitals: 

Able to walk to field hospitals 28% 

Sitters _20% 

Lying _12% 

57-60% 

In convalescent depot, able 

to walk to base_12% 

In mobile surgical hospitals — 8% 

In evacuation hospitals, 
convalescent depot and 
mobile surgical hospital —80% 


840 

168 

112 

1120 


(c) Total hospitalization required in the communica¬ 
tion zone and zone of the interior of a large field force, 
exclusive of mobile hospitals: 

For constant average non-effective sick-8% 

For battle casualties and crisis capacity for epidemics._ 7% 


Total 


,16% 














192 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


193. Battle Interments 

Multiple interments best made in a trench 6 feet 
deep, feet wide in three tiers of bodies. As 24 inches 
trench length is required for each body, allowance should 
be made of 8 inches (| foot) length when burial is in three 
tiers. 

Evacuation required 26 cubic feet per cadaver. 


Nature of soil 

Proportion of tools 
required 

Picks 1 Shovels 

Cubic feet of excavation 
per man 

1 hour 1 4 hours | 8 hours 

Vpry ViarH 

2 1 1 

1 1 

1 1 2 

15 1 40 1 67 

22.5 60 100 

30 1 80 1 133 

Avprag'p 

T.ip-ht. 



From this it will be seen that one man can excavate 
in 8 hours in medium ground sufficiently to inter 4 bodies. 
With S^-hour tasks 3^ running feet will be completed in 
something less than 12 hours. A S^-foot task will accom¬ 
modate cadavers. For night work a 5-foot task is more 
advantageous. In arranging for collection and interment, 
use one-half of force allowed for collection until this is com¬ 
pleted and one-half for excavation, then arrange reliefs for 
excavation and filling. One company of engineers of 250 
men with eight field wagons and tools given in the table are 
sufficient for collection and interment of the dead of a divi¬ 
sion 10 per cent casualty list. 

Additional aid required: 

Three medical officers and three clerks for examination and 
record of cause of death; three chaplains, one Roman Catholic, 
one Protestant, one Jewish, for record of interment, collection of 
effects, and last rites. 

194. Medical Supply 

a. In battalion, regimental, division, corps and army 
units, average normal sick and accident, there is a supply 
for 30 days and a battle supply of medicines and dressings. 

Battle supply of litters, splints, dressings, and blankets 
and clothing must be increased prior or during engagement 
by dumping contents of medical supply units and parks and 
refilling from medical supply parks and depots with dress¬ 
ings, splints, litters, blankets and clothing from parks and 
depots. 











THE SERVICES 


193 


195. Medical Department Personnel 

a. The amount of medical department personnel re¬ 
quired for zone of the interior, communications zone, .and 
combat zone, is 10 per cent of the entire force. Half of 
this will be in the combat zone and half in’ the communica¬ 
tions zone and zone of the interior. The ratio in these two 
latter zones is dependent upon the length of line of com¬ 
munication and whether definitive treatment is to be given 
in the communications zone or the zone of the interior. 

b. Replacements of medical department troops re¬ 
quired per 1,000 per month in an expeditionary force to 
cover deaths, severely wounded and prisoners: 

Officers_2.5% 

Men-2.9% 

An initial replacement reserve is required for temporary 
ineffectives from slight and moderate sickness and wounds 
amounting to, officers 46.2, men 46.5 per thousand. 


196. PLAN OF EVACUATION, CORPS 


OFFICE OF THE SURGEON, I ARMY CORPS 

Fairfield, Pa., July 2, 1919. 

From: Surgeon. 

To: A C of S, G4, I Army Corps. 

Subject: Memorandum plan Medical Department evacuation to ac¬ 
company F O No 50. 

1. Below find memorandum of a plan of Medical Department eva¬ 
cuation and hospitalization for consideration for inclusion in the ad¬ 
ministrative order to accompany F O No 50, I Army Corps. 

This plan is based upon a probable casualty day of 10 per cent 
of divisional troops. Casualties of corps troops will not be great 
and they are provided for by the divisions near which they serve 
and by the corps sanitary train. 


Organization and Location 


No. of Units Classes of Cases and Function 


I. Collection: 

(a) Evacuation ambulance 
companies 

Vicinity crossroads 611 


Vicinity crossroads 665 
ViciniD'^ crossroads 623 
Vicinity crossroads 616 
(S of Fairfield) 
Vicinity Hagerstown 


(b) Ambulance section I 

Corps Sn Tn vicinity 
crossroads 630, Amb Cos 


8 

1 Evacuation from field, mo¬ 
bile and evacuation hos¬ 
pitals. 

1 Same. 

2 Same. 

• Same. ? 

2 

2 Movement of casualties be¬ 
tween railway and eva¬ 
cuation hospitals. 

Evacuation from field, mo¬ 
bile and evacuation hos- 

4 pitals. 




194 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


11. Hospitalization: 

(a) Evacuation Hospitals 8 

Vicinity Virginia Mills 1 

(Zone 1st Div) 

Vicinity crossroads 665 1 

(Zone 2d Div) 

Vicinity Orrtanna 1 

(Zone 3d Div) 

Vicinity railway i mile 
west of crossroads 616 
(S of Fairfield) 1 

On track packed in vicinity 
of Hagerstown 4 

(b) Mobile surgical hospitals 4 

Vicinity Fairfield 1 

(Zone 1st Div) 

Vicinity crossroads 655 1 

(Zone 2d Div) 

Vicinity crossroads 616 1 

(Zone 3d Div) 

Vicinity crossroads 617 1 

(c) Field Hospitals, I Corps 

Sn Tn vicinity crossroads 
630 4 

(d) Mobile surgical units 
Reports to surgeons 1st, 

2d, 3d and 4th Div, each 1 

(e) Mobile degassing units 8 

To report to Surgeon 1st 

and 2d Div each 1 

To report to Surgeon 3d 
and 4th Div and CO 
Sn Tn, I Corps each 2 


Seriously wounded and sick 
excluding gas and con¬ 
tagious. 

Same. 

Same. 

Same. 


Will reconnoiter vicinity 
for means of shelter and 
establishment—will not 
establish until ordered. 

Non-evacuable surgical 
cases. 

Same. 

Same. 

In readiness to move—will 
not establish until 
ordered. 


1 gas case, 2 slightly 
wounded, 1 slightly sick 
and contagious cases. 

Duty with divisional F 
Hosp sec Sn Tn. 


For duty with Sn Tn. 


Same. 


III. Supply: 

Corps Medical Supply Park: vicinity crossroads 630. 

IV. Routes and Destinations: 

Movement of ambulances in corps areas north and south via 
corps lateral road. Slightly wounded, slightly sick, contagious and 
gas cases (to be evacuated) to corps field hospital sections at cross¬ 
roads 630. 

Non-evacuable to mobile surgical hospitals. 

All other cases to evacuation hospitals. 

V. Classification: 

Routine. 

VI. Corps collection by corps to mobile surgical and evacuation hos¬ 
pitals. 

Final evacuation by hospital trains. 

2. It is requested that eight hospital trains be secured and held 
for evacuation. 

X, 

Surgeon, I Army Corps. 


THE SERVICES 


195 


Distribution: 


C of S 1 

G1 1. 

G3 1 

G4 1 

Med Evac Off 1 


C Surg Off 1 

San Insp 1 

CO Sn Tn 3 

Surg next higher unit 1 


197. Plan of Evacuation—Division or Reinforced Brigade 

OFFICE OF THE SURGEON, 1st DIVISION 

Fairfield, Pa., June 2 , 1920 . 

T»/r 1 ^ ^ 12:00 noon 

Memorandum for G4, 1st Division. 

Subject: Plan of evacuation. 

1. Below find plan of collection, hospitalization, supply and evacu¬ 
ation, 1st Division, for the coming attack. 

Organization and Location No. of Units Function 


1 Establish SSW Miedley 
crossroads (1 mile south¬ 
west of hill 766) at H 
minus 4 hours. 


I. Collection: 

(a) Sn Tn 1st Div 


(b) Amb Cos 
4th Amb Co 

Vicinity Willoughby Run 
west of J. Biesecker 
farm at H minus 5 hours 
1st Amb Co 

Vicinity of Pitzer S. H. 

at H minus 5 hours 
Amb Det 2d Amb Co at 
H minus 4 hours 
Hq Amb Sec 2d Amb Co 
(less det) 

3d Amb Co 

Vicinity house 300 yards 
SE H. E. Boyd at H 
H minus 4 hours 

(c) Camp Ifmies 
Miedley crossroads at H 

minus 4 hours 
Camp Infmies unimproved 
road 900 yards NW cross¬ 
roads 590 at H plus 2 
hours 

II. Hospitalization: 

(a) Hq Sn Tn, Hq F Hosp Sec, 
1st and 2d F Hosp Cos 
Vicinity crossroads 583 at 

H minus 4 hours 

(b) 3d and 4th F Hosp Cos 
Vicinity unimproved road 
900 yards NW crossroads 

590 at H dIus 2 hours 

III. Supply: 

Div Med Sup Unit 
Vicinity crossroads 583 at 
H minus 4 hours. 


4 

1 Cover zone of attack 1st 
Brig. 

1 Cover zone of attack 2d 
Brig. 

1 Relay from 4th Amb Co. 


2 Reserve. 


1 SSW Miedley crossroads. 
1 


7 Reserve. 

Establish sorting and gas 
2 hospital. 


2 Reserve. 


1 Supply. 

Corps Supply Point cross¬ 
roads 630. 


196 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


IV. Routes and Destinations:. 

Ambulance routes: 

To 1st Brig: Miedley crossroads—568— McCleary S. H.— 
Trastle —J. Biesecker. 

To 2d Brig: 705—609—533—PiTZER S. H. 

All walkers to SSW: Miedley crossroads (1 mile SW hill 766). 
All other cases to sorting station. 

V. Classification: 

Routine. 

VI. Evacuation: 

By corps. 

2. It is recommended (a) that all empty trucks en route to rail¬ 
head stop at Miedley crossroads for transportation of slight cases en 
route to 611. 

(b) That one company of labor troops be provided with the fol¬ 
lowing tools and transportation: 75 picks, 75 shovels, 8 axes, 8 field 
wagons and teams complete; and reported to the sanitary inspector 
at J. Sacks farm at H plus 4 hour on D day. 

(c) That all prisoners be sent to the division collecting point via 
battalion and regimental aid points and dressing stations. 

XYZ, 

Surg 1st Div. 

198. ENGINEER CORPS 

199. Engineering Data—Roads 

The vehicles using roads vary from a light horse-drawn 
vehicle to the large tank weighing 35 tons (see table in 
Engineering Data — Bridges , for weights and wheel loads of 
various vehicles). 

In dry weather any earth road will support the heaviest 
traffic. In wet weather, an earth road will almost imme¬ 
diately become impassable to truck traffic; and a stone sur¬ 
faced road without large stone foundation base will in a 
day or more have many holes and be quite difficult for truck 
traffic. 

A plank road can carry the heavier loads for about two 
weeks, but it will then require constant repair. 

200. Table of Material 

(See page 70, Engineering Data.) 

201. Table of Construction 

(See page 71, Engineering Data.) 

202. Table for Maintenance Personnel 

(See page 72, Engineering Data.) 


THE SERVICES 


197 


203. Table for Maintenance Material 

(See page 72, Engineering Data.) 

204. Engineering Data—Light Railways 

(See page 47, Engineering Data.) 

205. Table of Rolling Stock, 60-Centimeter 

(See page 48, Engineering Data.) 

206. Table of Trains 

(See page 48, Engineering Data.) 

207. Table of Material 

(See page 50, Engineering Data.) 

208. Table of Construction 

(See page 50, Engineering Data.) 

209. Table of Operation and Maintenance 

(See page 53, Engineering Data.) 

NOTE: For data on standard gauge railways, see pages 55 to 66, Engineering 

Data. 

210. Engineering Data—Miscellaneous 


SLOPE 

OPERATIONS 

1-on 

Degrees 

7 

8 

Not practicable for heavily loaded vehicles. 

6i 

9 

With few exceptions it is impossible for heavily loaded 
trucks to climb grades exceeding 16 per cent (about 
9°), even when the road surface is hard and in good 
condition. 

6 

9J 

Field artillery can no longer maneuver. 

4 

14-15 

Maximum up to which all arms can move. 

3 

18i 

Light vehicles can ascend. 

2 

26 

Individuals and mules can ascend or descend. 

1 

45 

Foot troops can ascend or descend aided by hands. 


War material can be dragged up any slope. 


211. Practicable Depth of Fords, depending on current 
and nature of bottom: 

3- 3.5 feet deep for infantry. 

4- 4.5 feet deep for cavalry. 

3 feet deep for artillery. 

2.3 feet deep for wagons. 

212. Stream Flow.— Velocity in miles per hour — Tio X 
velocity in feet per second. 









198 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


213. Strength of Ice. 

3 inches thick will support small group of men. 

4i to 7 inches thick will support cavalry and light guns. 

8 to 12 inches thick will support heavy guns and wagons. 

214. Standard Reconnaissance Equipment. 

The Engineer Department issues a standard reconnais¬ 
sance equipment as follows, based solely on the plane table 
method: 

Equipment 

1 alidade, 1 holder, timing pad, 

1 board, sketching, 1 pace tally, 

1 chest, sketching outfit, 1 pencil pocket, 

1 clinometer, service with case, 1 tripod, wood, folding. 

Supplies 

12 celluloid, sheets, 6 pencils, drawing, H, 

2 erasers, rubber, 2 pencils, green, 

6 pads, timing, 2 pencils, red, 

72 paper, sketching board, sheets, 2 protectors, pencil point, 

2 pencils, blue, 2 tape, adhesive, rolls. 

215. ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT 

216. CHEMICAL WARFARE SERVICE 

217. Gas Defense Supplies 

Additional items of gas defense supply consist of tech¬ 
nical equipment (including samples of various gases) for 
gas defense training, protective paste (‘'sag paste”) for 
mustard gas protection, gas-proof blankets for dugouts, and 
gas-proof pigeon bags. Pigeon bags are furnished through 
the pigeon service, not through the chemical warfare service 
depot system. 

Issues of gas defense supplies within a division are 
made by the division chemical warfare officer to the regi¬ 
mental, battalion or other gas officer. Issues to corps and 
army troops are made similarly by the chief chemical war¬ 
fare officers of corps and armies respectively. During cam¬ 
paign, gas defense supplies are normally furnished to di¬ 
visions and corps through army chemical warfare service 
defensive depots. 

The gas mask is made in five sizes. The proportion of 
various sizes required runs generally as follows, although 
varying considerably in different commands: 


Diagram of Ordnance. Supply 













































































198 



214 


sar 

me 


1 a] 
1 b 
1 C] 
1 ci 


12 

2 

6 

72 

2 

21 ! 

21 ( 

21 ' 

ni( 

ga 

mi 

ga 

th' 

de 


mi 

m( 

ar 

fa 

pa 

vif 

de 

va 

va 


I 


I 



d3iy^HJr 


'r /‘ach rai/nay arfi/l/Ty ^^diwNAwe* .-. f/?fpairs of a// A^uipr^firr^ 

; Jftrti Mobile. ffepAiftSHOP \jnc^n7p. 



S' & 


I 

■5 




h 

■^1 



3mz_ s-Nouvmnb/tH?^- -^ 




























































• t 




( 


» 

, 5 


V 


f 



THE SERVICES 


199 


No. 1, very small, 2 per cent. 

No. 2, small, 12 per cent. 

No. 3, medium, 60 per cent. 

No. 4, large, 20 per cent. 

No. 5, very large, 6 per cent. 

If requisitions do not specify sizes needed, standard 
proportions will be supplied. 

Masks must he carefully fitted and tested when issued, 
and must be regarded as strictly personal equipment, not 
to be exchanged between individuals. 

Life of Gas Mask.— Gas mask canisters usually be¬ 
come ineffective through mechanical damage before they 
become worn out chemically. Nevertheless, the chemicals 
gradually lose their efficiency, even when breathed through 
in air only. The canister should be replaced by a new one 
after six months of war service, or sooner if defective from 
wet, rust or other damage, or if it has been breathed 
through for a full total of 40 hours in gas. 

Including losses, it is estimated that on the average re¬ 
placements will have to be made as follows: 

In Peace 

One mask to each individual every 3 years. 

One canister to each individual per year. 

In War 

One mask and one canister to each individual once every 
4 to 6 months. 

In order to obtain information regarding the safe life 
of respirators and canisters under varying conditions of 
service, combat divisions, in active service, are required to 
submit specimens of used masks to the chemical warfare 
service experimental laboratory once each month for test 
and report. 

As it is important to conserve tonnage and production, 
only canisters should be replaced whenever possible, not 
entire gas masks. 

Masks must be protected from wet as far as possible, 
and rough usage must be avoided. Nothing must be carried 
in the satchel, except the gas mask and anti-dimming out¬ 
fit; small articles of kit readily cause damage to the mask. 


200 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


218. Gas Defensive Equipment for One Infantry Division 

Based on Tables of Organization, Series A, January 14, 1918, as 
Amended. 


Line 

Unit Supplied 

American 

Tissot Masks 

Horse Masks 

Spare 

Canisters 

Protective 

Suits 

Protective 

Gloves 

Glycerine 

(2-oz. cans) 

Chloride of Lime 

( 100-lb. cans) 

1 Alarm 

[ Devices 



(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 



(e) 

(f) 

1 

Division headquarters __ 

320 

175 

15 

15 

30 

2 

2 

6 

2 

2 infantry brigades_ 

17,800 

2,165 

900 

850 

1,700 

90 

50 

278 

3 

1 artillery brigade_ 

5,215 

2,850 

260 

2,335 

4,710 

34 

70 

96 

4 

1 Mn hnttjilinn 

415 


20 

100 

200 

3 

5 

9 

5 

1 • engineer regiment_ 

1,835 

370 

90 

100 

200 

9 

20 

30 

6 

1 field signal battalion_ 

515 

30 

25 

400 

800 

4 


10 

7 

Train headquarters and 










military police __ 

395 

365 

20 

- —— — — 

. —— 

2 


25 

8 

Ammunition train _ 

1,400 

665 

70 

_ 

..... 

10 

20 

10 

9 

Supply train 

525 


25 



7 


4 

10 

Enginppr train 

90 

115 


20 

40 

2 


2 

11 

Sanitary train _ _ _ 

970 

215 

45 

140 

280 

8 

6 

17 

12 

Attached units _ _ 

100 


..... 

30 

60 

_ 


2 

13 

Div med supply officer __ 

600(g) 









Total __ 

30,000 

6,950 

1,470 

4,010 

8,020 

173 

172 

490 


NOTES 

(a) Issue based on total strength plus 5 per cent reserve. 

(b) Issue based on total strength plus 5 per cent reserve. Only 50 per cent of 
total will be issued at the present time. 

(c) Equal to 5 per cent of masks issued. 

(d) Protective suits will not be issued until there is some likelihood of their being 
needed at an early date, except in Hawaii, Philippines and Panama. 

(e) Will not be supplied until requisitioned by division commander for prospec¬ 
tive immediate use. 

(f) Devices consist of klaxons, steel triangles, police rattles, etc. 

(g) Item 500 masks—2 for each ambulance and reserve of 400 masks for field 
hospitals, emergency stations, etc. 


219. Gas Defense Supplies—Weight and Dimensions of 
Packages 


(Extract from Circular 52, Office Chief Chemical Warfare Service, 
A.E.F., Oct. 3, 1918.) 


ITEM 


American Masks 
American Masks 

Canisters _ 

Sag Paste _ 

Sag Paste _ 

Sag Paste _ 

Sag Paste _ 

Klaxon Horns _ 
Protective Gloves 

Horse Masks_ 

Blankets _ 

Blankets _ 

Chloride of Lime 
Chloride of Lime 
Protective Suits 


No. of units 
per package 

Size of package 
in inches 

Cubical contents 
in feet 

Weight in 
pounds 

No. of packages 
on 3-ton truck 
with 240 cu. ft. 

No. of packages 
on 5-ton truck 
with 360 cu. ft. 

24 

32 X 25 X 13 rz 10,400 

6.02 

150 

40 

60 

24 

23 X 22 X 18 =: 9,108 

5.27 

135 

45 

70 

98 

29 X 27 X 16 = 12,528 

7.25 

225 

27 

45 

386 

23 X 24 X 20 r= 13,440 

7.75 

195 

31 

46 

432 

21 X 14 X 13 = 3,822 

2.2 

60 

100 

165 

642 

39 X 23 X 22 = 19,734 

11.4 

322 

19 

31 

720 

48 X 24 X 20 = 23,040 

13.3 

407 

14 

24 

90 

45 X 37 X 31 =r 51,615 

29.8 

326 

8 

12 

200 

24 X 21 X 14 = 7,056 

4. 

100 

60 

90 

64 

35 X 22 X 12 = 9,240 

5.3 

125 

45 

70 

25 

30 X 30 X 13 = 11,700 

6.7 

118 

35 

53 

60 

48 X 48 X 40 = 92,160 

53.3 

250 

5 

7 

60 lbs. 

13Jx 13Jx 13 = 2,369 

1.4 

65 

92 

133 

60 lbs. 

21 X 13|x 10 = 2,835 

1.6 

85 

70 

117 

40 

20 X 22 X 12 rr 5,280 

3. 

93 

80 

120 




































































THE SERVICES 


201 


220. MOTOR TRANSPORT CORPS 

221. Maintenance, Repair and Salvage 

(See diagram of motor transport issue, repair, maintenance, 
salvage and supply facilities.) 

Units of the Motor Transport Corps divide themselves 
naturally into two classes by reason of their functions: 

(1) Operating units. 

(2) Maintenance units. 

Operating units consist of motor transport companies 
and motor commands, the organization of which is covered 
in this pamphlet. 

Maintenance units may be divided into two classes: 

(1) Motor transport depots; 

(2) Motor transport parks. 

Motor transport depots consist of: 

(1) Main supply depot. 

(2) Supply sub-depots. 

(3) Advance supply depots. 

The main supply depot or base spare parts depot is 
the most important of these organizations. It is located 
in the intermediate section and is the general storehouse 
for all of the spare parts and supplies in the motor trans¬ 
port corps. 

All of its stock goes directly to it from the ships, 
which convey it, without any stop either at the base port 
or any of the intervening stations, like the regulating sta¬ 
tions or advance bases. 

The storage and distribution of all spare parts, repair 
parts, materials and supplies, pertaining to the motor trans¬ 
port corps are co-ordinated at the main supply depot and 
issued to the supply sub-depots and other establishments of 
the motor transport corps as required. The question of 
spare parts is probably the most difficult problem the motor 
transport corps has to contend with. Spare parts and 
materials used solely with motor vehicles may be grouped 
into two classes: 

(a) Those articles common to all motor vehicles. 

(b) The special articles for each type, make and model of 
vehicle. 


202 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Eliminating all articles that might be used for other 
than motor vehicles and which would therefore be carried 
in supply depots, the list of the first class consists of about 
2,000 items. The list of the second class consists of an ad¬ 
ditional 1,500 items. Therefore, a stock for one vehicle, 
without any duplication of pieces, would amount to 3,500 
items. The bearing of this on the the operating work will be 
readily seen. 

As far as the carrying capacity is concerned, a given 
number of three-ton trucks of one make is equivalent to a 
like number of three-ton trucks of various makes, but from 
a practical standpoint as to their being kept in a serviceable 
condition it is seen that there is a vast difference. The only 
way to avoid this complexity of parts is to restrict to the 
greatest extent the variety of types, makes and models of 
motor vehicles in a given unit and adopt whenever possible 
a standard type vehicle. With our forces, however, urgent 
necessity has hitherto prevented the proper standardization 
of vehicles in the various units and as a result the establish¬ 
ment of a spare parts depot has been far from a simple 
affair. 

The scarcity of spare parts may at times necessitate 
the limiting of spare parts depots to the fewest number pos¬ 
sible in order that the distribution of parts might be care¬ 
fully co-ordinated and controlled to the greatest advantage. 

Practically all of the supplies for the main supply depot 
are transported from the base ports to this depot by the 
motor vehicles of the motor transport corps, thus relieving 
the congestion on the railroad to a great extent. 

Advance supply depots and sub-depots, service parks 
and overhaul parks deal, like the main supply depot, with 
both the receipt and issue of motor parts. 

Two things are necessary to be looked after in the lo¬ 
cation of one of these depots so that speedy and efficient 
service will be possible: 

(1) That it be easily accessible to the main supply depot. 

(2) That it be conveniently located with reference to the 
organization which it serves. 

These two factors will be determined by transportation 
facilities and proximity to the various repair centers. 


THE SERVICES 


203 


In the construction of an advance depot close attention 
should be paid to the following essentials: 

(1) The buildings must be fireproof. 

(2) Buildings must be multi-storied for utilization of ground 
space, to make camouflaging more successful, and to afford sep¬ 
arate floors for different parts. 

(3) The buildings should be constructed with as many win¬ 
dows on the side as possible to afford good lighting. 

(4) The floors must be constructed to sustain heavy loads—■ 
never less than 250 pounds per square foot. 

(5) Large issue spaces must be provided near the doors. 
At these depots there should be a receiving officer and an issuing 
officer, and great care must be observed in checking, sorting and 
storing parts and accessories. 

222. Motor Transport Corps Parks 

Motor transport parks look after the reception, repair, 
rebuilding, salvage, issue and replacement of all motor ve¬ 
hicles. These parks are under the chief of the maintenance 
division. Motor transport parks are of four general types: 

(a) Reception parks. 

(b) Organization parks. 

(c) Replacement parks. 

(d) Repair parks. 

In order to understand the functions of these parks 
they will be described somewhat in detail. 

223. Reception Parks. 

Reception parks are established at designated base 
ports to receive all motor vehicles shipped from the United 
States or other points abroad. At the reception parks, motor 
vehicles are assembled, registered and put generally in a 
running condition. The personnel and equipment of recep¬ 
tion parks will be such as is necessary to the proper per¬ 
formance of these functions. 

A reception park should be laid out in such a manner 
that the line of progress of a vehicle from the time that 
it is uncrated until the time that it is issued shall be in a 
continuous direction. After a vehicle arrives at a recep¬ 
tion park it is uncrated and a registration number is as¬ 
signed to it by means of a tag attached to the steering wheel. 
These numbers are received in blocks from the headquarters 
of the motor transport corps. The number on the tag 
is later stenciled on the body of the vehicle, the tag com- 


204 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


pleted and mailed to the director, motor transport corps. 
All tools, spare parts, accessories and equipment coming 
with the vehicle are removed and stored until the vehicle 
is ready to be issued. The vehicle is then removed to 
the shop section of the reception park for assembling, 
painting, stenciling, and any necessary repairing. The 
vehicles are sent from the shop section to the issue section, 
where they are kept cleaned, oiled and repaired. The 
motors are started daily in order to maintain them in good 
condition. When orders are received that a certain motor 
vehicles be issued, the gasoline and oil tanks are filled and 
the tools and equipment placed in the vehicle. To each 
vehicle is assigned a log book containing all necessary data 
concerning equipment of the vehicle, etc. The log book 
follows the vehicle in a similar manner in which the service 
record follows the soldier. When the order of issue comes 
certain prescribed forms are required to be made out and 
copies furnished the motor transport corps officers con¬ 
cerned in the transaction. Vehicles are issued from the 
reception parks only upon an order from the director, motor 
transport corps. 

In order that the entire amount of motor vehicles 
available for assignment may be sent forward to units in 
the field from the various reception and organization parks, 
the motor transport officer of each of these parks is re¬ 
quired to submit a telegraphic report to the office of the 
director motor transport corps of vehicles on hand ready 
for issue. This is required as it is necessary to co-ordinate 
daily these receipts. General headquarters establishes 
priority of all assignments of motor vehicles to combat units 
and forwards weekly to the office of the director motor 
transport corps what is commonly known as general head¬ 
quarters '‘priority lists.” This list specifies the units, ac¬ 
cording to item numbers, that are to be assigned and supplied 
transportation. The allotment of priority and assignment of 
equipment becomes necessary on account of the shortage 
of motor vehicles at times and renders it imperative to issue 
it according to the necessities of each case and not merely 
according to an allowance prescribed in tables of organiza¬ 
tion. It is therefore necessary to indicate not only the 


THE SERVICES 


205 


priority in which various units or organizations are to be 
equipped with motor transport, but also the specific amount 
of equipment to be assigned in each case. General head¬ 
quarters either acts in each case or lays down a general 
policy to be pursued. The daily telegraphic reports required 
of the reception parks and organization parks are consoli¬ 
dated and transmitted to G4, general headquarters, and G4, 
communications zone, and shows the complete status of all 
undelivered motor transportation that has either been as¬ 
signed or remains unassigned at the parks. G4, general 
headquarters, then issues to the director motor transport 
corps, through G4, communications zone, the weekly assign¬ 
ment sheet, showing priority in which vehicles are to be 
assigned. Upon receipt of these sheets, assignments are 
made from the various reception and organization parks 
where the particular vehicles may be available, telegraphic 
orders are issued to these parks, and the units to which 
transportation is assigned are notified by wire, and, if de¬ 
livery is not to be made by motor transport corps personnel, 
they are requested to send personnel to the park to take 
delivery. The assignment sheets are so filed that they come 
up automatically for attention within ten days, so that any 
delay may be ascertained and action taken to expedite de¬ 
livery. 

Before transportation leaves an issue park it is formed 
into a convoy, given a convoy number and placed in charge 
of a motor transport corps pilot. A telegraphic report 
is made to the director motor transport corps, giving the 
convoy number and a detailed report of the number, make 
and type of vehicles constituting the convoy, cargo carried, 
destination of the cargo and of the convoy (in case cargo 
is dropped en route) and the telegraphic order from the 
office of the director motor transport corps forming the 
convoy. Each night the pilot wires the location and condi¬ 
tion of the convoy to the office of the director motor trans¬ 
port corps. This enables a check to be kept on all vehicles 
in transit, allows vehicles to be diverted from the original 
destinations, or any necessary instructions to be given with 
reference to the cargo. Upon arrival at destination the pilot 
makes a final telegraphic report, when vehicles have been 
delivered to consignee, upon which the office of the director 


206 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


motor transport corps ceases to assume direct responsi¬ 
bility for the vehicles. 

Assignment of vehicles to the communications zone are 
made in block and endeavor is made to allot this equipment 
to the best possible advantage. In order to arrive at this, 
periodical reports as to transportation needs in each section 
of the communications zone are made by the motor trans¬ 
port officer thereof and forwarded through the commanding 
officer of the section to the communications zone headquar¬ 
ters from which they are transmitted, by G4, communica¬ 
tions zone, after approval, to the office of the director motor 
transport corps to be filled from the transportation avail¬ 
able, according to the activities and relative transportation 
necessities in each territorial section. 

The issue of transportation in bulk is made in truck 
tons, as it is the capacity that is ordinarily desired and not 
the actual number of vehicles. Thus an order for 15 truck 
tons may be filled by 10 one ton and a half trucks, 5 three- 
ton trucks, or 3 five-ton trucks. 

When a new division arrives in the theater of operations 
it is necessary to supply it immediately with a certain 
amount of motor equipment to take care of its immediate 
transportation needs. For this purpose, general authority 
is given to issue to each division upon its arrival in its area 
an '‘initial standard equipment” consisting of: 

110 truck tons. 

10 automobiles. 

15 motorcycles with side cars. 

Upon arrival of advance parties of a new division, G4, 
communications zone, informs the office of the director 
motor transport corps and the requisite amount of trans¬ 
portation is set aside and delivered by motor transport corps 
personnel from an issue park to the divisional area, and this 
personnel remains with the equipment until relieved by the 
divisional personnel. 

Thereafter all further assignments of motor transpor¬ 
tation to the division or other combat unit must be author¬ 
ized by general headquarters. 

The general plan of assignments adopted by general 
headquarters is usually to allot 10 per cent of the receipts 


THE SERVICES 


207 


to units engaged in communications zone activities and the 
remaining 90 per cent to combat units. The vehicles falling 
in the 90 per cent are either assigned by the office of the 
director motor transport corps in bulk to G4, army (to 
whom certain credits had been authorized by general head¬ 
quarters), who in turn makes the individual assignments 
to the combat units, or general headquarters arranges di¬ 
rectly through the office of the director motor transport 
corps for the assignment to the combat units in the various 
training areas throughout the communications zone. 

The above covers the system employed in the American 
Expeditionary Forces in the assignment of vehicles to com¬ 
bat units and other organizations. 

224. Organization Parks. 

Organization parks are composed of a reserve of 
trained personnel and motor vehicles in good running con¬ 
dition, organized and equipped for service, and held in readi¬ 
ness for assignment either as organizations, detachments or 
individuals. 

Each member of the personnel is trained at motor 
transport corps schools and then sent to the organization 
parks where he is placed in the branch of the service to 
which he is recommended by the school. The organization 
park receives its vehicles in good running condition from 
either reception parks, reconstruction parks, the general 
purchasing board or from all three sources. 

Vehicles are segregated according to their makes and 
assigned to groups. Complete motor transport companies, 
motorcycle companies and machine truck units (now called 
service park units) are here organized as operating units 
with or without vehicle equipment. When individuals, units, 
vehicles, or complete operating units are needed for motor 
transport service, requisitions are sent to the organization 
parks and the issue made as directed. 

225. Replacement Parks. 

Replacement parks resemble organization parks and 
the work of the one borders upon that of the other.. 
Replacement parks fill vacancies caused by destruction, loss, 
damage or repair of vehicles and fill these vacancies with 


208 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


new equipment or personnel irrespective of amount, whereas 
organization parks deal particularly with organizing and 
sending out complete units. 

Replacement parks ordinarily receive their vehicles 
from two sources: Organization parks and overhaul parks, 
but in exceptional cases vehicles may be received direct 
from reception parks. A replacement park uses its own 
vehicles to take the place of any unserviceable vehicles in 
the motor transport corps operating units in order that the 
unit will always have in active service the total number of 
vehicles assigned to it by the Tables of Organization. 

The personnel of a replacement park is such as is neces¬ 
sary to care for the vehicles and to maintain them in instant 
readiness for active service. These parks requisition on the 
motor transport corps supply depot and the organization 
parks for such supplies, accessories, etc., as may be neces¬ 
sary for the complete equipment of the vehicles in the parks. 

226. Repair Parks. 

Repair parks attend to the repairing, overhauling and 
rebuilding of disabled motor vehicles. They consist of three 
main classes: 

1. Service parks. 

2. Overhaul parks. 

3. Reconstruction parks. 

These parks form a very important part of the organi¬ 
zation of the motor transport corps in the field as upon them 
depends almost entirely the efficient operation of the motor 
transportation. 

227. Service Parks. 

Service parks are classified as: 

(a) Mobile, (b) Semi-mobile, (c) Immobile. 

A service park is the complete organization consisting 
of both the material and the personnel. 

(a) The mobile service parks operate as repair organi¬ 
zations attached to the troops. The personnel is comprised 
of 1 officer of the grade of first lieutenant and 35 
enlisted men. This unit was formerly designated as the 
machine shop truck unit, known as the M. S. T. U., but it 


THE SERVICES 


209 


is now called the service park unit. The mobile service park 
operates with the combat division under the supervision 
of the division motor transport officer and is usually attached 
to the motor supply train of the division, for which it does 
more work than for any other unit. 

The equipment of the mobile service park consists of 
the following: 

A machine shop truck with trailer upon which is 
mounted an engine and dynamo to supply light and power, 
an engine lathe, a combination drill press and milling ma¬ 
chine, a grinder, a bench with vises and hand tools, an 
acetylene welding outfit, blacksmith tools, radiator repair 
equipment, etc. Another truck and trailer carries a stock 
of spare parts, supplies and individual tool kits. There is 
also a trailer tire press, a trailer office and a light passenger 
vehicle (for organization, see table, “Service Park Unit”). 

(b) Semi-mobile service parks are motorized for mobil¬ 
ity but the machinery is so constructed that it may be de¬ 
tached from the machine shop trailer and operated in a 
building. When practicable a portable building to accom¬ 
modate the machinery is carried as a part of the equipment. 

(c) Immobile service parks are permanently installed 
in buildings and equipped with belt-driven machinery. The 
function of the service park is to make repairs to vehicles 
and their component parts within the scope of the mechan¬ 
ical equipment provided and to replace by new parts or 
units such items as cannot be adequately and satisfactorily 
repaired. 

Service parks should be located within a distance of 
eight miles from the organization served. The officer in 
charge should, if possible, select a site with hard ground and 
good parking facilities and take advantage of existing 
buildings whenever possible. Five thousand square feet of 
roofed space and fifteen thousand square feet of parking 
space is the amount desirable. The officer in charge should 
foresee the needs of the units he is serving and keep a 
sufficient amount of spare parts on hand at all times. A 
service park does not carry more stock usually than its 
records show to have been its average ten days’ consump¬ 
tion. Parts and material apt to be damaged by exposure 


210 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


must be protected. Infrequently used parts and salvage 
must not be allowed to collect, but should be evacuated regu¬ 
larly on vehicles that have brought up spare parts and 
forwarded to the nearest supply depot. All vehicles requir¬ 
ing extensive repairs are evacuated to the overhaul park 
which will be discussed later. The factors which determine 
whether or not a vehicle should be repaired by a service 
park are: 

(a) Dismantling necessary to accomplish repairs. All dis¬ 
mounted vehicles must be prepared for towing within eight hours. 

(b) Number of vehicles under repair at one time. This 
should never exceed 12 to 15. 

(c) The number of disabled units on one vehicle. If several, 
it should be evacuated. 

(d) Shortage of spare parts. 

(e) Character of repair operations. Unless simple the ve¬ 
hicle should be sent to the overhaul park. 

(f) Assigned tasks of men. Whenever a machinist, welder, 
blacksmith, etc., can increase the number of jobs turned out by 
working as a hand tool mechanic, his special work should go to 
the rear. 

In other words, when inspection shows that vehicles 
brought into the park are beyond its scope, they will not be 
repaired in the park but will be evacuated to an overhaul 
park. 

The rules given above also apply to the semi-mobile and 
immobile service parks. It is the duty of a service park to 
substitute serviceable vehicles in place of vehicles under¬ 
going repairs. For this purpose it should maintain a limited 
replacement section of motor vehicles. Service parks in 
France serving with combat units could not do this on ac¬ 
count of the shortage of vehicles. 

Spare parts and accessories are obtained from overhaul 
parks. 

228. Overhaul Parks. 

The repair of motor vehicles in the field is a progres¬ 
sive system, starting with caretaking by the operating 
personnel, near the front line, and passing back through 
the advance, intermediate and base section areas. The over¬ 
haul park is the next step back of the service park and is 
intermediate between service and reconstruction. It means 
exactly what its name implies. Overhaul parks are con¬ 
trolled and operated by communications zone personnel and 


THE SERVICES 


211 


their commanders are under the motor transport corps offi¬ 
cers of the communications zone sections unless specifically 
excepted. Their personnel is made up of repair units whose 
total strength varies from 800 to 1,500 men. Ordinarily one 
overhaul park is provided for each corps and as many as 
necessary to the communications zone. It should be located 
at an average distance of 30 miles behind the fighting line 
plus or minus 50 per cent variation, depending upon the 
topography and circumstances. Forty miles with the same 
variation is proper behind thinly held sectors. Roughly, 
each full sized overhaul park will care for 4,000 general cargo 
trucks. The park is permanent in nature. Its function is 
primarily to make a general overhaul and repair of vehicles 
requiring work of a nature beyond the capacity of the ser¬ 
vice parks. 

They differ from the service parks in that the character 
of their work is much more extensive and general, requir¬ 
ing heavier equipment and longer periods of time for com¬ 
pletion. They receive vehicles for repair or overhaul from 
the service parks and, exceptionally, fi'om other organiza¬ 
tions in which latter case they make the repairs ordinarily 
made by service parks. 

In general, after repair or overhaul, the vehicles are 
sent to a designated organization or replacement park. When 
so directed, however, an overhaul park may completely equip 
the vehicles and deliver them direct to motor transport 
corps groups or detachments held in reserve with combat 
units. Overhaul parks are ordinarily located in the advance 
section, communications zone, but they may be also es¬ 
tablished in certain specified localities further in the rear. 

The final decision as to whether or not a vehicle sent 
to the overhaul park for repair is within the scope of the 
park rests with the officer in charge of the park, whose de¬ 
cision will be based on the following: 

(a) A vehicle will not be accepted for repair or overhaul 
unless it can be put in reliable condition by using the majority 
of the parts of the vehicle. If the vehicle requires rebuilding or 
more than 600 working hours for the job, it will be sent to a re¬ 
construction park. 

(b) Overhaul work that requires extensive manufacturing 
of parts will not be undertaken. 

(c) Salvage by a reconstruction park is advisable when over¬ 
haul cost will exceed 30 per cent of the original cost of the de¬ 
livered vehicle. All vehicles beyond the scope of overhaul parks 
are evacuated to reconstruction parks. 


212 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Overhaul parks carry sufficient stock of spare parts, 
supplies and materials to act as advance supply depots. All 
motor "vehicles should be sent periodically to an overhaul 
park for general overhauling. 

229. Recomtruction Parks, 

Reconstruction parks have three main functions. 

(a) To rebuild vehicles, parts and equipment. 

(b) To overhaul and repair in the same manner as overhaul 
parks. 

(c) To salvage vehicles, parts, equipment and material. 

Reconstruction parks receive wrecked vehicles, parts 
and other mechanisms from the front or from the service 
or overhaul parks. 

Ordinarily this material passes first through the sal¬ 
vage section of the park where it is determined whether 
the vehicle or part should be rebuilt or scrapped. Recon¬ 
struction parks are under the direct control of the director 
motor transport corps. Work done by these parks is inten¬ 
sive in nature, being manufacture as well as repair. All 
vehicles rebuilt are reported to the office of the director 
motor transport corps and under orders of this office are 
sent to an organization or replacement park to be reissued 
for active service. All reconstructed parts are sent to the 
main supply depot for reissue. Supply depots are located 
at reconstruction parks. Usually one reconstruction park 
is provided for an army and is generally located in the inter¬ 
mediate section of the communications zone. 

The best way to retain a general knowledge of these 
various parks is to compare them with the medical depart¬ 
ment’s agencies on the battlefield for caring for a wounded 
soldier: 

(1) The soldier’s first aid packet corresponds to caretaking 
by the operating personnel on the motor vehicle. 

(2) The battalion aid station corresponds to the unit’s 
mechanic. 

(3) The regimental aid station bears a resemblance to the 
service park. 

(4) The division field hospital is not unlike the overhaul 
park. 

(5) Finally, the evacuation hospital or sorting station may 
be compared with the reconstruction park. 


DfAGRAM OF Motor Transport Issue, Repair.Maintenance,Salvage and Supply Facilities 






3 

? 

E 

I 



i 

CO 


be 

a 

Q-i 


















































































































































212 


c 

supplj 

motor 

park 

229. . 
I 


pj 


and < 
or o\ 

( 

vage 

the 

struc 

mote 

sive 

vehii 

mote 

sent 

for j 

mail 

at r 

is pi 

med 

vari 

mer 

sold 


THE SERVICES 


213 


230. Service Park Unit 

MOTOR TRANSPORT CORPS 


Series D January 15, 1919. 



1 


2 





0) 










U C 


1 

UNITS 


0) ^ 










c cs 





OCii 


2 

First Lieutenant _ 


1 


3 

Total Commissioned _ 


1 


4 

Sergeants First Class _ 


4« 


5 

Sergeants _ 


3»> 


6 

Corporals _ 




7 

Cook _ 


1 


8 

Privates First Class _ 


6<i 


9 

Privates _ 


2® 


10 

Total Enlisted__ 


18 


11 

Aggregate - 


19 


12 

Cars, motor medium (DS or 





DT) ... 


1 


13 

Trucks, S-ton, Cargo (AA)_ 




14 

Trucks, 3-5-ton, Cargo (B)_ 


2 


15 

Truck, Wrecking _ 


1 


16 

Truck, 3-5, Machine Shop - 


1 


17 

Trailer, Stockroom _ 


1 


18 

Trailer, Tire Press (x8T) - 


1 


19 

Trailer, Office (x50) - 


1 


20 

Pistols _ 


19 



NOTES 


“1 motor mechanic, 1 electrical and carburetor expert, 1 machinist, 1 supply 
and property sergeant. 

^1 blacksmith, 1 welder, 1 motorcycle mechanic, 
radiator repairer, 1 tire repairer, 1 carpenter. 

<^3 assistant motor mechanics, 1 clerk, 1 supply and property, 
laborers. 

PArmed with pistol. 

'^Light delivery truck may be issued in lieu. 

^Service park units will be assigned as required to combatant organizations, 
stations, and communications zone as required, and will be attached at the 
rate of 3 service parks for each division. When required for special work 
the same organization will be used, substituting personnel of suitable voca¬ 
tional qualifications. 














































CHAPTER VIII 


Replacements 


231. REPLACEMENTS (PERSONNEL) 

Divisions are required to furnish G1 of the corps weekly 
as of noon (Wednesday), a report showing the number 
of officers by rank and arm of service, the number of en¬ 
listed men by grade and arm of service and the number 
of specialists required to complete their organization com¬ 
plements, and the number of animals by class required to 
complete their authorized allowances. G1 of the division 
compiles the reports from the organizations of the divi¬ 
sion and sends the compiled report by coded telegram to 
G1 of the corps. The corps G1 takes the necessary steps 
to secure the replacements from the army. 

In preparing the weekly replacement requisition of 
the following paragraphs of G.O. No. Ill, G.H.Q., A.E.F., 
July 8, 1918, will govern: 

232. Conditions Governing the Request for Replacements 

VI. 1. Replacements may be requested: 

(a) When for any reason the strength on the rolls of an 
organization is less than the authorized strength. 

(b) When an officer or soldier is absent, although still car¬ 
ried on the rolls, for any cause that will probably con¬ 
tinue for more than two weeks, with the following ex¬ 
ceptions : 

(1) Absent on leave. 

(2) Detached duty, except under orders from general 
headquarters. 

(3) Insufficiently trained soldiers detached to corps re¬ 
placement battalions. 

(4) Students at corps schools and at the army line school 
and army infantry specialists’ school. 

2. The fact that replacements may be requested for absent officers 
and soldiers does not in itself authorize the absentees being 
dropped from the rolls. The number of noncommissioned 
officers carried on the rolls of an organization * * * must 

not be in excess of the authorized number as determined by 
the Tables of Organization. Therefore, the replacements re¬ 
quested for noncommissioned officers temporarily absent will 
be in the grade of private. 


214 



REPLACEMENTS 


215 


233. Dropping Officers and Soldiers from the Rolls of their 

Organizations, and Evacuating Officers and Soldiers 
from Hospitals 

VII. 1. Officers and soldiers will be dropped from the rolls of an or¬ 

ganization : 

(a) Upon death. 

(b) When missing after an absence of ten days. 

(c) When discharged from the service. 

(d) When transferred by a competent authority to another 
unit or to an authorized unassigned list. 

(e) When admitted to a communications zone or army hos¬ 
pital (in the case of combat divisions). 

234. Replacements as Effected by Promotion 

VIII. 1. A vacancy in a particular grade exists only when the number 

of officers or soldiers carried on the rolls in that particular 
grade is less than that authorized by Tables of Organization. 
2. Where vacancies exist in a commissioned or noncommissioned 
grade in organizations of a division * * * requisition will 
be made for the necessary replacements to fill these vacancies. 
If replacements are not available in the corps provisional re¬ 
placement battalion, depot division, or other replacement or¬ 
ganization for personnel of the proper grades and arm of the 
service who originally belonged to the division submitting 
the requisition, the commanding officer submitting the requi¬ 
sition will at once be notified and will take the necessary 
action to fill the vacancies in noncommissioned grades and 
will make recommendations for promotion to fill vacancies 
in the commissioned grades. A recommendation for promo¬ 
tion will be considered as a vacancy filled, in preparing sub¬ 
sequent requisitions. 

235. Replacement Within the Division 

In compliance with regulations, organizations are re¬ 
quired to submit daily to the statistical section of the divi¬ 
sion adjutant’s office a report of casualties. This at best 
cannot be very accurate, for it is next to impossible for 
organizations to submit correct reports during fighting 
where little or no opportunity is available to check up the 
men; in fact in some cases reports cannot be made at all. 
These reports, however, taken in conjunction with the 
report of evacuations from field hospitals submitted by the 
division surgeon, permit a rough estimate being made of 
casualties, certainly accurate enough for G1 to base a pre¬ 
liminary telegram to Gl, corps, for replacements. 

236. Arrangements for Receiving Replacements 

In order to avoid delay and confusion after the arrival 
of replacements, the following matters should be attended 


216 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


to by G1 prior to their arrival, particularly when large 
numbers are expected: 

(a) An efficient organization of about three officers and fifteen 
enlisted men should be established to take charge of replace¬ 
ments upon arrival at the railhead. These may be taken from 
the military police company. 

(b) If replacements are not to join their organizations soon after 
arrival, make arrangements for bivouacking them near the 
railhead. This includes the procuring of field ranges or 
rolling kitchens, rations, fuel, water, etc. and the digging of 
latrines. 

(c) If it is known exactly how many replacements are to be 
received, have a tentative assignment list prepared by the 
personnel adjutant. 

(d) If replacements are to join their organizations soon after 
arrival, have a suitable place selected near the railhead to 
form them up after detraining to make assignments to the 
different organizations of the division. 

(e) If it is known replacements are not fully equipped, give neces¬ 
sary instructions to chiefs of services concerned to be pre¬ 
pared to equip them as soon as possible. 

(f) Have suitable details made from different organizations to 
take charge of replacements after assignment. 

Steps to be taken after arrival of replacements: 

(a) Form replacements into provisional companies, if not already 
so formed, and attach necessary officers from the replacement 
officers. 

(b) Collect transfer slips, service records, etc. 

(c) Have inspection made as soon as possible to determine state 
of equipment. (If only a few are short of equipment, detain 
them with the military police company and send remainder 
to organizations.) 

(d) Separate men who have previously served in the division from 
the remainder and assign them to their old organizations, if 
possible. 

(e) Do not delay assignment of men to organizations due to non¬ 
receipt of service records and other papers. Make assign¬ 
ments, send the men to their organizations as soon as possible 
and straighten out their records afterwards. 

(f) Have all officer replacements report at division headquarters 
for assignment and furnish transportation for them and their 
baggage. 

237. ANIMAL REPLACEMENT AND EVACUATION 

238. Animals Required in Theater of Operations 

In the American Expeditionary Forces, France, at first 
one animal per five men was required. 

Later, when motor transport was used more exten¬ 
sively, and considering the good roads, the number was re¬ 
duced to one animal per seven men, including the com¬ 
munications zone. 


REPLACEMENTS 


217 


In the United States or in a country where motor trans¬ 
port cannot operate freely an estimate of one animal per 
three men for combat troops only should be made. 



239. Replacement. 

The system of animal replacement is as follows: 

The replacement requisition for personnel submitted 
by organizations to the statistical section of the division 





























































































218 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


adjutant’s office on Wednesday of each week includes re¬ 
placements for animals. The requisition shows the number 
of animals on hand, number lost (sick, wounded, dead) 
and number required by class. The consolidated requisi¬ 
tion for the division is prepared in the adjutant’s office and 
submitted by G1 who, after approval, sends it by telegraph 
to the army through the corps, if the division is attached to 
a corps. If not attached to a corps, the requisition is sent 
direct to army headquarters. Special requisitions are sub¬ 
mitted when emergencies occur. 

After action by the remount officer of the army and 
G4, the requisition is telegraphed to the commanding gen¬ 
eral, communications zone, who designates the remount 
depot to fill the requisition and prescribes the priority of 
shipment. 

Briefiy, the theory of supply from rear to front is as 
follows: 

The system of supply is divided into three groups under 
the commanding general, communications zone (see dia¬ 
gram, Animal Replacement and Evacuation). 

First is the base group, with a remount depot with a 
capacity of 3,000 animals, and a veterinary hospital to 
accommodate 500 animals. 

Second is the intermediate group, which has a remount 
depot and veterinary hospital with capacity as required. 

Third is the advance group where there is located an 
advance remount depot and veterinary hospital (usually 
one per army, capable of being divided into two depots). 
This is in the nature of a reserve, carries about 6,000 an¬ 
imals, and has a veterinary hospital capacity for 1,000 more. 

In addition to the above there is the army mobile re¬ 
mount depot and hospital, the corps mobile remount depot 
and hospital, and the division remount officer, veterinary 
units and mobile veterinary section (hospital) under the 
division veterinarian. 

Animals are delivered by the communications zone 
through the regulating station direct to the animal distrib¬ 
uting and collecting point for the division, which is usually 
fixed by G4 of the army. A convoy is sent forward with 
them from the communications zone. Requisitions are 


REPLACEMENTS 


2iy 

filled from the base or intermediate depots when possible, 
the advance depots and the army and corps mobile remount 
depots being held intact for emergencies. 

The division obtains its animals direct from the animal 
distributing point, the division quartermaster having re¬ 
ceived advanced notice of the arrival of the animals. From 
this point begins the work of the quartermaster, remount 
officer and veterinarian. 

When animals are shipped from a communications 
zone remount depot, the convoy is provided with a transfer 
form, A.G.O. 600, made out by the shipping officer to cover 
the animals, along with the certificate from the veterinarian 
as to whether or not they have been subjected to the mallein 
test. Not all animals are malleined. Sometimes the hurried 
shipment or lack of veterinarians makes this impossible. 
The receipts for the animals are accomplished by the quar¬ 
termaster and returned to the invoicing officer by the offi¬ 
cer or sergeant in charge of the convoy. In the event that 
no transfer form accompanies the animals, the receiving 
officer should list the animals by classes, making out the 
invoice and receipts for the shipping officer, accomplishing 
the receipts and returning them by the convoy. 

240. Animals Purchased in the Theater of Operations 

In case animals are purchased in the occupied enemy 
country, the following system would be adopted: 

The division is directed to detail several officers and a 
detachment of men to report to the headquarters of the 
communications zone. These officers and men are then sent 
to various sections of the occupied country and placed in 
touch with the agents of the quartermaster corps employed 
in the remount service. The remount service requisitions 
the animals of a given section through the civilian author¬ 
ities, who direct the farmers to bring them to certain desig¬ 
nated places where they are met by the representatives of 
the remount service and the divisional detachment. The re¬ 
mount representatives look them over and select the de¬ 
sirable ones by class if possible. Receipts are furnished for 
the animals and they are later paid for. The animals are 
then given the mallein test, turned over to the division 


220 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


representatives and forwarded under convoy (usually one 
man to eight animals) direct to the division railhead or 
animal distributing point through the regulating officer. A 
telegram, is sent by the forwarding officer to the division 
quartermaster giving the time of departure and the number 
and classification of animals shipped. This enables the 
transportation officer in the quartermaster’s office to have 
a distribution table figured out and ready for use by the time 
the animals arrive. 

241. Receipt of Animals at Railhead 

The division remount officer is responsible for making 
all of the necessary detailed arrangements with the troops 
for procuring the animals upon arrival. 

One officer will be required from each organization with 
a detachment consisting of a few noncommissioned officers 
and at least one man for every four animals. The unit 
supply officers should be warned by the remount officer be¬ 
forehand to have their detachments ready, but they are, not 
called for until the regulating officer or railhead officer noti¬ 
fies the division of the probable hour of arrival of the trains. 

The table of assignment of remounts is prepared by 
the division quartermaster in co-operation with the remount 
officer from data received from the division adjutant and 
from data in the quartermaster’s office. 

All records of assignment of animals to organizations 
in the division are kept by the division quartermaster. 

After arrival of the animals they are carefully looked 
over by the quartermaster, remount officer and veterinarian 
before unloading, and are then unloaded, checked and in¬ 
spected for disease, etc.* Sick animals are immediately seg¬ 
regated and, if unable to march, are sent to the veterinary 
section near the railhead. The quartermaster provides 
water for the animals near the unloading point. 

Too careful inspection of animals by the veterinarian 
and remount officer cannot be made. Shipping fever is 
prevalent in almost all shipments. This in itself must not 
be considered too lightly. The diseases most prevalent 
among animals newly received are influenza and mange. 
It is probable that many of the animals will have these 


REPLACEMENTS 


221 


diseases in various stages, so the veterinarian should make 
a thorough inspection of all of them, being assisted by the 
other veterinarians in the division. 

The quartermaster causes the remaining animals to be 
lined up for classification and assigns them according to 
the assignment table, making the necessary changes for the 
sick animals removed. 

The quartermaster obtains a field receipt from each 
supply officer when the animals are turned over, and from 
this receipt the posting to the transportation record book is 
made. While there is no accountability by supply Officers to 
the quartermaster’s office for these animals, the retained 
copy of the shipping officer’s invoice with the receipts of the 
regimental supply officers is filed as a matter of record or- 
reference. 

The shipping officer’s receipts are accomplished by the 
quartermaster and turned over to the officer in charge of 
the convoy. 

242. Evacuation 

The evacuation of animals ordinarily is carried out 
in a manner similar to that of supply of animals (see 
diagram, “Animal Replacement and Evacuation”). The 
units of the division evacuate to the division mobile veter¬ 
inary section, the latter evacuates to the corps mobile vet¬ 
erinary hospital, this hospital evacuates to the army mobile 
veterinary hospital and the army hospital evacuates to the 
veterinary hospital of the advance group, communications 
zone, which may pass the animals through the hospital of 
the intermediate group to the hospital of the base group, 
communications zone (frequently evacuations are made 
from the division direct to the communications zone). 

'In combat the corps usually establishes an advance 
collecting point for sick and wounded animals from which 
point veterinary personnel is sent forward to the division 
mobile veterinary section where the sick and wounded an¬ 
imals are taken over and conducted to the rear. The corps 
may sometimes evacuate animals direct to the veterinary 
hospitals of the communications zone without turning them 


222 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


over to the army. In this case the animals are shipped 
from a railhead designated by the army. 

In a rest or training'area the division usually evacuates 
its animals by carload lots from the division railhead to a 
hospital in the communications zone designated by the army. 
Cars for this purpose are furnished from time to time by 
the local railroad transportation officer as needed and ship¬ 
ments are made through the regulating officer. 

Remount depots and veterinary hospitals are kept sep¬ 
arate, usually one or two miles, in order to avoid contagion 
and infection. It is best to avoid the use of the same trans¬ 
port and personnel and contact in any possible way. Cer¬ 
tain hospitals should be designated to receive the infected 
cases, and these cases wherever possible should be given a 
special route for travel. 


243. Locating Mobile Veterinary Section 

In locating the division mobile veterinary section the 
following considerations should be borne in mind: 

(a) The location must be accessible to water. 

(b) A location must be selected which has good drainage and soil 
which permits shallow drainage ditches to be dug on each 
side of the picket lines. 

(c) Use must be made in inclement weather of such old buildings 
and sheds as may be available for shelter for sick animals. 

(d) In campaign, animals should be picketed in small groups, 
and sheltered as much as possible from aerial observation. 
Any natural means of camouflage should be used. If the 
location is occupied for some time, traverses should be thrown 
up along the picket lines for protection from air raids. Lo¬ 
cation should be near the division axial road with good evac¬ 
uation routes from the front. 

(e) When long in one location, arrangements should be made to 
procure the necessary material for construction of standings 
for the picket lines. 


replacements 


223 



table 7 D.D. 14. 

ANIMAL REIPLACEMEINT 

AND 

EVACUATION 

0 P Organizations. 


Div. Vot. Units 


Distrikxfing and Coilecting Points 
Designated by 0-4 Army. 


Div 


Corps Remount De/yots 


Corps. 


Corps. Mobile Veterinary Mortals. 


Army Remount Uepots • 


Army Mobile Veterinary Hospitals 


Remount Depots-Advance Groups 


Vetennary Hospitals-Advance Croups 


Remount Depots- 

Intermediate Groups 


Veterinary Hospitals- 

Intermediate Groups 


Remount Depots-Base Groups 


4l 






Il 


Advflince 

Remouni 

Section 

Officer 

C Z 



Veterinary Hospitals- 

Base Groups. 


lege: NO 

■ Requisitions 
• Evacuation 
Supply 
Emergency 


NOTE 

Requisitions are filled by C Z from 
Base or In termediate Groups when 
possible. 

Advance Groups and Depots are 
held mtac^for em ergen cies 


























































224 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


244. Veterinary Personnel in a Division 

One major—Division veterinarian. 

One captain—Assistant and meat inspector. 

One sergeant, first class—Clerk. 

Two privates, first class or privates^—Orderlies and messen¬ 
gers. 

Supervises work of veterinarians attached to organizations. 

Procures necessary veterinary supplies. 

Has charge of mobile veterinary section. 

Has charge of evacuation of sick and wounded animals in co-operation with divi¬ 
sion remount officer. 

*Mobile Vet. Sec 

list Lieutenant_1 

Sergeant _ 1 

Cornorals _3 

Farriers_2 

Horseshoer _1 

Wagoner _1 

Privates. 1st class 

or privates_13 

fotal_21 

Aggregate _22 


*Handles all sick and wounded animals jAttached to train headquarters, 

evacuated from the organizations of the 
division. 


Two Inf Brigs 
Two units 
Each consisting of: 


1st Lt. _1 

Farriers _2 

Privates. 1st cl 

or privates_1 

Total _3 

Aggregate _4 


Two Regts FA 
(Horsed) 

Four units 
Each consisting of: 


1st Lt._1 

Farriers _2 

Privates. 1st cl 

or privates_1 

Total _3 

Aggregate _4 


Divisional Tns 
' Three unitst 
Each consisting of: 


1st Lt._::_1 

Farriers _2 


Privates. 1st cl 

or privates_ 

Total _ 

Aggregate - 


rH CO 






















CHAPTER IX 


Forms for Administrative Orders 


245. GENERAL FORM OF ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS(ARMY) 

The following form for administrative orders for an 
army has been adopted at The General Service Schools. The 
details to be included under certain headings depend entirely 
upon each situation and the state of training and experience 
of the units in the army. 

Part I is prepared by G4 and Part II by Gl, after con¬ 
sultation with each other and with G3 and the chief of staff. 
The order as finally issued is printed by the G4 section. Only 
such paragraphs as apply to a situation will be embodied in 
the order and will be numbered consecutively, beginning 
No. I for each part. Paragraphs may be added as necessary. 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date and Hour) 

Administoative Orders I (Reference to field order) 

(Reference to maps used.) 

Part I 

SUPPLY, EVACUATION AND ROAD MAINTENANCE 
I. Supply. 

(Gener.al reference to letter of instructions on the subject of 
“supplies,'*’ giving date of letter, should such a letter have been 
issued.) 

A. Railheads : 

Location of—for each corps, division and army troops giving 
date and hour of drawing supplies. 

B. Rations: 

1. Reference to reserve supply of rations and forage at railheads. 
2*. Caution units to carry at all times the rations and forage 
prescribed in Par. 302, FSR. 

C. Ammunition: 

1 Location of army depots for each corps, cavalry division (if 
attached) and army artillery, giving number of each depot 
and character of ammunition at each depot. 


225 



226 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


2. Any special routes to be followed by ammunition trains (if 

necessary). . . 

3. Any special instructions relative to supply of ammunition to 

special units: 

a. Anti-aircraft units to be supplied by divisions. 

b. Army artillery units to be supplied small arms am¬ 
munition by corps munitions officers. 

4. Time when artillery and infantry reports of expenditures will 

be made. 

5. Reference to letter of instructions on the “Plan of Ammunition 

Supply,” giving date of letter, should such a letter have 
been issued. 

D. Engineer: 

Location of army depots for each corps, cavalry division and 
army troops, giving number of each depot and, in general terms, 
character of supplies. 

E. Signal: 

Same as D. 

F. Medical: 

Same as D. 

G. Motor Transport: 

Same as D. 

H. Ordnance : 

Same as D. 

I. Quartermaster: 

Location of army depot (usually one for all troops) giving 
character of supplies in general terms. 

J. Gasoline and Oil: 

Location of army depot (usually one for reserve supply). 

K. Chemical Warfare: 

Location of army depot (usually one for all troops containing 
gas defense equipment and supplies). 

II. EVACUATIO^. 

A. Men: 

1. Location of army evacuation hospitals for each corps and cav¬ 

alry division, giving number of each hospital and character 
of cases handled by each. Army troops to nearest hospital 
according to classifications. 

2. Prescribe evacuation routes when necessary. 

B. Animals: 

1. Location of army animal evacuation station (one for all troops 

and located on railroad). 

2. Instructions for evacuation by army. 

III. Road Maintenance. (See Engineer Plan.) 

A. Prescribe boundaries for corps. 

Assignment of army pioneer troops to corps and commander, 
army service area. 

B. Prescribe boundaries for army. 

Instructions for division engineers in army reserve. 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


227 


C. Instructions for chief engineer of army, after consultation with 

G4, corps, to arrange with chief engineer, corps, for progres¬ 
sively taking over repair work during advance. 

D. Instructions relative to streets and roads in villages, towns 

and cities being maintained by civil inhabitants. 

E. Reference to engineer plan attached as an annex. 

Part II 

TRAFFIC CIRCULATION AND CONTROL, PRISONERS OF 
WAR AND CAPTURED MATERIAL 

1. Traffic. 

A. Circulation: 

T. Reference to army circulation map, giving date. 

2. Give list of army reserve roads (motor traffic only). 

3. Give list of roads to become army reserve roads as the advance 

progresses and state when and how transfer of control will 
be effected. 

4. Designate corps axial roads. 

B. Control: 

1. Give area controlled by army. 

2. Give area controlled by corps. 

3. Instructions to corps to arrange for the following: 

a. Assignment of axial roads to divisions in moving forward. 

b. One-way traffic except on roads capable of continuous 

two-way traffic. 

c. Frequent cross-connection between longitudinal roads. 

d. Transfer points between motor and wagon near forward 

limit of motor travel and keeping longitudinal roads 
clear. 

e. Snatch teams for hills and bad points on roads, and de¬ 

tails for salvaging and wrecking stalled and ditched 
vehicles. 

f. Road signs prepared in advance for corps and divisional 

roads. 

g". Troops and trains awaiting orders to stand clear of roads. 

h. Roads and time schedules for moving up army and corps 

artillery during the attack. 

i. Non-essential baggage to be left in dumps and to come 

forward later. 

j. Designate time transport is to move forward according 

to the following priority: 

(1) Ambulances. 

(2) Signal corps trucks. 

(3) First line combat troops and their combat trains. 

(4) Anti-aircraft artillery (mobile). 

(5) Essential ammunition and gasoline for tanks. 

(6) Road materials. 

(7) Food, reserve ammunition and other essentials 

(division field and supply trains). 

k. No sightseers. 

4. Instructions for army provost marshal to arrange for relief 

of corps military police as advance progresses. - 

5. Daylight traffic to be reduced to minimum. 

6. *Train parks, picket lines, dumps, etc., to be placed under 

cover from terrestrial and aerial observation, or camouflaged. 

7. *Reference to instruction of teamsters and chauffeurs in road 

discipline and protection of transport from enemy observation. 


228 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES ,. 


8. *Upon halting all road columns to take advantage of cover to 

prevent aerial observation. 

9. *Prescribe distance to be maintained between elements of 

transport columns whether moving or halted. (Depends upon 
situation.) 

10. *Trains and convoys to be provided with disks. 

11. * Instructions to corps commanders to make necessary regu¬ 
lations concerning use of lights on transport in corps area. 
Instructions for transport in army area on use of lights. 

12. Instructions to corps relative establishment of officer and other 
traffic control posts in forward area and critical points. Such 
detailed instructions about control of traffic as may be neces¬ 
sary. 


II. Stragglers. 

Instructions to army provost marshal, the commander, army 
service area, and corps assistant provost marshals to search back 
areas for stragglers. All organization commanders in army area 
to lend assistance in 'detecting stragglers. 

III. Prisoners of War. 

A. Location of army prisoner of war enclosures for each corps and 

cavalry division, giving the number of each enclosure. 

B. Instructions relative method of evacuation by divisions, corps 

and army, giving location of enclosure to which the army 
evacuates. 

C. Give railhead to be used by each enclosure. ‘ 

D. Instructions to corps to make telegraphic reports of total number 

of officers and men captured since beginning of operation. 
Sent to G1 army by 12:00 noon each day. 

IV. Captured Material. 

A. Instructions for divisions to collect,-inventory and turn over to 

salvage service. 

B. Location of salvage depot in communications zone to which cap¬ 

tured material is to be shipped. 

C. Instructions to divisions to make daily reports as of 12 noon 

direct to Gl, army (copy being furnished to corps), covering 
the following: 

Guns, giving caliber. 

Mortars, giving caliber. 

Machine guns, giving make. 

Rolling stock (railroad), giving description, gauge and loca¬ 
tion. 

Motor transport, showing kind, condition and location. 

Other material of importance. 

■ Reports to show captures during preceding 24 hours with total 
of captures to date. 

(Authentication) 

Distribution: 


(Same as FO it accompanies.) 


Note: Paragraphs marked by a star (*) become standing orders 
and would not be reiterated in subsequent orders, except when reports 
indicated that provisions prescribed were not being generally com¬ 
plied with. Such precautions are generally given to meet special cases. 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 229 

246. FORM FOR ENGINEER PLAN (OFFENSIVE) 

ANNEX No — TO ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS No — 
FIRST BLUE ARMY (DATE) 

ENGINEER , 

I. Engineer Troops. 

The operations of army engineer troops within the army area 
will be directed by the chief engineer, First Blue Army (any other 
general instructions relative to employment of engineer troops). 

II. Supplies. 

A. Army depots are located as follows and will be operated by 
army engineer troops: 

((jive numbers of the depots, their location and units to be 
served thereat.) 

B. Corps parks are located as follows and will be operated by 
army engineer troops: 

(Give location and units to be served.) 

C. Instructions relative establishment of division engineer dumps— 
usually established under direction of chief engineer, corps, and 
operated by division engineer troops. 

III. Light Railways. 

Extended and maintained by army engineer troops—Instruc¬ 
tions relative extension. 

IV. Highways. 

A. Instructions relative construction, repair and maintenance by: 

Divisions within their areas. 

Corps within their areas (defining rear boundary). 

Army in rear of corps rear boundary. 

B. Instructions relative taking over of road repair by army troops 
as advance progresses (areas to be defined from time to time by 
chief engineer army). 

C. Instructions relative holding trucks loaded with road material 
ready in each corps for repair of roads. 

D. Advance dumps for road material. (Give location and units 
to be served.) 

V. Electrical and Mechanical Works. 

Instructions relative employment of army electrical and me¬ 
chanical troops. (Assist in installation and operation of water 
points, supply and operate lighting plants for divisional and higher 
headquarters and for evacuation hospitals—Location of shop for 
repairs to electrical plants.) 

Give location of the headquarters of these troops. 

VI. Camouflage. 

Assignment of army camouflage troops to each divisional sector 
under division engineer. 

Assignment of detachment to army artillery. Corps artillery 
to call on divisions for camouflage work. 

Camouflage dumps to be established at all corps engineer parks 
and other convenient points. 

VII. Water Supply. 

Instructions relative supply of water by army water supply 
troops. 

Cautions to prevent waste of water. 


230 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


General locations of water points. 

Advance water points to be established as advance progresses, 
locations to be furnished by army water supply officer to chief 
engineer, corps. 

Streams to be utilized by mobile purification units. 

Organization water carts to be accompanied by necessary per¬ 
sonnel to operate hand pumps. 

Information relative water supply in towns and at farms. 

Horse watering parties to be in charge of officer or NCO with 
extra personnel for operating pumps. 

Water points under control of Army Water Supply Servfce. 
Representatives of this service, including water guards, have com¬ 
plete control of water points. 

Water guards wear brassard with letters “W.S.” on white cloth, 

VIII. Mining. 

Mining troops used in conjunction with water supply troops. 

Corps commanders responsible for destruction of bridges, in 
case of reverse; destruction to be effected upon order of command¬ 
ing general. First Blue Army, or officer to whom he may delegate 
such authority. 

If situation demands immediate action corps commanders will 
use their discretion. 

IX. Any Other Subject Which Requires Instructions. 

By command of Lieutenant General X: 

Y 

Chief of Staff. 

247. GENERAL FORM OF ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS (CORPS) 

The corps administrative order is based usually on the 
army administrative order and follows the form of the divi¬ 
sion administrative order. 

Nearly all subjects covered are taken from the army 
administrative order, such additional instructions being 
added as may be necessary to carry out the administrative 
details pertaining to the particular corps area and the divi¬ 
sions in the corps. 


248. GENERAL FORM OF ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS (DIVISION) 

The following form for administrative orders has been 
adopted at The General Service Schools. The details to be 
included depend entirely upon each situation and the state 
of training and experience of the unit. Only such para¬ 
graphs as apply to a situation will be embodied in the order 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


231 


and will be numbered consecutively, beginning No. I. 
Paragraphs may be added as necessary. 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date and Hour) 

Administrative Orders) .j. . 4. -ci- u x 

_ > (Reference to Field Order.) 

(Reference to maps used.) 


I. Supply. 

A. Railhead: 

(Location of, date and hour of drawing supplies.) 

B. Rations: 

1. Any special instructions about rations. 

2. Location of distributing point or points with organizations 

to draw from each point and hours of issue. 

3. Route to be used by supply train (when necessary). 

C. Ammunition: 

1. Location of refilling point. (Corps park usually.) 

2. Location of distributing stations with kinds of ammunition 

at each and organizations served thereat. 

3. Route to be followed by ammunition train. 

D. Engineer Material: 

1. Location of corps park or army depot with description of 

material. 

2. Location of division dump (if used) with description of 

material. 

E. Signal Material: 

Same as D. 

F. Water Supply: 

1. Location of water distributing points or method of supply. 

2. Any special instructions or caution relative to condition 

of water, keeping water wagons filled, etc. 

■ Note: Similar subparagraphs pertaining to supplies of other services, such as 
ordnance, medical, gasoline and oil, etc., should be added when necessary. 


11. Evacuation. • 

A. Men : 

1. Dressing stations: 

a. Location of one for each brigade in an attack or in 

a defensive situation. 

b. Location of collecting stations for sick (division on 

the march). 

c. Any special instructions for division surgeon relative 

to evacuation. 

2. Field hospital: 

a. Location of division field hospital. 

b. How evacuation will be made and route to be fol¬ 

lowed. 

c. Location of corps evacuation hospital. 

3. Station for slightly wounded (SSW). (This establishment 

is also given in paragraph 4 of the field order.) 


232 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


B. Animals: 

1. Location of mobile veterinary section. 

2. How evacuation will be made and route to be followed. 

3. Any special instructions for division veterinarian relative 

to evacuation. 

4. Location of corps advance collecting point for animals or 

location of corps veterinary unit. 

HI. Roads. 

A. Restrictions'. 

Instructions relative to assignment or use of certain roads (re¬ 
served roads, axial roads, etc.). 

B. Maintenance: 

Instructions to engineers about repair of roads and bridges. 

C. Circulation : 

1. Instructions regarding direction of traffic on certain roads 

for certain units, nature of roads and bridges, and 
whether or not circulation is free in a certain area. 

2. Reference to circulation map (if issued). 

D. Traffic Control: 

1. Instructions to provost marshal relative police arrange¬ 

ments on roads. 

2. Instructions relative posting of signs (if necessary). 

3. Schedule of traffic priority (if necessary). 

4. Instructions relative reconnaissance of roads by provost 

marshal and preparation of draft of circulation map 
(when necessary). 

IV. Salvage and Burial. 

A. Salvage: 

1. Location of division salvage dump (if necessary) and 

method of evacuation. 

2. Location of corps salvage park. 

3. Any special instructions relative to units and transporta¬ 

tion detailed for salvage duty. 

B. Burial: 

1. Officer in charge and units detailed for burial duty. 

2. Areas to be covered by division burial detachment and the 

combat troops. 

3. Transportation and tools to be furnished. 

4. Instructions relative to keyeping of burial records. 

C. Anything which pertains to both salvage and burial. 

V. Military Police. 

A. Location of straggler line and of collecting point for stragglers. 

B. Special instructions for use of military police (special points to 
be policed, use of mounted officers, motorcycle patrols, etc.). 

VI. Prisoners of War. 

A. Location of collecting point for prisoners of war. 

B. Instructions relative to disposition of prisoners of war. 

C. Location of corps prisoner of war enclosure. 

VII. Miscellaneous. 

A. Billeting: 

Any special instructions for billeting parties or guides. 

B. Surplus Baggage: 

Instructions relative to disposition of same. 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


233 


C. Extra Transportation: 

Instructions relative to assignment and use of. 

D. Mail: 

Any special instructions. 

E. Any other matters which do not require a separate paragraph in 
the order. 


VIII. Trains. 

A. Division Trains: 

Any special instructions relative to location or movement of 
same. State hour of release when necessary. 

B. Field Trains: 


Same as A, except reference to release. 

C. Any special instructions relative to distance to be maintained be¬ 
tween groups of vehicles when marching (if required). 

D. Instructions that exact locations of all trains be promptly re¬ 
ported to division headquarters, and instructions relative main¬ 
taining contact therewith. 


(Distribution) 


(Authentication) 


Note:—W hen it is not clear from the field order where the assistant chief 
of stair in charge of administration and supply may be reached, a paragraph may be 
added as the last paragraph of the administrative order giving this information. 


249. SUBJECTS TO BE COVERED IN ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS FOR A DIVISION ON THE MARCH 

The following subjects are usually covered in the ad¬ 
ministrative orders for move of a division by marching: 

I. Supply. 

A. Railhead: 

Location, date and hour of drawing supplies (from corps or 
army order). 

B. Rations: 

1. Any special instructions about rations to be capied. *If 

combat is imminent at end of march, deficiencies, if any, 
in field and reserve rations should he replenished. 

2. Distributing points. 

Location for staging areas, if any, and for new area, 
if known, giving organizations to draw from each point 
and hours of issue. 

3. Route to be used by supply train (when necessary). 

C. Ammunition: 

1. Location of refilling point and distributing stations us¬ 
ually not stated for march. If contact is later gained 
with the enemy and fighting results the above establish¬ 
ments are given in a later administrative order. 

D. Engineer Material: 

Ordinarily no reference necessary. 

E. Signal Material: 

Same as D. 


234 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


f 

F. Water Supply: 

1. Where obtainable. 

2. Any special instructions or cautions relative to condition 

of water, *keeping water wagons filled, etc. 

II. Evacuation. 

A. Men: 

1. Collecting stations. 

a. Location of collecting stations for sick (usually es¬ 

tablished in towns or at farm houses along the 
route, 3 to 5 miles apart). 

b. * Charge division surgeon with details relative to 

evacuation on the march and in the old area. 

2. Dressing stations (not necessary on march). 

3. Field hospital. 

a. Location of corps evacuation hospital from corps 

order. 

b. Location of division field hospital in new area (if 

known beforehand). 

c. Prescribe evacuation routes, when necessary. 

B. Animals: 

1. Location of corps veterinary unit. 

2. Location of collecting points for sick or disabled animals 

(usually established in towns or at farm houses along 
the route, 3 to 5 miles apart). 

3. * Charge division veterinarian with details relative to 

evacuation on the march and in the old area. 

III. Roads. 

A. Restrictions: 

Instructions as to which may be used for marching troops, 
animal and motor transport (usually obtained from corps or 
army order). 

B. Maintenance: 

(Not necessary.) 

C. Circulation: 

1. State whether free or one, two, or three-way road and 

direction in case of one-way. 

2. Give any available information as to nature of roads and 

bridges. 

D. Traffic Control: 

1. *Instructions to provost marshal relative police arrange¬ 

ments for the march and new area, including: Special 
directions, if necessary, for the employment of mounted 
and motorcycle police for marching columns and MP 
posts to be established in all towns through which col¬ 
umns pass. 

*MP posts in staging areas, new area and at distrib¬ 
uting points. 

2. *Instructions relative posting of signs. 

3. *Instructions relative reconnaissance of roads in new area 

and preparation of draft of circulation map (when neces¬ 
sary) . 

IV. Salvage and Burial. 

A. Salvage : 

Location of salvage dumps in new area (if known). 

B. Burial: 

(No reference necessary.) 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


235 


V. Military Police. 

(On the march instructions usually covered under “Roads— 
Traffic Control.”) 

VI. Prisoners of War. 

(No reference necessary unless going into action.) 

VII. Miscellaneous. 

A. Billeting: 

Any special instructions for billeting parties or guides for 
staging and new areas, including transportation available and ra¬ 
tions, bicycles, etc., to be carried by billeting parties. 

B. Surplus Baggage: 

*General instructions (when necessary) to brigade command¬ 
ers and commander of trains, relative to assembling in dumps, 
the location of which to be reported to division quartermaster. 

C. Extra Transportation: 

1. *Give number of trucks assigned to division and brigade 

headquarters, with hour of reporting. 

2. * Special instructions to commanding officer of trains for 

movement of these trucks. Caution to return trucks 
promptly to supply train upon completion of move. 

D. ^Mail: 

Any specific instructions. 

E. Any other matters pertaining to the march which do not require 
a separate paragraph in the order. 

VIII. Trains. 

A. Division Trains: 

1. Specific instructions for movement of (usually moved under 

supervision of CO, Trains, per march table attached to 
division order). 

2. Special instructions relative to location of trains in stag¬ 

ing or new area, exact location to be later reported to 
G4, if not designated in orders. 

B. Field Trains: 

Same as A. 

C. Any special instructions relative to distance to be maintained 
between groups of vehicles (if necessary). 

D. *Instructions relative maintaining contact with division head¬ 
quarters. 

E. *Instructions for movement and location of special units (when 
necessary) such as mobile ordnance repair shop, service park 
unit, steam disinfectors, sales commissary, gas and oil station. 

Distribution: 

Usual distribution and to any individual to whom special in¬ 
structions have been given in the order. 


Remarks 

(See paragraphs marked *) 

Whenever it is certain that standing instructions will 
be carried out automatically, many of the details with re¬ 
spect thereto may be omitted from the administrative 


236 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


orders. It is largely a question of circumstances in each par¬ 
ticular case and the degree of confidence placed by the 
division commander in the chiefs of services and subordinate 
commanders. 


250. SUBJECTS TO BE COVERED IN ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS FOR MOVEMENT OF A DIVISION 
BY RAIL 

The follo'W'ing subjects are usually covered in the ad¬ 
ministrative orders for the movement of a division by rail: 

I. Supply. 

A. Railhead : 

1. Location of last railhead-in old area, giving date. 

2. Location of first railhead in new area, giving date. 

B. Rations: 

1. State number of days’ travel rations (if any) to be car¬ 

ried on train (usually 1 day’s travel rations are suffi¬ 
cient). Instructions for quartermaster to deliver travel 
rations at entraining stations (dump established there 
by army trucks if it can be arranged). 

2. State number of days’ field rations to be carried on field 

train, exclusive of rolling kitchens. (Usually necessary 
for both sections of field trains to be loaded full. This 
requires instructions for field trains to make a “double 
refill” on day preceding day of entrainment and usually 
insures rations for 48 hours after detrainment. 
Under this arrangement no issue by the supply train to 
the field trains on the day of detrainment will be neces¬ 
sary.) 

3. * Instructions for water carts to be loaded filled and fuel 

to be carried for rolling kitchens. 

4. Distributing points. 

For units arriving in new area, giving location, date 
and hour each unit draws. 

Instructions for the operation and movement to new 
area of the two sections of the supply train, giving dates 
last distribution will be made in the old area and first 
distribution in new area. 

C. Ammunition: 

(Usually no reference necessary.) 

D. Engineer Material: 

Same as C. 

E. Signal Material: 

Same as C. (G3 instructs the division signal officer to send 
an advance detachment to new area to provide signal communi¬ 
cations at the new headquarters.) 

F. Water: 

Instructions relative to procurement in new area (if known). 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 237 

II. Evacuation. 

A Men: ' ‘ > - 

1. Place where sick will be evacuated before the move. 

* Charge division surgeon with details of evacuation from 

. 1 ' old area. 

2.,*Ambulance service to be established at each entraining 
station. ' ^ 

3. Field hospital. 

Location of one in new area (if known beforehand), 
b. Animals: , 

1. Place where sick will be evacuated before the move. 

* Charge division veterinarian with details of evacuation 
from old area. 

2. Location of division mobile veterinary section in new area 

(if known) and place where animals are to be evacuated 
from new area. 

III. Roads. 

A. Restrictions: 

Give roads to be used by motor transport in moving to new 
area. 

B. " Maintenance: 

(No reference necessary.) , 

C. Circulation: 

1. * Instructions to assistant provost marshal to reconnoiter 
roads in new area and prepare draft of circulation map. 

, 2. Direct 'division engineer to have maps prepared (if not 
furnished by higher authority). 

D. Traffic Control: 

1. *Instructions to provost marshal relative police arrange- 

, ments for movement Of troops arid" animal transport to 

’ entraining stations. Traffic control posts at important 

road junctions on routes to entraining stations; at dis¬ 
tributing points in new area, etc. ^ 

2. * Instructions relative prompt posting of signs in new area. 

IV. Salvage and Burial. 

.1 ^ V ' * 

A. Salvage: 

Instructions for thorough police of old area before entraining. 

B. Burial: 

(No reference necessary.) 

V. Military Police. 

*Instructions to place military police on duty at each entrain¬ 
ing and detraining station. 

VI. Prisoners of War. 

(No reference necessary.) 

VII. Miscellaneous. 

A. Billeting: 

1. Instructions for billeting parties to proceed by rail on 

day before entrainment commences, giving hour of de¬ 
parture and action after arrival in new area. 

2. Direct billeting parties to take bicycles and sufficient 

rations to last until arrival of their units in new area. 

3. Any special instructions for division billeting officer. 


238 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


B. Baggage: 

When baggage will be placed at entraining station (usually 
3 hours before loading). 

C. Extra Transportation: 

*Instructions to CO Tns to furnish extra trucks, specifying 
number, to certain headquarters (usually division and brigades) 
for hauling extra baggage to entraining stations. When and 
where trucks are to report. 

D. General instructions for entrainment and detrainment. 

1. When troops should arrive at entraining station (usually 

1 hour before entrainment). 

2. When transportation to accompany troops should arrive at 

entraining station (usually 3 hours before loading). 

3. Instructions for senior officer of each train to furnish 

railway representative statement showing number of offi¬ 
cers, men, horses, mules, vehicles by type and amount 
of baggage carried by his train. 

4. Instructions for detachment commanders to report to 

commanding officer of train. 

5. Instructions for last unit entraining at each station to 

furnish loading detail (usually one company) and for 
first unit detraining at each station to furnish unload¬ 
ing detail (usually one company) at detraining station. 
State hours when loading parties should report at en¬ 
training stations and to whom. Instructions for tem¬ 
porary billets for loading parties at each entraining 
station. 

6. Instructions for commanding general, artillery brigade, to 

make necessary arrangements for loading artillery ani¬ 
mals, materiel and transportation. 

7. Instructions for officers charged in the division field 

order with making the detailed arrangements for en¬ 
training and detraining (usually the brigade command¬ 
ers) to furnish entraining and detraining officers at each 
station, stating when and where and to whom they 
should report. Brigade commanders to relieve them upon 
completion of duty. 

E. Mail: 

Where and when distribution commences in new area. 

VIII. Trains. 

A. Division Trains: 

Instructions for motor trains to move as directed in Par. — 
FO No — (usually moved by road under direction of CO Tns 
and in accordance with march table attached to the field order). 

IX. G4 Echelons. 

Statement as to where and when G4 may be reached in new 
area. 

Where and until what date and hour an assistant G4 may be 
reached in old area. 

Note :— G4 gives instructions to the CO Hq Tr in order to insure that 
the necessary material for the establishment of the new division headquarters is 
sent by truck well in advance of the movement. 

Remarks 

(See paragraph marked *) 

Whenever it is certain that standing instructions will 
be carried out automatically, many of the details with re* 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


239 


spect thereto may be omitted from the administrative orders. 
It is largely a question of circumstances in each particular 
case and the degree of confidence placed by the division 
commander in the chiefs of services and subordinate com¬ 
manders. 

251. SUBJECTS TO BE COVERED IN ADMINISTRA¬ 
TIVE ORDERS FOR A DIVISION IN 
COMBAT 

The following subjects are usually covered in the ad¬ 
ministrative orders for a division going into action: 

I. Supply. 

A. Railhead: 

Location, date and hour of drawing supplies (from corps 
or army order). 

B. Rations: 

Distributing points. 

Location, date, hour each unit draws. Locate near field 
trains, if possible, on good road circuit and under cover. 
Route to be used by supply train. 

C. Ammunition: 

1. Refilling point given in corps orders. Prescribe road to 

be used by ammunition train. 

2. Distributing stations: For artillery as near the batteries 

as possible. Centrally located for infantry. On side 
roads if possible to avoid congestion on axial road; good 
circuits necessary; cover where possible. 

D. Engineer Material: 

Corps park given in corps orders. Instructions to division 
engineer reference establishing dump, giving description of 
material. 

E. Signal Corps Material: 

Corps park given in corps orders. Instructions to division 
signal officer reference establishing dump, giving description 
of material. 

F. Water: 

Location of supply. Instructions to engineers if certain 
points are to be controlled by them (standing orders in divi¬ 
sion require boiling or filtering). 

II. Evacuation. 

A. Men: 

1. Dressing stations. For infantry brigades on brigade axial 

roads if provided for (good communication to front and 
rear). Evacuation route. 

2. Field hospitals. 

a. Non-evacuable and seriously wounded. Locate on good 

line of communication out of artillery range. 

b. All other cases. 


240 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


c. One or two field hospitals well to the rear on good road 

(avoid crossroads and other places where traffic con¬ 
gestion is apt to occur). 

Note:—A ll hospitals located on recommendation of division surgeon. 

d. Location of corps evacuation hospital given in corps orders. 

3. Station for slightly wounded (SSW). 

13. Animals : 

1. Location of corps mobile veterinary hospital given in corps 

orders. 

2. Designate location of collection station for sick and wounded 

animals and place division mobile veterinary section there. 

3. *Division veterinarian is charge with ail details of evacua¬ 

tion of animals. 

III. Roads. 

A. Restrictions'. 

Axial roads from division field orders or corps field orders 
if not given in the former. 

B. Maintenance: 

Instruction to division engineer. 

C. Circulation: 

Instructions and restrictions for use of roads (circulation 
map showing one-way, two-way and three-way roads and 
direction of traffic in case of one-way usually furnished by 
corps and distributed to units of division). *Instructions to 
assistant provost marshal and division engineer to reconnoi- 
ter roads in division area as fast as the advance permits and 
report. *Direct division engineer to have maps prepared 
if not furnished by-corps. • 

D. Traffic Control: 

Corps sector of control given in corps orders. Prescribe 
division sector for traffic control. *Direct establishment of 
control posts at important road junctions, distributing points, 
distributing stations, field hospitals, etc. Military police to 
have maps of area. Signs‘to be posted. New control posts 
to be located in forward area as attack permits. Schedule 
of traffic priority. 

IV. Salvage and Burial. 

A. Salvage: 

1. Corps salvage park from corps orders. 

2. Designate troops for salvage duty in rear of combat troops and 

define area. 

*3. Designate officer in charge of salvage work. 

4. Particular points to be covered by salvage detachments. 

5. Instructions relative to transportation. ' ' ' 

6. Where salvage will be delivered and how it will be evacuated. 

B. Burial: 

*1. 'Designate officer in charge of burial work. • 

2. Designate troops foT burial duty in rear of combat troops and 

define area. 

3. Instructions relative to transportation and tools. 

4. Designate officers to make records and reports of burial. 

C. General instructions for salvage and burial in the advance or 

combat area. 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


241 


V. Military Police. . 

Location of straggler line. Brigade straggler line from re¬ 
serve troops if necessary. *Instructions reference arrests of en¬ 
listed men. 

Location of collection point for stragglers. 

Instructions for moving straggler line forward. 

Provost marshal to inspect back area of division. 

VI. Prisoners of War. 

Sent to collection point, then to corps prisoner of war enclosure 
after being searched and interviewed by G2. 

Location of collection point for prisoners of war. 

Location of corps prisoner of war enclosure. i . 

VII. Miscellaneous. * * ' 

A. * Extra Trucks'. 

Instructions to quartermaster to furnish them to commanding 
officer, headquarters troop, for movement of advance division 
command post, specifying number. 

B. *Surplus Baggage: 

Instructions to brigade commanders to have battalion dumps 
formed near roads under proper guard. Quartermaster to be 
notified of location. 

C. *Mail: 

Usual statement. 

VIII. Trains. 

Give hour of release by commanding officer, trains. 

Prescribe movements, if .any contemplated, giving route to be 
followed, hour of departure and new locations. Give locations 
of those not moved. How contact is to be maintained with G4. 

IX. G4 Echelons. "'l 

Where G4 and assistants" may be found. 

Note :—Distribution of order. 

Usual distribution and to any individual to whom special instructions have been 
given in the order. 

Remarks 

(See paragraphs in Analysis marked*) 

Whenever it is certain that standing instructions will 
be carried out automatically, many of the details with 
respect thereto may be omitted from the administative 
orders. It is largely a question of circumstances in each 
particular case and the degree of confidence placed by 
the division commander in the chiefs of services and sub¬ 
ordinate commanders. 


242 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


252. SAMPLE OF DIVISION ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS ORGANIZING RAILHEAD DETACH¬ 
MENT AND BURIAL SERVICE 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders 1 
No — ]■ 

1. The following details are announced: 

2. Clothing Squad No 4, 1st Lt J. L. Jacobs, QMC, is attached 
to this division. 

3. Sales Commissary No 5, 1st Lt P. S. Slaton, QMC, command¬ 
ing, is attached to this division. 

4. The division quartermaster will immediately organize a rail¬ 
head detachment to relieve the railhead detail furnished by the com¬ 
munications zone. The detachment will be organized similarly to a 
company. The following details are directed and will report to the 
division quartermaster not later than noon, Jan 9th: 

Captain H. S. Ford, Unassigned. 

1st Lt L. L. Rand, 2d Inf. 

2d Lt J. S. Cole, 1st FA. 

1 sergeant from each infantry and artillery regiment. 

15 privates from each infantry regiment. 

10 privates from each artillery regiment. 

1 corporal from each infantry and artillery regiment. 

5 privates from the ammunition train. 

5 privates from the supply train. 

3 privates from the sanitary train. 

1 cook from the 2d Infantry. 

1 cook from the 1st Engineers. 

5. The chief burial officer, division sanitary inspector, will organ¬ 
ize a burial service as follows: 

a. Chief burial officer. 

1 .Sergeant, assistant, 

1 Corporal, clerk, 

21 Privates (3 from each infantry and artillery regi¬ 
ment; not to report until called for by the senior 
burial officer, at which time they will report to the 
1st Train Headquarters and military police for bil¬ 
lets and rations). 

b. Each organization chaplain is detailed as an assistant 

and in matters pertaining to the burial service will 
be subject to the orders of the chief burial officer. 
Assistant Burial Officer: 

1 Clerk. 

10 Privates from the organization to which the chaplain 
is assigned (not to report until called for). 

c. During any emergency the chief burial officer is author¬ 

ized to call upon the following organizations for addi¬ 
tional details not exceeding the number set forth after 
the organization: 


Each infantry regiment_10 privates 

Each artillery regiment_5 privates 

Each machine gun battalion_3 privates 

Supply train -5 privates 

Engineer train-6 privates 







FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


243 


d. During an advance of this division in attack the chief 

burial officer will cause his details to cover the area over 
which the organizations have advanced. He will, as 
representative of the division commander, select suitable 
locations for the burial of the dead found on the battle¬ 
field. The number of burial sites will be kept at a min- 
mum. 

e. The chief burial officer will be furnished such transpor¬ 

tation and materials as he may require in the perform¬ 
ance of his duties. He and his assistants are authorized 
to call upon the nearest units or upon the division quar¬ 
termaster and engineer officer for tools and materials 
required. 

f. The following instructions will be kept in mind by all 

burial officers: 

A chaplain should be present at every burial service. 
The battlefield should be carefully searched to assure 
that no dead, either men or animals, are overlooked. 

The graves of our own and the enemy dead should be 
carefully marked. 

Regulations regarding the disposition of identification 
tags will be complied with. 

Bodies will be handled and buried with proper respect. 
Valuables found on the dead will be disposed of accord¬ 
ing to existing instructions. 

The burial of all men and animals will be accomplished 
with the least practicable delay. 

All records, personal effects and valuables removed 
from the dead, information concerning the presence of 
unburied dead and the locations of burial plots selected 
by the assistant burial officers will be sent to the chief 
burial officer. 

g. The chief burial officer will confer with the chief burial 

officer of the I Corps and the representative of the Graves 
Registration Service for further instructions. 

By command of Major General X, ^ 

Chief of Staff. 

253. SAMPLE OF DIVISION ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS ORGANIZING THE SALVAGE 
SERVICE 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders \ 

No — 3 

1. Salvage Squad No 3, 1st Lt E. L. Booth, QMC, commanding, 
is attached to this division. 

2. The Division Salvage Dump is located at the Railhead. 

3. The following salvage service is directed. Organization com¬ 
manders will assure the necessary details. 

a. Division salvage dump: 

Salvage Squad No 3. 

b. Regimental salvage dump: 

1 officer in charge. 

1 sergeant and as many privates as may be necessary. 


244 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


c. Battalion salvage dump: 

1 sergeant in charge. 

1 corporal and as many privates as may be necessary. 

d. Company or battery salvage dump: 

1 corporal in charge. 

As many privates as may be necessary. 

e. Separate organization salvage dump: 

Same as for battalions. 

f. Detachment salvage dump: 

Same as for companies. 

4. Salvage will be collected daily, and whenever the accumulation 
is sufficient it will be sent to the next higher dump. 

5. Attention is invited to the fact that every article, no matter 
how badly damaged or worn it may be, has value as salvage. 

6. Salvage will be sorted according to the following classifi¬ 
cations : 

Class I: Clothing, cloth equipment, blankets, web belts, web 
equipment, flags and brassards, haversacks, tentage, leg¬ 
gings, paulins, other canvas materials, rubber equipment in¬ 
cluding boots, gloves, slickers, leather equipment, shoes, belts, 
boots, harness, saddles, bridles, mess outfits, cooking utensils, 
field ranges, metal helmets, trench tools, small metal articles 
and metal goods, of any kind (except as classified below). 

Class II: Certain ordnance equipment to include all artillery 
material, machine guns, autoniatic rifles, small arms, bayonets 
and ammunition. 

Class III: Certain signal corps property to comprise field 
wire, cable and special trench fittings. 

Class IV: Certain medical property to comprise special med¬ 
ical instruments and appliances.. Salvage of this class will 
be consigned to and repaired by the medical department. 

Class V: Gas masks. 

Class VI: Optical instruments, to include range finders, pan¬ 
oramic and telescopic sights, field glasses, trench periscopes, 
watches, compasses, etc. 

7. Salvage will be protected from the weather whenever prac¬ 
ticable. 

8. All ammunition and explosives will be segregated in a sep¬ 
arate dump. Except small arms ammunition, no ammunition, pyro¬ 
technic or grenades will be collected without the supervision of a rep¬ 
resentative from the ordnance department, who may be a member 
of the salvage squad or specially detailed. All fire arms will be un¬ 
loaded. 

9. Property which is new or fit for immediate re-issue and 
property which can be repaired within the division will not be shipped 
to salvage depots, but will be disposed of under the direction of 
the service concerned, i.e., ordnance, signal corps, engineer, quar¬ 
termaster, medical, etc. 

10. During an offensive operation details from the salvage squad 
will be sent to dressing stations to take over the arms, equipment 
and ammunition from the wounded. 

11. The division salvage officer will advise G4 when he requires 
railroad transportation to ship salvage to the salvage depots. He 
will furnish the chief salvage officer, headquarters First Army, weekly 
with the following: 

Copies of all manifests. 

Memoranda of all serviceable equipment salvaged. 

Memoranda of property re-issued. 


FORMS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS 


245 


12. No salvage dump for ammunition will be located within 103 
yards of a railway track. 

By command of Major General X, 

Y, 

Chief of Staff. 

254. SAMPLE OF DIVISION ADMINISTRATIVE 
ORDERS ORGANIZING THE CLOTHING 
SERVICE 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders ) 

No — J 

1. It is purposed that every man shall always have a serviceable 
and complete outfit of clothing. To this end certain articles will be 
issued direct to the man from the disinfecting and bathing plants: 

Caps 

0 D shirts 

Blouses 

Breeches 

Puttees 

Drawers 

Undershirts 

Socks 

Shoes, chevrons, ornaments and other articles of uniform will be 
obtainable upon memorandum requisition in duplicate submitted to 
the division quartermaster. The requisition will clearly describe 
the article required and state the numbers and sizes. Issue will be 
made by the clothing squad at the railhead. 

2. The system of issue at the plants will be in effect as follows: 

Men reporting at the plants will be required to undress and 

turn in the clothes they have on (except serviceable shoes). They 
will then bathe, and new or clean and serviceable articles of uniform 
will be issued them. 

No replacement articles of clothing will be issued except in 
exchange for a similar article turned in. 

3. Organization commanders will arrange with the officer in 
charge of the plants for their men to visit the plants on schedule. 

4. In cases where men are in urgent need of certain articles of 
clothing and the situation does not permit them to visit a plant, 
their company commanders may obtain the required articles by 
forwarding a duplicate memorandum request to a plant. The re¬ 
quests \<^ill show the number, sizes and kind of articles required 
(clothing slips in duplicate may be used for this purpose). The 
clothing will then be forwarded to the proper organization accom¬ 
panied by one copy of the request. The company commanders re¬ 
ceiving the articles will then cause the soiled or unserviceable ar¬ 
ticles of clothing for which new clothing has been issued to be 
returned to the proper plant. If the articles returned agree in 
number with the articles issued, the retained memorandum request 
will be destroyed; otherwise the company commander will be required 
to adjust properly any discrepancies. 

By command of Major General X, 


Y, 

Chief of Staff. 


CHAPTER X 


Miscellaneous 


255. MILITARY POLICE 

(For organization see T O 24 and table “Division Military 
Police Company,” in this pamphlet.) 

The assistant provost marshal deals directly with G1 
a& a chief of service. The military police company func¬ 
tions directly under the assistant provost marshal and not 
under the commander of trains. 

256. Duties of Military Police Company in General 

Police duty. 

Traffic control. 

Prisoners of war. 

Stragglers. 

Protection of inhabitants. 

Service of information. 

For more detail duties see par. 411, FSR. 

The following data, relative to the military police, is 
included as the result of our experience in The World War: 

257. (a) Straggler Line. 

A line of straggler posts established across the divi¬ 
sion area when combat is imminent for the purpose of 
collecting stragglers and returning them to their proper 
organizations. 

In an attack three lines are usually formed: 

First.—By combat troops approximately 100 yards in 
rear of the line of regimental aid stations. 

Troops are taken from reserves. 

Line is established by division or brigade order. 

Second.—By division military police approximately 2 
to 5 miles in rear of the front line and along a well defined 
road or stream when possible. Usually placed in rear of 
artillery positions. 


246 



MISCELLANEOUS 


247 


Location of line usually designated in corps orders and 
repeated in division administrative order. 

Posts consist of 5 or 6 men. Intervals between posts 
patrolled by mounted or motorcycle military police. 

Posts located on all roads, streams and covered ap¬ 
proaches leading from the front. Contact maintained with 
straggler line of division on right and left. 

Third.—By corps military police across corps area 
approximately 2 or 3 miles in rear of the division straggler 
line. 

All straggler lines co-ordinated by corps assistant pro¬ 
vost marshal and communication maintained by him with 
straggler lines of corps on right and left. 

(b) Collection Point for Stragglers. 

A point or points centrally located on the straggler 
line where stragglers are sent for proper disposition. 

Location designated in division administrative order. 
Military police officer and surgeon on duty there. Strag¬ 
glers examined, re-equipped when necessary, and physi¬ 
cally fit returned to their units; sick are sent to nearest 
dressing station or to field hospital. 

258. (c) Prisoners of War. 

Detachment of military police (about 6 or 8 men) 
sent to each brigade headquarters at beginning of action to 
escort prisoners from there to division collection point for 
prisoners of war. 

Collection point for prisoners of war centrally located 
near division axial road and usually on or near the strag¬ 
gler line. 

Officer of military police company and commissioned 
representative of G2 office are on duty there. Prisoners 
are searched for weapons by military police and for papers 
and other identifying articles by G2 representative. Pris¬ 
oners are listed as to name, rank, organization, and when, 
where and by what organization captured. After being fed, 
all prisoners, except those temporarily detained by G2 for 
interview, are sent to the corps prisoner of war enclosure 
under guard usually furnished by corps. Corps prisoner of 
war enclosure is generally located near corps headquarters. 


248 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Corps requires daily report of prisoners of war cap¬ 
tured during preceding 24 hours. Report made daily by 
division assistant provost marshal to division Gl, who for-- 
wards it to corps. 

(See Form of Administrative Order Covering Disposal of Prisoners 

of War.) 

259. (d) Limit of Daylight Traffic. 

Line beyond which during certain prescribed hours 
no troops or vehicles, except motorcycle couriers, staff 
cars and ambulances, are permitted to pass. During day¬ 
light hours troops in small bodies may cross this line, one 
man at a time. At night troops and vehicles move forward 
of this line in small groups. 

The exact distance from the front cannot be definitely 
stated as it depends entirely upon enemy observation and 
activity. It may be taken as the line beyond which troops 
and vehicles are liable to suffer heavily from enemy fire 
during daylight hours. As a rule no military police posts 
are established forward of this line. 

260. (e) Classification of Military Police Posts. 

(1) Traffic Control Posts {Fixed), 

One noncommissioned officer or acting noncommissioned 
officer and three privates. One man on post constantly— 
two when necessary (usually early part of night when troops 
and vehicles are moving forward). 

Permanent post. If post is subjected to shelling, men 
are relieved every few days, one man at a time, and put 
on posts further to the rear. 

Men billeted in nearest billet or dugout and rationed 
with nearby troops. If no troops near, food is furnished 
and prepared by men off duty. Post provided with telephone 
if block system of traffic control is employed. 

(2) Traffic Patrols. 

Motorcycle or mounted military police patrolling be¬ 
tween the fixed posts to insure against blocking of roads 
by vehicles doubling or becoming mired or disabled. Offi¬ 
cers frequently employed on this duty, particularly during 
an offensive. Patrols of individual officers and noncom- 


MISCELLANEOUS 


249 


missioned officers sent out from military police headquar¬ 
ters. On duty 4 to 8 hours and worked by reliefs from 
military police headquarters. 

(3) Detached Posts {Permanent). 

Posts established in nearby villages (usually outside 
of division area), at railroad stations, on roads leading 
into rear of division area, etc., to apprehend men absent 
without leave and to enforce existing regulations refer¬ 
ence closing of cafes, sale of intoxicants, etc. 

Consists of two or three men. 

Men rationed with nearby troops or placed on commu¬ 
tation of ration basis. 

(4) Railhead Post (Permanent). 

Usually one noncommissioned officer and nine privates. 

To control traffic and preserve order at the railhead. 

Receives instructions from railhead officer. 

Billeted and rationed with railhead detachment. 

(5) Straggler Posts. 

See (a), Second, above. 

261. (f) Traffic Priority. 

In an offensive the term “traffic priority” is frequently 
used and appears in army, corps and division administra¬ 
tive orders. “Traffic priority” means the order in which 
different kinds of traffic and material will be permitted to 
move toward the front after the beginning of the attack. 

The order of priority is usually prescribed as follows: 

a. Ambulances. 

b. Signal corps trucks. 

c. Front line combat troops and their combat trains. 

d. Ammunition. 

e. Road material. 

f. Rations and other supplies. 

Often a specific hour is set after H hour when each of 
the different classes of traffic and material may move for¬ 
ward. Ambulances should not be restricted ordinarily, as 
they usually move singly. 

The traffic priority schedule is of particular value to 
the military police in untangling traffic jams as a guide 
in determining which vehicles to send forward first. 


250 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


262. FORM OF ADMINISTRATIVE ORDERS COVERING 

DISPOSAL OF PRISONERS OF WAR 

(Title) 

(Place) 

(Date) 

Administrative Orders 1 

No — 5 

1. The following instructions will govern the handling and dis¬ 
posal of prisoners of war captured by this division: 

(a) Prisoners of w'ar will, immediately upon capture, be 
disarmed and sent to brigade headquarters, where they will be 
searched and all concealed weapons removed. They will then be 
sent with the least practicable delay to the division prisoner of 
war enclosure or collection point, accompanied by an informal 
memorandum giving the following information in regard to each 
prisoner: 

Name, rank and organization. 

Where captured. 

Time and date of capture. 

By whom or by which organization captured. 

(b) They will be counted into the prisoner of war enclosure 
by the officer in charge (detailed by the assistant provost mar¬ 
shal) of the enclosure, who will receipt to the commander of the 
escort for the total number of officers and enlisted men delivered 
to him. The escort will then return to its proper station. 

(c) At the prisoner of war enclosure prisoners will be 
searched and their papers turned over to the representative from 
the G2 office, who will also select certain desirable individuals 
for examination. 

(d) Prisoners who have been examined will not be permitted 
to mingle with prisoners awaiting examination. Officer prisoners 
will be kept separated from soldier prisoners. 

(e) Prisoners will be permitted to retain their personal ef¬ 
fects, such as watches, trinkets, iron crosses, identity disks, mess 
equipment, haversacks, gas masks and water bottles unless re¬ 
quired by the staff, in which case receipt will be given to the 
prisoners for the articles retained. 

(f) At the division prisoner of war enclosure prisoners will 
be furnished with necessary ordnance property, blankets, cloth¬ 
ing and such other essential articles. 

(g) Prisoners will be evacuated to the corps prisoner of 
war enclosure without delay. 

(h) Prisoners evacuated to the corps prisoner of war en¬ 
closure will be accompanied by a memorandum similar to the one 
provided for in paragraph (a) above. 

(i) All documents, papers, maps or other articles removed 
from prisoners at the division prisoner of war enclosure will be 

• sent with the prisoners to the corps prisoner of war enclosure. 

(j) In accordance with paragraph 1, section 3, G.O. 76, GHQ, 
1917, special reports of prisoners and materials captured will be 
rendered as well as the report of captured property required by 
paragraph 819, Army Regulations. 

2. The evacuation of prisoners from brigade headquarters to the 
corps prisoner of war enclosure is a function of the division assistant 
provost marshal. In the event of an offensive action upon the part of 
this division at any time the division assistant provost marshal will 
assure the following: 

(a) Furnish ten (10) military police for each brigade (in¬ 
fantry) headquarters to act as escort for prisoners of war. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


251 


(b) Furnish an officer in charge of the division prisoner of 
war enclosure and a sufficient guard for the enclosure. 

(c) To furnish escorts for prisoners of war evacuated to the 
corps prisoner of war enclosure. 

(d) In any case where the strength of the military police is 
not sufficient to meet the demands made upon it, the assistant 
provost marshal is authorized to call upon the nearest organiza¬ 
tion commander for additional men whom he will deputize as act¬ 
ing military police. When any such a call is made the facts will 
be immediately communicated to Gl. 

(e) The responsibility for prisoners of war in the division 
prisoner of war enclosure and their evacuation to the rear rests 
with the division assistant provost marshal except in so far as 
G2 may require some or all of them for examination. 

(f) All searching at the division prisoner of war enclosure 
\vill be conducted by representatives from G2 office and the as¬ 
sistant provost marshal personnel working in conjunction, the 
former paying particular attention to papers, documents and such 
articles, and the latter to dangerous weapons and implements. 

(g) All evacuation of prisoners of war will be made by 
marching. Motor vehicles will not be employed for this purpose 
except with the special authority of Gl. Guards or escorts may 
be mounted. 

3. The prisoner of war enclosure for the (-) Sector is located 

near (-). The capacity is approximately 500 prisoners. 

The division quartermaster will issue food, clothing, blankets, 
soap and such articles to prisoners upon call from the assistant pro¬ 
vost marshal. 

The division ordnance officer will issue ordnance equipment (ex¬ 
cept arms) to prisoners when called upon to do so by the assistant 
provost marshal. 

By command of Major General X. 

Y 

Chief of Staff. 


263. TRAFFIC CIRCULATION^ROADS 

Roads for purposes of circulation are classified as one¬ 
way, two-way and three-way roads. 

A one-way road means that traffic can move on it in 
one direction only. It requires careful control by the mili¬ 
tary police. The width should be 9 to 10 feet. One-way 
roads are usually the unimproved country roads. The width 
of a one-way plank road should be 9 feet. 

A two-way road is one that is capable of accommodat¬ 
ing two continuous lines of traffic moving in opposite direc¬ 
tions. The width should be 18 to 20 feet. Two-way roads are 
generally the improved roads in the country. Such roads 
are frequently good two-way roads in places and one-way 
in others. This requires careful control by the military 
police. The one-way portions should be made two-way as 
soon as possible. The width of a two-way plank road should 
be 18 feet. * 




252 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


A three-way road is one that will accommodate two 
continuous lines of traffic in one direction and one contin¬ 
uous line in the other. The width should be 32 to 34 feet. 
Three-way roads are very exceptional. They are more in the 
nature of boulevards and will not be often found in a thea¬ 
ter of operations. 

For an offensive certain roads are usually designated 
by the army and corps as reserved roads, corps axial roads, 
and division axial roads; and circulation maps are prepared 
by the army and corps showing the above roads and indi¬ 
cating the direction of traffic on all roads in the army area. 

A reserved road is a road designated by the army for 
use by motor transportation only. Usually one in each 
corps area is designated if sufficient roads are available. 
It is usually a main highway, whenever possible, capable 
of accommodating continuous lines of traffic in both direc¬ 
tions. It is usually reserved up to a certain point in the 
corps area, beyond which it may be used as a corps or divi¬ 
sion road. 

As the advance progresses the army reserved road is 
extended forward from time to time by army orders and 
repairs on it taken over by army troops. 

The corps axial road is generally designated by the 
army. If possible it should be a good two-way road near 
the center of the corps area. It may be used for both motor 
and animal transport. 

At times it may be the same as the army reserved 
road, in which case it will be used by motor transport only. 
It is used by the corps troops and corps artillery, but may 
be used by army troops and the divisions. 

The division axial road is usually designated by the 
corps, except where a division is acting independently. 

It should be a good two-way road if possible. If not, 
a good return circuit should be provided. 

It is the road upon which the division depends chiefly 
for its supply and evacuation and the movement of troops 
to the forward area. When roads are scarce it frequently 
is the same as the corps axial road. It is available for 
use by motor and animal transport, ambulances, staff cars, 
motorcycle couriers, etc. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


253 


The brigade axial road is designated by the division. 
It should be near the center of the brigade area whenever 
possible and a two-way road. It frequently coincides with 
the divisional axial road. It is the road upon which the 
brigade depends for its supply and evacuation and move¬ 
ment of troops. 

The designation of the above roads appears in the 
army, corps and division administrative orders. 

The nature of the roads and the direction of traffic 
should be indicated on circulation maps by using colors for 
different kinds of roads and arrows showing the direction 
of traffic. All roads should be carefully posted with signs. 

Arrows should be placed between all road junctions. 
In indicating a two-way road (if colors are not used), arrows 
should be placed close together pointing in opposite direc¬ 
tions with the points of the arrows toward each other. 

It is important to indicate the circulation on all roads 
in a division area, bearing in mind the location of all sup¬ 
ply establishments, trains, etc., and insuring at least one 
good forward road and one good return road in the area. 

The circulation map for a divisional area is usually 
prepared by the division engineers from a sketch submitted 
by the assistant provost marshal to G4 for approval. 

When the engineers are not available, the G2 section 
may prepare the circulation maps. 

If practicable, “ammunition routes” “ration supply 
routes” and “evacuation routes” should be prescribed by 
the army and corps so as to allow the maximum freedom 
of movement and a minimum of confusion and congestion. 

The army usually establishes an ammunition depot 
that serves several different divisions well forward of the 
railhead, and there is no choice of roads; so, after the route 
for ammunition trains is determined, it is well to endeavor 
to locate the field hospitals so that the ambulances can have 
as much freedom of movement as possible if roads permit. 
The location of ration distributing point or points should be 
as far off of the ammunition and evacuation routes as pos¬ 
sible. 

If the “ammunition route” is toward one side of the 
area the “evacuation route” should be in the center and the 


254 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


''ration supply route’’ toward the other side. If the "am¬ 
munition route” is in the center, then endeavor to locate 
the field hospitals so that the "ambulance route” is on one 
side of the area and the "ration supply route” on the other 
side. 

The above are guiding principles only. The actual condi¬ 
tions in each pai'ticular situation will determine the char¬ 
acter and number of roads available. 


264. DIVISION MILITARY POLICE COMPANY—OR¬ 
GANIZATION 


1 manor_Attached to train headquarters, division assist¬ 

ant provost marshal. 

1 cantain_Commanding company. 

2 first lieutenants_One in charge stragglers and prisoners of war. 

One in charge of traffic control. 


2 second lieutenants_One in charge of mounted and motorcycle pa¬ 

trols. 

One for company supply and miscellaneous 
duties. 

1 first sergeant 
1 mess sergeant 
1 supply sergeant 

1 stable sergeant 
10 sergeants 
18 corporals 
3 cooks 

3 horseshoers 

2 mechanics 

1 saddler 

2 wagoners 


157 privates, first class and 
privates 

50 riding horses 
8 draft mules 
1 rolling kitchen 
1 ration and baggage wagon 
3 motorcycles with side cars 
10 motorcycles, solos 
105 bicycles 

1 light motor truck 
205 pistols 


Total commissioned _ 5 

Total enlisted_200 

Aggregate _205 


265. ECHELONS—DIVISION HEADQUARTERS 

In campaign division headquarters is divided into two 
echelons. The composition of each echelon varies in each 
situation. However, the following subdivision will answer 
most cases: 

Advance Echelon 

Division commander and personal staff. 

Chief of staff. 

G1 section. (Chief or representative.) 

G2 section. (Chief and field section.) 

G3 section. 

G4 section. (Chief or representative.) 








. MISCELLANEOUS 


255 


Machine gun officer. 

Air service officer. 

Division engineer. 

Signal officer and message center. 

Artillery commander. 

Rear Echelon 

Rest of the division staff. 

266. MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN A DIVISION IN 

EVENT OF FALLING BACK 

(a) Demolition. 

All commanding officers make necessary plans and de¬ 
tail the personnel for destruction of all ammunition stores 
and materiel under their charge that cannot be evacuated. 
Subordinate commanders and supply officers are instructed 
that every effort must be made to prevent stores, materiel 
or transportation from falling into the hands of the enemy. 

The chief of each supply department makes necessary 
plans for the destruction of all stores, materiel and trans¬ 
portation in dumps and storehouses that cannot be evac¬ 
uated and details the personnel to carry them out. 

The officer in charge of the infantry ammunition dump 
arranges for destroying ammunition and pyrotechnics in 
the division dumps that cannot be evacuated, but does not 
cause the execution of the arrangements until ordered to 
do so by the artillery brigade munitions officer. 

(b) Evacuation of Supplies and Materiel. 

As a precaution in case of a general attack on our 
lines (notice of which is given by G4), all division field 
and combat trains refill with the prescribed ammunition, 
rations, materiel and baggage and then proceed to assembly 
points designated by G4. A detachment remains at sta¬ 
tion for executing the plan of destruction in case of actual 
withdrawal of our troops. 

The commander of trains establishes headquarters in 
rear at a point designated by G4, to which train com¬ 
manders send couriers to report arrival at assembly point 
and to maintain communication thereafter. He arranges 
with the assistant provost marshal necessary military police 
to insure proper traffic and march discipline. He maintains 
communications with G4. 


256 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


267. MACHINE GUN DATA 


268. Organization 


Companies Active guns 


Reserve guns 


Div MG Bn (motorized) 
2 Brigs MG bns 
4 regimental companies 

Total 


2 

24 

8 

8 

96 

32 

4 

48 

16 


1^ 

56 


269. Transportation 


Animal- Brig 
■ drawn Co Bn 


Carts, combat, 1-mule 24 

Carts, medical 

Carts, ration, 2-mule 1 

Carts, water, 1-mule 1 

Kitchens, rolling 1 

Wagons, combat, 4-mule 2 

Wagons, ration and bag¬ 
gage, 4-mule 1 

Horses, riding 7 

Mules, draft 28 

Mules, riding 3 

Bicycles 2 

Cars, motor, special 
Cars, motor, 5-passenger 


Kitchens, rolling, trail mobile 
Motorcycles with side cars 
Motorcycles without side cars 
Trucks, l-ton 
Trucks, 1 2 -ton, combat 
Trucks, ration and baggage, li-ton 
Trucks, repair, light 
Trucks, supply, 1-ton 


96 

1 

5 

4 

4 
8 

5 

35 

194 

13 

10 


Motorized Motorized 
Co Bn 


16 32 

5 11 

1 2 

12 29 

6 12 

1 

4 

2 

1 2 

1 3 


270. Road Spaces 


Combat Field 
Troops Train Train 


MG Co (animal) 370 

iMG Bn (4 Co animal) ‘ 1,500 

MG Co (motorized) 420 

MG Bn (2 Cos motorized) 860 


271. Weights 

Machine gun filled with water_ 

Tripod, model 1918 _ 

Ammunition box and filled belt _ 

Ammunition, 1,200 rounds in original case 


272. Anununition Carried 

On gun cart, 5 boxes and belts of 
250 rounds 

On ammunition cart, 12 boxes and 
belts of 250 rounds 
In combat wagons 
In belts 
In cases 


60 

50 

260 

235 

65 

40 

150 

100 


_ _37 lbs 

47 lbs 


15J lbs 
100 ■ lbs 

1 cart 

Total for Co 

1,250 

15,000 

3,000 

36,000 


24,000 

48,000 


Total 


123,000 







MISCELLANEOUS 


257 


273. Effective Ranges of Machine Guns 

Browning _ 

Vickers _^_ 

Hotchkiss _~ 

274. Rates of Fire 

Slow Fire. —60 to 75 rounds per minute. This is the 
rate used for prolonged barrage fire. 

Medium Fire.— 120 to 150 rounds per minute. This 
rate cannot be maintained for more than 30 minutes. 

Rapid Fire. —250 to 300 rounds per minute. This rate 
is used in response to S. 0. S. calls and for the first min¬ 
ute or two of a barrage to cover an attack. It can be 
maintained for only a few minutes. 

Harassing Fire.— Usual rate 1,000 rounds per hour. 
The fire is intermittent and may be carried out at any rate. 

275. Frontage Covered by One Gun 

Frontal Barrage.— The normal frontage for one gun 
executing a frontal barrage is as follows: 


At ranges less than 1,200 meters_60 meters 

At ranges from 1,300 to 1,600 meters_50 meters 

At ranges from 1,700 to 2,000 meters_40 meters 

At ranges over 2,000 meters_30 meters 


If the objective is on a gentle reverse slope, the danger 
space is increased and the frontage can be correspondingly 
increased. 

Oblique Barrages.— For each 10 mils of obliquity 1 
meter may be added to the frontages for a frontal barrage, 
until a maximum of 135 meters is reached. 

Flank Barrages. —The frontage of a gun would sel¬ 
dom be less than the depth of the 75 per cent zone for 
the particular range. Beyond the battle sight zone the 
frontage may vary from the depth of the 75 per cent zone 
to 135 meters, depending upon the number of guns avail¬ 
able. 

276. Equipment 

The division machine gun officer performs the fol¬ 
lowing duties in connection with the equipment of the ma¬ 
chine gun units: 


2,600 meters 
2,900 meters 
3,500 meters 









258 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Sees that all officers are provided with equipment manuals 
and are familiar with their use. 

Sees that all organizations submit their requisitions promptly 
for all articles of equipment required. 

Consults with G4 concerning the procurement of equipment, 
and obtains all information possible from the ordnance officer, 
quartermaster, division engineer, munition officer and gas officer 
as to the status of supplies. 

Makes such inspections of the organizations as are necessary 
to keep himself fully informed of the amount and condition of 
the property on hand. 

Keeps such a record of the important articles of equipment 
on hand as will enable him to determine the availability of units 
for service. 

277. Relief 

In the relief of machine gun units the following are 
important considerations: 

In any subsector the machine guns and infantry should not 
be relieved on the same night. 

Incoming units should take over the sector just as occupied 
by the outgoing units and make changes later. 

The relief should be made at the earliest hour possible with¬ 
out the units marching during daylight. 

Where time necessitates move by trucks, the guns must ac¬ 
company the men on the trucks and the trucks must go to a 
point sufficiently far forward that the relief can be made without 
the use of carts. 

The following points are important to outgoing units: 

Guides must meet incoming units at designated times and 
places. 

Plans and maps must be turned oVer to incoming units. 

All ammunition and equipment, except that pertaining to 
the regular equipment of the organization, are turned over to in¬ 
coming units. Machine guns or tripods must not be exchanged. 
Signal equipment may be exchanged. 

The relief should be completed in time for outgoing units to 
complete their march, or pass beyond the danger zone before 
daylight. 

Machine gun units usually move by marching. Trucks will 
ordinarily be employed only when the units are without animals 
or the distance is so great that they cannot be gotten out of the 
danger zone before daylight. 

278. Siting Guns 

The following are essential points in siting of guns: 

All guns are sited for direct fire, but are also prepared for 
indirect fire. 

Guns usually are sited in pairs. 

Gun positions should be sited for all around defense. 

Guns must be concealed. 

Emplacements and cover trenches must be provided. 

In a stabilized situation, guns in the front line will be de¬ 
stroyed unless protected by concrete emplacements. 

Ammunition dumps must be established. 

Animals should not be placed in areas subject to heavy shell¬ 
ing. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


259 


279. Preparation of Machine Gun Plan 

The following points should be considered in prepar¬ 
ation of the machine gun plan: 


all division machine gun officer obtains and studies carefully 

spedal I™tere“st to thenf'”''’ 

Co-operation of artillery and machine guns. 

Infantry xormations, line of departure and rate of advance 
must be communicated to all machine gun units, 
batt^io^^^^^^^ company is usually assigned to each assault 


•-(-1 ^ P'^^chine gun company is not assigned to support a battalion 
without there is a special reason for such assignment. 

Machine gun sections or platoons are usually assigned to con¬ 
necting groups. 

Make the maximum use of overhead fire. 

All guns not assigned to infantry units should participate in 
barrage fire in the beginning of the attack. This includes the 
division machine gun battalion. 

Machine guns employ standing barrages, not rolling bar¬ 
rages. 

Enfilade and oblique fire will be employed as far as practic¬ 
able. 

Units designated for duty with infantry organizations should 
report for instructions 24 hours before the attack. 

^ Units designated for barrage fire should reconnoiter and pre¬ 
pare positions, and prepare indirect fire data the second night 
before the attack. Positions should be occupied at least four 
hours before the attack. 

Spare barrels must be provided for all organizations. 

Dumps of ammunition, oil, and water must be provided. 


280. WATER SUPPLY 

281. Water Required on Marches 


Minimum amount required for 

marches 

of a 

L few days; 

Men 


R’al. 

per 

day 

Animals 

6 

e:al. 

per 

day 

Motors 

2 

gal. 

per 

day 

(Except motorcycles.) 




For marches of considerable duration: 




Men 

2h 

sal. 

per 

day 

Animals 

10 

ffal. 

per 

day 

Motors 

2 

g:al. 

per 

day 


In the first case for a division at maximum strength 
there would be required: 

Men _42,000 gal. per day 

Animals _36,000 gal. per day 

Motors _ 1,400 gal. per day 

Total approximately-80,000 gal. per day 













260 SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 

This would require about 10 railroad tank cars of aver¬ 
age capacity of 8,000 gallons each. 

The train for these cars should be organized about as 
follows: 

1 engine. 

1 caboose 
10 tank cars 

1 coach for personnel. 

2 cars, gondola, for watering troughs. 

1 car for lumber, timber, pipe and such hose as is required. 

Total, 1 engine and 15 cars. 

If water for men only has to be provided, it could be 
supplied with 2 motor tank companies of 28 trucks each. 

For a division, allowing for the normal amount of 
water required daily, 134,000 gallons would be needed for 
men, animals and motors, which would require 17 railroad 
tank cars. 

282. Water Required When Taken From Streams 

1 gallon per man on march. 

5 gallons per man in camp. 

6 to 10 gallons per animal on march and in camp. 

The above figures apply to water taken from streams, 
where animals are watered at the streams and cooking 
water carried. 

In estimating the daily supply for permanent or semi¬ 
permanent camps, where water is piped to kitchens, bath 
houses, etc., the requirements will be 25 to 30 gallons per 
man and 10 to 15 gallons per animal, depending on cli¬ 
matic conditions. 

Estimating Quantity of Water in Streams. 

B X D X V X 10,800 = gallons in 24 hours. 

B = average width; 

D = average depth; 

V = average velocity per minute (all in feet). 

283. Water Trains Used by 12th Provisional Division on 

Practice March to Austin, Texas, in October, 1916 

The problem was to furnish water by railroad tank 
trains for approximately 14,000 men and 5,800 animals. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


261 


Equipment 

Two water trains were required, each composed of: 

1 engine. 

21 tank cars. 

2 automobile cars, carrying 90 circular G.I. watering troughs. 
1 gondola car for lumber, tools, pumps, hose, skids, etc. 

1 baggage car equipped as kitchen. 

1 tourist sleeper for men operating train. 

35 men to unload troughs, operate foot valves, hose, fill 
troughs and do the work incident to watering a large 
command. 

Each train carried: 

1,680 feet of 2-inch suction hose (two 40-foQt sections to each 
tank car). 

10 pumps, horizontal, 2-inch. 

2 tongs, chain. 

2 wrenches, monkey. 

3 wrenches, stillson, large. 

6 hammers, claw. 

15 screwdrivers. 

6 wrenches, three-eighths and one-fourth inch, open end. 

12 buckets, G. I. 

12 lanterns. 

25 clamps, hose. 

12 nipples, 2-inch by 6-inch. 

1 range, field. No. 2, complete. 

4 cans, water, drinking. 

4 axes. 

5 pickaxes. 

10 shovels. 

. 1,000 feet lumber, assorted. 

25 pounds nails. 

The above equipment is considered necessary for emer¬ 
gency use. It is frequently necessary to level inequalities 
in the ground for the placing of troughs. 

Action Taken Upon Arrival of Train at 
Watering Station 

Tank cars spotted where level ground is available. 
Troughs placed in rows parallel to train at intervals 
of 30 feet, from center to center. Spacing allows sufficient 
room for animals to drink from all sides of trough; 550 
animals are watered at one time at the rate of about 550 
every 5 minutes. 

Time to water 6,000 animals a little less than 2 hours 
where approaches are favorable, ground level and suf¬ 
ficient space available to place troughs in a long line. Four 
to six tank cars are reserved for men. 


262 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Two 40-foot hose connections used at each car. 

Tank cars spotted where ground is lower than level 
of track in order to fill water wagons by gravity. Where 
such ground is not available, pumps are used. 

Time required to fill 600-gallon type of water wagon by 
gravity with 2-inch hose approximately 4 minutes. 

Five gallons of water per man was allowed. Not more 
than 3 gallons was used. In emergency a smaller quan¬ 
tity would have sufficed. Number of tank cars available 
permitted 18 gallons of water per animal. This amount 
was never consumed, though on warm days the allowance- 
was approached. 

Watering by this means should be done in daylight, as 
confusion results from night watering. 

Capacities of Tank Cars Used 

U.T.L.X. Car—8,260 gallons, 34 feet long between couplers. 

T. and N. O. Car—6,500 gallons, equipped with 2-inch valves 
and nipples, one on either end of car. 

Capacities of Watering Troughs Used 


Large circular G.I. watering trough_625 gallons 

Medium circular G.I. watering trough_457 gallons 

Small circular G.I. watering trough_318 gallons 


Fourteen animals may be watered without difficulty 
from the larger size troughs when the animals are able to 
surround completely the troughs. 

Personnel Required 

About one company of engineer troops for each divi¬ 
sion. 

Men must be familiar with the use of hose, pipe, appli¬ 
ances and mechanical work generally. 

Men were able to unload 90 troughs, attach hose to 
21 tank cars and fill water troughs in 1 hour. 

On one occasion men emptied 90 water troughs of 
small amount of water, placed them in nests of 3 each, 
loaded them into automobile cars, disconnected and loaded 
hose, tools and equipment in 16 minutes. 





MISCELLANEOUS 


263 


284. BILLETING 

285. Division Zone Major, Town Majors and Billeting Parties 

The personnel of the train headquarters and military 
police will generally suffice to handle all administrative 
matters arising in connection with the functions of the divi¬ 
sion zone major. 

In all towns available for billeting purposes there is 
a military official known as the town major. It is his duty 
to keep accurate data regarding the billeting facilities in 
his vicinity for officers, enlisted men and animals. He also 
keeps a record of all public property installed in billets, 
camps and cantonments, and in case of loss or damage 
caused by visiting troops prepares and submits claims to 
the commander concerned. 

Each military organization is required to have a bil¬ 
leting party which upon the occasion of a move to a new 
area precedes the troops. It is the duty of the officer in 
charge of the party upon arriving in the new area to se¬ 
cure full information from the town major regarding bil¬ 
leting facilities and perfect the necessary arrangements for 
the reception and disposition of the organization when it 
arrives. A billeting party generally consists of an officer 
and two or three enlisted men, depending upon the strength 
of the unit it represents. Advance billeting parties are 
usually transported by truck and should carry bicycles and 
rations. The division zone major or his representative 
should meet billeting parties in a new area for the purpose 
of giving them information and instructions which he him¬ 
self should secure from the zone major of the area or from 
advanced division headquarters. 

It is the duty of the division zone major to assign 
town majors to the towns of the area occupied by organiza¬ 
tions of the division. The officers and assistants for this 
purpose are usually furnished by the organizations. The 
duties of the town majors are to co-operate with the local 
town majors, to improve the billeting, bathing, and sanitary 
conditions, to secure additional billets as required, to assure 
that billets are properly and equitably assigned, to investi¬ 
gate claims and to prepare vouchers covering claims for 
damages. 


264 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Billeting parties and town majors when operating are 
under the zone major, who in turn receives his instructions 
from Gl. 

It is the duty of the zone major to maintain in his 
office complete and up-to-date data regarding the billeting 
facilities and water supply of all towns, camps and canton¬ 
ments in the area. He should bring to the attention of 
Gl all cases where conditions surrounding troops in bil¬ 
lets might be improved by a reassignment of billets or by 
the movement of an organization to another billeting area. 
If a move appears necessary, Gl should inform G3 who 
would take the proper action. 

286. Billets, Camps and Bivouacs 

During marches or troop movements the problem of 
quartering troops, whether in peace or war, is one of great 
importance and necessitates carefully prearranged plans, 
instructions and supervision. The commander or his staff 
must foresee that proper instructions are given to provide 
that timely arrangement is made for sheltering or quar¬ 
tering troops, so that upon arrival of troops at quartering 
points all arrangements will have been made for system¬ 
atically putting them in billets, camps or bivouac. 

The responsibility for these arrangements is upon the 
commander. He must see that his staff has made proper 
arrangements for providing necessary quartering parties 
and that instructions for their composition, transportation, 
and method of procedure are such that upon arrival of troops 
no delay or confusion will occur. In times of peace, or in 
movements where security detachments are not necessary, 
these parties can be transported and sent ahead so as to 
arrive in the quartering area a day ahead of the command, 
when they will have sufficient time to work out carefully 
all the details for quartering. But upon marches where se¬ 
curity detachments are employed, it will more than likely 
be necessary that these quartering detachments be marched 
in the column, in which case they should be well forward. 
If the command is moving on one road, the quartering party 
for the leading elements should march with the reserve 
of the advance guard, being mounted on animals and bi- 


MISCELLANEOUS 


265 


cycles, so that when the quartering area is approached they 
can be pushed ahead as far as safety permits, arriving 
on the ground as far ahead of the troops as is practicable. 

The operations order, either issued prior to the march 
or during the march, provides for the halt and the distri¬ 
bution of the various elements of the command. 

The administrative order, issued prior to the march, 
gives the composition of the quartering party, how it will 
proceed, method of transportation, rations to be carried 
and any instructions in regard to additional equipment 
(bicycles, etc.). 

In Europe troops are habitually billeted or bivouacked. 
In the United States troops are habitually camped or 
bivouacked. 

In other countries, in time of war, troops will more 
likely be quartered in billets, camps or bivouacked, according 
to the available shelter existing or the tactical situation. In 
considering the methods to be followed in billeting troops 
during marches or other movements we will consider the 
method to be employed in case of a division. The operation 
order prescribes the limits of the area and designates the 
places to be occupied by the various elements of the com¬ 
mand. The administrative order is as stated above. 

Billeting or quartering parties are detachments of offi¬ 
cers and men sent to a new area in advance of a movement 
of a division to make the necessary detailed arrangements 
for the reception of the division. 

287. Strength of Billeting Detachment 

The War Department authorized for each division par¬ 
ticipating in The World War a division billeting detachment 
of 15 officers, one of whom was designated as the division 
billeting officer. These officers were in addition to the au¬ 
thorized strength of the division. 

In addition to the foregoing the troops are called upon 
to furnish their own billeting parties which vary in strength, 
depending upon whether billets are to be occupied or the 
command is to be placed in camp or bivouac. 

The composition of the party, when billets are to be 
occupied, is usually as follows: 


266 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


1 officer in charge, division billeting officer. 

Assistant provost marshal or his assistant, accompanied by 
two noncommissioned officers and a sign-painting and 
posting detachment of about 3 men. 

1 division headquarters billeting officer. 

1 brigade billeting officer (in charge of brigade detail). 

1 regimental billeting officer (in charge of regimental detail). 

1 battalion billeting officer (in charge of battalion detail). 

1 noncommissioned ofP*cer from each company or battery. 

1 billeting officer, division trains (in charge of train detail). 

1 billeting officer from each train, except engineer train (in 
charge of detail from his train). 

1 noncommissioned officer of engineer train and one from 
each train company or field hospital. 

288. Duties of Billeting Party 

Each officer should be accompanied by an orderly and 
by an interpreter when his services are needed. He should 
be equipped with a strength report of his unit, showing 
number of officers, men and animals to be quartered, neces¬ 
sary blank billeting forms, blank sketching paper, pen¬ 
cils and map. 

Upon arrival in the billeting area the officer in charge 
issues instructions to the officers of the party as to the 
method of procedure to secure billets (what official to con¬ 
sult in each city, town or commune), how to mark billets, 
list them, issue billeting demands for each building or 
rooms of same to be occupied and to make a billeting sketch, 
warns them to work rapidly and to be sure to meet troops 
upon arrival and have them guided without delay to their 
billets. Also to make the inhabitants open buildings for 
airing and arrange approaches to lofts and garrets. Build¬ 
ings usually have to be policed by the troops themselves. 
He then gives instructions to the billeting officer concern¬ 
ing the location of division headquarters. He then visits 
the zone commandant, or in case there is none, then the 
highest civil official of the locality, informs him of the plans 
for billeting and ascertains customs for securing supplies 
that may be purchased locally and what prices to pay for 
same. 

The sanitary inspector consults local health author¬ 
ities as to local sanitary conditions and ascertains if there 
are any contagious diseases for men or animals prevalent in 
the community. If he deems it necessary, he furnishes the 


MISCELLANEOUS 


267 


officers in charge with such sanitary instructions as he 
desires issued to troops. 

The provost marshal makes a reconnaissance of the 
area, directs his noncommissioned officers as to the posting 
of military police upon their arrival and directs them where 
to meet same, and issues necessary instructions to his sign 
posting detachment to insure the prompt posting of neces¬ 
sary road and directing signs. He then consults local police 
authorities as to the local civilian police regulations and 
ascertains the bawdy house situation within the area and 
the vicinity. 

The brigade billeting officer supervises the billeting 
officers of his brigade and makes arrangements for billeting 
brigade headquarters. 

The regimental billeting officer supervises the battalion 
billeting officers and makes billeting arrangements for reg¬ 
imental headquarters, headquarters company, supply com¬ 
pany and machine gun company, unless they are attached 
to a battalion. He locates regimental infirmary and billets 
for medical corps personnel. 

The battalion billeting officer allots the billets for each 
company, gives necessary instructions to company billeting 
noncommissioned officers concerning the marking and list¬ 
ing of company billets. He selects and lists billets for 
officers, selects battalion infirmary if same is to be estab¬ 
lished, makes billeting sketch and billeting demands for 
each building or room occupied. If time permits, he sees 
that the company noncommissioned officers have properly 
performed their work and that the arrangements for billet¬ 
ing the various elements of the command are adequate and 
the best that can be provided. If needed he selects a guard¬ 
house and arranges for the prompt posting of the necessary 
guards. He must be on the lookout for the approach of 
his command or have his orderly posted for that purpose. 

The officer in charge of the billeting party should as¬ 
sure himself that the sites or roads selected for stands for 
motor units will not interfere with the road circulation. 

In case forage or fuel is to be provided locally, either 
wholly or in part, a representative of the division quarter¬ 
master should accompany this advance party, in order to 
make necessary arrangements for same. 


268 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


Upon the approach of troops to their billets the med¬ 
ical officer of each unit should precede the command into 
the village or town, examine water supply and have neces¬ 
sary signs put up and water guards posted. He also should 
locate sites for latrines and prescribe method of garbage 
disposal. 

289. Billeting Officers in Old Area 

There should be an assistant for each billeting offi¬ 
cer who remains a certain specified time after the departure 
of troops to receive and adjust claims and complaints. 
Transportation must be provided for these officers and their 
orderlies. This officer should also be required to make an 
inspection of billets, commencing as soon as they are va¬ 
cated, and work rapidly in order that he can notify the 
commander of troops in case proper police has not been made 
by any organization. His orderly can materially aid him in 
this inspection and the inspection can usually be completed 
before the command has departed from the vicinity. 

The administrative order should prescribe a method of 
inspection to be made upon departure of troops from billets 
by the various commanders of troops. The means for fol¬ 
lowing up this order must be actively employed. It should 
be specified that in case troops have failed to police properly 
billets or area around same or left any equipment or sup¬ 
plies behind, that they be marched back to make proper 
police. To insure that no accumulation of equipment, sup¬ 
plies or discarded clothing will exist at any time, a system 
of daily salvage must be inaugurated. Same arrangements 
for camps or bivouacs. 

290. Billeting on Movement by Rail 

In case of rail moves, the billeting party is accompanied 
by a G3 and a G4 representative, the senior being in charge 
of the party. Upon arrival in the new area, the G3 repre¬ 
sentative arranges for detraining points and if necessary 
staging area. He establishes an office at a station 
through which all trains pass prior to reaching detraining 
points. Upon the arrival of each train at this station he 
issues instructions to the train commander covering the 


MISCELLANEOUS 


269 


detraining points and the march to billets. The G4 repre¬ 
sentative sees that the facilities at the detraining points 
are adequate, locates water supply and arranges fuel sup¬ 
ply. He must furnish sufficient motor transportation to 
handle additional rations. He issues an administrative 
memorandum if necessary, containing instructions regard¬ 
ing supply and evacuation. The guides for the units of 
each train must be present at the detraining points to meet 
and guide their command to their billets. 

291. Billeting on Marches 

In marches where troops camp, the quartering party 
can be materially reduced, as the amount of preliminary 
work is considerably less. 

When a division is to camp the quartering party is 
usually as follows: The officer in charge, division sanitary 
inspector, assistant provost marshal and representative of 
division quartermaster. 

1 brigade officer. 

1 regimental officer. 

1 officer for separate organization. 

1 officer, division trains. 

1 noncommissioned officer from each train. 

The officer in charge would indicate to each brigade 
officer the site for his brigade. The brigade officer would 
in turn indicate to the regimental and separate organiza¬ 
tion officers the site for the camp of their unit. The officer 
in charge would designate the places for the trains which 
should, if possible, be placed on lateral roads that are not 
main traffic routes. In designating the site for the artil¬ 
lery brigade the question of stands for motors of the heavy 
regiment is an important one as the trucks will more than 
likely be loaded to capacity, and in a great many cases will 
have to park on roads. It may at times be necessary to 
quarter the motorized regiment separate from the brigade 
for this reason. In selecting camp sites for the various 
units, sanitary conditions, availability of water and the road 
system for interior communication, as well as getting in 
and out of camp, must be considered. Of course, the tac¬ 
tical situation outweighs all others in the consideration of 
location of the sites for the various units. 


270 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


292. Billeting at Night 

In night marches or concentrations where troops are 
to be billeted in superposition, under cover of darkness, the 
details for billeting party need not differ from those already 
outlined, but if the command is to bivouac, the party could 
be the same as that outlined for camps, except that it 
would be well to increase it by adding one officer for each 
battalion, so that the command could be put under shelter 
quicker and with less confusion. 

293. AREAS FOR CAMPS 

The areas for camps normally depends upon the kind 
of tentage used and strength of the command, and is a 
mathematical problem that can be easily computed. For 
example, figuring the area necessary for a regiment of in¬ 
fantry, maximum strength, in shelter tent camp: 

There are fifteen organizations in the regiment besides 
the attached medical corps personnel which can be attached 
to either the supply or machine gun company for rations 
and quarters. 

Using a double row of shelter tents, each row facing the 
company street with a street and a half for the headquar¬ 
ters company, allowing ten yards for company street and 
three yards for shelter tent, a company would occupy 18 
yards with the exception of headquarters company which 
would occupy 27 yards. 

Depth of camp = 14 x 18 yards plus 27 yards gives 
a total of 297 yards. Add to this ten yards for a road for 
transport, making a total of 290 yards. 

Then the breadth of camp can be figured as follows: 


Interval from highway_10 yards 

Field officers’ row_20 yards 

(including space for tent) 

Company officers’ row_20 yards 

Kitchen_25 yards 

Company street_155 yards 

Latrines_30 yards 

Transport stand _ 25 yards 

Picket lines _15 yards 

Total -300 yards 


300 X 300 yards = area of regimental shelter tent camp. 

This site to be expanded or contracted as tactical sit¬ 
uation or available ground demands. 












MISCELLANEOUS 


271 


294. INDIVIDUAL MOBILE EQUIPMENT FOR A RIFLE 
MAN IN THE A. E. F., FRANCE 


QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY 


Article No. 

Belt, waist_1 

Blankets, O. D. _1 

(One or two extra for winter use 
when ordered by proper authority) 

Breeches, service wool _1 

Caps, “overseas” _1 

Coat, service, wool _1 

Drawers, pairs _2 

Dubbin, 4-oz box _1 

Gloves, wool, O. D. ,_1 

(One extra pair for winter use 
when ordered by proper authority) 

Laces, shoe, extra pairs _2 

Ornaments, bronze _1 

Ornaments, bronze, letters_1 

Overcoat _1 

(For winter use when ordered by 
proper authority) 

Pins, tent, shelter _5 

Pole, tent, shelter_1 

Puttees, spiral, woolen, pairs _1 

Rations, reserve_2 

Shirts, flannel, O. D. _2 

Shoes, pairs _2 

Slicker _1 

Socks, wool, pairs _4 

Tags, identification _2 

Tape for identification tag _1 yd 

Tent, shelter half _1 

Toilet kit _1 

Undershirts _2 

MEDICAL PROPERTY 

Article No. 

Foot powder or grease _1 

Packet, first aid _1 


ORDNANCE PROPERTY 


Article No 

Bayonet _1 

Bayonet scabbard _ 1 

Breech cover _ 1 

Breech stick _1 

Brush and thong _1 

Can, bacon _1 

Can, condiment_1 

Can, meat_.._1 

Canteen _1 

Canteen cover, dismounted -1 

Cartridges, ball, cal. 30 _100 

Cartridges, belt, cal. 30, dismt’d — 1 

Cup _1 

Fork _1 

Front sight cover_1 

Gun sling _1 

Haversack _1 

Helmet, steel_1 

Knife _1 

Oiler and thong case -1 

Pack carrier _1 

Pouch for first aid packet_1 

Rifle, U. S., cal. 30 _1 

Spoon _1 


GAS SERVICE PROPERTY 


Article No 

Gas mask, complete --1 


NOTE: 


See table for “fighting pack.” 





















































272 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


295. INDIVIDUAL ‘‘FIGHTING PACK” FOR A RIFLE¬ 
MAN IN THE A. E. F., FRANCE 


Article 


No. 


REMARKS 


Alcohol, solidified, cans _1 

Bandoleer, filled _1 

Clothing, complete (see Note 1) 1 

Foot powder or grease _1 

Helmet, steel _1 

Intrenching tool (see Note 2) 1 

Masks, gas _1 

Mess equipment (see Note 3) 1 

Panels, marking _1 

(For two rifiemen) 

Packet, first aid _1 

Rations, reserve _2 

Rifie equipment (see Note 4) 1 

Sand bags _2 

Swab, iodine _1 


1. Clothing complete, including all the articles 

of uniform and clothing worn at the time 
or as may be prescribed by the proper 
commanding officer for the occasion. 

2. The proportions in which the different kinds 

of entrenching tools are to be distributed 
will be regulated by the proper command¬ 
ing officer. 

Entrenching tools in the sense used here¬ 
in consist of: bolos and carriers, hand axes 
and carriers, pick mattocks and carriers, 
shovels and carriers, wire cutters and car¬ 
riers. 

3. Mess equipment, complete, consists of: 

1 bacon can. 

2 canteens. 

2 canteen covers, dismtd. 

1 condiment can. 

1 cup. 

1 fork. 

1 haversack, without carrier. 

1 knife. 

1 meat can. 

1 spoon. 

4. Rifle equipment, complete, consists of: 

1 bayonet. 

1 bayonet scabbard. 

1 breech cover. 

1 breech stick. 

1 brush and thong and oiler and thong 
case : or 1 spare part container. 

1 cartridge belt, cal. 30, dismt’d. 

100 cartridges, ball, cal 30. 

1 front sight cover. 

1 gun sling. 

1 pouch for first aid packet. 

1 rifle, U. S., cal. 30. 


NOTE: 

In cold weather if the commanding officer directed that overcoats be worn, 
the slickers would not be carried, and conversely. 

No definite t^erm for the above equipment has been prescribed but it is fre¬ 
quently referred to as “Fighting Pack,” “Combat Pack,” or “Over the Top Equipment.” 


296. ARMAMENT OF INFANTRY SQUAD 

Automatic Rifleman 

1 automatic rifle. 

1 spare parts case. 

1 magazine filler. 

12 magazines of 20 rounds each in belt. 

Corporal 

1 rifle and bayonet. 

1 belt containing 100 rounds. 

1 magazine filler. 

2 automatic rifle magazines of 20 rounds each. 
1 V. B. rifle grenade. 


















MISCELLANEOUS 


273 


6 Riflemen 

Each 1 rifle and bayonet. 

Each 1 belt containing 100 rounds. 

Each 2 automatic rifle magazines of 20 rounds each. 

Each 1 V. B. rifle grenade. 

One of the riflemen carries one grenade discharger, 
rifle; this rifleman does not carry the two automatic rifle 
magazines. 

Flares or Position Lights 

1 to each platoon sergeant, section leader, and section guide. 

Grenade Discharger Signal Cartridges 

Will be carried and will be fired by one'of the signalmen 
of the company headquarters. 

Marking Panels 

64 per company. 

These to be issued three per squad, as far as they will go. 

Hand Grenades 

To be issued only when directed and come from special supply. 

Extra Ammunition Issued From Combat Wagon 

2 bandoleers of 60 rounds each per man. 

297. TABLE OF DISTANCES AND TIMES 


NOTE: For organizations traveling at rates of speed of 4 or 6 miles per 
hour, take double the rates indicated in columns 4 and 5 respectively. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Organization 


Time to 

pass a given point 


Length of 

At 88 yds 

At 8 mi. 

At 12 mi. 


column in 

per min. 

per hour 

per hour 


yards 

Minutes 

Minutes 

Minutes 

INFANTRY AND MACHINE GUNS 





Division Headquarters 

660 

7 



Brigade Headquarters 

60 

1 



Regiment of Infantry less C Tn 

2,280 

26 



Regiment of Infantry with C Tn 

2,965 

34 



Regiment of Infantry C and F Tns 

3,870 

44 



Battalion of Infantry less C Tn 

515 

6 



Battalion of Infantry with C Tn 

645 

8 



Battalion of Infantry with C and F Tns 845 

10 



Company of Infantry 

125 

2 



Machine Gun Battalion with carts 

1,500 

17 



Machine Gun Battalion and C Tn 

1,760 

20 

% 


Machine Gun Company with carts 

370 

4 



Division Machine Gun Bn Mtz complete 1,110 

13 



Machine Gun Company Mtz 

525 

6 

2i 

11 

ARTILLERY 





Regiment Light Artillery less C Tn 

1,990 

23 



C Tn Regiment Light Artillery 

1,665 

19 



Regiment Light Artillery with C Tns 

3,655 

42 



Regiment Light Artillery with C and F Tns 4,355 

50 



Battalion Light Artillery less C Tns 

905 

10 



Battalion Light Artillery with C Tns 

1,650 

19 



Battalion Light Arty with C and F Tns 

1,920 

22 



C Tn Battalion Light Artillery 

745 

9 



Battery Light Artillery less C Tn 

300 

4 



Battery and C Tn 

535 

6 



C and F Tns Battery Light Artillery 

610 

7 











274 


SUPPLY PRINCIPLES 


1 


2 

3 

4 

6 

Organization 



Time to 

pass a given point 


Length of 

At 88 yds 

At 8 mi. 

At 12 mi. 


column in 

per min. 

per hour 

per hour 


yards 

Minutes 

Minutes 

Minutes 

Battery Light Artillery with C and F 

Tn 

1,920 

22 



Regiment Heavy Artillery 


5,720 

65 

25 

161 

Battalion Heavy Artillery, C and F 

Tns 

1,630 

19 

7 

5 

Battery Heavy Artillery with Tns 


760 

9 

u 

2 

C Tns Regiment Heavy Artillery 


2,200 

25 

9i 

6 

ENGINEERS 






Regiment Engineers with C Tn 


1,685 

20 



Battalion Engineers with C Tn 


725 

8 



Company Engineers 


225 

3 



FIELD TRAINS 






F Tn Division 


6,410 

71 



F Tn Infantry Brigade 


2,065 

24 



F Tn Infantry Refgiment 


905 

10^ 



F Tn Infantry Battalion 


200 

2i 



F Tn Machine Gun Battalion 


235 

3 



F Tn Regiment Engineers 


335 

4 



F Tn Field Signal Battalion 


120 

11 



F Tn Field Artillery Brigade 


1,400 

16 



F Tn Light Artillery Regiment 


700 

8 



F Tn Light Artillery Battalion 


270 

3 



F Tn of H Sec Am Tn 


295 

7 

3 

2 

F Tn Hv Arty Regt Mtz 


620 

2 

1 

U 

F Tn Heavy Artillery Battalion Mtz 


150 

2 



F Tn Sanitary Train 


70 

1 



Train Headquarters and Military Police 

60 

1 



TRAINS—HORSED SECTIONS 






Division Headquarters H Sec 


115 

n 



Sanitary Train H Sec 


70 

1 



Field Hospital Animal-drawn 


205 

2i 



Ambulance Company Animal-drawn 


340 

4 



Ammunition Train H Sec less F Tn 


1,855 

16 



Ammunition Company (H Sec) 


595 

7 



Wagon Company 


920 

lOi 



Engineer Train H Sec 


530 

6 



8 Camp Infirmaries 


160 

2 



TRAINS—MOTORIZED 






F Tns Division Troops 


1,365 

16 

6 

4 

Sanitary Train (less H Sec) 


1,690 

19 

7 

5 

Ambulance Section (less H Sec) 


800 

7 


2h 

Field Hospital Section (less H Sec) 


815 

n 

n 

2i 

Ambulance Company 


260 

3 

1 

1 

Field Hospital Company 


270 

3 

1 

1 

Engineer Train 


260 

3 

1 

1 

Ammunition Train (less H Sec) 






(Mob Ord Rep Sec inc) 


2,930 

34 

12 

8 

Truck Company Ammunition Train 


665 

8 

3 

2 

Supply Train 6 Companies 


4,090 

47 

18 

12 

Supply Train 3 Companies 


2,155 

25 

9 

6 

Truck Company Supply Train 


645 

7 

3 

2 

CAVALRY 






Squadron 


535 

6 

21 

11 

Squadron C Tn 


100 

1 

1 


Squadron F Tn 


260 

3 

1 


Troop 


120 

IJ 

1 


Troop C Tn 


20 

1 



Troop F Tn 


65 

1 



Regiment 


2,050 

24 

9 

6 

Regiment F Tn 


1,430 

16J 

6 


Regiment C Tn 


390 

4i 

2 


LIGHT ARTILLERY ON MOTOR TRUCKS 





Regiment 


3,345 

39 

14 

10 

Regiment (less F Tn) 


2,900 

33 

12 

8 

Regiment (less C and F Tn) 


2,160 

24J 

9 

6 

Regiment C Tn 


840 

10 

4 

21 

Regiment F Tn 


445 

5 

2 

li 

Battalion 


1,285 

15 

5J 

3i 

Battalion (less C Tn) 


865 

10 

4 

2i 

Battalion C Tn 


420 

5 

2 

li 

Battery 


520 

6 

2i 

l| 

Battery (less C Tn) 


380 

4 

li 

1 

Battery C Tn 


140 

2 

§ 

1 












































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































1 





o 

HH 

xn 

hH 

> 

hH 

Q 

O 

m 

H 

HH 

p 

o 

CO 

p 


CO 

H 

O 

p 

CO 

p 

c 

o 

p 


CQ 

s 

e 

•p« 

'4i^ 

QQ 

e 

c9 

ki 

« 

*« 

s 

• m 

s 

< 

h« 

o 

o 

o 

b 


c 

CQ 

•PN 

m o- 

.W 

o.^ 

^CQ 


U3 

C 

w 

(N 


o 

*«»• 

■«r 

X 

W 

-o 


o 

<M 

Csl 

s: 

(j 

•*j 

CO 


§ rt 
£ 

O £ 

ri 
£ *2 
>=i ^ 

*jr *H ■-« 


-T.— HW 

a5«^ 

§^- 
u^. rt 
*^o 

CVJ .p- 

OojS 

XJ^OO^ 

C ^ •«r * 

>0^: E 


CO +J 

O^'O'^ C 

£ s c:3rt 


2 c 

•- S 

Oc|-S 
2^82 
^ qH 

•M 

C4 r- 

S g 

oH 

CO 

p. 

O 

o 

U( 


ic no O 

Tf CD 

04 CD 

iDOOOOOiDiD 
rHCOOCDt-000303 
O4lDO^00 00Tj<O3t- 

•> •> 

CO rH 03 

ID O O 

C- t- C4 

04 00 O 

(N 

ID ID ID lO 

00 O C- 1-1 
rH rH rH CD 

ID O ID ID ID 
04 04 ID 05 Tf 

CD 05 CO 04 t- 

•» 

rH iir 

8,710 

14,640 

ID ID O 

05 05 04 

CO CO 

•t 

220 

220 

1,035 

615 

2,690 

530 

790 

O 

kD 

rH 

04* 

2,150 

5,440 


kD O O kD O 
Tf 05 04 iH rH 
04 kD O CD tH 

oTof OO 

rH 

O kD 

00 CO 
rH CD 

A 

iH 00 
CO CO 

kD O O 
rH CO kD 
CD kD iH 

04 

ID kD 

O O- 
04 

CO CO 

1-1 

34,475 

61,710 


O O iO 

CD CD CO 
rH 

OiDlDOiDOiDiD 

IDOOOOOIDCOCD 

03 (M 05 ® 

04 

ID iD CO 
rH CO 

30 

30 

120 

o o o o 

05 t- o o 

04 C- t- 

o o 

O CD 

Tf O 

fH c4' 

ID ID O 
ID kD GO 
04 

ID ID kD 
^ iH rH 

70 

295 

kD kD 
CO CO 

295 

295 

655 


O O kD O O 
CD CO CO CsJ O 
iH CO iH ^ 

•> p 

Tf rH 

6,045 

6,880 

_ 1 

O kD kD 
tH CO 05 
04 

400 

4,525 

6,445 

11,405 


lO lO O 

iDiDxDOlDOOO 

ID O ID 

ID iD ID iD 

ID O ID ID kD 

o o 

O O O 

kD ID O 

kD ID 

kD kD 

kD 

kD kD 


kD O kD kD O 

kD kD 

kD kD kD 

liH <"S 

. >ri 


00 00 oi 

CDTfCDCDCDCOCDCO 

04 04 00 

^ t- C- 05 

CO ID ID 05 Tf 

rH 00 

Tf Tf Tf 

o o 04 

Tf C5 

ft5 kD 

kD 

iD 00 


00 CD 00 05 rH 

i-i"i >o 

Tf (Hi »r\ 

PH, »I 7 

PTl . 


^ rH iD 

rH CD 03 C— pH. 

•» 

04 C- CD 

rH tH Tf 

ID CD CD 04 

CO ID 

A •• 

CO CO IH 

04 04 O 

kD CO 

Tf tr- 

00 

00 c- 


iH Tf CD Tf CO 

lH t— 

ID Tf 00 

00 kD 

© CO 



04 rH t— 



IH CO 

t- 04 



04 


tH 

iH Tf 


* * «k 

ID rH t— 

ID rH 

rH 

04 " 06 

* 

00 © 


1 




fH 








iH 

04 CO 



04 Tf 


ID lO Uf5 

OOOOlDOOO 

O O ID 

O o ID O 

iD ID ID ID ID 

o o 

iD ID ID 

kD ID kD 

O O 

O O 

o 

O ID 


kD O kD O O 

O O 

o o o 

© kD 

© kD 


CO CO 

•^OOOICDOOCDCOCO 

rH tr- CO 

CO T}< CO CD 

CO Tf CD t- 04 

CO rH 

CD CD CD 

CD CD kD 

CO 04 

05 CO 

o 

o o 


CO CO CO CD CO 

04 CD 

CO 05 o 

04 CO 

© 



rH ^ O 

•k 

rH CO 00 

IH 04 

04 C- CD iH 

•k 

CO CD 

m. 


rH rH 04 

04 kD 

Tf t- 

c- 

t- iD 


04 00 04 CO 

C- iH 

04 Tf tH 

Tf 04 

rH CO 



rH 



rH 

CO ID 

1 





lH Tf 


CO CO 

ChO 

rH 

04 © 

0 © 
















rH 

1 


1 ^ ^ 

« 

o o o 

IDIDIDOOOOO 

LD O O 

ID ID O ID 

O ID O O O 

o o 

ID ID ID 

O O ID 

kD kD 

ID kD 

kD 

kD <ft> 


O o O kD O 

kD kD 

kD kD iD 

kD kD 

0 <=> , 

ID ID 00 

OlCOTfOCOt-OO 

rH ID ID 

04 CO CO 

O O 05 04 04 

00 t- 

t> t- C- 

Tf Tf CD 

rH C- 

04 

kD 

kO 00 


kD O kD CO 00 

rH 05 

rH ID 

tH 1 -H 

© rH 


1—3 rH ^ 

rH CO ID 04 CO no rH 

^ •• •> 

rH CO 00 

iH 04 

CO 05 05 iH 

05 d» 

04 04 O 

t- 

CO CO 


rH 

iH 04 


rH 04 00 04 05 

Tf ID 

CO rH 

Tf CO 

00 © 



04 rH CD 



tH 

CO CD 



rH 





04 CO 

tH iH 


04 

IH CO 



1 





1 


1 





1 

iH 04 

1 


{ rH 04 



CO 

C 

O 

• M 

» 

4> 

CO 


-o 

4> 

N 

••« 

Im 

O 

o 


CO 

Z 

O 

H 

s 

M 

z 

<; 

C5 

cii 

o 


o* >» 
ffi c 

^ c3 

C ?• 
O S 

W o 

-^Q 

5i^ 

coS 

2C 




vS 


CO 

'rt 

•4^ 

o 

H 


CO 


ft—T3 

O C3 q; 

2^£ 
§^^■2 
o w 5 

PhW O 


H 

z 

<15 

Z 


CD ^ 

St3 ^ 


>4 

ft 

CQ 

ft 

2 

o 

5 w 

CQ b 

Q <V 

o ft 

^ s 

O' 

S s 

«w 


>> 

ft 

ft 

£ 

o 

O 


'7L ft 

W-M 

ft^ 

3 ft 
C0« 


>. ft 
p= 2 

ft — 
ft ft 

o ft 
O W 

ft ft 
ft ft 

oo 

•4-> 

ft a; 0) 
ft ft 

.|xx 


ft 

W 

o 

s 

CO 

<4^ 

bfi 

4) 

Ph 

(M 

a> 

TS 

ft 

bc 

P2 


pC .ft 

o o 
ft ft 


u 

z 

M 

C5 

z 

u 


CO CO 03 

Jh S« ^ 
Oj (y OJ 

ft ft ft 
ft ft ft 
ft ft ft 
CO ww 

>> ft 

g® s 

&■« H 

S^'S 

o ft 13 

QWPh 


CO 

Pn 

p^ 

o 

u 

hP 

z 

o 

NM 

CO 


ft 
o 

"ft 

s*^ 

ft 

ft CQ 

ft^ 

ig 

be 

®0-p;2 

O loW 

o 

<13^ ftTS 

j;P ftftS 
^P^OCu 


>. 

ft 

ft 

ft 

E 


>, 
ft 
ft 
ft 

io 


C3i 

u 

NH 

H 

« 

<5 


J= X 45 

WOW 

ft ft ft 

• pN *pp CO 

I I I ^ 

CO CO CO <y 

^ ft 
C ft 3 

|a|f 

a s 8 S 

•StSoW 

w^a 

• fN 

X X X CQ 
WWW" 

CSC. 

•»« »p« ^ 

' ' • r 

O CD C£) tx> C£> A 


I I 

CO CO 


i>, ^ 

&.2 

-£ ft 

<4^ •4-> 

03 ft 

wpo 


XX 
w w 
ft ft 

•fH •fN 

I 


13 

'V 

ft 

03 be 

-4-> .S' 

g£ 

S?S 

P5 CO 


(M 


ft 

.4.^ 

o 

M'S 

.£ 

«x 

. £ 
<3 o 
!xU 


CO 

Z 

<5 

P^ 

H 

kJ 

<; 

z 

o 

■M 

CO 

M 

> 

M 

Q 


o 

O 

X 

■4-> 


o 

ftO 


ft 

ki 

H 


X 
£ 
< 

ft 

•- 2 

c o 

ft pQ 

«4 

C -4^ 


ft 

o 

'PH 

.ip> 

w 

03 

CO 

03 


CO 


W 

ft ft 

£^3 

• fH 

— X 

5 £ 

o o 
HO 


X 

w 

I r ^ 

\ Eco 

CO P 

o’^ a 

O 

03 Q 

CO >—I 
rt4 o ft 
" HH .4J 

ppH " O 

'O r^ 

COp^H 
o •- 03 

'V .PH 

•M P-. X 

. C3 P 
+j •*■> 5 
OT o P 
-* ftiO 


ft 

{h 

H 

CO 

*3 •<-» 

ft o 

•S^ 

ft '3 

CO 03 

ft 

pi£x 

-2 £ 
o o 
HO 


PS 

H 

P^ 

a 

Z 

— 

o 

z 

u 


03 

^*2 

• PH ft 

HH 

Jh'® 

•81 
^ s 

c o 

CdU 


•f4 

3" c 2 

^ 0-22? 
P g ft ft 
COOft^g 

^ 13C0 

K ^* «M 

O > ft 
ft 

03 o 

HcoH 


C 

P^ 

H 


ft| 

o ft 

x^ 

COt^ 


^ ft 

O O 

z”«§ 

^'■^O J 

i5 

C?E 

fflC^H 


co 

p—< 

ft 

o 

H 

T3 

03 

ft 


o 

O 


Q 

D 

a 

CO 

Z 

o 

M 

H 

> 

Pi 

U 

o 


CO 

H 

z 

Pco 

cu 

So 

H 0 

s 

o 

o 


o 

o 

Ph 

S 


ft 


4-9 
4J 

? -5 
.£« 

be 

^*2 


>> 
4-9 

ft 

ffi CO 
03 
-'V 
C ft 

M.y 

>m 


03 

•ft 

So 


ft 

ft 


ft 

13 


« 


03 

ft 

>^x 

t-> w 

03 ft 

as 


bCte 


u 

wcoc § 
ft ••* 

•PH -rt ^3 CO 

be— — ‘2 
c 13 13 > 

« .pH .pH 


03 

"ft 

4-9 

O 

H 

T? 

03 

ft 


CO 

Z 

— 

Pi 

H 


ft 
o 
u 
•ft 
ft 
ft 
a 
CO 

I o 

. t- .-s P 
b ^ ft«« 


03 

3 

C3 

H 

'O 

03 

ft 


CO 

ft 

CO&" 
C hi 
•ft^ 

u 

H 

'ft 
ft 
ft 

CO 

ft 
o 

O 

^4 

H 


2 

H 

03 

a 

4^ 

o 


'ft 

03 

ft 


— to 


XX 

B £ 

o o 

Q(NE3pE3l4plHQC-0 


^ ^ 03 ft > c fc- 

— ®*ft 

ft? 4J " f* 3." ^ ^ 

E^ftTr s 2 ft c ft c 


ft’c ^ IJ -2 S 

J3 {j ft ft X Q Q 

cocoW-^OHo 


pS 

a 

4^ 

o 

H 


X 

£ 

o 

O 




03 +J 

§'^'ft'ft ft 

2 £ « 

r" O 

^O 

03 ‘3 
•S fj 

p^ 

^H 

l^gft 

2 § 

H 


a-- 

8 

oH 


4-9 

^ e 

a- 
£ 2 
® c 

o^ 

CO 

ft 

o 

O 

^4 

H 


IC O lO o 

03 N 1-4 CD 
CO '*0' CD 



kD © 

©©©ooooo 

© kD kD 0 

0 © © 

© 0 

© 0 

® © ® 0 

© © © 0 0 

© 

© 

0 © © © 

© © © © © 0 © 

© © 


04 rH 

©COC4TfTfT-HCOTf 

CO CO 04 04 

tH rH CO 

tH © 

© © 

00 Tf Tf © 

© 04 © © Tf 

CO 

rH 

CO rH © CO 

©tH©O4C0 00tH 

CO rH 

1 

\0 rH 

•k 

tH©t-iD©04©© 

rH © © Tf 

04 CO © Tf 

F •» 

fH ^ 

04 00 © 

•s 

rH 

0 © 
oToT 

04 tH 

© rH © 

•k 

Tf 

rH 00 CO 04 Tf 

04 CO kD 

© 

Tf 

© rH Tf © 

© rH tH 00 
CO 

© © 04 00 © C- © 

Tf 04 04 © CO 

rH 

04 t- 

tH rH 
rH © 


ic 0 m 
iCN CO 

rH 

40 

100 

©oooooo© 

Tf©C4 04 04Tf©© 
rH © © © © 

•k 

04 

© © 0 

IH 04 00 
04 04 

16 

225 

295 

35 

® © 0 © 

04 © Tf © 
© rH Ch 

CO 

© © 0 © © 

04 Tf 0 © © 
rH 04 CO © 


75 

0 0 © © 

© 0 CO 00 
© rH 00 00 

•k 

© 

3,760 

225 

140 

4,125 

4,525 

0 © 
© © 

0 * Tf 

•V •k 

Tf rH 
rH 



© 0 

©®©o©ooo 

© 0 0 © 

© © 0 

© © 

© © 

0 © 

© 

© © © © © 

© 

0 

0 © 0 © 

© © © © © © 0 

© © 



00 rH 

rH00O04C4CHtH00 

CO © © Tf 

tH rH 04 

© © 

© © 

© Tf 

CO 

00 00 © CO 00 

CO 

Tf 

C- rH 04 © 

CO © © 00 CO © © 

tH ® 


CO CO © 

Tf © 

IH Tf rH © rH 04 © 

04 04 CO tH 

A 

04 00 © 

00 CO 

•1 •« 

04 tH 


CO 

0 1-H Oi 

•k «k A 

© 

CO 

04 0 © tH 

* A «k 

CO 00 04 © © © © 

«k «k «k * 

CJ CO 

•k A 




rH © © 04 

rH 

f-H 

rH 04 




04 04 Tf 

1 


© rH © rH 


04 ©00 

04 © 




rH 

t 

1 


1 

t 



( 


CO 



1 rH ^ 1 


O la 

1 -H rj< 



© 0 0 © 

0 © © 

0 

© 

0 © © 

0 © 

® ® 

© © 

0 

0 © © © © 

© 

© 

0 0 0 © 

© © © © © © © 

© © 


0 © 0 © 

00 00 rH 

0 

© 

CO © © 

Oi 04 

Tf CO 

04 04 

tH 

© 00 © ® 0 

CO 

rH 

00 © Tf 5D 

C- © Tf 00 CO tH CO 

© © 

rH 

CO © CN rH 

04 © 

•k «k 

04 


04 

04 © 

04 tH 


1-H 

© rH 00 © 

«• 

© 


04 ^ ^ rH 

r, * K 

I-H 04 04 © © 00 04 

•» F •. 

04^ CO 


04 

04 © 








04 04 Tf 



04 04 © 

04 CO <0 

© ©*" 

1 






1 





, 


rH 


rH 


O 

CO 

CO 


o o 

CO CO 
CO Tt< 


A p—' 

o©o©©o©® 

© 0 © © 

0 © © 

0 © 

© © 

© © 

0 

© 0 

© 0 

© 

0 © 0 © 

© 0 © © 

© © 

0 0 

04 © 

Tf 00 

1 

rHC40©04©©t— 
Tf 00 © CO © © 

04 04 © 

CO © ® tH 
04 00 0 

Tf 04 © 
04 tH tH 

© tH 
©00 

rH rH 

G4 04 

Tf C4 

1 

© 

rH 

04 © 
tH 

rH 00 
1-H 04 

CO 

CO 

© © 00 © 
© 00 rH ID 

F m, 9. 

04 Tf 

04 

© © 04 ® 
tH © fH 

F 

Tf ,H 

00 CO 

F F 

rH 04 

04 tH 

© © 

F F 

© CO 
C4 


ft 

m 

o 

s 

> 

• F4 

Q 

03 

o 

o 

d 


03 

>» 

£ 

C4h| 

ft 


ft 

£ 

o 

C30 

w 

03 

'ft 

'w 

ft 


oi 

o 

XJ 


CD 

CO 

03 

-ft 

ft 

w 

c 


o 

Cl 

X 

w 


o 

Tj< 

X 

w 


■g'ft 

1-1 04 


NOTE: All motorized to left. Foot or animal-drawn to right. 

Combined totals underlined, where part is motorized and part animal-drawn. 

Prepared by Colonel J. D. Taylor, 





























































































































































INDEX 


Chapter I 

Organization of the Theater of Operations for Supply 


' Paragraph 

Agencies of Supply and Evacuation_ 4 

Agencies and Methods for Moving Troops_16 

Areas of Military Activity _ 1 

Army Supply Establishments_ 8 

Classification and Methods of Supply_ 9 

Class I Supplies _ 10 

Class II Supplies _11 

Class III Supplies _12 

Class IV Supplies_13 

Class I Chart of Supply_after 24 

Class II and III Chart of Supply_after 24 

Class IV Chart of Supply ___after 24 

Credits _14 

Diagrammatic Representation of the Zone of the Interior and 

_ the Theater of Operations_after 1 

iiivacuation and Sorting Stations_ 7^ 

Evacuation of Sick and Wounded by Hospital Trains_21 ‘ 

Evacuation from the Combat Zone_22 

Evacuation in the Communications Zone_23 

Method of Supply in the Communications Zone_15 

Model Railhead _after 23 

Organization of the Theater of Operations for Supply_ 2 

Organization of the System of Supply, General Provisions_ 3 

Organization of a Regulating Station-after 23 

Organization of American Regulating Station “A”— 

Is-sur-Tille___after 23 

Organization of American Regulating Station “B”— 

St. Dizier_after 23 

Proposed Table of Organization for a Regulating Station 

Serving 500,000 or More Troops_after 23 

Railheads and Refilling Points - 6 

Regulations for Railhead Officers -24 

Regulating Stations _ 5 

Troop Movements Entirely Within the Communications Zone-17 

Troop Movements from the Communications Zone to the Combat 

Zone _18 

Troop Movements from the Combat Zone to the Communications 

Zone _19 

Troop Movements Entirely Within the Combat Zone-20 


1 




































INDEX 


Chapter II 

Supply of an Expeditionary Army 


Paragraph 

American Estimate of Poundage per Man per Day-:-28 

British Estimate of Poundage per Man per Day-29 

Corps Phase of Supply-39 

Ammunition Parks_42 

Chemical Warfare Supplies (Defensive) _53 

Circulation _55 

Corps Responsibility for Supply _40 

Corps Supply Establishments_41 

Engineer Park_43 

Engineer Supplies_54 

Evacuation _56 

Medical Park_44 

Military Police _57 

Mobile Ordnance Repair Park_45 

Motor Transport Supplies _51 

Ordnance Supplies _ 52 

Rations_49 

Remount Depot and Mobile Veterinary Hospital_46 

Replacement Park (Personnel) _47 

Signal Corps _50 

Supply _48 

Trains _58 

Diagram Illustrating the Flow of Supplies in the A.E.F._after 30 

Distribution of Work of Organization of an Army Area for Supply 33 

Estimate of Tonnage_34 

Form for Plan of Supplies__36 

Form for Plan of Ammunition Supply_37 

Organization of an Army Area for Supply_32 

Personnel for a Communication Zone_26 

Pertinent Points Concerning Army Depots_33 J 

Plans Submitted by Chiefs of Services_35 

Preliminary Arrangements for the Organization of the Com¬ 
munications Zone_25 

Reserve Supply of all Material in the Communications Zone_27 

Storage Space Required for Reserve Supplies in the Commun¬ 
ications Zone _27i 

Suggested Letter of Instructions to Commander, Army Service 

Area -38 

Supply System to be Employed for an Expeditionary Army_31 

Transportation Principles for a Large Operation_30 


Chapter III 
Division Supply 


Distributing Points_ 72 

Consideration in Selecting Distributing Points_ 74 

Number Used_^_!_ 73 

Personnel Necessary at Distributing Points_ 75 


11 










































INDEX 


Paragraph 

Rations_ 59 

Daily Ration Telegram_70 

Field Rations_01 

Forage Rations (A. R. 1077) _06 

Forage Rations (A. E. F.) _67 

Garrison Rations_ 60 

How Rations are Distributed _71 

Rations and Forage Required by Field Service Regulations __ 08 

Reserve Rations_62 

Travel Rations_ 03 

Trench Rations _64 

Trench Reserve_05 

Weight of Rations_69 

Regimental Supply of Rations_ 77 

In Camp or Cantonment_ 78 

In Campaign _79 

Regimental Supply of Ammunition _80 

Summary Showing How Supplies are Obtained _76 


Chapter IV 
Ammunition 


Ammunition Supply_81 

Agencies for Supply _84 

Ammunition Service _83 

Ammunition Capacity of Vehicles _98 

Ammunition Supply for Cavalry_99 

Amount of Ammunition in Army Depots_93 

Control_ 82 

Divisional Reserve Ammunition _87 

Divisional Means of Handling Ammunition _89 

Infantry Ammunition Supply -91 

Infantry Ammunition (How Carried) _ 88 

Methods of Transportation _85 

Methods of Distribution -- 86 

Ordnance Reclamation Service-- 95 

Reports on Ammunition Supply-92 

Responsibility for Supply- 90 

Rules for Handling Ammunition _ 97 

^ Salvage of Material Pertaining to Ammunition_1_96 

Supply in Rapid Advance-94 

Ammunition Supply and Responsibility for Supply-after 100 

Ammunition Carried in Ammunition Train, Cavalry Division __105 

Amount of Ammunition at Battery Emplacements-101 

Artillery Brigade Munitions Officer -106 

Cargo Capacity of Ammunition Train-103 

Characteristics of Field, Railway and Anti-aircraft Artillery after 107 
Form for an Order Establishing the Munitions Service in a 

Division _107 

Notes on Distribution of Ammunition-100 

Proposed Ammunition Supply for a Division in an Attack_102 

Proposed Plan of Ammunition Supply for a Division in an 

Attack _ after 102 

Truck Tonnage for Divisional Ammunition Train_104 

iii 
















































INDEX 


Chapter V 

Transportation 


Paragraph 

Marine Transportation _116 

Chartering of Ships _118 

Classification of Ships_117 

Data on Army Transports_ 121 

Marine Troop Movements and Tactics_120 

Oversea Tonnage Data—Infantry Division_after 121 

Selection and Assignment of Ships_119 

Motor Transportation _122 

Assignment of Motor Transportation in the Theater of 

Operations _127 

Assignment of Truck Companies to Entrucking Points Where 

Time Element is a Factor _after 148 

Classification of Trucks by Tonnage_129 

Commander of Troops to be Entrucked_140 

Conditions Under Which Motor Transport of Troops is 

Advisable _131 

Consideration of Roads_133 

Convoy _137 

Definitions_126 

Detrucking Troops _143 

Diagram Illustrating Methods of Loading Troops on 

Trucks_after 148 

Divisional Units, Equipment and Material Considered as 

Feasible to be Moved by Truck Transport_139 

Formation of the Troops at Entrucking Point_141 

Headquarters Motor Command_125 

Loading Machine Gun Carts, Stokes Mortar Carts, and One 

Pounder Gun Carts _l_145 

Loading Field Kitchens_146 

Loading Horses_147 

Loading Field Artillery _148 

Maximum Speed of Motor Vehicles_134 

Method of Loading Troops in Trucks _142 

Movement Table for Entrucking Troops_after 148 

Number of Men Carried in Different Size Trucks_132 

Number of Men in an Infantry Brigade for Movement by 

Truck and Marching_after 148 

Precautions in Bad Weather_144 

Requisitioning Commercial Motor Vehicles _128 

Road Distances_135 

Road Spaces of Truck Units Marching and Halted_after 148 

Standard Motor Truck Company_123 

Standard Motorcycle Company_124 

Technical Rules Governing Carrying Out of Troop Move¬ 
ments by Truck_138 

Time Allowed for Motor Truck Company to Close Up at En¬ 
trucking Point _136 

Troop Movements by Truck_130 

Railway Transportation _108 

Dimensions and Capacities of Railroad Cars_ 113 

Entraining Data_109 

Entraining Table _ 112 


IV 













































INDEX 


Paragraph 

List Showing: Train Loads_110 

Movement of U. S. War Strength Division_1081 

Rail Transportation for Machine Gun Organization_111 

Standard Railroad Troop Train_114 

Trains Required to Move a Division_115 


Chapter VI 
Trains 


Army Trains _150 

Chart of Supply Echelons, Movement by Trucks and 

Marching _ after 178 

Corps Trains _151 

Diagram Illustrating the Movements of Echelons of Supply 

During Entrainment_after 178 

Disposition of Reserve Rations in a Rest or Training Area_179 

Division Trains (Infantry) _152 

Ammunition Train _153 

Ammunition Carried in Ammunition Train _154 

Engineer Train _156 

Form of Administrative Order Defining Functions of the Divi¬ 
sional Trains and the Motor Transport Service_158 

Sanitary Train_157 

Supply Train _155 

Division Trains (Cavalry) _ 165 

Ammunition Train _167 

Engineer Train_170 

Sanitary Train _169 

Supply Train _168 

Train Headquarters and Military Police_166 

Handling Trains (General Remarks) _164 

Notes on the Use of Supply Train, Infantry Division-174 

Notes on the Use of Field Trains, Infantry Division_178 

Number of Trucks Required to Haul Division Reserve of Rations 175 
Number of Trucks Required to Haul Rations of Infantry Brigade 177 

Organizational Trains (Infantry) -159 

Combat Trains_160 

Combat Wagons in an Infantry Regiment-161 

Contents of Combat Wagons-162 

Field Trains _163 

Organizational Trains (Cavalry) -171 

Combat Train _172 

Field Train_173 

Suggested System of Ration Supply for an Advancing 

Division_after 177 

Suggested System of Supply for a Division in Trench 

Warfare _ after 177 

Suggested Method of Supply for Divisions Assembling for 

an Attack-after 178 

Table of Ration Weights and Shipping Units-176 

Trains _149 


V 











































INDEX 


Chapter VII 
The Services 


Paragraph 

Chemical Warfare Service- 216 

Gas Defensive Equipment for One Infantry Division-218 

Gas Defense Supplies _ 217 

Gas Defensive Supplies—Weights and Dimensions of Packages 219 

Division Quartermaster_180 

Burial Service _187 

Clothing Squad _185 

Disinfecting and Bathing Plants-184 

Organization of the Division Quartermaster’s Office-188 

Proposed Table of Organization for Railhead Detachment 

Serving One Division_after 188 

Railhead Detachment_186 

Sales Commissary _183 

Salvage Squad _182 

Sub-services Controlled by Division Quartermaster-181 

Engineer Corps _198 

Engineering Data—Roads_199 

Engineering Data—Light Railways _204 

Engineering Data—Miscellaneous_210 

Practicable Depth of Fords ^_211 

Standard Reconnaissance Equipment _214 

Stream Flow_212 

Strength of Ice_213 

Table of Material_200 

Table of Construction_201 

Table for Maintenance Personnel_202 

Table for Maintenance Material_203 

Table of Rolling Stock, 60 c.m. _205 

Table of Trains_206 

Table of Material_207 

Table of Construction _208 

Table of Operation and Maintenance _209 

Medical Department _189 

Battle Interments _193 

Capacity of Collection Units_191 

Casualties _^_190 

Hospitalization—Capacity in Beds_192 

Medical Department Personnel_195 

Medical-Supply_194 

Plan of Evacuation—Corps_196 

Plan of Evacuation—Division or Reenforced Brigade_197 

Motor Transport Corps_220 

Diagram of Motor Transport Issue, Repair, Maintenance, 

Salvage and Supply Facilities_ after 230 

Maintenance, Repair and Salvage _221 

Motor Transport Corps Parks _222 

Organization Parks_224 

Overhkul Parks_228 

Reception Parks_:_223 

Reconstruction Parks_ 229 

Repair Parks _226 

Replacement Parks_225 


VI 




















































.INDEX 


Paragraph 

Service Parks _227 

Service Park Unit—Motor Transport Corps_230 

Ordnance Department_215 


Diagram of Ordnance Repair and Maintenance Facilities after 215 


Chapter VIII 
Replacements 


Animal Replacement and Evacuation_•__237 

Animals Purchased in Theater of Operations_240 

Animals Required in Theater of Operations_238 

Chart—Animal Replacement and Evacuation_after 243 

Evacuation _242 

Locating Mobile Veterinary Section _243 

Receipt of Animals at Railhead _241 

Replacement _239 

Veterinary Personnel in a Division_244 

Replacements (Personnel) _231 

Arrangements for Receiving Replacements_236 

Conditions Governing Request for Replacements _232 

Diagram Illustrating Flow of Replacements (Personnel) after 236 

Dropping Officers and Soldiers from the Rolls of their 
Organizations and Evacuating Officers and Soldiers 

from Hospitals _233 

Replacements as Affected by Promotion_234 

Replacement Within the Division _235 


Chapter IX 

Forms for Administrative Orders 


Form for Engineer Plan (Offensive) -246 

General Form of Administrative Orders (Army) -.245 

General Form of Administrative Orders (Corps) -247 

General Form of Administrative Orders (Division) -248 

Sample of Division Administrative Orders Organizing Rail¬ 
head Detachment and Burial Service-252 

Sample of Division Administrative Orders Organizing the 

Salvage Service -253 

Sample of Division Administrative Orders Organizing the 

Clothing Service -254 

Subjects to be Covered in Administrative Orders for a 

Division on the March -249 

Subjects to be Covered in Administrative Orders for Move¬ 
ment of a Division by Rail-250 

Subjects to be Covered in Administrative Orders for a 

Division in Combat-251 

vii 



































INDEX 


Chapter X 

Miscellaneous 


Paragraph 

Armament of Infantry Squad-296 

Billeting_284 

Areas for Camps _293 

Billets, Camps and Bivouacs-286 

Billeting at Night _292 

Billeting Officers in Old Area_289 

Billeting on Marches _291 

Billeting on Movement by Rail _290 

Division Zone Major, Town Majors and Billeting Parties-285 

Duties of Billeting Parties _288 

Strength of Billeting Detachment _287 

Echelons—Division Headquarters_265 

Individual ‘‘Fighting Pack” for a Rifleman in the American 

Expeditionary Forces, France_295 

Individual Mobile Equipment for a Rifleman in the American 

Expeditionary Forces, France _294 

Machine Gun Data _267 

Ammunition Carried _272 

Effective Ranges of Machine Guns _273 

Equipment _276 

Frontage Covered by One Gun_275 

Organization_268 

Preparation of Machine Gun Plan_279 

Rates of Fire_274 

Relief _277 

Road Spaces_ 270 

Siting Guns _278 

Transportation _269 

Weights _271 

Measures to be Taken in a Division in Event of Falling Back_266 

Military Police _,_255 

Classification of Military Police Posts_260 ' 

Division Military Police Company—Organization _264 

Duties of Military Police Company in General_256 

Form of Administrative Orders Covering the Disposal of 

Prisoners of War _262 

Limit of Daylight Traffic_259 

Prisoners of War_258 

Straggler Line _257 

Traffic Circulation—Roads _263 

Traffic Priority _261 

Road Spaces for Units of a Division in Yards_after 297 

Table of Distances and Times _297 

Time and Distance Graphs for Various Rates of Marching after 297 

Water Supply _280 

Water Required on Marches _ 281 

Water Required When Taken from* Streams _282 

Water Trains Used by the 12th Provisional Division on 

Practice March to Austin, Texas, in October, 1916_283 


viii 

























































I 




\ 


vf j Ir 




V ' *rir^ 



r 


































































